P139 EN M A88 Vol1

MiCOM P139
Feeder Management
and Bay Control
Version: -304/306/307 -
405/406/407/408/409/410/411/412/413 -
605/611/612
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
P139/EN M/A88
Contains:
V605 P139/EN M/B33 (AFSV.12.09450.D)
V611 P139/EN AD/A77 (AFSV.12.09690.D)
V612 P139/EN AD/A88 (AFSV.12.09950 D)
MiCOM P139
Feeder Management
and Bay Control
Version 304 405/406/407 -605
Technical Manual
Volume 1 of 2
P139/EN M/B33
(AFSV.12.09450 D)
! Warning
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltage will be present in certain parts of the
equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger
personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage.
Before working in the terminal strip area, the device must be isolated. Where stranded conductors
are used, wire end ferrules must be employed.
Proper and safe operation of this device depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper
storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing.
For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate this device.
Any modifications to this device must be in accordance with the manual. If any other modification
is made without the express permission of AREVA T&D, it will invalidate the warranty, and may
render the product unsafe.
Qualified Personnel
are individuals who
! are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the device and of the system to which it is being
connected;
! are able to perform switching operations in accordance with safety engineering standards and are authorized to
energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it;
! are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering standards;
! are trained in emergency procedures (first aid).
Note
The operating manual for this device gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the
manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of
questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA
technical sales office and request the necessary information.
Any agreements, commitments, and legal relationships and any obligations on the part of AREVA, including settlement
of warranties, result solely from the applicable purchase contract, which is not affected by the contents of the operating
manual.
Stckprfbescheinigung P139
Routine Test Certificate P139
AREVA Energietechnik GmbH ist ein DNV zertifiziertes Unternehmen.
Fertigung und Prfung der Schutzeinrichtungen erfllen die Anforderungen von EN ISO 9001.
AREVA Energietechnik GmbH has been awarded the DNV certificate by the internationally recognized, independent and impartial
association for the certification of quality assurance systems, DNV (DET NORSKE VERITAS CERTIFICATION FRANCE), thereby
certifying that AREVA has introduced and uses a state-of-the-art quality assurance system that complies with all requirements stated
in EN ISO 9001 that apply to its products and services.
Stckprfung
Routine Test
Alle Prfungen nach IEC 255-6 und DIN EN 60255-6.

All tests according to IEC 255-6 and EN 60255-6.
Die folgenden berprfungen waren Gegenstand der Stckprfung bei Referenzbedingungen:

The following tests have been carried out as part of the routine test under reference conditions:
1 bereinstimmung der Schutzeinrichtung mit Bestckungs- und Anschluplan

Conformity of the protection device with components list, location diagram and terminal connection diagram
2 Isolationsprfung
Insulation test
3 Stromversorgung im Bereich 0,8 UH,nom UH,nom 1,1 UH,nom

Power supply within the range 0.8 VA,nom VA,nom 1.1 VA,nom
4 Prfung der Genauigkeit der Einstellwerte

Accuracy of the setting values
5 Ansprech- und Kommandozeiten fr alle wesentlichen Funktionen

Operate and command times for all essential functions
6 Funktionsprfung aller binren Signaleingnge und Kontakte

Functional testing of all binary signal inputs and contacts
7 100 % kontrollierter Wrmedauerlauf

100 % controlled thermal endurance test
Contents
1 Application and Scope 1-1
2 Technical Data 2-1

2.1 Conformity 2-1
2.2 General Data 2-1
2.3 Tests 2-2
2.3.1 Type Test 2-2
2.3.2 Routine Test 2-4
2.4 Environmental Conditions 2-4
2.5 Inputs and Outputs 2-4
2.6 Interfaces 2-7
2.7 Information Output 2-9
2.8 Settings 2-9
2.9 Deviations 2-10
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values 2-10
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages 2-11
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition 2-11
2.10 Recording Functions 2-12
2.11 Power Supply 2-13
2.12 Dimensioning of Current Transformers 2-14
Connection of non-conventional transformer to the NCIT-
2.13 2-17
module
3 Operation 3-1
3.1 Modular Structure 3-1
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication 3-3
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel, the Indication (LOC) 3-4
Panel and the Measured Value Panels;
Selection of the Control Point
3.4 Serial Interfaces 3-12
3.4.1 PC Interface (PC) 3-12
3.4.2 "Logic Communication Interface 1 (COMM1) 3-14

3.4.3 Logic Communication Interface 2 (COMM2) 3-22
3.4.4 Logic Communication Interface 3 (COMM3) 3-25
3.5 Time Synchronization via the IRIG-B Interface (IRIGB) 3-29
3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the (INP) 3-30
Binary Inputs
3.7 Measured Data Input (MEASI) 3-31
3.7.1 Direct Current Input on the Analogue I/O 3-33
Module
3.7.2 Connection of a Resistance Thermometer to 3-38
the Measuring Input PT100 of the Analogue
I/O Module
3.7.3 Connection of the Temperature Sensors to the 3-39
RTD Module
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode and Blocking (OUTP) 3-43
of the Output Relays
3.9 Measured Data Output (MEASO) 3-46
3.9.1 BCD-Coded Measured Data Output 3-49
3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output 3-54
3.9.3 Output of External Measured Data 3-60
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED (LED) 3-61
Indicators
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7

Contents
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (MAIN) 3-63

3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control 3-63
3.11.2 Bay Type Selection 3-67
3.11.3 Conditioning the Measured Variables 3-68
3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement 3-70
3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device 3-86
Functions
3.11.6 Activation of Dynamic Parameters 3-90
3.11.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint) 3-91
3.11.8 Function Blocks 3-93
3.11.9 Multiple Blocking 3-94
3.11.10 Blocked / Faulty 3-95
(OUT OF SERVICE)
3.11.11 Coupling between Control and Protection for 3-96
the CB Closed Signal
3.11.12 Close Command 3-97
3.11.13 Multiple Signaling 3-99
3.11.14 Ground Fault Signaling 3-101
3.11.15 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic 3-103
3.11.16 CB Trip Signal 3-110
3.11.17 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the 3-112
Control Functions
3.11.18 Monitoring the Switchgear Unit Motors 3-115
3.11.19 Communication Error 3-116
3.11.20 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization 3-117
3.11.21 Resetting Mechanisms 3-118
3.11.22 Assignment of Logic Communication 3-119
Interfaces to Physical Communication
Channels
3.11.23 Test Mode 3-120
3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (PSS) 3-121
3.13 Self-Monitoring (SFMON) 3-123
3.14 Operating Data Recording (OP_RC) 3-125
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (MT_RC) 3-126
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (OL_DA) 3-127
3.17 Overload Recording (OL_RC) 3-130
3.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (GF_DA) 3-133
3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady- 3-134
State Power Evaluation
3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady- 3-136
State Current Evaluation
3.18.3 Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance 3-138
Evaluation
3.19 Ground Fault Recording (GF_RC) 3-141
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (FT_DA) 3-144
3.21 Fault Recording (FT_RC) 3-156
3.22 Time-Overcurrent Protection (DTOC) 3-162
3.23 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (IDMT) 3-176
3.24 Short-Circuit Direction Determination (SCDD) 3-193
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (SOTF) 3-205
3.26 Protective Signaling (PSIG) 3-207
8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Contents
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC) 3-213

3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR) 3-232
3.27.2 Cooperation of the Auto-Reclosing Control 3-234
(ARC) with the Automatic Synchronism Check
(ASC)
3.27.3 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR) 3-237
3.27.4 ARC Counters 3-239
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (ASC) 3-240
3.29 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using
Steady-State Values (GFDSS) 3-256
3.29.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation 3-259
3.29.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation 3-264
3.29.3 Admittance Evaluation 3-265
3.29.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by 3-271
Steady-State Power and Admittance
Evaluation
3.30 Transient Ground Fault Direction (TGFD) 3-272
Determination
3.31 Motor Protection (MP) 3-280

3.31.1 Overload Protection 3-283
3.31.2 Special Overload Protection Cases 3-291
3.31.3 Low Load Protection 3-295
3.31.4 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines 3-295
3.32 Thermal Overload Protection (THERM) 3-296
3.33 Unbalance Protection (I2>) 3-306
3.34 Time-Voltage Protection (V<>) 3-308
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (f<>) 3-318
3.36 Power Directional Protection (P<>) 3-324
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF) 3-343
3.38 Measuring-Circuit Monitoring (MCMON) 3-344
3.39 Limit Value Monitoring (LIMIT) 3-350
3.40 Programmable Logic (LOGIC) 3-362
3.41 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (DEV01 to 3-369
DEV10)
3.41.1 Processing of Position Signals for Manually 3-370
Operated Switchgear
3.41.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable 3-372
Switchgear Units
3.42 Interlocking Logic (ILOCK) 3-387
3.43 Single-Pole Commands (CMD_1) 3-389
3.44 Single-Pole Signals (SIG_1) 3-390
3.45 Binary Counts (COUNT) 3-392
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9

Contents
(continued)
4 Design 4-1
4.1 Designs 4-1
4.2 Modules 4-8
5 Installation and Connection 5-1

5.1 Unpacking and Packing 5-1
5.2 Checking the Nominal Data and the Design Type 5-1
5.3 Location Requirements 5-2
5.4 Installation 5-3
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding 5-14
5.6 Connection 5-15
5.6.1 Connecting the Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits 5-15
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B Interface 5-24
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces 5-24
6 Local Control Panel 6-1

6.1 Display and Keypad 6-2
6.2 Changing between Display Levels 6-8
6.3 Illumination of the Display 6-9
6.4 Control at the Panel Level 6-9
6.4.1 Bay Panel 6-9
6.4.2 Signal Panel 6-16
6.4.3 Measured Value Panels 6-19
6.4.4 Event Panel 6-20
6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level 6-21
6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree 6-21
6.5.2 Switching between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode 6-22
6.5.3 Change-Enabling Function 6-23
6.5.4 Changing Parameters 6-26
6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter 6-27
6.5.6 Memory Readout 6-29
6.5.7 Resetting 6-33
6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions 6-34
6.5.9 Changing the Password 6-35
7 Settings 7-1
7.1 Parameters 7-1
7.1.1 Device Identification 7-2
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters 7-6
7.1.3 Function Parameters 7-45
7.1.3.1 Global 7-45
7.1.3.2 General Functions 7-53
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets 7-77
7.1.3.4 Control 7-99
7.2 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines 7-108
7.2.1 General 7-108
7.2.2 Restrictive Safety-Oriented Configuration 7-108
10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Contents
(continued)
8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

8.1 Operation 8-1
8.1.1 Cyclic Values 8-1
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data 8-1
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals 8-9
8.1.1.3 Logic State Signals 8-14
8.1.2 Control and Testing 8-39
8.1.3 Operating Data Recording 8-43
8.2 Events 8-44
8.2.1 Event Counters 8-44
8.2.2 Measured Event Data 8-46
8.2.3 Event Recording 8-50
9 Commissioning 9-1
9.1 Safety Instructions 9-1
9.2 Commissioning Tests 9-3
10 Troubleshooting 10-1
11 Maintenance 11-1
12 Storage 12-1
13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1
14 Order Information 14-1
Appendix AP-1
Content AP-2
A Glossary A-1
B List of Signals B-1
C List of Bay Types C-1
D Terminal Connection Diagrams D-1
E Address List E-1
(The Address List is available as a PDF file.
It is not included in the printed manual.)
F Upgrade Documentation F-1
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 11

12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
1 Application and Scope
The P139 time-overcurrent protection and control device is a one-box solution for
protection and control.
The protection functions available in the device provide selective short-circuit protection,
ground fault protection, and overload protection in medium- and high-voltage systems.
The systems can be operated as impedance-grounded, resonant-grounded, grounded-
neutral or isolated-neutral systems. The multitude of protection functions incorporated
into the device enable the user to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of
cable and line sections, transformers and motors. The relevant protection parameters
can be stored in four independent parameter subsets in order to adapt the device to
different operating and power system management states.
The control functions are designed for the control of up to six electrically operated
switchgear units equipped with plant status signaling and located in the bay of a
medium-voltage substation (or a high-voltage station with basic topology). The P139
has more than 250 predefined Bay Types stored for selection and it is also possible to
load user-defined bay templates.
External auxiliary devices are largely obviated by the integration of binary signal inputs
operating from any auxiliary voltage, and versatile relay output contacts, by the direct
connection option for current and voltage transformers, and by the comprehensive
interlocking capabilities. This simplifies the handling of switch bay protection and control
technology from planning to commissioning.
During operation, the user-friendly interface makes it easy to set the device parameters
and allows safe operation of the substation by preventing non-permissible switching
operations.
The P139 is equipped with a large number of protection and control functions. These
can be individually configured and de-configured.
These features give the user the means to adapt the device to the protection and control
capacity required in a specific application.
The powerful programmable logic provided by the device also makes it possible to
accommodate special applications.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-1

(continued)
Protection functions P139 P139

without VTs with VTs
50/51 P,Q,N DTOC Definite-time overcurrent protection, four stages, phase selective
! !
(includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection)
51 P,Q,N IDMT Inverse-time overcurrent protection, one stage, phase selective
! !
(includes negative-sequence overcurrent protection)
67 SCDD Short-circuit direction determination !
50/27 SOTF Switch on to fault protection ! !
85 PSIG Protective signaling ! !
79 ARC Auto-reclosing control (three-pole) ! !
25 ASC Automatic synchronism check (!)
67N GFDSS Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values !
67N TGFD Transient ground fault direction determination (!)
37/48/49/
MP Motor protection ! !
49LR/50S/66
49 THERM Thermal overload protection ! !
46 I2> Unbalance protection ! !
27/59 P,Q,N V<> Time-voltage protection !
81 f<> Frequency protection !
32 P<> Power directional protection !
50BF/62 CBF Circuit breaker failure protection ! !
30/74 MCMON Measuring-circuit monitoring ! !
LIMIT Limit value monitoring ! !
LOGIC Programmable logic ! !
Control Functions P139

DEV01 to DEV10 Control and monitoring of three or six switchgear units ! or ( ! )
CMD_1 Single-pole commands !
SIG_1 Single-pole signals !
ILOCK Interlocking logic !
COUNT Binary integrated total !
Communication Functions P139

COMM1, COMM2 2 information interfaces
IRIGB IRIG-B (!)
COMM3 InterMiCOM protective interface
Measured Value Functions P139

MEASI 20mA input, 2 x 20mA outputs,
(!)
MEASO up to 10 inputs for resistance thermometers
! = standard; (!) = ordering option
1-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
General functions
Functions listed in the tables above are self-contained function groups (except for
ILOCK) and can be individually configured or de-configured according to the specific
application requirements. Unused or de-configured function groups are hidden to the
user, thus simplifying the menu.
This concept provides a large choice of functions and makes wide-ranging application of
the protection device possible, with just one model version. On the other hand simple
and clear parameter settings can be made.
In this way the protection and control functions (except for ILOCK) can be included in or
excluded from the configuration; they are arranged on the branch "General Functions" of
the menu tree.
Control functions
Switchgear contact positions are acquired by the P139 through up to 20 binary signal
inputs, that can signal and process a maximum of 10 two-pole contact positions. A
maximum of 12 output relays are available to control a maximum of 10 two-pole
switchgear units.
Up to 40 operation signals can be acquired though binary signal inputs and they are
processed according to their primary significance (e.g. CB readiness). Each binary
signal input for signals from switchgear and single-pole operations can have the
debouncing and chatter suppression from eight groups assigned, for which the
debouncing and chatter time can be individually set.
A binary signal input is configurable to acquire a binary counter value. The binary
integrated total is stored should the supply voltage fail. Counting continues from the
stored total as the starting value when the device restarts.
The P139 sends control signals only after it has checked the readiness and validity to
carry out such commands, and it then monitors the operating time of the switchgear
units. If the device concurs that a switchgear unit has failed, it will signal this information
(e.g. by configuration to a LED indicator).
Before a switching command is issued the interlocking logic on the P139 checks if this
new switchgear status corresponds with the bay and station topology. The interlocking
logic is stored in form of bay interlocking, with and without station interlocking, for each
Bay Panel in the default setting. The interlocking conditions can be adapted to the
actual bay and station topology. Interlocking display and operation correspond with the
programmable logic.
When a P139 is included in a station control system the local interlocking can easily be
integrated with the overall system interlocking.
When the device is not included in a station control system then bay interlocking is
applied without station interlocking.
If the bay and station topology are found to be valid the switching command is issued. If
a non-permissible status would result from the switching action the issuing of such a
switching command is refused and an alarm is issued.
If not all binary outputs are required by the bay type then these vacant binary outputs
can be freely utilized for other purposes.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-3

(continued)
Global functions
In addition to the listed features, and extensive self-monitoring, the P139 is equipped
with the following global functions:
# Parameter subset selection

# System measurements to support the user during commissioning, testing and
operation
# Operating data recording (time-tagged event logging)
# Overload data acquisition
# Overload recording (time-tagged event logging)
# Ground fault data acquisition
# Ground fault recording (time-tagged event logging)
# Fault recording (time-tagged event logging together with fault value recording of the
three phase currents, the residual current as well as the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the neutral-point displacement voltage).
Control/ Monitoring of Self- Overload

Communication COMM1 COMM2 InterMiCOM Recording and
up to 3 or optionnally 6 monitoring recording
acquisition of
switching devices
measur. values Ground fault
to substation or remote control level by modem ... recording
DEV ILOCK
via RS485 or optical fibre connection
Measur.
per IEC 60870-5-101, -103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
LIMIT values Fault recording
85
PSIG LOGIC
V ref
50/51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 67 50/27 49 37/48/49/50S/66 46 30/74 25 79 67N 67N

DTOC IDMT1 IDMT2 SCDD SOTF THERM MP I2> MCMON ASC ARC GFDSS TGFD
27/59 P,Q,N 81 32 50BF/62

V<> f<> P<> CBF COUNT SIG_1 CMD_1
always VT other P139 Feeder Management
available fitted options and Bay Control
1-1 Functional diagram
1-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Design
The P139 is modular in design. The plug-in modules are housed in a robust aluminum
case and electrically interconnected via one analog p/c board and one digital p/c board.
Inputs and outputs

The following inputs and outputs are available:
# 4 current-measuring inputs
# 4 or 5 voltage-measuring inputs
# 8 or 14 output relays, freely-configurable
# 6 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) and 6 output relays to control 3 switchgear units
or
# 12 binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) and 12 output relays to control 6 switchgear
units
# 4, 8 or 28 additional binary signal inputs with user-definable function assignment
With the maximum number of binary signal inputs and output relays fitted, 10 switchgear
units can be monitored and 6 of these can be electrically controlled.
The nominal currents and nominal voltages of the standard measuring inputs in the P139
can be set. As an option, currents and voltages from non-conventional instrument
transformers can be connected to the NCIT module.
The nominal voltage range of the binary signal inputs (opto-coupler) is 24 to 250 V DC.
As an option binary signal input modules with a higher switching threshold are available.
The auxiliary voltage input for the power supply is also designed for an extended range.
The nominal voltage ranges are 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC. As an option
there is a variant available for the lower nominal voltage range 24 V to 36 V DC.
All output relays can be utilized for signaling and command purposes.
The optional (up to 10) inputs for resistance thermometers on the temperature p/c board
are lead-compensated and balanced.
The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

suppression defined by a setting, plus the option of linearizing the input variable via 20
adjustable interpolation points.
Two selectable measured variables (cyclically updated measured operating data and
stored measured fault data) can be output as a burden-independent direct current via
the two optional 0 to 20 mA outputs. The characteristics are defined by 3 adjustable
interpolation points allowing a minimum output current (4 mA, for example) for slave-side
open-circuit monitoring, knee-point definition for fine scaling, and a limitation to lower
nominal currents (10 mA, for example). Where sufficient output relays are available, a
selectable measured variable can be output in BCD-coded form by contacts.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-5

(continued)
Local control and display

# Local control panel with LC-display
(16 lines of 21 characters each with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels)
# 17 LED indicators, 12 with user-definable functional assignment
# PC interface
# Communication interfaces (optional)
Information interfaces
Information is exchanged through the local control panel, the PC interface, or two
optional communication interfaces (channel 1 and channel 2).
Utilizing one of the two available communication interfaces (communication protocols

per IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, DNP 3, MODBUS or Courier; IEC 61850 available
soon) the digital protection device can be wired either to the substation control system or
a telecontrol system.
The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103

only) is designed for remote control.
External clock synchronization can be accomplished by using the optional IRIG-B input.
A direct link to other MiCOM protection devices can be set up by applying the optional
InterMiCOM protective interface (channel 3).
1-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
2 Technical Data
2.1 Conformity
Notice
Applicable to P139, version -301 -401 -601.
Declaration of conformity
(Per Article 10 of EC Directive 72/73/EC.)
The product designated P139 Time-Overcurrent Protection and Control Unit has been
designed and manufactured in conformance with the European standards EN 60255-6
and EN 61010-1 and with the EMC Directive and the Low Voltage Directive issued by
the Council of the European Community.
2.2 General Data
General device data

Design
Surface-mounted case suitable for wall installation or flush-mounted case for
19" cabinets and for control panels.
Installation Position
Vertical 30.
Degree of Protection
Per DIN VDE 0470 and EN 60529 or IEC 529.
IP 52; IP 20 for rear connection space with flush-mounted case.
Weight
40 TE case: Approx. 7 kg
84 TE case: Approx. 11 kg
Dimensions and Connections

See dimensional drawings (Chapter 4 "Design") and terminal connection diagrams
(Chapter 5 "Installation and Connection").
Terminals
PC interface (X6): EIA RS232 connector (DIN 41652),

type D-Sub, 9-pin.
Communication Interface:
Optical fibers (X7, X8 and X31, X32): F-SMA optical fiber connection
per IEC 874-2 and DIN 47258 or
optical fiber connection BFOC-ST connector 2.5
per IEC 874-10 and DIN 47254-1
(ST is a registered trademark of
AT&T Lightguide Cable Connectors) or
Wire leads (X9, X10 and X33): M2 threaded terminal ends for
wire cross sections up to 1.5 mm2 or
RS 232 for InterMiCOM only (X34): Connector (DIN 41652), type D-Sub, 9-pin.
IRIG-B Interface (X11): BNC plug
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-1

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Current Measuring Inputs (conventional):

Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M5,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 4 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4
Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)

plugs and sockets per DIN 41652, type D-Sub, 9-pin (male, female)
Other Inputs and Outputs:

Threaded terminal ends, pin-type cable lugs: M3,
self-centering with cage clamp to protect conductor cross-sections 0.2 to 2.5 mm2
or:
Threaded terminal ends, ring-type cable lugs: M4
Creepage Distances and Clearances

Per EN 61010-1 or IEC 664-1
Pollution degree 3, working voltage 250 V
overvoltage category III, impulse test voltage 5 kV.
2.3 Tests
2.3.1 Type Tests
Type tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6.
Electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC)
Interference Suppression
Per EN 55022 or IEC CISPR 22, Class A.
1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test

Per IEC 255 Part 22-1 or IEC 60255-22-1, Class III
Common-mode test voltage: 2.5 kV
Differential test voltage: 1.0 kV
Test duration: > 2 s
Source impedance: 200
Immunity to Electrostatic Discharge

Per EN 60255-22-2 or IEC 60255-22-2, severity level 3
Contact discharge
Single discharges: > 10
Holding time: > 5 s
Test voltage: 6 kV
Test generator: 50 to 100 M, 150 pF / 330
Immunity to Radiated Electromagnetic Energy

Per EN 61000-4-3 and ENV 50204, severity level 3
Antenna distance to tested device: > 1 m on all sides
Test field strength, frequency band 80 to 1000 MHz: 10 V / m
Test using AM: 1 kHz / 80 %
Single test at 900 MHz: AM 200 Hz / 100%.
2-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Electrical Fast Transient or Burst Requirements

Per EN 61000-4-4 and IEC 60255-22-4, severity levels 3 and 4
Rise time of one pulse: 5 ns
Impulse duration (50% value): 50 ns
Amplitude: 2 kV / 1 kV or 4 kV / 2 kV
Burst duration: 15 ms
Burst period: 300 ms
Burst frequency: 5 kHz or 2.5 kHz
Source impedance: 50 .
Current/Voltage Surge Immunity Test

Per EN 61000-4-5 or IEC 61000-4-5, insulation class 4
Testing of circuits for power supply and asymmetrical or symmetrical lines.
Open-circuit voltage, front time / time to half-value: 1.2 / 50 s
Short-circuit current, front time / time to half-value: 8 / 20 s
Amplitude: 4 / 2 kV
Pulse frequency: > 5 / min
Source impedance: 12 / 42 .
Immunity to Conducted Disturbances Induced by Radio Frequency Fields

Test voltage: 10 V.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity

Test frequency: 50 Hz
Test field strength: 30 A / m.
Alternating Component (Ripple) in DC Auxiliary Energizing Quantity

Per IEC 255-11
12 %.
Insulation
Voltage Test
Per DIN EN 61010-1 and IEC 255-5
2 kV AC, 60 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs. The PC interface and the NCIT current and voltage measuring inputs must not
be subjected to the voltage test.
Impulse Voltage Withstand Test

Per IEC 255-5
Front time: 1.2 s
Time to half-value: 50 s
Peak value: 5 kV
Source impedance: 500 .
Mechanical robustness
Vibration Test
Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-1, test severity class 1
Frequency range in operation: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Frequency range during transport: 10 to 150 Hz, 1 g
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-3

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Shock Response and Withstand Test, Bump Test

Per EN 60255-21-2 or IEC 255-21-2, test severity class 1
Acceleration: 5 g / 15 g
Pulse duration: 11 ms
Seismic Test
Per EN 60255-21-3 or IEC 60255-21-3, test procedure A, class 1
Frequency range:
5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 10 / 5 m/s2, 3 x 1 cycle.
2.3.2 Routine Tests
All tests per EN 60255-6 or IEC 255-6

and DIN 57435 Part 303.
Voltage Test
Per IEC 255-5
2.2 kV AC, 1 s
Only direct voltage (2.8 kV DC) must be used for the voltage test on the power supply
inputs.
The PC interface must not be subjected to the voltage test.
Additional Thermal Test

100% controlled thermal endurance test, inputs loaded.
2.4 Environmental Conditions
Environment
Temperatures
Recommended temperature range: -5C to +55C or +23F to +131F
Limit temperature range: -25C to +70C or -13F to +158F.
Ambient Humidity Range

75 % relative humidity (annual mean),
56 days at 95 % relative humidity and 40C (104F), condensation not permitted.
Solar Radiation
Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be avoided.
2.5 Inputs and Outputs
Measuring inputs
Current Measuring Inputs (conventional)
Nominal current Inom: 1 and 5 A AC (adjustable)
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.1 VA at Inom
Load rating:
continuous 4 Inom
for 10 s: 30 Inom
for 1 s: 100 Inom
Nominal surge current: 250 Inom
or
Current Measuring Inputs (NCIT)
Per IEC 60044-8
NCIT voltage 22,5 mA at 50 A
2-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Voltage Measuring Inputs (conventional)

Nominal voltage Vnom: 50 to 130 V AC (adjustable)
Nominal consumption per phase: < 0.3 VA at Vnom = 130 V AC
Load rating: continuous 150 V AC.
or
Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)
Per IEC 60044-7
NCIT voltage 3.25 V / 3 at Vnom,prim / 3
Frequency
Nominal frequency fnom: 50 Hz and 60 Hz (adjustable)
Operating range: 0.95 to 1.05 fnom
Frequency protection: 40 to 70 Hz
Binary signal inputs

Maximum input voltage permitted: 300 V DC
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 Vin,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % Vin,nom.
Threshold Pickup and Drop-off Points as per Ordering Option

18V standard variant (VA,nom: = 24 to 250 V DC):
Von 19 V DC
Voff 14 V DC
90 V optional variant:
(60%...70% of voltages in the range of VA,nom: 125 to 150 V DC)
Von 100 V DC
Voff 80 V DC
155 V optional variant:
(60%...70% of voltages in the range of VA,nom: 220 to 250 V DC)
Von 180 V DC
Voff 130 V DC
Power consumption per input

18V standard variant:
VA = 19 to 110 V DC: 0.5 W 30 %
VA > 110 V DC: VA,nom 5 mA 30 %.
90 V and 155 V optional variants:

VA > threshold: VA,nom 5 mA 30 %.
Direct current input

Input current: 0 to 26 mA
Value range: 0.00 to 1.20 IDC,nom (IDC,nom = 20 mA)
Maximum continuous input current permitted: 50 mA
Maximum input voltage permitted: 17 V DC
Input load: 100
Open-circuit monitoring: 0 to 10 mA (adjustable)
Overload monitoring: > 24.8 mA
Zero suppression: 0.000 to 0.200 IDC,nom (adjustable).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-5

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Resistance thermometer
Resistance thermometer:
Only PT 100 permitted for analog (I/O) module, mapping curve per IEC 75.1
PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 permitted for temperature p/c board (the RTD module)
Value range: -40.0C to +215.0C (-40F to +419F)
3-wire configuration: max. 20 per conductor
Open and short-circuited input permitted
Open-circuit monitoring: > +215C and < -40C ( > +419F and < -40F)
Output relays
Rated voltage: 250 V DC, 250 V AC
Binary I/O module X (6xI, 8 A continuous current

6xO) for switchgear control
All other modules 5 A continuous current
Short-duration current: 30 A for 0.5 s

Making capacity: 1000 W (VA) at L/R = 40 ms
Breaking capacity: 0.2 A at 220 V DC and L/R = 40 ms
4 A at 230 V AC and cos = 0.4
BCD-coded measured
data output
Maximum numerical value that can be displayed: 399
Analog measured
data output
Value range: 0 to 20 mA
Load permitted: 0 to 500
Maximum output voltage: 15 V
2-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.6 Interfaces
Local control panel

Input or output:
With 12 keys and an LC-display consisting of 16 lines and 21 columns (128 x 128 pixels)
State and fault signals:

17 LED indicators (5 permanently assigned, 12 freely configurable)
PC interface
Transmission rate: 300 to 115,200 baud (adjustable)
Communication interface
The communication module A can be provided with up to three communication channels,
depending on the module variant. Channel 1 and 3 may either be equipped to connect
wire leads or optical fibers and channel 2 is only available to connect wire leads.
For communication interface 1, communication protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103,

IEC 870-5-101, MODBUS, DNP 3.0, or Courier can be set. Communication interface 2
can only be operated with the interface protocol based on IEC 60870-5-103.
Communication interface 3 permits end-end channel-aided digital communication

schemes to be configured for real time protective signaling between two protection
devices (InterMiCOM protective interface).
Wire Leads
Per RS 485 or RS 422, 2 kV isolation
Distance to be bridged:
Point-to-point connection: max. 1200 m
Multipoint connection: max. 100 m
Transmission rate Communication

Protocol
BA-no. -910 300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable) IEC 60870-5-103
(one channel)
BA-no. -921 300 to 19,200 baud (adjustable Can be set by user for
(two channels) for COMM1) one channel
300 to 64,000 baud (adjustable
for COMM2)
BA-no. -951 600 to 19,200 baud (adjustable)
(InterMiCOM)
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-7

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Plastic Fiber Connection

Optical wavelength: typically 660 nm
Optical output: min. -7,5 dBm
Optical sensitivity: min. -20 dBm
Optical input: max. -5 dBm
Distance to be bridged:1) max. 45 m

Protocol
(one channel)
for COMM2)
(InterMiCOM)
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125

Optical output: min. -19.8 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 62.5/125

Optical output: min. -16 dBm
Glass Fiber Connection G 50/125 or G 62,5/125

Protocol
(one channel)
for COMM2)
(InterMiCOM)
IRIG-B interface
B122 format
Amplitude-modulated signal
Carrier frequency: 1 kHz
BCD- coded variable data (daily)
1)
Distance to be bridged given for identical optical outputs and inputs at both ends, a
system reserve of 3 dB, and typical fiber attenuation.
2-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.7 Information Output
Counters, measured data, and signals: see "Address List."
2.8 Settings
Typical characteristic data

Main function
Minimum output pulse for trip command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Minimum output pulse for close command: 0.1 to 10 s (adjustable)
Definite-Time and Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection

Operate time inclusive of output relay
(measured variable from 0 to 2-fold operate value): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 2-fold operate value to 0): 40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Starting resetting ratio: approx. 0.95
Short-circuit direction determination

Nominal acceptance angle for forward decision: 90
Resetting ratio forward/backward recognition: 7
Base point release for phase currents: 0.1 Inom
Base point release for phase-to-phase voltages: 0.002 Vnom at Vnom = 100 V
Base point release for residual currents: 0.01 Inom
Base point release for neutral displacement voltage: 0.015 to 0.6 Vnom/3 (adjustable)
Time-voltage protection
Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
40 ms, approx. 30 ms
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for V<>: 1 to 10 % (adjustable)
for operate values > 0,6 Vnom and Vnom/3: approx. 0,95
for operate values < 0,6 Vnom and Vnom/3: approx. 1.05
Power directional protection

Operate time including output relay (measured variable from nominal value to 1.2-fold
operate value or measured variable from nominal value to 0.8-fold operate value):
Reset time (measured variable from 1.2-fold operate value to nominal value or measured
variable from 0.8-fold operate value to nominal value):
Resetting ratio for
P>, Q>: 0.05 to 0,95 (adjustable)
P<, Q<: 1.05 to 20 (adjustable)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-9

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.9 Deviations
2.9.1 Deviations of the Operate Values
Definitions
Reference Conditions
Sinusoidal signals at nominal frequency fnom, total harmonic distortion 2 %, ambient
temperature 20C (68F), and nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom.
Deviation
Deviation relative to the setting under reference conditions.
Measuring-circuit
monitoring
Operate values Ineg, Vneg
Deviation: 3 %
Definite-time and inverse-
time overcurrent protection
Phase and Residual Current Stages
Deviation: 5 %
Negative-Sequence System Stages

Deviation: 5 %
Short-circuit direction
determination
Deviation: 10
Motor protection and

thermal overload protection
(reaction time)
Deviation 7.5 % when I/Iref = 6
Unbalance protection
Deviation: 5 %
Time-voltage protection
Operate Values
Deviation: 5 % (referred to the nominal value 1 %)
Over-/underfrequency
protection
Operate Values
Deviation: 3 % (referred to the nominal value 1 %)
Power directional
protection
Operate Values P<>, Q<>
Deviation: 5 %
Ground fault direction

determination by steady-
state values (GFDSS)
Operate values VNG>, IN,act>, IN,reac>, IN>
Deviation: 3 %
Sector angle:
Deviation: 1
2-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Direct current input

Deviation: 1 %
Resistance thermometer
Deviation: 2 or 1 %
Analog measured
data output
Deviation: 1 %
Output residual ripple with max. load: 1 %
2.9.2 Deviations of the Timer Stages

Definitions
Deviation
Definite-time stages
Deviation: 1% + 20 ms to 40 ms
Inverse-time stages
Deviation when I 2 Iref:
5 % + 10 to 25 ms
For IEC characteristic 'extremely inverse' and for thermal overload protection:
7.5 % + 10 to 20 ms
2.9.3 Deviations of Measured Data Acquisition
Definitions
Deviation
Operating data
measurement
Measuring Input Currents
Deviation: 1 %
Measuring Input Voltages

Deviation: 0.5 %
Internally Formed Resultant Current and Negative-Sequence System Current

Deviation: 2 %
Internally Formed Neutral-point Displacement Voltage and Voltages of Positive- and

Negative-Sequence Systems
Deviation: 2 %
Active and Reactive Power / Active and Reactive Energy

Deviation: 2 % when cos = 0.7
Deviation: 5 % when cos = 0.3
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-11

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Load Angle
Deviation: 1
Frequency
Deviation: 10 mHz
Direct Current of Measured Data Input and Output

Deviation: 1 %
Temperature
Deviation: 2C
Fault data
Short-Circuit Current and Voltage
Deviation: 3 %
Short-Circuit Impedance, Reactance, and Fault Location

Deviation: 5 %
Internal clock
With free running internal clock:
Deviation: < 1 min/month
With external synchronization (with a synchronization interval 1 min):

Deviation: < 10 ms
With synchronization via IRIG-B interface: 1 ms
2.10 Recording Functions
Organization of the Recording Memories:
Operating data memory

Scope: All signals relating to normal operation; from a total of 1024 different logic state
signals (see Operating Data Memory in the Address List)
Depth: The 100 most recent signals
Monitoring signal memory

Scope: All signals relating to self-monitoring; from a total of 1024 different logic state
signals (see Monitoring Signal Memory in the Address List)
Depth: Up to 30 signals
Overload memory
Number: The 8 most recent overload events
Scope: All signals relating to an overload event; from a total of 1024 different logic state
signals (see Overload Memory in the Address List)
Depth: 200 entries per overload event
Ground fault memory

Number: The 8 most recent ground fault events
Scope: All signals relating to a ground fault event; from a total of 1024 different logic
state signals (see Ground Fault Memory in the Address List)
Depth: 200 entries per ground fault event
2-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Fault memory
Number: The 8 most recent fault events
Scope for signals:

All signals relating to a fault event; from a total of 1024 different logic state
signals (see Fault Memory in the Address List)
Scope for fault values:

Sampled values for all measured currents and voltages
Depth for signals

200 entries per fault event
Depth for fault values:

Max. number of periods per fault set by the user; ax. number of cycles per fault
can be set by user;820 periods in total for all faults, that is 16.4 s (for
fnom = 50 Hz) or 13.7 s (for fnom = 60 Hz)
Resolution of the Recorded Data
Signals
Time resolution: 1 ms
Fault values
Time resolution: 20 sampled values per period
Phase currents
Dynamic range: 100 Inom / 25 Inom (adjustable)
Amplitude resolution: 6.1 mA r.m.s. / 1.5 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 1 A
30.5 mA r.m.s. / 7.6 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 5 A
Residual current
Dynamic range: 16 Inom / 2 Inom (adjustable)
Amplitude resolution: 0.98 mA r.m.s. / 0.12 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 1 A
4.9 mA r.m.s. / 0.61 mA r.m.s. at Inom = 5 A
Voltages
Dynamic range: 150 V AC
Amplitude resolution: 9.2 mVr.m.s.
2.11 Power Supply

Power supply
Nominal auxiliary voltage VA,nom:
24 to 36 V DC or 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC (ordering option)
Operating range for direct voltage:

0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Operating range for alternating voltage: 0.9 to 1.1 VA,nom
Nominal consumption with VA = 220 V DC and with maximum module configuration

( relays de-energized/energized) 40 TE case: approx. 13 W / 34 W
( relays de-energized/energized) 84 TE case: approx. 153 W / 42 W
Start-up peak current: < 3 A for duration of 0.25 ms
Stored energy time 50 ms for interruption of VA 220 V DC
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-13

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.12 Current Transformer Specifications
The following equation is used to calculate the specifications of a current transformer for
the offset maximum primary current:
(
Vsat = (R nom + R i ) n Inom R op + R i k I1,
'
max)
with:
Vsat: saturation voltage (IEC knee point)
'
I1,max : non-offset maximum primary current, converted to the secondary side
Inom : rated secondary current
n: rated overcurrent factor
k: over-dimensioning factor
Rnom : rated burden
Rop actual connected operating burden
Ri : internal burden
The specifications of a current transformer can then be calculated for the minimum
required saturation voltage Vsat as follows:
( )'
Vsat R op + R i k I1,max
As an alternative, the specifications of a current transformer can also be calculated for

the minimum required rated overcurrent factor n by specifying a rated power Pnom as
follows:
(R op + R i ) '
I1,max (Pop + Pi ) '
I1,max
n k = k
(R nom + R i ) Inom (Pnom + Pi ) Inom
with:
2
Pnom = R nom Inom
2
Pop = R op Inom
2
Pi = R i Inom
Theoretically, the specifications of the current transformer could be calculated for lack of
saturation by inserting instead of the required over-dimensioning factor k its maximum
value:
k max 1 + T1
with:
: system angular frequency
T1: system time constant
However, this is not necessary. Instead, it is sufficient to calculate the over-

dimensioning factor k such that the normal behavior of the analyzed protective function
is guaranteed under the given conditions.
2-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
If the P139 is to be used for definite-time overcurrent protection, then the over-
dimensioning factor k that is to be selected is primarily a function of the ratio of the
maximum short-circuit current to the set operate value and, secondly, of the system time
constant T1. The required over-dimensioning factor can be read from the empirically
determined curves in Figure 2-1. When inverse-time maximum current protection is
used, the over-dimensioning factor can be taken from Figure 2-2.
10
T1= 10 ms
T1= 25 ms
T1= 50 ms
0.1 T1= 500 ms

T1= 100 ms
T1= 250 ms
0.01
1 10 100
I' /I
1,max operate
2-1 Required over-dimensioning factor for definite-time overcurrent protection with fnom = 50 Hz
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-15

2 Technical Data
(continued)
25
k 20
15
10
0
0 50 100 150 200 250
T1 / ms
2-2 Required over-dimensioning factor for inverse-time maximum current protection with fnom = 50 Hz
2-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
2.13 Connecting NCITs to Inputs on the CT/VT-Board with NCIT
When the P139 is equipped with a CT/VT-Board with NCIT, non-conventional instrument
transformers per IEC 60044-8 (electronic current transformers) and IEC 60044-7
(electronic voltage transformers) can be connected to the P139 instead of conventional
CTs or VTs.
This feature will enable the user to utilize the advantages that the non-conventional
instrument transformer technology offers and because of the diversity of available
sensors their numbers in the bay may be reduced. Up to five devices can be connected
to one NCIT. (Designing with 200 k terminal resistors is required.)
In addition transformer saturation is avoided and thermal loading of cables and
protection inputs is low because signals are low level/low burden.
Non-conventional instrument Non-conventional instrument

current transformer voltage transformer
Protection device Protection device
*
A A
D D
*option
NCIT_1_EN
2-3 Connecting NCITs to the P139 equipped with a CT/VT-Board with NCIT
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-17

2 Technical Data
(continued)
The NCIT inputs I1 to I3 on the MiCOM P30 series are designed as follows:
! Rated range of the primary phase currents from 50 to 4000 A, adjustable in steps of
50 A (M A I N : I n o m p r i m . N C I T )
! Dynamic range of measuring input designed for 25 kA
! Optimization of the dynamic range through an internal amplification factor which is
defined by the set rated range
! Dynamic range 25 Inom / 100 Inom (setting depends on model) similar to standard
processing of measured values
Residual current measurement IN with the NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range:
! Generating the residual current by analog summation in order to obtain the highest
sensitivity for the measurand with its own amplification factor
! No individual core balance transformer necessary for the measurement of the
sensitive earth fault (residual current)
! Rated range of the primary residual currents from 10 to 800 A, adjustable in steps of
10 A (M A I N : I N , n o m p r i m . N C I T )
X3
4 + +
A (100 x Inom)
5 + -
A' (25 x Inom)
1 + +
B (100 x Inom)
2 + -
B' (25 x Inom)
7 + +
C (100 x Inom)
+ -
8
C' (25 x Inom)
IN (16 x Inom)
IN' (2 x Inom)
NCIT_2_EN
2-4 NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range (dynamic range dependent on model)
2-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2 Technical Data
(continued)
Design of the NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range:

! Rated range of the primary phase voltages from 0.1 kV to 1000 kV, adjustable in
steps of 0.1 kV (M A I N : V n o m p r i m . N C I T )
! Resolution of the phase voltages makes calculation of neutral-point displacement
voltage VNG possible; no individual VNG VT necessary.
! Connecting two voltage systems is possible.
Switching between these voltage systems through
! setting: M A I N : C h a n n e l s e l e c t . N C I T
or
! Binary signal inputs M A I N : C h . x a n . N C I T o n E X T ), with x=1,2.
If both binary signal inputs are set then channel 1 is valid.
Setting of the binary signal inputs has priority over the value of the parameter setting.
Also possible is the setting 'Without channel' (neither channel 1 or channel 2
selected).
! The channel for the second voltage group can be applied to the ASC function
(Automatic Synchronism Check).
! Phase error correction is possible by setting the following parameters:
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph. err. VBG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,1 NCIT
MAIN: Ph.e.VBG/Vref,2 NCIT
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-19

2 Technical Data
(continued)
V X1
4 +
O
L 5 - V1
B
TB 1 +
A1 -
2 V2
G
E 7 +
8 - V3
X2
V 4
+
O -
LB 5
+
TB 1
Vref
A2 2
-
G +
7
E -
8
NCIT_3_EN
2-5 NCIT inputs on the MiCOM P30 range:
2-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
3 Operation
3.1 Modular Structure
The P139, a numeric device, is part of the MiCOM P 30 family of devices. The device
types included in this family are built from identical uniform hardware modules.
Figure 3-1 shows the basic hardware structure of the P139.
3-1 Basic hardware structure
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-1

3 Operation
(continued)
The external analog and binary quantities electrically isolated are converted to the
internal processing levels by the peripheral modules T, Y, and X. Commands and
signals generated by the device internally are transmitted to external destinations via
floating contacts through the binary I/O modules X. The external auxiliary voltage is
applied to the power supply module V, which supplies the auxiliary voltages that are
required internally.
The analog data are always transferred from the transformer module T to the processor
module P by way of the analog bus module.The processor module contains all the
elements necessary for the conversion of measured analog variables, including
multiplexers and analog/digital converters. The analog data processed by analog
module Y are fed to the processor module P by way of the digital bus module. Binary
signals are fed to the processor module by the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus
module. The processor handles the processing of digitized measured variables and of
binary signals, generates the protective trip as well as the control commands and
signals, and transfers them to the binary I/O modules X via the digital bus module. The
processor module also handles overall device communication. As an option,
communication module A can be mounted on the processor module to provide serial
communication with substation control systems.
The control and display elements of the integrated local control panel and the integrated
PC interface are housed on control module L.
3-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.2 Operator-Machine Communication
The following interfaces are available for the exchange of information between operator
and device:
! Integrated local control panel

! PC interface
! Communication interface
All setting parameters and signals as well as all measured variables and control
functions are arranged within the branches of the menu tree following a scheme that is
uniform throughout the device family. The main branches are:
Parameters branch
This branch carries all setting parameters, including the device identification data, the
configuration parameters for adapting the device interfaces to the system, and the
function parameters for adapting the device functions to the process. All values in this
group are stored in non-volatile memory, which means that the values will be preserved
even if the power supply fails.
Operation branch
This branch includes all information relevant for operation such as measured operating
data and binary signal states. This information is updated periodically and consequently
is not stored. In addition, various control parameters are grouped here, for example
those for resetting counters, memories and displays.
Events branch
The third branch is reserved for the recording of events. Therefore all information
contained in this group is stored. In particular the start/end signals during a fault, the
measured fault data as well as sampled fault records are stored here and can be read
out at a later time.
Settings and signals are displayed either in plain text or as addresses, in accordance
with the users choice. The appendix documents the settings and signals of the P139 in
the form of an address list. This address list is complete and thus contains all settings,
signals and measured variables used with the P139.
Normally the local control panel will display the Bay Panel, which represents a selected
bay and shows the up-to-date switching status. The configuration of the local control
panel also permits the installation of Measured Value Panels on the LCD display.
Different panels are automatically displayed for certain system operating conditions.
Priority increases from normal operation to operation under overload conditions and
finally to operation following a short circuit in the system. Thus the P139 provides the
measured data relevant for the prevailing conditions.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-3

3 Operation
(continued)
3.3 Configuration of the Bay Panel and of the Measured Value Panels;
Selection of the Control Point (Function Group LOC)
The layout of a bay with its switchgear units is displayed on the Bay Panel. A Bay Panel
usually consists of one Bay Panel image as a standard but after applying the bay editor
from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 and having loaded a customized Bay Panel it
can be sub-divided into up to eight images. The graphic LCD also permits the display of
Event and configurable Signal Panels. In addition the P139 offers Measured Value
Panels, which display the measured values relevant at a given time.
During normal power system operation; the Bay Panel or if activated the Operation
Panel is displayed. If the Operation Panel is activated as an event occurs, the display
switches to the appropriate Event Panel provided that measured values have been
selected for the Event Panels. In the event of overload or ground fault events, the
display will automatically switch to the Operation Panel at the end of the event. In the
event of a fault, the Fault Panel remains active until the LED indicators or the fault
memories are reset.
If the change enabling command has been issued

(L O C : P a r a m . c h a n g e e n a b l . ) , it will be cancelled after the time, defined by the
setting L O C : A u t o m . r e t u r n t i m e , has elapsed and the Bay Panel will be called
up.
Bay Panel
The P139 offers a selection of pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type be
missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139. By
applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also
define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at
MAIN: Customized bay type.
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a single
line (phase) diagram. The activation of the Bay Panel display is described in the
Chapter entitled "Local Control Panel". The user can switch between two character sets
to represent the switchgear units on the Bay Panel display. The character sets are also
described in Chapter "Local Control Panel". Each external device represented in the
Bay Panel is identified by an external device designation as selected by the user. The
user can also select the designations for busbars and busbar sections. The display of
external device designations can be deactivated. The display of the control point (local
or remote control) and interlocking can also be deactivated.
The switchgear unit to be controlled needs to be selected first. The selection is valid for
the set time L O C : R e t u r n t i m e s e l e c t .
The measured values that will be displayed on the Bay Panel can first be selected
separately for the numerical and the bar chart display by an m out of n parameter.
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for display as
numerical measured values. However, not all measured values that can be displayed in
numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart form. In such cases, a dummy or
placeholder must be included in the selection list for the bar chart display at the same
point at which a measured value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in
the selection list for numerical measured values.
For the bar chart display, the orientation of the bar and the scaling can be selected (the
latter separately for the current and voltage data). Display of the scaling can be
deactivated.
3-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-2 Bay Panel
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-5

3 Operation
(continued)
Signal Panel
The Signal Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one signal has been
configured. From all physical and logical binary states that the device has available up
to 28 signals can be selected for display on the Signal Panel by an m out of n
parameter. This occurs without influencing the Event Panel, which is additionally
available. When more signals are selected for display than the LC display can
accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of signals at intervals defined
by the setting at L O C : P a n e l H o l d - T i m e or when the appropriate key on the local
control panel is pressed. If automatic switching to the Signal Panel is configured at
L O C : A u t . a c t i v . S i g n . P a n e l then the Signal Panel is automatically selected
when there is a change of state for a signal configured in the panel.
With the parameter L O C : S t a t . i n d . S i g n . P a n e l it is possible to differentiate

between the states 'signal active/available' and 'signal inactive/not available' shown on
the Signal Panel. This is shown by the 'clear to black' square alone and the
simultaneous change over from 'normal' display to 'highlighting' of text in the lines. The
type of signaling and the clearing, which may become necessary is selected by setting
LOC: Indicat.Sign.Panel.
LOC: Fct. Signal

Panel
Signal
m out of n
Signal
Signal LOC: Autom. LOC: Autom.
return time
return time
Signal
LOC: Hold-time LOC: Hold-time
Selected signals for Panels for panels
LOC: Aut.activ.
LOC: Indicat.Sign. Sign.Panel
Panel
LOC: Stat.ind.
Sign.Panel
no signal.
flash. panel LOC: Sign.caus.
Sign.Panel
flash. lines
Selection
C
LOC: Chg.Sig.
Panel stat.
Sig. Panel
LOC:Chg.Sig.
Panel flash.
Keys, local control

445209_
3-3 Signal Panel
3-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation Panel
The Operation Panel is displayed when it is selected and when at least one measured
value has been configured. The user can select which of the measured operating values
will be displayed on the Operation Panel by means of an m out of n parameter. If more
measured values are selected for display than the LC display can accommodate, then
the display will switch to the next set of values at intervals defined by the setting at
L O C : H o l d - T i m e for P a n e l s or when the appropriate key on the local control
panel is pressed.
3-4 Operation Panel
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-7

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault Panel
The Fault Panel is displayed in place of another data panel when there is a fault,
provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The Fault Panel
remains on display until the LED indicators or the fault memories are cleared.
The user can select the measured fault values that will be displayed on the Fault Panel
by setting an 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or
when the appropriate key on the local control panel is pressed.
3-5 Fault panel
3-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Ground Fault Panel

The Ground Fault Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when
there is a fault, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Ground Fault Panel remains on display until the ground fault ends, unless a fault occurs.
In this case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Ground Fault
Panel by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for
display than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set
of values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or
3-6 Ground Fault Panel
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-9

3 Operation
(continued)
Overload Panel
The Overload Panel is automatically displayed in place of another data panel when there
is an overload, provided that at least one measured value has been configured. The
Overload Panel remains on display until the overload ends, unless a fault occurs. In this
case the display switches to the Fault Panel.
The user can select the measured values that will be displayed on the Overload Panel
by setting a 'm out of n' parameter. If more measured values are selected for display
than the LC display can accommodate, then the display will switch to the next set of
values at intervals defined by the setting at L O C : H o l d - T i m e f o r P a n e l s or
3-7 Overload Panel
3-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the
control point
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between
local and remote control is achieved using either the L/R key on the local control panel or
an external key switch. The position of this switch is interrogated via an appropriately
configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w .) If the input is
configured 'to L/R key switch' then the L/R key on the local control panel is without
function. This setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the
switching (using either the L/R key or the key switch) is between local and remote control
(LR) or between local+remote and local control (R&LL).
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local
control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
LOC: Fct. assign.

L/R key
LOC: Rem.acc.
block.active
Local LOC: Loc.acc.
Remote block.active
Remote & Local LOC:Remote&
local control
MAIN: Inp.asg
L/R key sw.
Signal
Signal
Signal
Signal
Without function
Selected signal
Keys, local control

19Z5261A_EN
3-8 Selection of the control point
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-11

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4 Serial Interfaces
The P139 has a PC interface as a standard component. Communication module A is

optional and can be provided with one or two communication channels depending on
the design version. Communication between the P139 and the control stations
computer is through the communication module A. Setting and interrogation is possible
through all P139 interfaces.
If the communication module A with two communication channels is installed, settings for
two communication interfaces will be available. The setting of communication interface 1
(COMM1) may be assigned to the physical communication channels 1 or 2 (see section
"Main Functions"). If the COMM1 settings have been assigned to communication
channel 2, then the settings of communication interface 2 (COMM2) will automatically be
active for communication channel 1. Communication channel 2 can only be used to
transmit data to and from the P139 if its PC interface is inactive. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communication channel 2 becomes "dead".
If tests are run on the P139, the user is advised to activate the test mode. In this way the
PC or the control system will recognize all incoming test signals accordingly (see section
"Main Functions").
3.4.1 PC Interface (Function Group PC)
Communication between the device and a PC is through the PC interface. In order for
data transfer between the P139 and the PC to function, several settings must be made in
the P139.
There is an operating program available as an accessory for P139 control (see

Chapter 13).
3-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-9 PC interface settings
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-13

3 Operation
(continued)
3.4.2 Communication Interface 1 (Function Group COMM1)
There are several different interface protocols available at the communication interface
1. The following user-selected interface protocols are available for use with the P139:
! IEC 60870-5-103, Transmission protocols - Companion standard for the informative

interface of protection equipment, first edition, 1997-12 (corresponds to VDEW / ZVEI
Recommendation, Protection communication companion standard 1, compatibility
level 2, February 1995 edition) with additions covering control and monitoring
! IEC 870-5-101, Telecontrol equipment and systems - Part 5: Transmission
protocols - Section 101 Companion standard for basic telecontrol tasks, first edition
1995-11
! ILS-C, internal protocol of AREVA Energietechnik GmbH
! MODBUS
! DNP 3.0
! COURIER
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P139.
Communication interface 1 can be blocked through a binary signal input. In addition, a

signal or measured-data block can also be imposed through a binary signal input.
3-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-10 Communication interface 1, selecting the interface protocol
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-15

3 Operation
(continued)
Address mode
003 168
3-11 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol
(The address mode is not supported with P139 605)
3-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-12 Communication interface 1, settings for the IEC 870-5-101 interface protocol
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-17

3 Operation
(continued)
3-13 Communication interface 1, settings for the ILS_C interface protocol
3-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-14 Communication interface 1, settings for the MODBUS protocol
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-19

3 Operation
(continued)
3-15 Communication interface 1, settings for the DNP 3.0 protocol
3-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-16 Communication interface 1, settings for the COURIER protocol
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-21

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
For interface protocols based on IEC 60870-5-103, IEC 870-5-101, or ILS_C it is
possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the control
station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local control panel.
3-17 Checking spontaneous signals
Communication interface 2 supports the IEC 60870-5-103 interface protocol.
In order for data transfer to function properly, several settings must be made in the P139.
3-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-18 Settings for the communication interface 2
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-23

3 Operation
(continued)
Checking spontaneous
signals
It is possible to select a signal for test purposes. The transmission of this signal to the
control station as sig. start or sig. end can then be triggered via the local control panel.
3-19 Checking spontaneous signals
3-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Application
Communication interface 3 is designed to establish a digital communication link between
two MiCOM devices over which up to 8 binary protection signals may be transmitted.
Whereas communication interfaces 1 and 2 are designed as information interfaces to
connect to data acquisition subsystems and for use in remote control, communication
interface 3 is designed as a protective interface that will transmit signals in real time
(InterMiCOM protective interface). Its main application is to transmit signals from
protective signaling (function group PSIG). In addition any other internal or external
binary device signals may also be transmitted.
Physical medium
COMM3 is provided as an asynchronous, full-duplex communication interface. To
transmit data the following physical media are available:
Direct link without use of external supplementary equipment:

! Glass fiber (e.g. via 2 x G62.5/125 up to max. 1.4 km)
! Twisted pair (RS 422 up to max. 1.2 km)
Use of external transmission equipment:

! FO module (e.g. OZD 485 BFOC-1300 / Hirschmann up to max. 8/14/20 km)
! Universal modem (e.g. PZ 511 via twisted pair 2x2x0.5 mm up to max. 10 km)
! Voice frequency modem (e.g. TD-32 DC / Westermo up to max. 20 km)
Digital network:
! Asynchronous data interface of primary multiplexing equipment
Activating and Enabling

In order to use InterMiCOM, the communication interface COMM3 has to be configured
using the parameter C O M M 3 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C O M M 3 . This setting
parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication module is fitted. After
activation of COMM3, all addresses associated to this function group (setting
parameters, binary state signals etc.) become visible.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting
COMM3: General enable USER.
Telegram configuration
The communication baud rate is settable (C O M M 3 : B a u d r a t e ) to adapt to the
transmission channel requirements. Sending and receiving addresses (C O M M 3 :
S o u r c e a d d r e s s and C O M M 3 : R e c e i v i n g a d d r e s s can be set to different
values, thus avoiding that the device communicates with itself.
The InterMiCOM protective interface provides independent transmission of eight binary

signals in each direction. For the send signals (C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . s e n d x ,
with x = 1 to 8) any signal from the selection table of the binary outputs (OUTP) can be
chosen. For the receive signals (C O M M 3 : F c t . a s s i g n m . r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8)
any signal from the selection table of the binary inputs (INP) can be chosen.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-25

3 Operation
(continued)
For each receive signal, an individual operating mode can be set

( C O M M 3 : O p e r . m o d e r e c e i v e x , with x = 1 to 8 ) , thus defining the required
checks for accepting the received binary signal. In addition a specifically selected
telegram structure subdivides the 8 binary signals into two groups. The signal encoding
along with the set operating mode for the telegram check defines the actual balance of
"Speed", "Security" and "Dependability" for each signal:
! Binary signals 1 to 4:
Operating mode settable to 'Blocking' or 'Direct intertrip'
! Binary signals 5 to 8:
Operating mode settable to 'Permissive' or 'Direct intertrip'
EN 60834-1 classifies 3 categories of command based teleprotection schemes

according to their specific requirements (see figure 3-20). By selection of a binary signal
and by setting its operating mode appropriately, these requirements can be fulfilled as
follows:
! Direct transfer trip or intertripping:

Preference: Security
Implication: No spurious pickup in the presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from groups 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Direct intertrip'
! Permissive teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Dependability.
Implication: Maximizes probability of signal transmission in the
presence of channel noise.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 5 to 8 and
set operating mode 'Permissive'
! Blocking teleprotection scheme:

Preference: Speed.
Implication: Fast end-end signal transfer.
Recommended setting: Select binary signal from group 1 to 4 and
set operating mode 'Blocking'
Speed
fast
Blocking
Permissive
high high
Direct
Security Intertrip Dependability
3-20 Comparison of speed, security and dependability offered by the three operating modes.
3-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Communication monitoring
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t is used for monitoring the transmission channel
(this timer is re-triggered with each complete and correct received telegram). The wide
setting range allows adaptation to the actual channel transmission times and above all
this is needed for time-critical schemes such as the blocking scheme. After the timer
has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m u n i c a t i o n s f a u l t and
S F M O N : C o m m u n i c . f a u l t C O M M 3 are issued and the received signals are
automatically set to their user-defined default values
(C O M M 3 : D e f a u l t v a l u e r e c . x , with x = 1 to 8). As the main application for this
protective signaling the fault signal may be mapped to the corresponding input signal in
function group PSIG with the C O M M 3 : S i g . a s g . c o m m . f a u l t setting.
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . is used to determine a persistent failure of the data

transmission channel.
After the timer has elapsed, signals C O M M 3 : C o m m . l i n k f a i l u r e and
S F M O N : C o m m . l i n k f a i l . C O M M 3 are issued.
Block. signal Enable signal Direct intertrip

accepted accepted accepted
Telegram Test 1. character & Test

CRC-Test
received source address telegram syntax
[120 033] COMM3:

Time-out comm.fault'
New start of
[120 043] COMM3:
monitoring 1
Communications fault
timer stages
[120 035] COMM3:

Time-out link fail.
[120 044] COMM3:

1
Comm. link failure
3-21 Message processing and communication monitoring
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-27

3 Operation
(continued)
Supervision of
communication link quality
After a syntax check of each received message, InterMiCOM updates the ratio of
incorrectly received messages, based on a total of the last 1000 received messages.
The result is provided as updating measurand C O M M 3 : N o . t e l . e r r o r s p . u .
and the overall maximum ratio can be read from
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored.
If the set threshold C O M M 3 : L i m i t t e l e g r . e r r o r s is exceeded the
corresponding signals C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .
and S F M O N : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r . will be issued. All corrupted telegrams are
counted (C O M M 3 : N o . t e l e g r a m e r r o r s ) . This counter as well as the stored
maximum ratio of corrupted messages can be reset via
COMM3: Reset No. tel.errors.
Commissioning tools
The actual values of send and receive signals can be read from the device as physical
state signals (C O M M 3 : S t a t e s e n d x and C O M M 3 : S t a t e r e c e i v e x , with x
= 1 to 8). In addition, InterMiCOM provides 2 test facilities for commissioning of the
protection interface.
For a loop-back test, the send output is directly linked back to the receive input. After
setting the bit pattern wanted (as an equivalent decimal number at
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k s e n d ) the test can be triggered via
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k t e s t . This bit pattern is sent for the duration of the hold time
set at C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . Only for this test, the source address is set to
'0', a value that is not used for regular end-end communication. The test result can be
checked as long as the hold-time is running by reading the measured operating data
C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e s u l t and C O M M 3 : L o o p b a c k r e c e i v e . As soon
as the hold-time has expired, the loop back test is terminated and InterMiCOM reverts to
the normal sending mode (i.e. sending the actual values of the configured send signals,
using the set source address).
Thus in case of communication problems, the loop back test can be used to verify or to
exclude a defective device. The transmission channel including the receiving device can
be checked manually by setting individual binary signals
(C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l f o r t e s t ) to user-defined test values
(C O M M 3 : L o g . s t a t e f o r t e s t ). After triggering the test by
C O M M 3 : S e n d s i g n a l , t e s t , the preset binary signal is sent with the preset value
for the set hold time C O M M 3 : H o l d t i m e f o r t e s t . The 7 remaining binary
signals are not affected by this test procedure and continue to be sent with their real
values. During the hold time, a received signal can be checked at the receiving device,
e.g. by reading the physical state signal. After the hold time has expired, the test mode
is reset automatically and the actual values of all 8 signals are transmitted again.
3-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.5 Time Synchronization via the IRIG-B Interface (Function Group IRIGB)
If a GPS receiver with an IRIG-B connection is available, for example, then the internal
clock in the P139 can be synchronized to GPS time through the optional IRIG-B
interface. The user must keep in mind that the IRIG-B signal contains only one piece of
information about the date (the day as numbered since the beginning of the year). On
the basis of this piece of information about the date, the P139 calculates the current date
(DD.MM.YY) based on the year set in the P139.
Disabling and enabling the

IRIG-B interface
The IRIG-B interface can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Synchronization readiness
Once the IRIG-B interface has been enabled and is receiving a signal, the P139 checks
the received signal for plausibility. Non-plausible signals are rejected by the P139. If a
correct signal is not received by the P139 continuously, then the synchronization function
is no longer ready.
3-22 IRIG-B interface
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-29

3 Operation
(continued)
3.6 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
The P139 has optical coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation.
The functions that will be activated by triggering these binary signal inputs are defined by
the configuration of the binary signal inputs. The trigger signal must persist for at least
30 ms in order to be recognized by the P139.
Configuring the binary

inputs
One function can be assigned to each binary signal input by configuration. The same
function can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated
from several control points having different signal voltages.
In this manual, we assume that the required functions (marked 'EXT' in the address
description) have been assigned to binary signal inputs by configuration.
Operating mode of the

binary inputs
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active 'high' mode) or the absence (active 'low' mode) of a
voltage should be interpreted as the logic '1' signal. The display of the state of a binary
signal input 'low' or 'high' is independent of the setting for the operating mode of the
signal input.
3-23 Configuration and operating mode of the binary signal inputs
3-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
There is a second optional analog module available for the P139. In addition to the
analog (I/O) module Y with analog inputs and outputs there is now a second analog
module obtainable, the temperature p/c board (also called the RTD module).
When the P139 is equipped with the analog (I/O) module Y it has two analog inputs
available for measured data input. Direct current is fed to the P139 through the 20 mA
analog input (input channel 1). The other input is designed for connection of a PT 100
resistance thermometer.
The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs
available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. These analog inputs are designed
for connection of PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers.
The input current IDC present at the analog (I/O) module Y is displayed as a measured
operating value. The current that is conditioned for monitoring purposes (ID,Clin) is also
displayed as a measured operating value. In addition, it is monitored by the Limit Value
Monitoring function to detect whether it exceeds or falls below set thresholds (see "Limit
Value Monitoring").
The measured temperatures are also displayed as measured operating values and
monitored by the Limit Value Monitoring function to determine whether they exceed or
fall below set thresholds (see "Limit Value Monitoring").
All measured variables are also forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function.
With this protection it is possible to set whether the PT 100 resistance thermometer, the
20 mA analog input or if configured one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9 is to be
used for the thermal replica (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-31

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling or enabling the

measured data input
function
The measured data input function can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel.
3-24 Disabling or enabling the measured data input function
3-32 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.1 Direct Current Input on the Analog (I/O) Module Y
External measuring transducers normally supply an output current of 0 to 20 mA that is

directly proportional to the physical quantity being measured the temperature, for
example.
If the output current of the measuring transducer is directly proportional to the measured
quantity only in certain ranges, linearization can be arranged, provided that the
measured data input is set accordingly. Furthermore, for certain applications it may be
necessary to limit the range being monitored or to monitor certain parts of the range with
a higher or lower sensitivity.
By setting the value pair M E A S I : I D C x and M E A S I : I D C , l i n x , the user
specifies which input current IDC will correspond to the current that is monitored by the
Limit Value Monitoring function, i.e., IDC,lin. The resulting points, called "interpolation
points", are connected by straight lines in an IDC-IDC,lin diagram. In order to implement a
simple characteristic, it is sufficient to specify two interpolation points, which are also
used as limiting values (see figure 3-25). Up to 20 interpolation points are available to
implement a complex characteristic.
When setting the characteristic the user must remember that only a rising/rising or
falling/falling curve sense is allowed (no peak or vee-shapes). If the setting differs, the
signal C H E C K : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g I D C will be generated.
IDClin / IDC,nom
1.2
1.1
1
IDClin20
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
IDClin1 0
0 0.1 0.2 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.4 0.45 0.5 0.6 IDC/ IDC,nom
IDC1 IDC20
D5Z52KDA
19Z5266A_EN
3-25 Example of the conversion of 4 to 10 mA input current to 0 to 20 mA monitored current, IDC,lin
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-33

3 Operation
(continued)
IDClin / IDC,nom
0,8
Interpolation points
IDClin20 0,7
0,6
IDClin4 0,5
0,4
IDClin3 0,3
IDClin2 0,2
IDClin1 0,1
0
0 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8 0,9 1 1,1 1,2
IDC1 IDC2 IDC3 IDC4 IDC20 IDC / IDC,nom
Enable IDC p.u.

D5Z52KEA
3-26 Example of a characteristic with five interpolation points (characteristic with zero suppression setting of 0.1 IDC,nom is shown as a broken
line)
Zero suppression
Zero suppression is defined by setting M E A S I : E n a b l e I D C p . u . If the direct
current does not exceed the set threshold, the per-unit input current IDC p.u. and the
current IDC,lin will be displayed as having a value of 0.
3-34 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Open-circuit and overload

monitoring
The device is equipped with an open-circuit monitoring function. If current IDC falls below
the set threshold M E A S I : I D C < o p e n c i r c u i t , the signal M E A S I : O p e n
c i r c . 2 0 m A i n p . is issued.
The input current is monitored in order to protect the 20 mA analog input against
overloading. If it exceeds the set threshold of 24.8 mA, the signal M E A S I :
O v e r l o a d 2 0 m A i n p u t is issued.
Backup sensors
The open circuit signal on the 20 mA analog input from the function group MEASI is
forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. Here it is possible to set
whether the resistance thermometer connected to the PT 100 input or if configured
one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9, connected to the temperature p/c board (the
RTD module), is to be used as a backup sensor (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-35

3 Operation
(continued)
3-27 Analog direct current input
3-36 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Beyond the linearization described above, the user has the option of scaling the
linearized values. Thereby negative values, for example, can be displayed as well and
are available for further processing by protection functions.
3-28 Scaling of the linearized measured value
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-37

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.2 Connecting a Resistance Thermometer to the "PT 100 Analog Input" on the
Analog (I/O) Module Y
This analog input on the analog (I/O) module Y is designed to connect a PT 100
resistance thermometer. The mapping curve R = f(T) of PT 100 resistance
thermometers is defined in standard IEC 751. If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is
connected using the 3-wire method, then no further calibration is required.
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand

(temperature T), a normalized value (temperature norm. T), and as the maximum value
since the last reset.
Open-circuit monitoring
If there is an open measuring circuit due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I : O p e n
c i r c . P T 1 0 0 is issued.
MEASI: Enabled
MEASI: Open circ.

Measur.input PT100 PT100
SFMON: PT100
open circuit
MEASI: Temperature
T
MEASI: Temperature
p.u. T
MEASI: Temperature
Tmax
19Z5262A_EN
3-29 Temperature measurement using a PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module
Backup sensors
The open circuit signal on the PT 100 analog input from the function group MEASI is
forwarded to the functions Thermal Overload Protection and Limit Value Monitoring.
In the Thermal Overload Protection it is possible to set whether the 20 mA input or if
configured one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9, connected to the temperature p/c
board (the RTD module), is to be used as a backup (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
In the Limit Value Monitoring function the limit values assigned to the faulty PT 100 are
blocked.
3-38 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.7.3 Connecting Temperature Sensors to the Temperature P/C Board (the RTD
Module)
The temperature p/c board (the RTD module) mounted in the P139 has 9 analog inputs
available to connect temperature sensors T1 to T9. These analog inputs are designed
for connection of PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 resistance thermometers.
If the PT 100 resistance thermometer is connected using the 3-wire method, then no
further calibration is required.
All nine temperature sensors must be of the same type, which is set under M E A S I :
Type of TempSensors
The result of a temperature measurement can be read out as a direct measurand

(temperature Tx), a normalized value (temperature norm. Tx) and as the maximum value
since the last reset (temperature Tx max).
Open-circuit monitoring
If one of the measuring circuits is open due to a broken wire, the signal M E A S I :
O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 T x (x = 1 to 9) is issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-39

3 Operation
(continued)
MEASI: Enabled
MEASI: Open circ.

Measur.input T1 PT100 T1
SFMON: PT100 T1
open circuit
MEASI: Temperature
T1
MEASI: Temperature
p.u. T1
MEASI: Temperature
T1max
19Z5263A_EN
3-30 Temperature measurement with temperature sensor T1 connected to the temperature p/c board. The same applies to sensors T2 to T9.
In the data model P139-605 the temperature sensors T1 to T9 are identified as U 301 to U 309.
In future software versions this designation will be adapted to the new device identifier scheme. The input designation will then be
U81 to U89 (as in the terminal connection diagram).
The following designations will then also be modified:

Formerly: MEASI: Temperature Tx U301 Now: MEASI: T e m p e r a t u r e T x
Formerly: MEASI: Temp. Tx max. U301 Now: MEASI: T e m p e r a t u r e T x max
(x = 1 to 9)
3-40 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Backup sensors
The open circuit signals from temperature sensors, issued by function group MEASI, are
forwarded to the Thermal Overload Protection function. Should the main temperature
sensor (that has been set in the Thermal Overload Protection) fail, it is possible to select
in whether the 20 mA input or if configured one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9,
connected to the temperature p/c board (the RTD module), is to be used as a backup
sensor (see "Thermal Overload Protection").
In addition to this, the open circuit signals from the temperature sensors, issued by the
function group MEASI, are forwarded to the Limit Value Monitoring function. The
selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in the
function group M E A S I .
For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD
board) are divided into three groups:
Group 1: T1, T2, T3

Group 2: T4, T5, T6
Group 3: T7, T8, T9
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Without, the Limit Value

Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors.
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 -2, the defective

temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 2.
If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the
corresponding sensor from group 3, under the assumption that M E A S I :
B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 2/3.
The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below:
Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2 Backup sensor from group 3
With setting: With setting:
Group 1 -2 Group 1 2/3
or
Group 1 -2/3
T1 T4 T7
T2 T5 T8
T3 T6 T9
Should temperature sensor T1 fail, with the setting Group 1 2/3, it will replaced by T4.
Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will replaced by T7.
For further details refer to section with the description of the "Limit Value Monitoring".
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-41

3 Operation
(continued)
Application example
A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1
to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a "PT 100" resistance
thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.
RTD RTD Phase RTD

Main Temp. Sensor A B C Ambient temperature /
RTD Coolant temperature
Backup Temp. Sensor
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD Stator
RTD
RTD
Rotor
Bearing Bearing
19B5236A_EN
3-31 Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (L I M I T )
and the Thermal Overload protection (THERM)
3-42 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.8 Configuration, Operating Mode, and Blocking of the Output Relays

(Function Group OUTP)
The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The binary signals to be
issued are defined by configuration.
Configuration of the output

relays
One binary signal can be assigned to each output relay. The same binary signal can be
assigned to several output relays by configuration.
Operating mode of the

output relays
The user can set an operating mode for each output relay. The operating mode
determines whether the output relay will operate in an energize-on-signal arrangement
(ES, logic 1 = energize relay coil) or normally energized arrangement (NE, logic 1 =
de-energize relay coil) and whether it will operate in latching mode. Latching is disabled
manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input either at the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new system
disturbance, depending on the operating mode selected.
Blocking the output relays

The P139 offers the option of blocking all output relays from the local control panel or by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input. The output relays are likewise
blocked if the device is disabled via appropriately configured binary inputs or if the self-
monitoring function detects a hardware fault. An output relay configured for the signal
M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y is not included in blocking.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-43

3 Operation
(continued)
3-32 Configuration, setting the operating mode, and blocking the output relays
3-44 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the output relays

For testing purposes, the user can select an output relay and trigger it via the local
control panel. In this case the device has to be switched to offline. Triggering persists
for the duration of the set hold time.
3-33 Testing the output relays
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-45

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9 Measured Data Output (Function Group MEASO)
Measurands made available by the P139 can be provided in BCD (binary coded
decimal) form through output relays or in analog form as direct current output. Output as
direct current can only occur if the device is equipped with analog module Y. BCD-
coded output is always possible, whether the device is equipped with analog module Y
or not.
Disabling or enabling the

measured data output
function
The measured data output function can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel.
3-34 Disabling or enabling the measured data output function
3-46 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling measured data

output
The measured data output can be enabled through a binary signal input, provided that
the function M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has been configured. If the function
M E A S O : O u t p . e n a b l e d E X T has not been configured to a binary signal input,
then the measured data output is always enabled.
3-35 Enabling measured data output
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-47

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the measured

data output function
BCD-coded or analog output of measurands is terminated for the duration of the hold
time if one of the following conditions is met:
! The measured data output function is reset from the integral local control panel or
through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
! There is a general reset.
! LED indicators are reset.
3-36 Resetting the measured data output function
Scaling
Scaling is used to map the physical measuring range to the device inherent setting
range.
Scaling of analog output is also suited for directional-signed output of some fault
measurands, in particular fault location in percent.
3-48 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.1 BCD-coded Measured Data Output
The user can select a measurand for output in BCD-coded form by assigning output
relays.
The selected measurand is available in BCD-coded form for the duration of the set hold
time M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t B C D . If the selected variable was not
measured, then there is no output of a value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to immediate availability at
the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-49

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling of BCD output

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range (Mx,min
... Mx,max) in scaled form (as Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max) and the associated BCD
display range (BCD,min ... BCD,max) have to be set.
! MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD

! MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD
! MEASO: BCD-Out min. value
! MEASO: BCD-Out max. value
The BCD display range should be set so that the value 399 is never exceeded. If this
should occur or if the measurand is outside the acceptable measuring range, then the
value for "Overflow" (all relays triggered) is transmitted.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
Associated scaled 0 ... 1
measurands
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands to be output Range

Measurands to be output Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measurands to be Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,max
output
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of the set "Scaled min. val. BCD" ..."Scaled max. val. BCD"
values in the data model
Measurands BCD-coded display values

Measurands in the range BCD-Out min. value BCD-Out max. value
"Measurands to be output: (Valid BCD value)
Measurands: BCD-Out min. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min.
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (BCD value not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2.
Measurands Mx: BCD-Out max. value (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-50 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

BCD output
The value range for the fault measurand is set from 320.00% to +320.00%.
The PU fault location is given in the range from 0% to 200%.
Measurands Range
Fault measurand: -320,00% ... +320,00%
FT_DA: Fault
locat. percent
measurands

Measurands to be output 0% ... 200%
Scaled measurands to be 0.5 ... 0.813
output with:
0.500 = 320/640
0.813 = 520/640
Measurands BCD-coded display values

Measurands in the range 0 ... 200
"Measurands to be output
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config.parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group MEASO 'With'
031 074 MEASO: General enable USER 'Yes'

053 002 MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
010 010 MEASO: Hold time output BCD 1.00 s
037 140 MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 0.500
037 141 MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 0.813
037 142 MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 0
037 143 MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 200
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-51

3 Operation
(continued)
The following figure displays the values output as a function of the fault location. The
BCD-coded value and the signal M E A S O : V a l i d B C D v a l u e = 'Yes' are only
issued in the value range 0% to 200%.
[004.027] FT_DA: [037.050] MEASO: [004.027] FT_DA:

Fault locat. percent Valid BCD value Fault locat. percent
= Overflow = yes = Overflow
200
BCD
value
0
-320% 0% 200% 320%
[004.027] FT_DA: Fault locat. percent
3-37 Example of BCD coded output of fault location
Note:
Except from radial, single circuit lines the fault location value gives a reasonable value
only for faults up to the line end. For any fault on a subsequent line the fault location is
more or less incorrect due to unknown fault current infeed in the remote substation.
It is recommended to limit the calculation of a fault location to a practical and sensible
range on the line by setting F T _ D A : O u t p u t f a u l t l o c a t . = 'Only aft.tr.t1/t1,ze'.
3-52 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
MEASO: Hold time

MEASO: Enabled output BCD
MEASO: 1-digit
bit
MEASO: 1-digit
bit
Setting blocked MEASO: 1-digit
bit
MEASO: Enable MEASO: 1-digit

bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: Reset
meas.val.outp. MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 10-digit
bit
MEASO: 100-dig.
bit
selected measured
MEASO: 100-dig.
operating value bit
selected
measured event value
is updated
MEASO: Valid
selected measured value BCD value
not activated
selected measured value

Overflow
measured
MEASO: Fct.
assignm. BCD value
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
Scaling of the
Selected meas. val. BCD output
++
MEASO: Output
value x
MEASO Output Address ++ Scaling of the BCD output

value x
MEASI: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140
MEASI: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141
MEASI: BCD-Out min. value 037 142
MEASI: BCD-Out max. value 037 143
19Z5264A_EN
3-38 BCD-coded measured data output Overflow behavior is displayed in BCD example (see previous figure)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-53

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.2 Analog Measured Data Output
Analogue output of measured data is two-channel.
The user can select two of the measurands available in the P139 for output in the form of
load-independent direct current. Three interpolation points per channel can be defined
for specific adjustments such as adjustment to the scaling of a measuring instrument.
The direct current that is output is displayed as a measured operating value.
The selected measurand is output as direct current for the duration of the set hold time
M E A S O : H o l d T i m e O u t p u t A - x . If the selected variable was not measured,
then there is no output of a measurand value.
Output of measured event

values
If the measured event value is updated during the hold time, the measurand output
memory is cleared and the hold time is re-started. This leads to an immediate availability
at the output of the updated value.
Output of measured
operating values
The selected measured operating value is available for the duration of the set hold time.
After the hold time has elapsed, the current value is saved and the hold time is re-
started. If the hold time has been set to "blocked", the measured operating value that
has been output will be stored until the measured data output function is reset.
Configuration of output
relays assigned to the
output channels
The user must keep in mind that direct current output only occurs when the output relays
assigned to the output channels are configured for M E A S O : V a l u e A - x O u t p u t ,
since the output channels would otherwise remain short-circuited (see terminal
connection diagrams).
3-54 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Scaling the analog display

In order to define the resolution for measured data output the measurand range in scaled
form and the associated display range have to be set. One additional value for the knee
point must also be defined. In this way the user can obtain an analog output
characteristic similar to the characteristic shown in Figure 3-39.
Measurand range to be
output
The measurand range to be output is (Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max),
with:
Mx,min: minimum value to be output
Mx,knee: Knee point value for the measurand range to be output
Mx,max: maximum value to be output
This measurand range to be output is defined by setting the following parameters:
! MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-x

! MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-x
! MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-x
Scaling is made with reference to the complete range of values for the selected
measurand (variable Mx). The complete range of values is defined by their end values
Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2. (Mx,RL1 and Mx,RL2 are listed in the operating program S&R-103
- PC Access Software MiCOM S1 - under "minimum" and "maximum".)
Measurands Range
Measurands of the Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
variable Mx
measurands

Measurands with knee-point Mx,min ... Mx,knee ... Mx,max
to be output
Scaled measurands with a Mx,scal,min ... Mx,scal,knee ... Mx,scal,max
scaled knee-point to be
output with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,knee = (Mx,knee - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1)
Designation of the set "Scal. min. value Ax" ...

values in the data model ... "Scal. knee-point Ax" ...
... "Scal. max. value Ax"
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-55

3 Operation
(continued)
Associated display range

The associated display range is defined by setting the following parameters:
! MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-x

! MEASO: AnOut knee point A-x
! MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-x
Measurands Analog display values

Measurands in the range "AnOut min. val. A-x" ...
"Measurands to be output ... "AnOut knee point A-x" ...
..."AnOut max. val. A-x"
(Value A-x valid)
Measurands: "AnOut min. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,RL1 = Mx = Mx,min
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Value A-x not valid)
Mx,max = Mx = Mx,RL2
Measurands Mx: "AnOut max. val." (Overflow)
Mx < Mx,RL1
or
Mx > Mx,RL2
3-56 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for scaling of

analog display ranges
Voltage A-B is selected as the measurand to be transmitted by channel A-1.
The measuring range is from 0 to 1.5 Vnom with Vnom = 100 V.
The range to be transmitted is from 0.02 to 1 Vnom
with the associated display range from 4 mA to 18 mA.
The knee-point of the characteristic is 0.1 Vnom with an associated display of 16 mA.
Measurands Range
Measurands of the 0 V ... 150 V
variable Mx
measurands

Measurands with knee-point 2 V ...10 V... 100 V
to be output
Associated scaled 0.013 ... 0.067 ... 0.67
measurands
with:
Mx,scal,min = (2 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.013
Mx,scal,knee = (10 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.067
Mx,scal,max = (100 V - 0 V ) / (150 V - 0 V ) = 0.67
Measurands Analog display values

Measurands in the range 4 mA ... 16 mA ... 18 mA
"Measurands to be output
0.02 ... 0.1 Vnom ... 1 Vnom
In this example the following device settings are selected:
/Parameter/Config.parameters/
Address Description Current value
056 020 MEASO: Function group 'With'
MEASO
031 074 MEASO: General enable 'Yes'
USER
053 000 MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 MAIN:
Voltage A-B PU
010 114 MEASO: Hold time output A-1 1.00 s
037 104 MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 0.013 (corresponds with 0.02 Vnom)
037 105 MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 0.067 (corresponds with 0.10 Vnom)
037 106 MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 0.667 (corresponds with 1.00 Vnom)
037 107 MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 4 mA
037 108 MEASO: AnOut knee point A- 16 mA
1
037 109 MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 18 mA
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-57

3 Operation
(continued)
By setting M E A S O : A n O u t M i n . v a l . A - x , the user can specify the output current

that will be output when values are smaller than or equal to the set minimum measured
value to be transmitted. The setting at M E A S O : A n O u t m a x . v a l . A - x defines
the output current that is output for the maximum measured value to be transmitted. By
defining the knee-point, the user can obtain two characteristic curve sections with
different slopes. When entering this setting the user must keep in mind that only a
rising/rising or falling/falling curve sense is permitted (peaky or vee shapes not allowed).
If the setting was not properly entered, the signal S F M O N : I n v a l i d s c a l i n g A - x
will be issued.
Note:
A check of the set characteristic and its acceptance by the device, if the setting was
properly entered, will only occur after the device, with the setting M A I N : D e v i c e o n -
l i n e is again switched on-line.
Ia / mA
20
Max.
output value18
Knee point
16
output value
14
12
10
6
Min.
output value 4
2
0
0 0.02 0.1 1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 Vnom
0,013 0,067 0,667 1,0Mx,scal
D5Z52KFA
19Z5265A_EN
3-39 Example of a characteristic curve for analog measured data output . In this example the range starting value is = 0; also possible is
directional-signed output (see corresponding example in section BCD-coded Measured Data Output).
3-58 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-40 Analog measured data output
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-59

3 Operation
(continued)
3.9.3 Output of External Measured Data
Measured data from external devices, which must be scaled to 0 ... 100%, can be written
to the following parameters of the P139 via the communications interface.
! MEASO: Output Value 1

These "external" measured values are output by the P139 either in BCD-coded data
form or as load-independent direct current, provided that the BCD-coded measured data
output function or the channels of the analogue measured data output function are
configured accordingly.
3-60 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.10 Configuration and Operating Mode of the LED Indicators

(Function Group LED)
The P139 has 17 LED indicators for the indication of binary signals. Four of the LED
indicators are permanently assigned to functions. A further LED has a default
assignment but may be reconfigured if required. The other LED indicators are freely
configurable.
Configuring the LED

indicators
One binary signal can be assigned to each of the freely configurable LED indicators.
The same binary signal can be assigned to several LED indicators by configuration.
Operating mode of the LED

indicators
The user can set an operating mode for each LED indicator with the exception of the
first one. The operating mode determines whether the LED indicator will operate in an
energize-on-signal arrangement (ES, logic 1 = illuminate) or normally energized
arrangement (NE, logic 0 = illuminate) and whether it will operate in latching mode.
Latching is disabled manually from the local control panel or through an appropriately
configured binary signal input (see section entitled 'Main Functions of the P139') either at
the onset of a new fault or at the onset of a new system disturbance, depending on the
operating mode selected.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-61

3 Operation
(continued)
3-41 Configuration and operating mode of the LED indicators
3-62 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (Function Group MAIN)
3.11.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time
tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these
signals can be assigned to one of eight groups and for each of these groups the
debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters
achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-63

3 Operation
(continued)
3-42 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
3-64 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Debouncing
The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer
stage. If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing
the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated.
If the signal has not changed its state from the occurrence of the first pulse edge to the
elapsing of the set debouncing time, no telegram is generated.
3-43 Signal flow for debouncing, example:

Set debouncing time: 50 ms
Key: s: start, e: end
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-65

3 Operation
(continued)
Chatter suppression
Sending of the first telegram starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set
monitoring time. While the timer stage is elapsing, telegrams are generated for the
admissible signal changes. The number of admissible signal changes can be set. After
the first "inadmissible" signal change, no further telegrams are generated and the timer
stage is re-triggered. While the timer stage is elapsing, it is re-triggered by each new
signal change. Once the timer stage has elapsed, each signal change triggers a
telegram.
3-44 Signal flow for debouncing and chatter suppression, example:

Set debouncing time: 20 ms
Set chatter monitoring time: 200 ms
Number of admissible signal changes: 4
Key: s: start, e: end
3-66 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.2 Bay Type Selection
The P139 is designed to control up to six switchgear units. The Bay Panel type defines
the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
The P139 offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type
be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the
P139 to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P139. By
applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can define
new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at M AIN :
Customized bay type .
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P139 can automatically configure the binary
inputs and outputs with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. The
assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the List of
Bay Types in the Appendix.
3-45 Bay type selection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-67

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.3 Conditioning the Measured Variables
The secondary phase currents of the system transformers are fed to the P139. There is
the option of connecting up to five voltage transformers. The measured variables are
electrically isolated converted to normalized electronics levels. Air-gap transformers
are used in the phase current path to suppress low frequency (DC decays and offsets)
signal components. The analog quantities are digitized and are thus available for further
processing.
Settings that do not refer to nominal quantities are converted by the P139 to nominal
quantities. The user must therefore set the secondary nominal currents and voltages of
the system transformers.
The connection direction of the measuring circuits on the P139 must also be set.
Figure 3-46 shows the standard connection. By this setting the phase of the digitized
currents is rotated by 180.
If the P139 is to operate with the GFDSS function (ground fault direction determination
using steady-state values), current transformer T4 needs to be connected to a current
transformer in Holmgreen connection (dashed lines in Figure 3-46 ) or to a core balance
current transformer.
When the P139 is equipped with the NCIT module (non conventional instrument
transformer) the conventional CTs are exchanged by NCITs as shown in the following
figure ("Connecting the P139 measuring circuits"), and described in Chapter
2\"Conecting NCITs to the NCIT Module" and in Annex D\"Connecting NCITs".
When the P139 is equipped with the temperature p/c board (RTD module) further
resistance thermometers, in addition to the PT 100 resistance thermometer connected to
the analog module (I/O), can be connected to the RTD module as described in Chapter
3\"Measuring Data Input"\"Connecting resistance thermometers to the RTD module" and
in Annex D\"Temperature p/c board for PT 100, Ni 100 or Ni 120 (RTD module)".
3-68 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-46 Connecting the P139 measuring circuits (when the P139 is equipped with the NCIT module or the RTD module; see references in previous
text)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-69

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.4 Operating Data Measurement
The P139 has an operating data measurement function for the display of currents and
voltages measured as well as quantities derived from these measured values. For the
display of measured values, set lower thresholds need to be exceeded, to avoid
fluctuating small values from noise. If these lower thresholds are not exceeded, the
value "not measured" is displayed. The following measured variables are displayed:
! Phase currents for all three phases

! Maximum phase current
! Minimum phase current
! Delayed and stored maximum phase current maximum demand values
! Residual current measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer
! Phase-to-ground voltages
! Sum of the three phase-to-ground voltages
! Phase-to-phase voltages
! Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
! Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
! Neutral-point displacement voltage measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer
! Reference voltage measured by the P139 at the T 15 transformer
! Active, reactive and apparent power
! Active power factor
! Load angle in all three phases
! Angle between measured residual current and measured neutral-point displacement
voltage
! Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
! Frequency
! Active and reactive energy output and input
The measured data are updated at 1 s intervals. Updating is interrupted when a general
starting signal is issued or if the self-monitoring function detects a hardware fault.
3-70 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured current values

The measured current values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities. To allow display in primary
values, the primary nominal current of the system current transformer should be set in
the P139.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-71

3 Operation
(continued)
3-47 Measured operating data - phase current
3-72 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-48 Measured operating data - residual current
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-73

3 Operation
(continued)
Delayed maximum phase

current display
The P139 offers the option of a delayed display of the maximum value of the three phase
currents (thermal ammeter function). The delayed maximum phase current display is an
exponential function of the maximum phase current IP,max (see upper curve in Figure 3-
49). The time after which the delayed maximum phase current display will have reached
95 % of maximum phase current IP,max is set at M A I N : S e t t l . t . I P , m a x , d e l .
Stored maximum phase

current display
The stored maximum phase current follows the delayed maximum phase current. If the
value of the delayed maximum phase current is declining, then the highest value of the
delayed maximum phase current remains stored. The display remains constant until the
actual delayed maximum phase current exceeds the value of the stored maximum phase
current (see middle curve in Figure 3-49). The stored maximum phase current to the
actual value of the delayed maximum phase current is set at
M A I N : R e s e t I P , m a x , s t o r e d (see lower curve in Figure 3-49).
3-74 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-49 Operation of delayed and stored maximum phase current display
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-75

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured voltage values

The measured voltage values are displayed both as per-unit quantities referred to the
nominal quantities of the P139 and as primary quantities. To allow a display in primary
values, the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer needs to be set in the
P139.
3-50 Determining the minimum and maximum phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
3-76 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-51 Measured operating data - phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-77

3 Operation
(continued)
3-52 Measured operating data - neutral-point displacement voltage
3-53 Measured operating data reference voltage
3-78 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values for

power, active power factor,
and angle
The load angle and the angle between the measured values for the residual current and
the neutral-point displacement voltage are only determined when associated currents
and voltages exceed minimum thresholds.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-79

3 Operation
(continued)
MAIN: General
starting int.
MAIN: Hardware
fault
A > 0,025 Inom
B > 0,025 Inom
C > 0,025 Inom
VA-G > 1,5 V
VB-G > 1,5 V
VC-G > 1,5 V
N > 0,02 INnom
V G > 1,5 V
MAIN: Load angle

phi A
MAIN: Load angle

phi B
MAIN: Load angle

phi C
MAIN: Angle
phi N
MAIN: Appar.
power S p.u.
MAIN: Active
power P p.u.
MAIN: Reac.
power Q p.u.
MAIN: Active
MAIN: Inom C.T. power factor
prim.
MAIN: Vnom V.T.

prim.
MAIN: Appar.
power S prim.
MAIN: Active
power P prim.
MAIN: Reac.
power Q prim.
19Z5240A_EN
3-54 Measured operating data - power, active power factor, and angle
3-80 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase relation IN
The P139 checks if the phase relations of calculated residual current and measured
residual current agree. If the phase displacement between the two currents is 45,
then the indication Equal phase is displayed.
3-55 Phase relation between calculated and measured residual current
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-81

3 Operation
(continued)
Frequency
The P139 determines the frequency from the voltage VA-B. This voltage needs to exceed
a minimum threshold of 0.65 Vnom in order for frequency to be determined.
3-56 Frequency measurement
3-82 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Active and reactive energy

output and input
The P139 determines the active and reactive energy output and input based on the
primary active or reactive power.
There are two procedures available to determine active and reactive energy. If
procedure 1 is selected, active and reactive energy are determined every 2 s
(approximately) as in software versions 601. If procedure 2 is selected, active and
reactive energy are determined every 100 ms (approximately) thus achieving higher
accuracy. Whenever the maximum value of 655.35 MWh or 655.35 Mvar h is exceeded,
a counter is incremented and the determination of the energy output is restarted. The
value that exceeded the range is transferred to the new cycle.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-83

3 Operation
(continued)
The total energy is calculated as follows:
Total energy = number of overflows 655.35 + current count
3-57 Determining the active and reactive energy output and input
3-84 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of the procedure

to determine energy output
Procedure Characteristics Applications
1 ! Determination of the active and reactive energy ! Constant load and slow load variations (no
every 2 s (approximately) significant load variations within 1 second).
! Reduced system loading ! Phase angles below 70 (cos > 0.3 ).
2 ! Determination of the active and reactive energy ! Fast load variations

every 100 ms (approximately).
! Phase angles below 70 (cos > 0.3 ).
! Increased system loading
The maximum phase-angle error of the P139 of 1 leads to greater errors in

measurement when the phase angle increases, as shown in the following diagram.
Fault
5%
2%
45 70 Phase angle S8Z0401A
3-58 Error of measurement in the determination of energy output resulting from the phase angle error of the P139
Error of measurement: Approx. 2 % of the measured value for cos = 0.7

Approx. 5 % of the measured value for cos = 0.3
For phase angles in excess of 70 or when the error of measurement resulting from the
maximum phase-angle error is not acceptable, external counters should be used to
determine the energy output.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-85

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.5 Configuring and Enabling the Device Functions
The device can be adapted to the requirements of a specific high-voltage system by

configuring the available function range. By including the desired device functions in the
configuration and cancelling all other, the user creates an individually configured device
appropriate to the specific application. Parameters, signals and measured values of
cancelled device functions are not displayed on the local control panel. Functions of
general applicability such as operating data recording (OP_RC) or main functions
(MAIN) cannot be cancelled.
Cancelling a device
function
The following conditions must be met before a device function can be cancelled or
removed:
! The device function must be disabled.

! None of the functions of the device function to be cancelled can be assigned to a
binary input.
! None of the signals of the device function can be assigned to a binary output or an
LED indicator.
! No functions of the device function being cancelled can be selected in a list setting.
If the above conditions are met, proceed through the 'Configuration' branch of the menu
tree to access the setting relevant for the device function to be cancelled. If, for
example, the "LIMIT" function group is to be cancelled, the setting L I M I T : F u n c t i o n
g r o u p L I M I T is accessed and its value is set to "Without". To re-include the "LIMIT"
function in the device configuration, the same setting is accessed and its value is
changed to "With".
The device function to which a setting, a signal, or a measured value belongs is defined
by the function group designation (example: "LIMIT"). In the following description of the
device functions, it is presumed that the corresponding device function is included in the
configuration.
3-86 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling a
device function
Besides cancelling device functions from the configuration, it is also possible to disable
protection via a function parameter or binary signal inputs. Protection can only be
disabled or enabled through binary signal inputs if the M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t .
E X T and M A I N : E n a b l e p r o t e c t . E X T functions are both configured. When
neither or only one of the two functions is configured, the condition is interpreted as
"Protection externally enabled". If the triggering signals of the binary signal inputs are
implausible i.e. both are at logic level = "1" then the last plausible state remains
stored in memory.
Note: If the protection is disabled via a binary signal input that is configured for
M A I N : D i s a b l e P r o t e c t . E X T , the signal
M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y is not issued.
3-59 Enabling or disabling a device function
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-87

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling the

residual current systems of
the DTOC/IDMT protection
The function can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel or
through binary signal inputs.
Enabling of the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection depends on the
setting at M A I N : S y s t . I N e n a b l e d U S E R . If this enabling function has been
activated, it can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel or through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel and the binary
signal inputs have equal status in this regard. If only the M AIN : System IN en a b l e
E X T function is assigned to a binary signal input, then the residual current systems of
the DTOC/IDMT protection will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and
disabled by a negative edge. If only the M AIN : Sys te m IN d i s a b l e E X T function
has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-88 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-60 Enabling or disabling the residual current systems of the DTOC/IDMT protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-89

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.6 Activation of Dynamic Parameters
For several of the protection functions, it is possible for the duration of the set hold time
to switch over to other settings - the "dynamic parameters" via an appropriately
configured binary signal input. If the hold time is set to 0 s, switching is effective as long
as the binary signal input is being triggered.
3-61 Activation of dynamic parameters
3-90 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.7 Inrush Stabilization (Harmonic Restraint)
The inrush stabilization function detects high inrush current flows that occur when
transformers or machines are switched on, and, if detected, it will then block the
following functions:
! The phase current starting and negative-sequence current starting of definite-time

overcurrent protection (DTOC)
! The phase current starting and negative-sequence current starting of inverse-time
overcurrent protection (IDMT)
The inrush stabilization function identifies an inrush current by evaluating the ratio of the
second harmonic current components to the fundamental. If this ratio exceeds the set
threshold, then the inrush stabilization function operates. Another settable current
trigger blocks inrush stabilization if the current exceeds this trigger. The setting of the
operating mode determines whether inrush stabilization will operate phase-selectively or
across all phases.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-91

3 Operation
(continued)
3-62 Inrush stabilization (harmonic restraint)
3-92 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.8 Function Blocks
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be
prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external
signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output

signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1
and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts
a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M AIN : F c t. b l o c k . X a c ti ve is
issued.
3-63 Function blocks
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-93

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.9 Multiple Blocking
Two multiple blocking conditions can be defined via 'm out of n' parameters. The items
available for selection are found in the Address List. The functions defined by selection
may be blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-64 Multiple blocking
3-94 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.10 Blocked/Faulty
If the protective functions are blocked, the condition is signaled by continuous

illumination of the amber LED indicator H 2 on the local control panel and by a signal
from an output relay configured M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y . In addition functions can
be selected that will issue the M A I N : B l o c k e d / F a u l t y signal by setting a m out of
n parameter.
3-65 "Blocked/Faulty" signal
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-95

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.11 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Closed Signal
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents
the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the Closed position
signal is made by the setting M AIN : Si g . a s g . C B c l o s e d . As a result, the CB
status signal needs to be assigned to one binary signal input only if this coupling is
implemented.
3-66 Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal
3-96 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.12 Close Command
The circuit breaker can be closed by the auto-reclosing control function (ARC), by the
automatic synchronism check function (ASC), from the integrated local control panel, or
via an appropriately configured binary signal input on the P139. The close command
from the local control panel or binary signal input is only executed if there is no trip
command present and no trip has been issued by a protection device operating in
parallel. Moreover, the close command is not executed if there is a CB closed position
signal. The duration of the close command can be set.
If the ARC function issues a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then the
close command requires a close enable by the ASC function.
Close command counter.

The number of close commands are counted. The close command counter can be reset
either individually or together with the trip command counters. If the ARC function issues
a close request while the ASC function is enabled, then the close command requires a
close enable by the ASC function.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-97

3 Operation
(continued)
3-67 Close command
3-98 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.13 Multiple Signaling
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR
operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is
defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding
multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored
signal is reset by the following actions:
! General reset
! Latching reset
! LED indicators reset
! A command received through the communication interface.
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow
the updated signal.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-99

3 Operation
(continued)
3-68 Multiple signaling
3-100 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.14 Ground Fault Signaling
If a ground fault has been detected by either the GFDSS function (ground fault direction
determination by steady-state values) or the TGFD function (transient ground fault
direction determination), the P139 analyzes the phase-to-ground voltages and identifies
the phase on which the ground fault has occurred.
During a ground fault, the P139 determines the lowest phase-to-ground voltage and
checks if the two other phase-to-ground voltages exceed the threshold of 0.2 Vnom. In
addition, the two higher phase-to-ground voltages must exceed the lowest phase-to-
ground voltage by a factor of 1.5. If these conditions are met, a ground fault signal is
issued for the phase with the lowest phase-to-ground voltage.
3-69 Phase-selective ground fault signaling
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-101

3 Operation
(continued)
Ground fault signals generated either by ground fault direction determination using
steady-state values (GFDSS) or transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD)
are grouped together to form multiple signaling.
3-70 Multiple ground fault signals
3-102 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.15 Starting Signals and Tripping Logic
Phase-selective starting
signals
Common phase-selective starting signals are formed from the internal phase-selective
starting signals of definite-time overcurrent protection and of inverse-time overcurrent
protection.
An adjustable timer stage is started by the phase-selective starting signals, the residual
current starting signal and the negative-sequence starting signal. While this timer stage
is running, the starting signals are blocked. The starting signals are also blocked directly
by the motor protection if the startup of a motor has been detected. Blocking is
suspended if a trip signal is present.
The operate delays for the residual current and negative-sequence current stages of the
DTOC and IDMT protection functions can be blocked for a single-pole or multi-pole
starting (depending on the setting).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-103

3 Operation
(continued)
3-71 Phase-selective starting signals
3-104 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
General starting
The general starting signal is formed from the starting signals of the DTOC and IDMT
protection functions. A setting governs whether the residual current stages and the
negative-sequence current stage will be involved in forming the general starting signal.
If the operate signal from one of the residual current stages and the negative-sequence
current stage does not cause a general starting (due to the setting) then the associated
operate delays will be blocked. As a result, a trip command cannot be issued by residual
current and negative-sequence current stages.
3-72 General starting
Counter for general

starting signals.
The number of general starts is counted.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-105

3 Operation
(continued)
Multiple signaling by the

DTOC and IDMT
protection functions
The trip signals generated by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions are grouped
together to form multiple signaling.
3-73 Multiple signaling by the DTOC and IDMT protection functions
3-106 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Trip command
The P139 provides two trip commands. The functions required to issue a trip can be
selected by setting a 'm out of n' parameter independently for each of the two trip
commands. The minimum trip command closure time may be set. The trip signals are
present only as long as the conditions for the signal are met.
Latching of the trip

commands
Each of the trip commands can be individually set to operate in the latching mode. If the
latching mode is selected, the trip command persists until it is reset from the local control
panel or via an appropriately configured binary input signal. Latching is ineffective if a
trip command has been issued by the ARC function.
Blocking of the trip

commands
The trip commands may be blocked from the integrated local control panel or through an
appropriately configured binary signal input. This blocking is then effective for both trip
commands. The trip signals are not affected by this blocking. If the trip commands are
both blocked, it is indicated by the continuously illuminated amber LED indicator H 2 on
the local control panel and by a signal from an output relay configured to
"Blocked/Faulty".
Trip command counter

The number of trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or as a group.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-107

3 Operation
(continued)
3-74 Forming the trip commands
3-108 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Manual trip command

A manual trip command may be issued via the local control panel or a binary signal input
configured accordingly, but it is not executed unless the manual trip is included in the
selection of possible functions to cause a trip.
3-75 Manual trip command
Trip command counter

The number of trip commands are counted. The counters can be reset either individually
or as a group.
3-76 Counter of trip commands
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-109

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.16 CB Trip Signal
The signal M AIN : C B tr i p i n te r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met

simultaneously:
! The binary signal input configured for tripping is set to a logic value of '1' or the
selected trip command from the P139 is present.
! At the binary signal input configured as CB trip a logic value of '1' is present.
The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two
binary signal inputs need to be configured as CB trip enable ext. and as CB trip ext..
3-110 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-77 CB trip signal
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-111

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.17 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the
P139, the P139 first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch
command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the
interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic
for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each
control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock
equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station
interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units
within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each
switching unit and each control direction (see Control and Monitoring of Switchgear
Units).
If Local has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be
cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
3-112 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-78 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-113

3 Operation
(continued)
3-79 Rejection of the switching commands
3-114 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.18 Monitoring the Switchgear Unit Motor Drives
For bays with direct motor drive control of load disconnecting switches, isolating links or
grounding switches, a monitoring function is provided to protect motors from
overheating.
The number of switching operations within a set monitoring period is counted. If the
number of switching operations within the monitoring period exceeds the set limit, the
signal M AIN : M o n . m o t. d r i ve s tr . is issued. For the duration of the set cooling
time, no control commands to motor-driven switchgear units will be executed. Once the
set cooling time has elapsed, the control commands are enabled again.
3-80 Monitoring the switchgear unit motor drives
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-115

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.19 Communication Error
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal
"Communication error" will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication
module A is not fitted.
3-81 Communication error
3-116 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.20 Time Tagging and Clock Synchronization
The data stored in the operating data memory, the monitoring signal memory and the
event memories are date- and time-tagged. For correct tagging, the date and time need
to be set in the P139.
The time of different devices may be synchronized by a pulse given to an appropriately

configured binary signal input. The P139 evaluates the rising edge. This will set the
clock to the nearest full minute, rounding either up or down. If several start/end signals
occur (bouncing of a relay contact), only the last edge is evaluated.
3-82 Date and time setting and clock synchronization
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-117

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.21 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways.
The following resetting actions are possible:
! Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the
LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event
data on the local control panel LCD whenever a new event occurs.
! Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the local control
panel LCD by pressing the "Clear" key ! located on the local control panel.
! Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) from the
local control panel or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs
! General reset
In the first two cases listed above only the displays on the local control panel LCD are
cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and
substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
3-83 General reset, LED reset and measured event data reset from the local control panel
3-118 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.22 Assigning Communications Interfaces to Physical Communications

Channels
Depending on the design version of the communications module A there are up to two
communications channels available (see "Technical Data"). These physical
communications channels may be assigned to communications interfaces COMM1 and
COMM2.
If communications interface COMM1 is assigned to communications channel 2, then the

settings of communications interface COMM2 are automatically assigned to
communications channel 1. Communications channel 2 can only be used to transmit
data to and from the P139 if its PC interface has been de-activated. As soon as the PC
interface is used to transmit data, communications channel 2 becomes "dead".
3-84 Assigning communications interfaces to physical communications channels
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-119

3 Operation
(continued)
3.11.23 Test Mode
If tests are run on the P139, the user is advised to activate the test mode so that all
incoming signals via the serial interfaces will be identified accordingly.
3-85 Setting the test mode
3-120 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.12 Parameter Subset Selection (Function Group PSS)
The P139 allows the user to pre-set four independent parameter subsets. The user can
switch between parameter subsets during operation without interrupting the protection
function.
Selecting the parameter

subset
The control path that will determine the active parameter subset (function parameter or
binary signal input) can be selected via the function parameter P S S : C o n t r o l v i a
U S E R or the external signal P S S : C o n t r o l v i a u s e r E X T . Depending on the
selection made, the parameter subset will be selected either in accordance with the pre-
set function parameter P S S : P a r a m . s u b s . s e l . U S E R or as a function of
external signals. The parameter subset that is active at any given time can be
determined by scanning the logic state signals P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m . s u b s e t or
PSS: PSx active.
Selecting the parameter

subset via binary inputs
If the binary signal inputs are to be used for parameter subset selection, then the P139
first checks to determine whether at least two binary inputs are configured for parameter
subset selection. If this is not the case, then the parameter subset selected via the
function parameter will be active. The P139 also checks to determine whether the
signals present at the binary signal inputs allow an unambiguous parameter subset
selection. This is true only when just one binary signal input is set to a logic value of 1.
If more than one signal input is set to a logic value of 1, then the parameter subset
previously selected remains active. Should a dead interval occur while switching
between parameter subsets (this is the case if all binary signal inputs have a logic value
of 0), then the stored energy time is started. While this timer stage is running, the
previously selected parameter subset remains active. As soon as a signal input has a
logic value of 1, the associated parameter subset becomes active. If, after the stored
energy time has elapsed, there is still no signal input with a logic value of 1, the
parameter subset selected via a function parameter becomes active.
If, after the supply voltage is turned on, no logic value of 1 is present at any of the
binary signal inputs selected for the parameter subset selection, then the parameter
subset selected via a function parameter will become active once the stored energy time
has elapsed. The previous parameter subset remains active while the stored energy
timer stage is running.
Parameter subset selection may also occur during a starting condition. When subset
selection is handled via binary signal inputs, a maximum inherent delay of approximately
100 ms must be taken into account.
Settings for which only one address is given in the following sections are equally
effective for all four parameter subsets.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-121

3 Operation
(continued)
3-86 Activating the parameter subsets
3-122 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.13 Self-Monitoring (Function Group SFMON)
Comprehensive monitoring routines in the P139 ensure that internal faults are detected
and do not lead to malfunctions.
The selection of the warning function assignment includes self-monitoring signals from
communications monitoring, measuring circuit monitoring (V, Vref, I), open circuit
monitoring (20mA input, temperature sensors) as well as logic outputs 30 to 32 and 30(t)
to 32(t).
Tests during startup

After the supply voltage has been turned on, various tests are carried out to verify full
operability of the P139. If the P139 detects a fault in one of the tests, then startup is
terminated. The display shows which test was running when termination occurred. No
control actions can be carried out. A new attempt to start up the P139 can only be
initiated by turning the supply voltage off and then on again.
Cyclic tests
After startup has been successfully completed, cyclic self-monitoring tests will be run
during operation. In the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will
be issued and stored in a non-volatile memory the monitoring signal memory along
with the assigned date and time (see also Monitoring Signal Recording).
The self-monitoring function monitors the built-in battery for any drop below the minimum
acceptable voltage level. If the associated monitoring signal is displayed, then the
battery should be replaced within a month, since otherwise there is the danger of data
loss if the supply voltage should fail. Chapter 11 gives further instructions on battery
replacement.
Signaling
The monitoring signals are also signaled via the output relay that is configured for
SF MON : Wa rn ing . The output relay operates as long as an internal fault is detected.
3-87 Monitoring signals
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-123

3 Operation
(continued)
Device response
The response of the P139 is a function of the type of monitoring signal. The following
responses are possible:
! Signaling Only
If there is no malfunction associated with the monitoring signal, then only a signal is
issued, and there are no further consequences. This situation exists, for example,
when internal data acquisition memories overflow.
! Selective Blocking
If a fault is diagnosed solely in an area that does not affect the protective functions,
then only the affected area is blocked. This would apply, for example, to the
detection of a fault on the communication module or in the area of the PC interface.
! Warm Restart
If the self-monitoring function detects a fault that might be eliminated by a system
restart such as a fault in the hardware , then a procedure called a warm restart is
automatically initiated. During this procedure, as with any startup, the computer
system is reset to a defined state. A warm restart is characterized by the fact that no
stored data and, in particular, no setting parameters are affected by the procedure. A
warm restart can also be triggered manually by a control action. During a warm
restart sequence, both the protective functions and communication through serial
interfaces will be blocked. If the same fault is detected after a warm restart has been
triggered by the self-monitoring system, then the protective functions remain blocked,
but communication through the serial interfaces will usually be possible again.
! Cold Restart
If a corrupted parameter subset is diagnosed during the checksum test, which is part
of the self-monitoring procedure, then a cold restart is carried out. This is necessary
because the unit cannot identify which parameter in the subset is corrupt. A cold
restart causes all internal memories to be reset to a defined state. This means that all
device settings are also erased after a cold restart. The settings that then apply are
the underlined values given in the column headed Range of Values in the Address
List (see Appendix). In order for a safe initial state to be established, the default
values have been selected so that the protective functions are blocked. Both the
monitoring signal that triggered the cold restart and the signal indicating parameter
loss are entered in the monitoring signal memory.
3-124 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
3.14 Operating Data Recording (Function Group OP_RC)
For the continuous recording of processes in system operation as well as of events, a

non-volatile ring memory is provided. The operationally relevant signals, each fully
tagged with date and time at signal start and signal end, are entered in chronological
order. The signals relevant for operation include control actions such as function
disabling and enabling and triggers for testing and resetting. The onset and end of
events in the system that represent a deviation from normal operation such as overloads,
ground faults, or short-circuits are also recorded. The operating data memory can be
cleared.
Counter for signals

relevant to system
operation
The signals stored in the operating data memory are counted.
3-88 Operating data recording and counter for signals relevant to system operation
3-125 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(Continued))
3.15 Monitoring Signal Recording (Function Group MT_RC)
The monitoring signals generated by the self-monitoring function are recorded in the
monitoring signal memory. A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal
memory is given in the address list (see Appendix). The memory depth allows for a
maximum of 30 entries. If more than 29 monitoring signals occur without interim memory
clearance, the SFMON: O v e r f l o w M T _ R C signal is entered as the last entry.
Monitoring signals prompted by a hardware fault in the unit are always entered in the
monitoring signal memory. Monitoring signals prompted by a peripheral fault can be
entered into the monitoring signal memory, if desired. The user can select this option by
setting an 'm out of n' parameter (see Self-Monitoring).
If at least one entry is stored in the monitoring signal memory, this fact is signaled by the
red LED indicator H 3 on the local control panel. Each new entry is indicated by a
flashing light.
The monitoring signal memory can only be cleared manually by a control action. Entries
in the monitoring signal memory are not even cleared automatically if the corresponding
test in a new test cycle has a negative result. The contents of the monitoring signal
memory can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or communication
interface. The time and date information assigned to the individual entries can be read
out through the PC or communication interface or from the local control panel.
Monitoring signal counter

The number of entries stored in the monitoring signal memory is displayed on the
monitoring signal counter (MT_RC: N o . m o n i t . s i g n a l s ).
3-89 Monitoring signal recording and the monitoring signal counter
126 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.16 Overload Data Acquisition (Function Group OL_DA)
Overload duration
In the event of an overload, the P139 determines the overload duration. The overload
duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the OL_RC : R ecor d. i n
p rogr ess signal.
3-90 Overload duration
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-127

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of measured
overload data by the motor
protection function
During motor startup, the measured data for the startup time, the maximum startup
current and the startup heating are determined and stored at the end of the startup
process.
MP Startup OL_DA: Time

taken f.startup
OL_DA: Start-up
current
MP IP
r.m.s./Iref
OL_DA: Heat.
dur. start-up
19Z5280A_EN
3-91 Measured overload data of the motor protection function
3-128 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of the
measured overload data of
The measured overload data are derived from the measured operating data of the
thermal overload protection function. They are stored at the end of the overload event.
3-92 Measured overload data of thermal overload protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-129

3 Operation
(continued)
3.17 Overload Recording (Function Group OL_RC)
Start of overload recording

An overload exists and therefore overload recording begins if a starting signal is issued
by either the motor protection function (M P : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > ) or the thermal
overload protection function (T H E R M : S t a r t i n g k * I r e f > ) .
Counting overload events

Overload events are counted and identified by sequential number.
3-93 Counting overload events
3-130 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each overload event by the internal clock is stored. An
overload events individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal
clock. The date and time assigned to an overload event when the event begins can be
read out from the overload memory on the local control panel or through the PC and
communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the overload)
that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the overload memory or through the
PC or one of the communication interfaces.
Overload logging
Protection signals during an overload event are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific event. A total of eight overload events, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile overload
memories. After eight overload events have been logged, the oldest overload log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single overload event, then OL_RC : O ver l. m em .
o ver flow will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured overload data are also entered in the overload
memory.
The overload logs can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
communication interfaces.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-131

3 Operation
(continued)
3-94 Overload memory
3-132 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18 Ground Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group GF_DA)
In the event of a ground fault, the P139 acquires the following measured ground fault
data:
! Duration of the ground fault recording

! When the GFDSS function (ground fault direction determination using steady-state
values) is enabled:
" Ground fault duration determined by steady-state power, steady-state current or
admittance evaluation
" Neutral-point displacement voltage VNG determined by steady-state power or
admittance evaluation
" Residual current IN
" Active component of residual current determined by steady-state power evaluation
" Reactive component of the residual current determined by steady-state power
evaluation
" Filtered residual current determined by steady-state current evaluation
" Admittance, conductance and susceptance if the admittance evaluation mode is
enabled
Resetting the measured

ground fault data
After the reset key C on the local control panel is pressed, the ground fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
Duration of the ground fault

recording
The ground fault duration is defined as the time between the start and end of the
OL_ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-95 Duration of the ground fault recording
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-133

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.1 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Power Evaluation
Ground fault duration

Ground fault duration is defined as the time between operation and dropout of the trigger
G F D SS: VN G > . However, there is only a time output after the end of a ground fault if
the trigger G F D SS: VN G > has operated at least for the set time GFDSS: tVNG>.
After GFDSS: tVNG> has elapsed, the display of the ground fault duration of the last
ground fault is automatically cleared.
3-96 Measurement and storage of ground fault duration, steady-state power evaluation
3-134 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
The residual current that is present at the time the timer stage GFDSS: tVNG> elapses is
stored in memory. In addition, the active or reactive component of the residual current at
the time of the direction decision output is also stored. All measured data are output as
per-unit quantities referred to the nominal current Inom of the device.
Neutral displacement
voltage
The neutral displacement voltage that is present at the time the timer stage
GFDSS: tVNG> elapses is stored in memory.
3-97 Residual current and neutral-displacement voltage for steady-state power evaluation
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-135

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.2 Measured Ground Fault Data from Steady-State Current Evaluation

G F D SS: IN > . However, there is only a time output after the end of a ground fault if the
trigger G F D SS: IN > has operated at least for the duration of the set operate delay
(G F D S S : O p e r a t e d e l a y I N ). After the operate delay has elapsed, the display of
the ground fault duration of the last ground fault is automatically cleared.
GFDSS: IN> GF_DA: GF

triggered duration pow. meas.
GFDSS: Op. elay

IN elapsed
MAIN: General
reset
execute
MAIN: Reset LED
19Z5208_EN
3-98 Measurement and storage of ground fault duration, steady-state current evaluation
3-136 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current
Both the unfiltered and the filtered residual current at the time when the operate delay
G F D SS: O p e r a te d e l a y IN elapses are stored.
3-99 Filtered residual current determined by steady-state current evaluation
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-137

3 Operation
(continued)
3.18.3 Measured Ground Fault Data from Admittance Evaluation

G F D SS: VN G > . However, there is only a time output after the end of a ground fault if
the trigger G F D SS: VN G > has operated at least for the set time G F D SS: tVN G > .
After GFDSS: tVNG> has elapsed, the display of the ground fault duration of the last
ground fault is automatically cleared.
3-100 Measurement and storage of ground fault duration, admittance evaluation mode
3-138 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of admittance,
conductance and
susceptance
Conductance and susceptance are stored at the time when the direction decision is
issued. The acquisition of the admittance data value is carried out at the time when
timer stage GFDSS: Operate delay Y(N)> elapses.
Residual current
The residual current that is present at the time the timer stage GFDSS: tVNG> elapses is
stored in memory. The measured data value is output as per-unit quantity referred to the
nominal current Inom of the device.
Neutral displacement
voltage
The neutral displacement voltage that is present at the time the timer stage
GFDSS: tVNG> elapses is stored in memory.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-139

3 Operation
(continued)
3-101 Measured ground fault data for the admittance evaluation mode
3-140 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.19 Ground Fault Recording (Function Group GF_RC)
Start of ground fault

recording
A fault exists, and therefore fault recording begins, if at least one of the following
conditions is met:
! A ground fault has been detected by the GFDSS function (ground fault direction
determination using steady-state values).
! A ground fault has been detected by transient ground fault direction determination.
Ground fault counting
The ground faults are counted and identified by sequential number.
3-102 Ground fault counting
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-141

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each ground fault by the internal clock is stored. A ground
faults individual start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The
date and time assigned to a ground fault event when the event begins can be read out
from the ground fault memory on the local control panel or through the PC and
communication interfaces. The time information (relative to the onset of the ground fault
event) that is assigned to the signals can be retrieved from the ground fault memory or
through the PC or communication interfaces.
Ground fault logging

Protection signals issued during a ground fault are logged in chronological order with
reference to the specific ground fault. A total of eight ground fault logs, each involving a
maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored in the non-volatile ground fault
memories. After eight ground faults have been logged, the oldest ground fault log will be
overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more than 199 start or
end signals have occurred during a single ground fault, then GF_RC : G F m emo r y
o ver flow will be entered as the last signal.
In addition to the signals, the measured ground fault data are also entered in the ground
fault memory.
The ground fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC
or communication interfaces.
3-142 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
GF_RC: Record.
in progress
GF_RC: GF memory
Signal overflow
Signal
Signal
Signal
GF_RC: Ground flt.

record. n
Measured value 1
Measured value 2
Measured value 3
Measured value n
MAIN: Time tag
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
MAIN: General
reset GF_RC: Reset
recording
execute GF_RC: Ground flt.record. n
don't execute
execute
19Z5241A_EN
3-103 Ground fault memory
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-143

3 Operation
(continued)
3.20 Fault Data Acquisition (Function Group FT_DA)
When there is a fault in the system, the P139 collects the following measured fault data:
! Running time
! Fault duration
! Fault current (short-circuit current)
! Fault voltage (short-circuit voltage)
! Short-Circuit Impedance
! Fault reactance (short-circuit reactance) in percent of line reactance and in
! Fault angle
! Fault distance
! Ground fault current
! Ground fault angle
! Fault location in %
! Fault location in km
3-144 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Running time and fault

duration
The running time is defined as the time between the start and end of the general starting
signal that is generated within the P139, and the fault duration is defined as the time
between the start and end of the F T _ R C : R e c o r d . i n p r o g r e s s signal.
3-104 Running time and fault duration
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-145

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data acquisition time

The F T _ D A : S t a r t d a t a a c q u . setting governs the point during a fault at which
the measured fault data are acquired. The following settings are possible:
! End of fault
Acquisition at the end of the fault.
! Trigg./Trip/GS end
Acquisition at one of the following points:
" Triggering of an appropriately configured binary signal input during a general
starting state
" Issue of a general trip signal
" End of a general starting state
Output of fault location occurs depending on the setting either when there is a
general starting signal or when there is both a general starting signal and a simultaneous
general trip signal.
3-105 Enabling of measured fault data acquisition and fault location output
3-146 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of measured
fault data
The P139 selects a measuring loop based on the phase-selective starting decision. The
short-circuit impedance (fault impedance) and fault direction are determined from this
measuring loops voltage and current. In the case of single-pole starting with ground
fault detection, the currents corrected by the ground factor are selected as measured
variables. In the case of three-phase starting, either grounded or ungrounded, the
minimum voltage of the phase-to-phase voltages and the associated phase-to-phase
current are selected as measured variables.
Fault Detection Variables Selected for Measurement

A IA-kG / VA-G
B IB-kG / VB-G
C IC-kG / VC-G
A-G IA-kG / VA-G
B-G IB-kG / VB-G
C-G IC-kG / VC-G
A-B IA-B / VA-B
B-C IB-C / VB-C
C-A IC-A / VC-A
A-B-G IA-B / VA-B
B-C-G IB-C / VB-C
C-A-G IC-A / VC-A
A-B-C IP-P(min) / VP-P (min)
A-B-C-G IP-P(min) / VP-P (min)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-147

3 Operation
(continued)
3-106 Formation of currents corrected by ground factor
3-148 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-107 Selection of measured variables for fault data acquisition
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-149

3 Operation
(continued)
The fault must last for at least 60 ms so that the fault data can be determined.
The fault data are determined using the measured variables Imeas and Vmeas selected by
measured variable selection, if the fault is detected by fault data acquisition. One phase
current is selected as the fault current in accordance with the measuring loop selected.
In the case of multi-phase starting this is the current of the leading phase in the cycle.
The primary fault reactance is calculated from the per-unit fault reactance using the
nominal data for the set primary current and voltage transformers.
The ground fault data are only determined if a phase-to-ground loop has been selected
for measurement in conjunction with the fault data acquisition function. The vector sum
of the three phase currents is displayed as the ground fault current. The ground fault
angle is the phase displacement between ground fault current and selected measuring
voltage.
If there is an m.c.b. trip signal or the transformer module is not fitted with a voltage
transformer, then only fault current is determined, and the maximum phase current is
displayed.
Fault current and voltage are displayed as per-unit quantities referred to Inom and Vnom.
If the measured or calculated values are outside the acceptable measuring range, the
Overflow indication is displayed.
3-150 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-107a Acquisition of fault data (short-circuit data)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-151

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of fault location

In order for the fault location to be determined in percent of line length and in km, the
user must enter two settings in the P139: the value of the line reactance that
corresponds to 100% of the line section being monitored and the value of the
corresponding line length in km.
3-108 Acquisition of fault location
3-152 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Acquisition of load data

In addition to fault data and fault location, the following load data are determined when
the general starting signal drops out:
! Load impedance
! Load angle
! Residual current
The same measuring loop used to determine fault impedance is used to determine load
impedance and load angle. The load current and the voltage must exceed the
thresholds 0.1 Inom and 0.1 Vnom , respectively, in order for the load data to be
determined. If the thresholds are not reached or if the general starting signal does not
last as long as 60 ms, the display Not measured appears.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-153

3 Operation
(continued)
3-109 Acquisition of load data
3-154 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault data reset

After the reset key C on the local control panel is pressed, the fault data value is
displayed as Not measured. However, the values are not erased and can continue to
be read out through the PC and communication interfaces.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-155

3 Operation
(continued)
3.21 Fault Recording (Function Group FT_RC)
Start of fault recording

A fault exists, and therefore fault recording begins, if at least one of the following signals
is present:
! MAIN: General starting

! MAIN: Gen. Trip signal 1
! MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2
! FT_RC: Trigger
! FT_RC: I>
In addition, the user can set an 'm out of n' parameter in order to configure signals
whose appearance will trigger fault recording.
Fault counting
Faults are counted and identified by sequential number.
3-156 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-110 Start of fault recording and fault counter
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-157

3 Operation
(continued)
Time tagging
The date that is assigned to each fault by the internal clock is stored. A faults individual
start or end signals are likewise time-tagged by the internal clock. The date and time
assigned to a fault when the fault begins can be read out from the fault memory on the
local control panel or through the PC and communication interfaces. The time
information (relative to the onset of the fault) that is assigned to the signals can be
retrieved from the fault memory or through the PC or communication interfaces.
Fault recordings
Protection signals during a fault, including the signals during the settable pre-fault and
post-fault times, are logged in chronological order with reference to the specific fault. A
total of eight faults, each involving a maximum of 200 start or end signals, can be stored
in the non-volatile fault memories. After eight faults have been recorded, the oldest fault
recording will be overwritten, unless memories have been cleared in the interim. If more
than 199 start or end signals have occurred during a single fault, then F T _ R C : F a u l t
m e m . o ve r fl o w will be entered as the last signal. If the time and date are changed
during the pre-fault time, the signal F T _ R C : F a u l ty ti m e ta g is generated.
In addition to the fault signals, the measured fault data are also entered in the fault
memory.
The fault recordings can be read from the local control panel or through the PC or
3-158 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-111 Fault memory
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-159

3 Operation
(continued)
Fault value recording

The following analog signals are recorded:
! Phase currents
! Phase-to-ground voltages
! Residual current, measured by the P139 at the T 4 transformer
! Neutral-displacement voltage, measured by the P139 at the T 90 transformer
The signals are recorded before, during and after a fault. The times for recording before
and after the fault can be set. A maximum time period of 16.4 s is available for
recording. This period can be divided among a maximum of eight faults. The maximum
recording time per fault can be set. If a fault, including the set pre-fault and post-fault
times, lasts longer than the set maximum recording time, then recording will terminate
when the set maximum recording time is reached.
The pre-fault time is exactly adhered to if it is shorter than the set maximum recording
time. Otherwise; the pre-fault time is set to the maximum recording time minus a
sampling increment, and the post-fault time is set to zero.
If the maximum recording time of 16.4 s is exceeded, the analog values for the oldest
fault are overwritten, but not the binary values. If more than eight faults have occurred
since the last reset, then all data for the oldest fault are overwritten.
The analog data of the fault record can only be read out through the PC or
When the supply voltage is interrupted or after a warm restart, the values of all faults
remain stored.
3-160 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
FT_RC: Record.
in progress
FT_RC: Max.
recording time
FT_RC: Pre-fault
time
FT_RC: Post-fault
time
A Analog channel 1
B Analog channel 2
C Analog channel 3
VA-G Analog channel 4
VB-G Analog channel 5
VC-G Analog channel 6
G Analog channel 7
V -G Analog channel 8
V Analog channel 9
MAIN: General
reset
execute
FT_RC: Reset
recording
execute
19Z5242A_EN
3-112 Fault value recording
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-161

3 Operation
(continued)
3.22 Definite-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group DTOC)
A three-stage definite-time overcurrent protection function (DTOC protection) is available

in the P139. Three separate measuring systems are available for this purpose for:
! Phase currents system

! Negative-sequence current system
! Residual currents system
Either the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) or the auto-reclosing

control may intervene in the functional sequence of the DTOC function.
Enabling or disabling
DTOC protection
DTOC protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Enabling can
be carried out separately for each setting group.
3-113 Enabling or disabling DTOC protection
3-162 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages

The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to detect
when they exceed the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be
active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for the dynamic
parameters (see Activation of Dynamic Parameters) and the normal thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds in one
phase, timer stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed, a signal is
issued. The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal
inputs.
When the inrush stabilization function (see: Main Functions of the P139) is triggered,
the 1st stage of the DTOC function is blocked.
The trip signals from all phase current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control
function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages I> and I>> only) can be blocked by the
short-circuit direction determination function. Depending on the setting of the short-
circuit direction determination function, the trip signal of stages I> or I>> will be enabled.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-163

3 Operation
(continued)
3-114 Phase current stages
3-164 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-115 Trip signals from the DTOC phase current stages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-165

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence
current stages
The P139 calculates the negative-sequence current from the three phase current values
according to this formula. The result depends on the rotary field direction setting for
phase rotation.
For clockwise rotary field direction (ABC):

1
( 2
I neg = I A + a I B + a I C
3
)
For anti-clockwise rotary field direction (ACB):
1
( 2
I neg = I A + a I B + a I C
3
)
a = e j120
a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to

detect when it exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types
can be active. The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic
parameters" (see Activation of Dynamic Parameters) and the normal thresholds are
active when no hold time is running. If the current exceeds the set thresholds, timer
stages are started and after the time periods have elapsed, a trip signal is issued.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. In
addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-
pole starting (depending on the setting).
The trip signals from the negative-sequence current stages are only enabled if the
operating mode for the general starting has been set to "With starting IN, Ineg.
the 1st stage of the negative-sequence current function is blocked.
When the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) is active, trip signals from
the DTOC negative-sequence current stages have no directional dependence.
The trip signals from all negative-sequence current stages are blocked by the auto-
reclosing control function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
3-166 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Enabled
MAIN: Enable
protect.
MAIN: Rush restr.
trig.
MAIN: Rush restr.
selec. fct.
DTOC: tIneg>
DTOC: Block.
tIneg> EXT
MAIN: Block tim. DTOC: Ineg>
st. IN,neg
MAIN: Dynam. DTOC: tIneg>
param. active elapsed
DTOC: Ineg>
MAIN: Rotary
field
DTOC: Starting
A Ineg>
B neg DTOC: Trip signal
C tIneg>
ARC: Blocking
trip
DTOC: tIneg>>
DTOC: Block.
tIneg>> EXT DTOC: Ineg>>
DTOC: Ineg>> DTOC: tIneg>>

elapsed
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>
DTOC: Trip signal

tIneg>>
DTOC: tIneg>>>
DTOC: Block.
tIneg>>> EXT DTOC: Ineg>>>
DTOC: Ineg>>> DTOC: tIneg>>>

elapsed
DTOC: Starting
Ineg>>>
MAIN: Gen.
starting mode DTOC: Trip signal
tIneg>>>
with starting
IN,Ineg
DTOC: Ineg> DTOC: Ineg> DTOC: Ineg>> DTOC: Ineg>>
set
set
set
set
DTOC: Ineg>>> DTOC: Ineg>>> DTOC: tIneg> DTOC: tIneg>> DTOC: tIneg>>>
set
set
set
set
19Z5281A_EN
3-116 Negative-sequence current stages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-167

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: tIneg> DTOC: Trip signal

elapsed tIneg>
DTOC: tIneg>> DTOC: Trip signal

elapsed tIneg>>
DTOC: tIneg>>> DTOC: Trip signal

elapsed tIneg>>>
ARC: Blocking trip
MAIN: Gen.
starting mode
with Starting
IN,Ineg
19Z5282A_EN
3-117 Trip signal from the DTOC negative-sequence current stages
3-168 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC residual current
stages
DTOC residual current stages can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Residual current stages

The residual current is monitored by the P139 with three-stage functions to detect when
it exceeds the set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be active.
The dynamic thresholds are active for the set hold time for the "dynamic parameters"
(see Activation of Dynamic Parameters) and the normal thresholds are active when
no hold time is running. If the residual current exceeds the set thresholds, timer stages
are started and after the time periods have elapsed, a signal is issued.
The timer stages can be blocked by appropriately configured binary signal inputs. In
addition these timer stages can also be automatically blocked by single-pole or multi-
pole starting (depending on the setting).
The trip signals from the residual current stages are only enabled if the operating mode
for the general starting has been set to "With starting IN, Ineg.
The trip signals from all residual current stages are blocked by the auto-reclosing control
function (ARC) when this function is able to issue a trip command.
The trip signals from the DTOC function (stages IN> and IN>> only) can be blocked by
the short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD). Depending on the setting of
the short-circuit direction determination function, the trip signal of stages IN> or IN>> will
be enabled.
Selecting the measured

variable
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current: either
the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
directly measured at the fourth transformer (T 4).
3-118 Selecting the measured variable
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-169

3 Operation
(continued)
3-119 Residual current stages
3-170 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-120 Trip signal from the DTOC residual current stages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-171

3 Operation
(continued)
Hold-time logic for

intermittent ground faults
A hold-time logic for the treatment of intermittent ground faults is available in the P139.
! As the IN> starting in the residual current stage commences, the hold time is reset.
At the same time, the starting time is accumulated when IN> starting commences.
! As IN> starting ends, the timer stage D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is started
and the charging of the accumulation buffer is thereby lengthened by the set value of
the timer stage.
! The accumulation result is compared with the settable limit value
DTOC: tIN>, interm. PSx.
! If the limit value is reached and a general starting is present, then a trip results,
provided that it is permitted by the relevant MAIN settings:
" MAIN: Block tim.st. IN,neg
(Address 017 015)
" MAIN: Gen. starting mode
(Address 017 027)
" MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1
(Address 021 001)
" MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2
(Address 021 002)
! If the limit value is reached while the timer stage
D T O C : P u l s . p r o l . I N > , i n t P S x is running, then a trip will occur when the next
general starting phase commences.
! With each release of the trigger stage IN>, the set hold-time
D T O C : H o l d - t. tIN > ,i n tm PSx is restarted. When the hold time has elapsed or
after the hold-time logic has issued a trip
(D T O C : T r i p s i g . t I N > , i n t m .), accumulation is stopped and the accumulation
buffer is cleared.
3-172 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-121 Hold-time logic for definite-time characteristics
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-173

3 Operation
(continued)
3-122 Signal flow for values below the accumulation limit value
3-174 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
DTOC: Starting IN>
DTOC: Pulse
prolong. runn.
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,

i. runn
DTOC: t2 N
DTOC: Trip sig.

tIN>,intm.
Startings not
illustrated
have occured
here.
Settings
DTOC: Puls.prol. DTOC: tIN,interm. DTOC: Hold-t.
IN>,intPSx PSx tIN>,intmPSx
Setting Setting Setting
19Z5243A_EN
3-123 Signal flow for values at the accumulation limit value
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-175

3 Operation
(continued)
3.23 Inverse-Time Overcurrent Protection (Function Group IDMT)
The inverse-time overcurrent protection (IDMT) function operates with three separate
measuring systems:
! Phase currents
! Negative-sequence current
! Residual current
Either the short-circuit direction determination function or the auto-reclosing control may
intervene in the functional sequence of the IDMT function.
Disabling or enabling
IDMT protection
IDMT protection can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-124 Disabling or enabling IDMT protection
Time-dependent
characteristics
The measuring systems for the evaluation of the three phase currents, the negative-
sequence current system and the residual current operate independently and can be set
separately. The user can select from a large number of characteristics (see table
below). The measured variable is the maximum phase current, the negative-sequence
current, or the residual current, depending on the measuring system. The tripping
characteristics available for selection are shown in Figures 3-125 to 3-128.
3-176 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Release
Characteristic Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k b
I
1
I
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 R
tr = k 2
a I
t = k + c 1
I
I b ref
1
I
ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI R
tr = k 2
a I
t = k + c 1
I
I b ref
1
I
ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k
0.236
0.339
I

I
ref
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse I
t = k 5.8 1.35 ln

I ref
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-177

3 Operation
(continued)
IEC 255-3, Standard Inverse IEC 255-3, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10 k=10
t/s k=1
t/s
1 1 k=1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05 0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K1A S8Z50K2A
Characteristic No. 1 Characteristic No. 2
IEC 255-3, Extremely Inverse IEC 255-3, Long Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
10 10
k=1
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=0.1
k=1 k=0.05
0.1 0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K3A S8Z50K4A

3-125 Tripping characteristics per IEC 255-3
3-178 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
IEEE C37.112, Moderately Inverse IEEE C37.112, Very Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 k=10 10
k=10
t/s t/s
1 k=1 1
k=1
0.1 k=0.1 0.1

k=0.05 k=0.1
k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K5C S8Z50K6C
IEEE C37.112, Extremely Inverse
1000
100
10
t/s
k=10
1
k=1
0.1
k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50K7C
Characteristic No. 7
3-126 Tripping characteristics per IEEE C37.112
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-179

3 Operation
(continued)
ANSI, Normally Inverse ANSI, Short Time Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
10 10
t/s t/s
k=10
1 1
k=10
k=1
0.1 0.1
k=1
k=0.1 k=0.1
0.01 k=0.05 0.01 k=0.05
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50K8C S8Z50K9C
ANSI, Long Time Inverse
1000
100
k=10
10
t/s k=1
1
k=0.1
0.1 k=0.05
0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref
S8Z50KAC
Characteristic No. 10
3-127 Tripping characteristics per ANSI
3-180 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
RI-Type Inverse RXIDG-Type Inverse
1000 1000
100 100
k=10
k=10
10 10
t/s k=1 t/s
k=1
1 1
k=0.1
k=0.1
k=0.05
0.1 0.1 k=0.05
0.01 0.01
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
I/Iref I/Iref
S8Z50KBA S8Z50KCA
3-128 RI-type inverse and RXIDG-type inverse tripping characteristics
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-181

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stage

The three phase currents are monitored by the P139 to detect when they exceed the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic
threshold is active for the set hold time of the dynamic parameters (see Activation of
Dynamic Parameters); the normal threshold is active when no hold time is running.
The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if 1.05 times the set reference
current is exceeded in one phase. The P139 determines the highest of the three phase
currents for further processing. As a function of this current and of the set characteristic,
the P139 will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set;
the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent of the magnitude of the current.
the phase current stage is blocked.
The inverse-time stage can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary

signal input.
The trip signals of the IDMT function can be blocked by the short-circuit direction
determination function or by the auto-reclosing control function. Depending on the
settings for the short-circuit direction determination function, the trip signal may be
enabled. The trip signals of the phase current stage are blocked by the auto-reclosing
control function (ARC) if the ARC is able to form a trip command.
3-182 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-129 Phase current stage (trip signal: see next drawing)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-183

3 Operation
(continued)
3-130 Trip signal of the phase current stage
3-184 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Negative-sequence current
stage
The P139 determines the negative-sequence current based on the set rotary field
according to the following formulas:
Clockwise rotating field (ABC rotation):

1
(2
)
Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC
3
Anticlockwise rotating field (ACB rotation):

1
( 2
)
Ineg = I A + a IB + a IC
3
a = e j120
a 2 = e j240
The negative-sequence current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the
set thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic
The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if the negative-sequence current
exceeds a value of 1.05 times the set reference current. As a function of the set
characteristic and of the residual current, the P139 will determine the tripping time.
Furthermore, a minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this
minimum independent of the magnitude of the negative-sequence current.
the negative-sequence current stage is blocked.

signal input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can depending on the setting - be
blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
If short-circuit direction determination is enabled, then the trip signal issued by the IDMT
negative-sequence current stage is always non-directional.
The trip signals of the negative-sequence current stage are blocked by the auto-
reclosing control function (ARC) if the ARC is able to form a trip command.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-185

3 Operation
(continued)
3-131 Negative-sequence current stage
3-186 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Selection of measured
variables for the residual
current stage
A setting specifies which current will be used by the P139 as the residual current: either
the residual current calculated from the three phase currents or the residual current
measured at the fourth transformer.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-187

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stage

The residual current is monitored by the P139 to detect when it exceeds the set
thresholds. Alternatively, two different threshold types can be active. The dynamic
The IDMT protection function issues a starting signal if the residual current exceeds a
value of 1.05 times the set reference current. As a function of the set characteristic and
of the residual current, the P139 will determine the tripping time. Furthermore, a
minimum trip time can be set; the trip time will not fall below this minimum independent
of the magnitude of the residual current.

signal input. Furthermore, the inverse-time stage can depending on the setting - be
blocked automatically for single-pole or multi-pole startings.
The trip signals of the IDMT function can be blocked by the short-circuit direction
determination function or by the auto-reclosing control function. Depending on the
settings for the short-circuit direction determination function, the trip signal may be
enabled. The trip signals of the residual current stage are blocked by the auto-reclosing
control function (ARC) if the ARC is able to form a trip command.
3-188 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-133 Residual current stage (trip signal: see next drawing)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-189

3 Operation
(continued)
3-134 Trip signal of the residual current stage
3-190 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Holding time
As a function of the current, the P139 will determine the tripping time and start a timer
stage. The setting for the holding time defines the period for the elapsed IDMT starting
time to be stored after the starting has dropped out. If the starting time returns while the
hold time elapses, the new starting time is added to the stored time. If the sum of the
starting times reaches the tripping time determined by the P139 then the appropriate
message is issued. If the starting time does not return while the hold time elapses then
the memory storing the sum of the starting times will in accordance with the setting -
be cleared either without delay or according to the set characteristic. The phase current
stage serves as an example to illustrate the effect of the holding time in Figure 3-135.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-191

3 Operation
(continued)
3-135 The effect of the holding time illustrated for the phase current stage as an example
Case A: The determined tripping time is not reached.
Case B: The determined tripping time is reached
3-192 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.24 Short-Circuit Direction Determination (Function Group SCDD)
A short-circuit direction determination function (SCDD) has been implemented in the

P139. Thus the P139 can be used as a directional definite-time overcurrent protection
device and also as a directional inverse-time overcurrent protection device. Two
separate measuring systems are available for this purpose:
! Phase currents system

! Residual currents system
Disabling and enabling
short-circuit direction
determination
Short-circuit direction determination can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-136 Disabling and enabling short-circuit direction determination
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-193

3 Operation
(continued)
Phase current stages

For direction determination of phase current stages, a phase current and the phase-to-
phase voltage opposite this current are selected as a function of fault type, and an
optimum characteristic angle is used.
For a single-pole fault in A-G, for example, the current A and the voltage VB-C are
selected as measured variables, and a characteristic angle P of +45 is used (see
Figure 3-137).
The reference quantity is the vector of the selected phase-to-phase voltage. The
characteristic angle P specifies the measurement relation to the reference quantity.
Different characteristic angles corresponding to fault type are specified by the P139.
The measuring position is defined as the bisector of the forward direction zone. The
forward direction applies if the vector of the selected phase current is in the range
90 of the measurement relation.
The backward direction applies if the vector of the selected phase current is in the range
> 90 of the measurement relation.
3-137 Example of formation of phase current stage direction decision with a single-pole fault in A-G, an inductive system, and a clockwise rotary
field
3-194 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling the phase current

stages
The direction determination function of the phase current stages is enabled if the
following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
" The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled.

" The measuring-circuit monitoring function has not identified any errors in the voltage
measuring circuit (see Measuring-Circuit Monitoring).
" A phase starting signal is present.
" At least two phase-to-phase voltages are greater than 200 mV.
! All three phase currents are greater than 0.1 Inom.
" There is no external signal M AIN : M .c .b . tr i p V EXT .
If there is no enable for direction determination, then the following internal signal is
generated: S C D D : P h a s e c u r r . s t a g e b l .
3-138 Enable for the direction determination function of the phase current stages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-195

3 Operation
(continued)
After direction determination is enabled, one of the following two signals is generated,
depending on the measurement decision:
" In the case of a fault in the forward direction,

SCDD: Fault P forward.
" In the case of a fault in the backward direction,
SCDD: Fault P backward.
To control transient race problems, the triggering and release of a directional decision is
delayed by 30 ms.
3-139 Direction determination of the phase current stages
3-196 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Formation of the blocking

signal for the phase current
stages
For the formation of the blocking signal for the two DTOC phase current stages and the
single IDMT phase current stage, the fault direction for evaluating the measurement
decision can be separately set, once the user has selected forward, backward or non-
directional.
A blocking signal for the first DTOC phase current stage is formed if one of the following
conditions is met:
" The direction for tI> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
function identifies a fault in the backward direction.
" The direction for tI> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction determination
function identifies a fault in the forward direction.
A blocking signal for the second DTOC phase current stage is formed if one of the
following conditions is met:
" The direction for tI> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
" The direction for tI> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction determination
A blocking signal for the IDMT phase current stage is formed if one of the following
conditions is met:
" The direction for tIref,P> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
" The direction for tIref,P> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction
determination function identifies a fault in the forward direction.
If there is no enable for direction determination (in the case of m.c.b. trip, for example),
the user may specify at S C D D : T r i p b i a s P S x whether stages set to forward shall
be operated with trip bias.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-197

3 Operation
(continued)
3-140 Formation of the blocking signals for the phase current stage
3-198 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Residual current stages

The measured residual current IN and the neutral displacement voltage VG-N = -VN-G are
used for the direction determination function of the residual current stages. The user
must specify a favorable characteristic angle in accordance with the neutral-point
treatment of the power system. The characteristic angle N can be set within the range
of - 90 to + 90.
The reference quantity is the vector of the neutral displacement voltage. The
characteristic angle specifies the measuring position relative to the reference quantity.
The measuring position is defined as the bisector of the forward direction zone. The
forward direction applies if the vector of the residual current is in the range of 90 of
the measuring position.
The backward direction applies if the vector of the residual current is in the range > 90
of the measuring position.
In the following example the system neutral has been grounded with a relatively low
resistance. When there is a single-pole fault in A-G and a fault in the forward direction,
the residual current will then assume a position approximately like the one shown in
Figure 3-141. With a set characteristic angle of N = - 45, a direction decision in the
forward direction is issued.
3-141 Example of direction decision formation for residual current stage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-199

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling the residual

current stages
The enable for the direction determination function of the residual current stages is
issued if the following conditions are satisfied simultaneously:
" The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled.

" The short-circuit direction determination function is not blocked by measuring circuit
monitoring (see Measuring Circuit Monitoring).
" A zero-sequence starting signal is present.
" The residual current is greater than 0.01#Inom.
" There is no external signal M AIN : M .c .b . tr i p V EXT .
" The neutral displacement voltage is greater than the set triggering value of the
function S C D D : V N G > .
3-142 Enable for the direction determination function of the residual current stages
3-200 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
After direction determination is enabled, one of the following two signals is generated,
depending on the measurement decision:
" If there is a fault in the forward direction, S C D D : G r o u n d f a u l t f o r w a r d .

" If there is a fault in the backward direction, S C D D : G r o u n d f a u l t b a c k w .
To control transient race problems, the triggering and release of a directional decision is
delayed by 30 ms.
3-143 Direction determination of the residual current stages
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-201

3 Operation
(continued)
Formation of the blocking

signal for the residual
current stages
For the formation of the blocking signal for the two DTOC residual current stages and the
IDMT residual current stage, the fault direction for evaluating the measurement decision
can be separately set. once the user has selected forward, backward or non-directional.
A blocking signal for the first DTOC residual current stage is formed if one of the
following conditions is met:
" The direction for tIN> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
" The direction for tIN> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction determination
A blocking signal for the IDMT residual current stage is formed if one of the following
conditions is met:
" The direction for tIN>> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
" The direction for tIN>> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction determination
A blocking signal for the IDMT residual current stage is formed if one of the following
conditions is met:
" The direction for tIref,P> is set on forward, and the short-circuit direction determination
function detects a fault in the backward direction.
" The direction for tIref,N> is set on backward, and the short-circuit direction
determination function identifies a fault in the forward direction.
If there is no enable for direction determination (in the case of m.c.b. trip, for example),
the user may specify at S C D D : T r i p b i a s P S x ) whether stages set to forward
shall be operated with trip bias. In the event of phase current starting, the trip bias can
be suppressed in the residual current stage by making the appropriate setting at
S C D D : B l o c k . b i a s G P S x.
3-202 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-144 Formation of the blocking signals for the residual current stage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-203

3 Operation
(continued)
Signaling logic
The signals for fault direction that are generated by the direction determination functions
of the phase current and residual current stages are combined into one common
function.
3-145 Fault signals of phase current stage or residual current stages, forward or backward
3-204 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.25 Switch on to Fault Protection (Function Group SOTF)
When the circuit breaker is closed manually, it is possible to switch on to an existing

fault. This is particularly critical since the time-overcurrent protection would not clear the
fault until after the set operate delay had elapsed. In this situation, however, the fastest
possible clearance is desired.
To ensure rapid clearing with manual closing, the manual close signal must be issued
not only to the circuit breaker but also to the P139 at the same time. If there is no close
request from the ARC and if no HSR cycle of an external auto-reclosure control is
running, an adjustable timer stage is started with the manual close command. By setting
a parameter, the user can choose which of the time-overcurrent protection starting
decisions will generate a trip signal while the timer stage is elapsing:
An internal blocking signal is generated with the starting signal for the timer stage. This
signal prevents the ARC from being activated when a manual close causes switching on
to a fault.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-205

3 Operation
(continued)
3-146 Switch on to fault protection
3-206 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.26 Protective Signaling (Function Group PSIG)
Protective signaling
Protective signaling is used together with short-circuit direction determination in power
systems with single-side infeed and a subsequent parallel line configuration (line
section). Selective instantaneous clearing of the line section affected by the fault is
initiated by this function, while the IDMT or DTOC tripping times are bypassed.
protective signaling
The function can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel or
Activation is enabled independent of parameter subset via PSIG : G e n e r a l e n a b l e

U SER . Activation is enabled for parameter subset PSx via PSIG : E n a b l e P S x .
Subsequently, protective signaling can be enabled via the local control panel or through
appropriately configured binary signal inputs. Enabling from either the integrated local
control panel or through binary signal inputs is equally effective. If only PSIG : E n a b l e
EXT is assigned to a binary signal input then protective signaling will be enabled by a
positive edge of the input signal; it will be disabled by a negative edge. If only
PSIG : D i s a b l e EXT is assigned to a binary signal input then a signal present at the
input will have no effect.
Readiness of the protective

signaling function
In order for protective signaling (PSIG) to function, the following requirements must be
satisfied:
! It must be activated.
! There is no external block
! There is no transmission fault.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-207

3 Operation
(continued)
3-147 Protective signaling ready to operate
3-208 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Forming the
communication link
To form the communication link it is necessary to connect either the break contact or the
make contact of the transmitting relay, depending on the transmitting relay mode
selected (Transm. relay make contact or Transm. relay break contact), to the
P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of the remote station by means of pilot wires (see
Installation and Connection and Figure 3-148). With both operating modes, a receive
signal (DC loop closed) is present in both protection devices in the idle state.
3-148 Protective signaling using pilot wires, selected mode of operation: transmission relay break contact
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-209

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation of the protective

signaling function
If a general starting condition begins, then the loop is opened without delay
(transmitting). When a general starting signal is present and the set starting time has
elapsed, loop reclosing takes place as follows in accordance with the mode selected at
P S I G : D i r e c t . d e p e n d . P S x and as a function of the direction decisions:
" Independently of any direction decision

" As a function of the condition that there not be any direction decision in the backward
direction of the phase current stage
" As a function of the condition that there not be any direction decision in the backward
direction of the residual current stage
" As a function of whether one of the following conditions in the table is satisfied (if one
line of statements is true, then one condition is satisfied):
Fault Fault Fault Fault

Residual current Residual current Phase current Phase current
stage stage stage stage
Backwards Forwards Backwards Forwards
no no no no
no no no yes
no yes no no
no yes no yes
yes no no yes
After the loop has reclosed and provided that both a general starting condition and a
status signal through the P S I G : R e c e i v e E X T input of a closed loop are present,
then the signal P S I G : T r i p b y P S I G is generated without delay. The loop recloses
after dropout of the general starting condition and after a delay equal to the release time
that can be set at P S I G : R e l e a s e t . s e n d . P S x .
If protective signaling is not ready, the DC loop will be open if Transm. relay make
contact has been selected as operating mode for the transmitting relay or closed if
Transm. relay break contact has been selected.
3-210 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-149 Protective signaling logic
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-211

3 Operation
(continued)
Protective signaling
monitoring and loop check
The pilot wires are monitored for interruptions. If, in fault-free operation (i.e., in the
absence of a general starting condition), no signal is received through the loop for a
period longer than the set release time of the transmitting relay + 600 ms, then the signal
P S I G : T e l e c o m . f a u l t y is issued (see Figure 3-150). A communication
malfunction or failure leads to a protective signaling block.
To check the loop, the communications link can be opened from the local control panel
by using the function P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R .
3-150 Faulty transmission channel of protective signaling
3-212 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27 Auto-Reclosure Control (Function Group ARC)
Under certain conditions the automatic reclosure control function (ARC) will cause a line
section to be cleared and then, when the dead time has elapsed, automatic reclosure of
the line section will occur.
Figure 3-151 shows an example for the usual sequence of a failed high-speed reclosure
followed by a subsequent successful time-delay reclosure.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-213

3 Operation
(continued)
3-151 Example for an ARC sequence
3-214 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC operating modes

The ARC function available in the P139 offers the possibility of triggering starting times
with different starting signals. Once the starting times have elapsed, a trip signal is
generated. Multiple reclosures are possible with the ARC function available in the P139.
When the ARC operating mode has been set accordingly, multiple reclosures first begin
with a high-speed reclosure (HSR). If the fault is not cleared after reclosure by a HSR,
then another attempt can be made to clear the fault with a time-delay reclosure (TDR).
Multiple reclosures using only TDRs are also possible if the ARC operating mode is set
accordingly.
3-152 Setting the operating mode of the ARC function.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-215

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling and disabling the

ARC function
The ARC function can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel or
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets)

via A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A R C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ARC can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel and the binary signal inputs have
equal status in this regard. If only the A R C : E n a b l e E X T function is assigned to a
binary signal input, then ARC will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and
disabled by a negative edge. If only the A R C : D i s a b l e E X T function has been
assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
3-216 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-153 Enabling or disabling auto-reclosure control
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-217

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC blocking
Under certain conditions the ARC will be blocked and the signal A R C : B l o c k e d will
be issued, provided that one of the following conditions is met:
! A blocking signal is present because of a manual close.

! An external signal A R C : B l o c k i n g E X T is present.
! ARC is disabled.
! Protection is disabled (off).
! A manual trip command is issued from the local control panel.
When all blocking conditions have been removed, the blocking time is started. When the
blocking time has elapsed, ARC blocking is canceled.
3-154 ARC blocking
3-218 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
ARC ready to operate

An ARC cycle can only start if the ARC is ready. For this purpose the following
conditions need to be met simultaneously:
! Protection is activated (on).

! ARC is not blocked.
! The circuit breaker must be capable of opening and closing again (CB opening &
closing drive is ready).
! The circuit breaker contacts must be in closed position (closed position scanning is
optional).
! No ARC cycle is running.
3-155 ARC ready to operate
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-219

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping times
When protection functions operating with auto-reclosure control are started, the tripping
times (HSR or TDR) are started together with the operative time. If the tripping time has
elapsed during an active ARC cycle while the operative time is still running, a trip signal
is issued. The HSR or TDR trip time having caused the trip signal also determines which
dead time (HSR or TDR) is to be triggered. Once the dead time commences, all tripping
times already triggered and the operative time will be terminated.
The beginning of the following starts or input signals trigger the tripping times provided
that the starting conditions are met and the respective tripping times are not "blocked". If
short-circuit direction determination (SCDD) is enabled, then some of the starting signals
are directional:
! General starting
! DTOC starting I> (directional)
! DTOC starting I>> (directional)
! DTOC Starting I>>>
! DTOC starting IN> (directional)
! DTOC starting IN>> (directional)
! DTOC Starting IN>>>
! IDMT starting IkIref,P> (directional)
! IDMT starting IkIref,N> (directional)
! IDMT starting IkIref,neg>
! Start by programmable logic
! Ground fault direction determination by steady-state values (GFDSS) has operated
and detected one of the following faults:
" GFDSS starting fault 'forward/LS'
" GFDSS starting Y(N)>
" GFDSS starting fault 'forward/LS' or GFDSS starting Y(N)>
If - in the operating mode "HSR/TDR permitted" - only one of the starting conditions
listed above applies, then the first trip signal is always generated by the HSR trip time
stage, regardless of the duration of the HSR or TDR tripping time setting. HSR precedes
TDR. If more than one starting is present then the trip signal will be issued after the
HSR tripping time that has elapsed first. As an exception, a TDR will be triggered first
after having elapsed first, if the associated HSR tripping time is set to "Blocked".
If the trip signal has been generated by a TDR tripping time stage, then no HSR will be
initiated within the same ARC cycle.
The ARC trip signal must be included in the m out of n selection of the trip commands.
3-220 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-156 Tripping time, part 1
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-221

3 Operation
(continued)
3-222 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-223

3 Operation
(continued)
3-224 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-225

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking and resetting the

tripping times
The HSR tripping time stages are blocked or reset either by the set value "Blocked" or by
one of the following conditions:
! ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to "Test HSR only permitted.

! I>>> starting is present and AR C : H SR b l o c k i n g b y I > > > PSx has been
selected.
! ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to "TDR only permitted".
! An HSR is not permitted because an HSR or TDR has already occurred within the
current ARC cycle.
! The ARC is blocked.
The TDR tripping time stages are blocked or reset either by the set value "Blocked" or by
one of the following conditions:
! ARC: Operating mode PSx is set to "Test HSR only permitted .

! I>>> starting is present and AR C : T D R b l o c k i n g b y I > > > PSx has been
selected.
! The ARC is blocked.
! The number of permitted TDRs has been reached and thus no further TDRs are
permitted.
3-226 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-162 Blocking and resetting the tripping time stages
ARC cycle
An ARC cycle begins, provided that the starting condition is met, with the presence of a
relevant starting option (DTOC/IDMT starting, starting via programmable logic, GFDSS,
or start of a test HSR), as long as the signal AR C : R e a d y is present at this time. As
the ARC cycle proceeds, the signal AR C : R e a d y is no longer taken into account.
An ARC cycle is running if the ARC is not blocked and one of the following conditions is
met:
! The operative time is running.

! A dead time is running.
! The reclaim time is running.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-227

3 Operation
(continued)
Blocking the DTOC or

IDMT protection function,
the GFDSS function, and
programmable logic
If the ARC is ready, it will block the trip signals of DTOC and IDMT protection as well as
the GFDSS function and the programmable logic via the signal AR C : Bl o c k i n g tr i p .
ARC permits the generation of a trip command by the other protection functions if one of
the following conditions is met:
! A R C c y c l e r u n n i n g is not applicable, and ARC is not ready.

! The final reclaim time is running.
! Only an HSR test is permitted ("Test HSR only").
! ARC is blocked.
! The operative time is running during a running tripping time.
! A relevant starting type begins while a dead time is running.
! One or more starts do not trigger a tripping time stage because the relevant tripping
time stages are disabled (t set to "Blocked"). If a tripping time stage is started in this
condition by additional starting and as long as no final trip command has been issued,
a trip command is again generated by the ARC.
3-228 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Example of programmable
logic in the ARC
This example (see Figure 3-163) illustrates the possible interconnection and the binary
signal output for starting the tripping time stage via a binary signal input.
By using the programmable logic a binary signal input with serial operate delay and an
AND element is implemented. The function AR C : Bl o c k i n g tr i p "NOT" has been
assigned to the second input on this AND element. The output from the AND element
must be included in the configuration of the m out of n selection for the general trip
command. The tripping time can be started by the output signal
ARC: Start by logic.
For this example the following list parameters need to be set from the local control panel
(see the section on Setting a List Parameter in the chapter entitled Local Control).
List Parameter
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. OR e.g. LOGIC: Input 4 EXT
output 1 (address 034 003)
(address 030 000)
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. OR LOGIC: Output 1 (t)
output 2 (address 042 033)
AND NOT ARC: Blocking trip
(address 042 000)
In general, any equation within the programmable logic function can be used to start the
ARC tripping time.
One of the options offered by the programmable logic is the triggering of the ARC by an
external protection device.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-229

3 Operation
(continued)
3-163 Example of programmable logic in the ARC
General control functions

The entire ARC sequence is monitored and controlled by a sequence control function.
While the ASC function is enabled, reclosure requires a close enable by the ASC
function, which implements a check of the synchronism conditions.
3-230 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-164 ARC sequence control
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-231

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.1 High-Speed Reclosure (HSR)
If the starting conditions are met then any ARC-relevant protection startings will trigger
an ARC cycle. The starts trigger the associated tripping time stages and the operative
time. If an HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal
A R C : T r i p s i g n a l is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function
assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. With the release of the
starting, the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. If there is no
starting during the dead time, a reclosure command is issued once the dead time has
elapsed. The reclaim time is started simultaneously. If there is no starting during the
reclaim time, the signal ARC: R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s fu l is issued and the ARC cycle is
terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed.
If the HSR does not succeed and another starting occurs then a TDR is started if at least
one TDR is permitted. If TDR after HSR is not permitted then the current reclaim time
will be the last reclaim time of the ARC cycle. If the last reclaim time has elapsed and
another starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. Instead the
signal AR C : Bl o c k i n g tr i p is set to a logic value of 0 and a trip by other protection
functions is enabled. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it will be
regarded as a final trip. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time has
elapsed.
When the signal A R C : C y c l e r u n n i n g appears, the signal A R C : S i g . i n t e r r .

C B t r i p (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued automatically and is reset after the
final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle, once the close command pulse time has
elapsed. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal A R C : B l o c k e d
appears during an ARC cycle.
If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out, the last reclaim time will
be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled.
During the dead time, the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings
occur. If this is the case, the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection
trip signals is cancelled.
While the ASC function is enabled, the procedures described in the following section
"Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions" are also applicable.
3-232 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-165 HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC disabled see also next section "Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions")
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-233

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.2 Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions
Figure 3-166 shows the joint operation of the ARC and ASC functions, illustrated for a
high-speed reclosure (HSR).
an ARC cycle. The startings set off the associated tripping time stages and the
operative time. If a HSR tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal
A R C : T r i p s i g n a l is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function
assignment for the trip commands is configured appropriately. With the release of the
starting, the operative time is terminated and the HSR dead time begins. After the dead
time has elapsed, a close request is sent to the ASC. The ASC checks to determine
whether reclosure is possible. If a positive decision is reached during the ASC operative
time, then there is a close enable, and the close command is issued.
If the ASC is disabled or deactivated, or if its decisions are to be ignored, then a close
command is issued immediately and the reclaim time is started. If there is no starting
during the reclaim time, the signal ARC: R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s fu l is issued and the
ARC cycle is terminated once the reclaim time has elapsed.
If the ASC function decides against a reclosure then the reclaim time is started and the
ARC cycle is completed after the reclaim time has elapsed.
3-234 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-166 HSR signal sequence (example shown is with ASC enabled)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-235

3 Operation
(continued)
Test HSR
A test HSR can only be triggered when the ARC is ready to operate and if the operating
mode has been set to "Test HSR only permit.". In this operating mode, the blocking of
the trip signals from the DTOC, IDMT and other protection functions is cancelled so that
any system fault can be properly cleared.
Once a test HSR has been triggered, a trip signal of defined duration is issued. The
subsequent sequence corresponds to a successful HSR (open and reclose command
when the HSR dead time has elapsed). Once the close command pulse time has
elapsed, further triggering during the reclaim time does not result in a further HSR.
A test HSR can be triggered either from the local control panel or via a binary signal
input and adds an increment to the A R C : N u m b e r H S R counter.
Each Test HSR request that does not result in a test HSR generates the signal
ARC: Reject test HSR.
3-167 Test HSR
3-236 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.3 Time-Delay Reclosure (TDR)
Multiple reclosures using TDRs are possible if the operating mode is set accordingly. A
TDR may occur after a HSR if reclosure has occurred as the result of the HSR or if the
operating mode set for the ARC allows only TDRs. This is only possible if the setting
fo r A R C : N o . o f p e r m i t . T D R P S x (number of permitted TDRs) is not zero.
the associated tripping times. The operative time is started simultaneously. If a TDR
tripping time is running during the operative time then the signal A R C : T r i p s i g n a l
is issued and this signal can lead to a trip command if the function assignment for the trip
commands is configured appropriately. With the release of the starting, the operative
time is terminated and the TDR dead time begins. If there is no starting during the dead
time, a reclosure command is issued once the dead time has elapsed. The reclaim
time is started simultaneously. If no further TDR is permitted during the current ARC
cycle then this will be the last reclaim time. If the last reclaim time has elapsed and
another starting occurs then the tripping time stages are no longer started. Instead the
signal A R C : B l o c k i n g t r i p is set to a logic value of 0 and a final trip by other
protection functions is enabled. If a trip signal occurs during the last reclaim time then it
will be regarded as a final trip. The ARC cycle is completed after the last reclaim time
has elapsed. If there is no starting during the last reclaim time, the signal
A R C : R e c l o s u r e s u c c e s s f u l will be issued.
If there is a new starting during the reclaim time and at least one TDR is still permitted
then the reclaim time is terminated and another trip is issued when the tripping time has
elapsed. Once the dead time has elapsed, a further reclosure command is issued.
When the signal A R C : C y c l e r u n n i n g appears, the signal A R C : S i g . i n t e r r .

C B t r i p (interruption breaker trip signal) is issued automatically and it is reset after the
final HSR or TDR of the current ARC cycle, once the close command pulse time has
elapsed. This signal is also reset immediately when the signal A R C : B l o c k e d
appears during an ARC cycle.
If the operative time has elapsed before the starting drops out, the last reclaim time will
be started directly and the blocking of protection trip signals is cancelled.
During the dead time, the P139 keeps checking whether any ARC-relevant startings
occur. If this is the case, the last reclaim time is started and the blocking of protection
trip signals is cancelled.
While the ASC function is enabled, the procedures described in the previous section
"Joint Operation of the ARC and ASC Functions" are also applicable.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-237

3 Operation
(continued)
3-168 Signal sequence of a failed HSR followed by a failed TDR and then by a final successful TDR (example shown is with ASC disabled)
3-238 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.27.4 ARC counters
The following events are counted:
! Number of high-speed reclosures (HSR) that have been carried out.

! Number of time-delay reclosures (TDR) that have been carried out.
The associated counters can be reset either individually or as a group.
3-169 ARC counters
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-239

3 Operation
(continued)
3.28 Automatic Synchronism Check (Function Group ASC)
The automatic synchronism check (ASC) function allows the device to verify that before
a close or reclose command is issued synchronism exists between network sections that
are to be synchronized (paralleled) or whether one of the network sections is de-
energized. In order to check for synchronism, two voltages generally the voltages on
the line and busbar sides are compared for differences in frequency, angle, and
voltage. Connecting the reference voltage transformer will determine which of the
network sections will provide the reference voltage (e.g. the line side or the busbar side).
At the P139 the measurement loop must be set to correspond to the reference voltage
connection (A S C : M e a s u r e m e n t l o o p P S x ) so that the correct measuring
voltage is selected for the comparison. In the connection example shown in the section
entitled 'Conditioning the Measured Variables', the busbar voltage VA-B is the reference
voltage.
3-170 Selecting the measurement loop
3-240 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Disabling and enabling the

ASC function
The ASC function can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel or
The activation of the function is enabled generally (independent of parameter subsets)

via A S C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . It is enabled as a function of a parameter
subset via A S C : E n a b l e P S x . If these enabling functions have been activated,
ASC can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel or through appropriately
configured binary signal inputs. The local control panel and the binary signal inputs
have equal status in this regard. If only the A S C : E n a b l e E X T function is
assigned to a binary signal input, then ASC will be enabled by a positive edge of the
input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the A S C : D i s a b l e E X T
function has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have
no effect.
If the ASC function is disabled an activation enable will always be issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-241

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: General enable

USER
No
Yes
ASC: Enable
PSx
ASC: Enabled
No
Yes
INP: Fct. assignm.

U xxx
Address
Address
ASC: Enabled
ASC: Enable EXT

ASC: Enable USER
don't execute
execute
ASC: Disable EXT
ASC: Disable USER
don't execute
execute
ASC: Enable PSx

set
set
set
set
19Z5232A_EN
3-171 Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.
3-242 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC readiness and

blocking
The ASC function is ready if it is activated and enabled and if there is no blocking.
Blocking can be brought about if a voltage transformer m.c.b. was tripped or by an
appropriately configured binary signal input. The user can specify whether closing or
reclosing will always be enabled or not (reclosure with or without a check) when the ASC
function is blocked.
The user can also specify separately for high-speed reclosures (HSR) and time-delay
reclosures (TDR) whether reclosure will be carried out with or without a check.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-243

3 Operation
(continued)
3-172 ASC readiness and blocking
3-244 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Close request
The ASC function can be triggered by ARC, from the integrated local control panel, via
an appropriately configured binary signal input (A S C : C l o s e r e q u e s t E X T ), or via
a close request from the control functions. Close requests from the local control panel,
the binary signal input or the control functions are only accepted if no ARC cycle is
running.
3-173 Close request
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-245

3 Operation
(continued)
The ASC operative time is started with the close request. If the close enable is issued
before the ASC operative time has elapsing, the close command is issued. Otherwise
an A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n signal is generated for 100 ms.
3-174 Signal flow for a close enable and a close rejection
3-246 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC operating modes

The criteria for a close enable are determined by the ASC operating mode setting (see
Figure 3-176). The following operating mode settings are possible:
! Voltage-checked
! Synchronism-checked
! Voltage/synchronism-checked
Voltage-checked
The synchronism-checked close enable can be bypassed using the voltage-checked
close enable, without affecting the former. For this purpose the three phase-to-ground
voltages and the reference voltage Vref are monitored to determine whether they exceed
or fall below the set threshold values (A S C : V > v o l t . c h e c k and A S C : V <
v o l t . c h e c k ). Depending on the operating mode selected for the voltage check, all
three phase-to-ground voltages need to exceed or fall below the set value in order to
meet the condition for voltage-checked closing. If the conditions corresponding to the
set operating mode for the voltage-checked synchronism check are met, then the close
enable is issued after the set minimum time has elapsed (A S C : t m i n v o l t . c h e c k ).
The following operating modes for voltage checking can be selected separately for each
parameter subset:
! Vref but not V

! V but not Vref
! Not V and not Vref
! Not V or not Vref
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-247

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC: Enabled
ASC: Active
ASC: Operating mode

PSx
volt. check
ASC: V> volt.check
PSx
volt./
sync. check
V A-G VA G
VB-G VB G
VC-G VC G
ASC: V< volt. check

PSx
VA G
VB G
VC G
ASC: tmin volt.

check PSx
ASC: Meas. loop ASC: Op.mode volt.
selected PG chk.PSx
V V
not V & Vref
V & not Vref
not V & not Vref
not V or not Vref
ASC: Close enable,

volt.ch
ASC: Close enable

ASC: Close enable,
sync.ch
ASC: Op.mode ASC: V> volt. ASC: V< volt. ASC: tmin volt.
volt.chk.PSx check PSx check PSx check PSX
set
set
set
set
19Z5233A_EN
3-175 Voltage-checked close enable
3-248 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Synchronism-checked
Before a close enable is issued, the ASC checks the voltages for synchronism.
Synchronism is recognized if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
! The three phase voltage and the reference voltage must exceed the set threshold
value (A S C : V > s y n c . c h e c k . ) . When with a three phase voltage the setting of
M A I N : N e u t r a l - p o i n t t r e a t . is "Low-imped. grounding" both the phase-to-
ground and the phase-to-phase voltages are checked. If the setting is
"Isol./res.w.start.(or w/o st.)PG" only the phase-to-phase voltages are checked.
! The difference in magnitude between measuring voltage and reference voltage must
not exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a V m a x ).
! The frequency difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a f m a x ).
! The angle difference between measuring voltage and reference voltage must not
exceed the set threshold value (A S C : D e l t a p h i m a x ). The set offset angle
(A S C : P h i o f f s e t ) is taken into account in these comparisons.
If these conditions are met for at least the set time (A S C : t m i n s y n c . c h e c k ), then
a close enable is issued. The ASC operating time for determination of differences in
voltage, angle, and frequency is approximately 100 ms.
The voltage magnitude difference, angle difference, and frequency difference are stored
as measured synchronism data at the time the close request is issued. In the event of
another close request, they are automatically overwritten by the new data.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-249

3 Operation
(continued)
3-176 Synchronism-checked close enable
3-250 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage/synchronism-
checked
If this setting has been selected, then the close enable is issued if the conditions for
voltage- or synchronism-checked closing are met.
3-177 ASC sequence control
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-251

3 Operation
(continued)
Testing the ASC function

For test purposes a close request can be issued from the integrated local control panel
or via an appropriately configured binary signal input (see Figure 3-178). In this case no
close command is issued and it is not counted.
The ASC cycle and the operating time are started by the test close request. The
network synchronism is checked during the whole operating time and A S C : C l o s e
e n a b l e is set accordingly. If at the end of the operate time no network synchronism is
registered, a 100 ms signal A S C : C l o s e r e j e c t i o n is issued.
Close Enable Close Reject
ASC: Cycle running ASC: Cycle running
ASC: gen. ASC: gen.

Close request Close request
ASC: Operat.time ASC: Operat.time

running running
ASC: Close enable ASC: Close

rejection
2 2 2
ASC: Close ASC: Close enable

rejection
2
ASC: >
Operative time PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5230A_EN
3-178 ASC sequence during testing
3-252 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Integrating the ASC

function into the control
and monitoring of
switchgear units
ASC triggering by a close request from the control functions is also possible. This
requires that the circuit breaker is assigned to an external device and that the ASC
system integration is set to "automatic synchr. control". If the control function issues a
close request then the close command for the circuit breaker requires the
A S C : C l o s e e n a b l e (see Issue of the switching commands in Chapter Control
and Monitoring of Switchgear Units.
However if A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'automatic synchr. check' ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously
updated by the ASC function are transmitted when configurations have been set
accordingly to the central control station, where operators may make decisions as to
which external device is to be given a switching command.
3-179 Integrating the ASC function into the control and monitoring of switchgear units
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-253

3 Operation
(continued)
Measured values obtained

by ASC
The following measured values are obtained and calculated during an ASC cycle and
are transmitted during a set cycle time:
! Voltage from the reference voltage channel

! Voltage from the selected measuring loop
! Difference in phase voltage magnitudes
! Difference in phase angles
! Difference in Frequencies
Outside of the ASC cycle the measured values have the status of "not measured".
ASC: Transm.cycle,
meas.v.
101 212
ASC: Cycle
running
038 019
ASC: Voltage
Vref
004 087
ASC: Volt. sel.

meas.loop
004 088
ASC: Volt. magnit.

diff.
004 091
ASC: Angle
difference
004 089
ASC: Frequ.
difference
004 090
19Z5231A_EN
3-180 Measured values obtained by ASC
3-254 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
ASC counters
The following ASC signals are counted:
! Number of reclosures after a close request from the integrated local control panel or
through a binary signal input.
! Number of close requests
! Number of close rejections
The counters can be reset individually (at the address at which they are displayed) or as
a group.
3-181 ASC counters
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-255

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29 Ground Fault Direction Determination Using Steady-State Values

(Function Group GFDSS)
Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral displacement voltage and
the residual current using the steady-state power evaluation method or, alternatively, the
admittance evaluation method. As an alternative, it is also possible to detect ground
faults (without direction determination in this case) using a steady-state evaluation
method based solely on current (steady-state current evaluation). In that case only the
filtered residual current is used as the ground fault criterion.
The functional sequence of ground fault direction determination can be influenced by the
auto-reclosing control function.

ground fault direction
determination using
steady-state values
Ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) can be disabled
or enabled from the local control panel. The user can switch to the current evaluation
mode either from the local control panel or through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
Readiness of ground fault

direction determination
using steady-state values
A readiness signal is issued for the selected evaluation mode if protection is active and if
ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS) is enabled.
3-256 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-182 Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground fault direction determination using steady-state values (GFDSS)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-257

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning and selecting

measured variables
Special transformers are provided in the P139 for conditioning the measured variables.
As an alternative, the neutral displacement voltage calculated by the P139 from the three
phase-to-ground voltages, or the voltage measured at transformer T 90 can be used for
steady-state power evaluation. The current transformer is designed specifically for this
application so that it has a low phase-angle error.
3-183 Selection of the measured voltage
3-258 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.1 Steady-State Power Evaluation
In order to detect the ground fault direction, ground fault direction determination by
steady-state power evaluation requires the neutral-point displacement voltage and the
residual current. The frequency given by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these quantities
using Fourier analysis. Three periods are used for analysis if the setting selected for the
timer stage G F D S S : t V N G > is greater than or equal to 60 ms. This means that
typical ripple control frequencies are suppressed in addition to all integer-frequency
harmonics. If the timer stage has been set for values less than 60 ms, only one period is
used for filtering purposes.
Measurement is enabled after timer stage tVNG> has elapsed; this stage is started by
the trigger VNG>. The sign of either active power G F D S S : O p e r . m o d e G F
( p o w . ) cos phi circuit or reactive power G F D S S : O p e r . m o d e G F ( p o w . )
sin phi circuit is used for direction determination, depending on the operating mode
selected cos phi circuit or sin phi circuit. Connection of the measuring circuits is taken
into account by the setting G F D S S : M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . With the standard
connection, a decision for LS is reached in the case of a ground fault on the line side
and BS in the case of a ground fault on the busbar side.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-259

3 Operation
(continued)
3-184 Direction determination in the power evaluation mode
3-260 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
cos circuit
The direction decision is not enabled until the active component of the residual current
exceeds the set value and the phase displacement between residual current and neutral
displacement current is smaller than the set sector angle. The sector angle makes it
possible to extend the dead zone to take into account the expected phase-angle errors
of the measured variables. These settings make it possible to achieve the characteristic
shown in Figure 3-185.
Output of the direction decisions is operate- and release-delayed.
The trip signal of the GFDSS function for the forward direction is blocked by the auto-
3-185 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state power evaluation, operating mode cos
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-261

3 Operation
(continued)
sin circuit
The direction decision is enabled if the reactive component of the residual current has
exceeded the set threshold operate value. These settings make it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-186.
3-186 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state power evaluation, operating mode sin
3-262 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-187 Output of direction decisions in the power evaluation mode
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-263

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.2 Steady-State Current Evaluation
The frequency given by the setting f/fnom is filtered from the residual current using Fourier
analysis. Three periods are used for steady-state current evaluation. If the current
exceeds the set threshold value, then a ground fault signal is issued after the set operate
delay has elapsed.
3-188 Evaluation of residual current
Counting the ground faults

The number of ground faults is counted. The counter may be reset either individually or
together with the other counters.
3-189 Counting the ground faults
3-264 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.3 Admittance Evaluation
In order to detect the ground fault direction, ground fault direction determination in the
admittance evaluation mode requires the neutral-point displacement voltage and the
residual current. The frequency given by the setting f/fnom is filtered from these quantities
using Fourier analysis.
Measurement is enabled after timer stage tVNG> has elapsed; this stage is started by
the trigger VNG>. The sign of either active power G F D S S : O p e r . m o d e G F
( p o w . ) cos phi circuit or reactive power G F D S S : O p e r . m o d e G F ( p o w . )
sin phi circuit is used for direction determination, depending on the operating mode
selected cos phi circuit or sin phi circuit. Connection of the measuring circuits is taken
into account by the setting G F D S S : M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . With the standard
and BS in the case of a ground fault on the busbar side. The setting G F D SS:
C o r r e c t i o n a n g l e is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system
transformers.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-265

3 Operation
(continued)
3-190 Direction determination in the admittance evaluation mode
3-266 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
cos circuit
The direction decision is enabled if the conductance G(N) in the residual current loop
has exceeded the set threshold operate value. This setting makes it possible to achieve
the characteristic shown in Figure 3-191.
3-191 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state admittance evaluation, operating mode cos
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-267

3 Operation
(continued)
sin circuit
The direction decision is enabled if the susceptance B(N) in the residual current loop has
exceeded the set threshold operate value. This setting makes it possible to achieve the
characteristic shown in Figure 3-192.
3-192 Characteristic of ground fault direction determination by steady-state admittance evaluation, operating mode sin
3-268 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-193 Output of the direction decisions in the admittance evaluation mode
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-269

3 Operation
(continued)
Non-directional ground
fault determination
In the admittance evaluation mode, the non-directional ground fault determination
function can serve as backup protection in case, for example, the active component G(E)
is too small for directional determination.
The admittance in the residual current loop is used in the evaluation. If the admittance
exceeds the set threshold value, then a ground fault signal is issued after the set operate
delay has elapsed.
The trip signal of the non-directional ground fault determination is blocked by the auto-
3-194 Admittance evaluation
3-270 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.29.4 Counting the Ground Faults Detected by Steady-State Power and

Admittance Evaluation
The number of ground faults and direction decisions is counted. The counters can be
reset either individually or as a group.
3-195 Counting the ground faults
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-271

3 Operation
(continued)
3.30 Transient Ground Fault Direction Determination (Function Group TGFD)
Ground fault direction is determined by evaluating the neutral displacement voltage and
the residual current using the transient ground fault measurement method.

transient ground fault
Transient ground fault direction determination (TGFD) can be disabled or enabled from
the local control panel.
Readiness of transient
ground fault direction
determination
A readiness signal is issued if the following conditions are satisfied:
! Protection is activated (on).

! Transient ground fault direction determination is enabled.
! The nominal frequency is set to 50 Hz.
! There is no external blocking.
! A directional decision has not been issued by the transient ground fault direction
determination function.
! Self-monitoring does not detect a fault in the area of transient ground fault direction
determination.
3-272 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-195 Enabling, disabling, and readiness of transient ground fault direction determination
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-273

3 Operation
(continued)
Conditioning and selecting

measured variables
Special transformers are provided in the P139 for conditioning the measured variables
VNG and IN. Alternatively, the neutral displacement voltage formed by the P139 from the
three phase-to-ground voltages may be used for evaluation.
Connection of the measuring circuits is taken into account by the setting TG F D :
M e a s u r i n g d i r e c t i o n . A polarity reversal of the residual current measuring circuit
via the global setting M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N has no effect on the TGFD
direction determination.
3-196 Selection of the neutral displacement voltage
3-274 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Determination of ground
fault direction
Determination of the ground fault direction can only take place if the TGFD function is
ready.
Higher frequency components are filtered out of the two measured variables residual
current and neutral displacement voltage. The amplitudes of the harmonic components
of residual current and neutral displacement voltage and the fundamental component of
the neutral displacement voltage are monitored by settable triggers. For the
determination of ground fault direction, the P139 separately evaluates the trigger
decisions of harmonic component monitoring for the positive and negative half-cycles.
The respective sign of the harmonic component of the neutral displacement voltage is
determined immediately after the harmonic component of the current has exceeded the
positive or negative operate value. For the directional decision, the trigger decisions of
current and voltage are compared, and the connection of the measuring circuits is the
determining factor for the evaluation. The connection of the measuring circuits is taken
into account by the setting TGFD: M e a s u r e m . d i r e c t i o n . With the standard
and BS in the case of a ground fault on the busbar side. The directional decision is
enabled once the set operate delay has elapsed. The set operate delay follows the
harmonic component monitoring stage of the neutral displacement voltage.
Furthermore, a timer stage is started when a current trigger operates. Once this timer
stage has elapsed, transient ground fault direction determination can then detect another
transient ground fault. A new ground fault can be detected after the set operate delay of
+ 40 ms has elapsed.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-275

3 Operation
(continued)
3-197 Direction Determination
3-276 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
The direction decisions are output for the duration of the set storage time. If the storage
time is set to 0s, the direction decisions are output until the fundamental component of
the neutral displacement voltage no longer exceeds the set threshold T G F D : VN G > .
3-198 Output of direction decisions
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-277

3 Operation
(continued)
Resetting the directional

decision
While the storage time is elapsing, the directional decisions can be reset from the
integrated local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal input. If the
storage time is set to , then the direction decision must be reset so that a new ground
fault can be detected.
3-199 Resetting the direction decisions
Monitoring the measured

variables
If, during operation in the absence of ground faults (that is, when the fundamental
component of the neutral displacement voltage does not exceed the set trigger
threshold), the current or the higher frequency component of the neutral displacement
voltage exceeds the set operate value, then the TGFD function is blocked after 5 s.
3-200 Monitoring the measured variables
3-278 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting transient ground

faults
The number of ground faults and direction decisions is counted. The counters can be
reset either individually or as a group.
3-201 Counting transient ground faults
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-279

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31 Motor Protection (Function Group MP)
A motor protection function is implemented in the P139. This motor protection function is
designed especially for protection of directly switched, high-voltage asynchronous
motors with thermally critical rotors. Optimized protection functions are available for this
application:
! Overload protection with thermal replica of the motor (complete memory)

! Inclusion of heat dispersion processes in the rotor after several startups
! Separate cooling time constants for running and stopped machines
! Startup frequency monitoring for the number of startups, restart blocking
! Heavy starting logic
! Locked rotor protection
! Logic function for the operating mode with thermal overload protection (THERM)
! Special startup measured values for commissioning
The definite-time overcurrent protection stages and the unbalance protection function,
which are necessary for comprehensive motor protection, are described in this chapter in
the sections on DTOC protection and unbalance protection (I2>), respectively.
3-280 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling or disabling motor

protection
Limit value monitoring can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
3-203 Enabling or disabling motor protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-281

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting conditions
The overcurrent stage I kIref,P> serves as the starting stage for the overload protection
function. The maximum value of the three phase currents is evaluated. The reference
quantity for operate value and tripping time is the set reference current Iref,P. The current
stage operates when I kIref,P> is exceeded.
The output signal of the overcurrent stage IkIref,P> is the starting signal.
3-204 Starting conditions
3-282 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.1 Overload Protection
Recognition of operating
state
In order to control the overload protection function, i.e., for optimized thermal tracking,
the P139 is equipped with an operating state recognition function. The possible
operating states of a directly switched asynchronous motor are detected by way of
different trigger stages, as follows:
" Machine stopped:

If the measured maximum r.m.s. phase current falls below the current threshold of 0.1
Iref, the machine stopped state is recognized. No-load currents of asynchronous
motors will definitely be above the current threshold of 0.1 Iref.
" Machine running:
If the measured maximum r.m.s. phase current is above the current threshold of
0.1 Iref, the machine running state is recognized.
" Overload range:
The overload range of a machine includes all those currents that exceed the
maximum permissible continuous thermal current of the machine. If the measured
maximum r.m.s. phase current exceeds the current threshold of IkIref,P>, then an
increment is added to the overload memory.
" Startup:
The onset of startup in a directly switched asynchronous motor is detected when the
measured maximum r.m.s. phase current exceeds the current threshold of
M P: IStU p > PSx for a set minimum period tI S t U p > . The end of a startup process
is detected when, after onset of startup has been identified, the measured maximum
r.m.s. phase current falls below the current threshold of 0.6 I S t U p > .
Overload memory
The thermal overload protection function implemented in the P139 is designed especially
for protection of motors with thermally critical rotors, a very common motor type. A
special overload memory is included for this application. This memory contains a replica
of the excess temperature of the protected object relative to the temperature of the
coolant over a range of 0 to 100 %. The following memory loading values have a
particular significance in conjunction with this model:
" 0 %:
A value of 0 % represents the cold state of the protected object, i.e., after the
protected object has cooled down to ambient temperature.
" 20 %:
A value of 20 % represents the minimum load of the overload memory with the
protected object at operating temperature or after initial startup. A running machine is
always considered as being at operating temperature.
" 40 %:
A value of 40 % temporarily represents the minimum load of the overload memory
after two consecutive startups of the protected object.
" 60 %:
A value of 60 % temporarily represents the minimum load of the overload memory
after three consecutive startups of the protected object.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-283

3 Operation
(continued)
" 100 %:
As soon as the overload memory reaches a value of 100 % (trip threshold), an
overload protection trip is issued. The hysteresis for a defined release of the trip
signal is 1 %.
The overload memory mapping process that results in a replica of the actual thermal
conditions in the protected object includes the following operations:
" Mapping of heating:

The overload memory increases continuously by increments if the measured
maximum r.m.s. phase current exceeds the current threshold of IkIref,P> (overload
range). The rate of this increase is a function of the magnitude of the maximum
r.m.s. phase current and, to some extent, of the selected tripping characteristic
MP: Character. type P PSx.
" Mapping of heat transfer:
If a startup has been detected and the maximum r.m.s. phase current falls below the
current threshold of 0.6IStUp>, then a continuous pre-discharge of the overload
memory will automatically occur, governed by the time constant
M P: T a u a fte r s t.- u p PSx of the overload memory. This time constant is used
to map the heat transfer in the asynchronous motor from the copper of the rotor to the
rotor core. This continuous pre-discharge is linear until the minimum load after
startup (described above) is reached, which is a function of the count on the startup
frequency counter. The rate of this pre-discharge is constant: 40 % discharge
(after startup = 20) within a time period of 60 s, for example.
" Mapping of cooling:
If the measured maximum r.m.s. phase current falls below the current threshold of
IkIref,P> and if the mapping of heat transfer, if applicable, has been completed, then
cooling of the protected object is simulated by continuous overload memory
discharge. If the machine is running, the discharge will be governed by the cooling
time constant M P : T a u m a c h . r u n n i n g P S x and will continue until the minimum
loading state of 20 % is reached. If the machine is stopped, discharge will be
governed by the constant M P: T a u m a c h . s t o p p e d P S x and will continue until
the minimum loading state of 0 % is reached. Discharge is an exponential function of
time. The cooling time from an initial value m0 to an interim value of m(t) can be
determined as follows:
m 0 0,2
# Machine running: t = machine.running ln
m( t) 0,2
m0
# Machine stopped: t = machine.stopped ln
m( t)
3-284 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup frequency
monitoring
A startup counter in count down circuit configuration is included in the P139 for startup
frequency monitoring. Depending on the setting M P: Pe r m . N o . s t.- u p s PSx, the
permissible number of consecutive startups is either three from cold or two from warm
or two from cold or one from warm. The counter reading at any given time indicates the
number of consecutive startups that are still permitted. The startup counter is controlled
as follows (see Figure 3-205):
" Decrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted):

As the end of a startup is detected, the startup counter is decremented by 1. If the
counter reading reaches its minimum value of 0, then the RC blocking signal is
formed and can - and indeed should - be configured to an output relay for the
purpose of CB closure blocking.
" Incrementing the startup counter (number of startups still permitted)
If the setting for the permissible number of consecutive startups is three from cold or
two from warm and the machine is running, then the startup counter is incremented
by 1 if the overload memory charge drops below a threshold value of 40 % or 22 %,
respectively, in conjunction with simulation of the cooling of the protected object. If
the machine is stopped then the startup counter will be incremented by 1 if the
overload memory charge drops below 40 %, 20 % or 2 %, respectively, as cooling of
the protected object is simulated by the model.
If the setting for the maximum permissible number of consecutive startups is two
from cold or one from warm and the machine is running, then the startup counter will
be incremented by the value 1 if the overload memory charge drops below the
threshold of 22 % as cooling of the protected object is simulated by the model. If the
machine is stopped then the startup counter will be incremented by 1 if the overload
memory charge drops below 20 % or 2 %, respectively, in conjunction with simulation
of protected object cooling.
The RC blocking signal is withdrawn if the overload memory charge falls below the
40 % threshold (for three consecutive startups from cold or two from warm) or 22 %
(for two from cold or one from warm).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-285

3 Operation
(continued)
3-205 Overload memory and startup counter
Heavy starting logic

The heavy starting application involves a situation in which a machines startup time
tStUp exceeds its maximum possible blocking time tE from operating temperature. For
this application the P139 is equipped with a special logic function that can be activated
by the following two settings:
" The permissible number of consecutive startups is limited to two from cold or one
from warm (MP: Perm. No. st.-ups PSx).
" For the permissible startup time tStUp (M P: St.- u p ti m e tStU p PSx), a higher
value is set than for the maximum permissible blocking time tE from operating
temperature (M P: Bl o c k i n g ti m e tE PSx). These two setting values are only
relevant for this particular application; if both settings are identical, they have no
effect on the protective function and the heavy starting logic is not active.
If this logic function has been activated, then the two timer stages tE and tStUp are started
at the time when the onset of a startup is detected, corrected by the discrimination time
tIStUp>. Once the set time tE has elapsed, the logic function checks to see whether the
machine is actually running. The presence of an external signal from an overspeed
monitor, for example serves as the criterion for a running machine.
If a running machine is detected once the set time tE has elapsed, then the overload
memory charge is automatically frozen and tracking is only restarted after the set startup
time tStUp has elapsed. If a locked rotor state is detected after the set time tE has
elapsed, the overload memory is automatically set to a value of 100 %, which leads to an
immediate trip decision.
3-286 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping time
characteristics
The P139 user can choose between the following two tripping time characteristics:
36
" Reciprocally squared t = (1 m 0 ) t 6Iref
(I Iref ) 2
(I Iref ) 2
( )
" Logarithmic: t = 1 m 0 t 6Iref 36 ln
(I Iref ) 2 1
where m0 in each case signifies the pre-charging of the overload memory at time t = 0.
With reference to the basic physical model (two-body model), the logarithmic
characteristic in the overload range also takes into account heat transfer to the coolant,
but this heat transfer becomes less significant as the overcurrent increases. At I = 6Iref,
for example, the tripping time increase is only about 1.4 % and is thus below the
specified accuracy of the protection device. In the low overcurrent range, selection of
the logarithmic characteristic guarantees significantly higher tripping times than selection
of the reciprocally squared characteristic (see Figure 3-206) since in the overload range
the reciprocally squared characteristic always disregards heat transfer to the cooling
medium. The possibility of choosing between two different tripping time characteristics
takes into account the fact that the user or the application may require a more restrictive
or less restrictive type of protection. For currents in excess of 10 Iref, the tripping times
are limited in the direction of lower values.
The equation for determining the setting value t6Iref can be derived from the above
equations for tripping time t. For this purpose the startup current Istartup and the
maximum permissible blocking time from cold tblock,cold for the asynchronous motor must
be known. Setting the overload protection function on the basis of the cold tripping time
where m0 = 0 % (cold curve) is permitted since the conditions for a machine at
operating temperature are automatically taken into account. The conditional equations
for the setting value t6Iref are therefore the following:
(Istartup )
2
Iref
" For the reciprocally squared characteristic we set: t 6IB = t block,cold
36
1
" For the logarithmic characteristic we set: t 6IB = t block,cold
(Istartup )
2
Iref
36 ln
(Istartup )
2
Iref 1
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-287

3 Operation
(continued)
3-206 Tripping time characteristics
3-288 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
10000
A
1000
B
C
100
D
E
t in s 10
F
0,1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
I / Iref
A = logarithmic characteristic D = reciprocally squared
(at t6Iref=100s) characteristic (at t6Iref=10s)
B = reciprocally squared E = logarithmic characteristic

characteristic (at t6Iref=100s) (at t6Iref=1s)
C = logarithmic characteristic F = reciprocally squared

(at t6Iref=10s) characteristic (at t6Iref=1s)
S8Z50D6A
3-207 Tripping characteristic of motor protection (at I/Iref 2.5 we have m=0.2, at I/Iref > 2.5 we have m=0)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-289

3 Operation
(continued)
Plausibility conditions
A number of plausibility conditions need to be observed in order to ensure that the
protected object is given optimum protection and that unintended tripping is prevented.
" If the permissible number of consecutive startups is set for the sequence 'three from
cold or two from warm' and if this set permissible number of consecutive startups is
also intended to be used up during operation, then the heating during startup in the
overload memory (OL_DA: Heat. dur. start-up) must not exceed 60 %. If the
calculation is based on a constant startup current (O L _ D A : S t a r t - u p c u r r e n t )
over the entire startup period, then we obtain the plausibility condition tstartup
0.6tblock,cold. However, since the startup current decreases during the course of the
startup time (O L _ D A: T i m e ta k e n f. s ta r tu p ), thereby causing rate of memory
charging to decrease as well, one can therefore assume that there is a corresponding
extra margin, for all practical purposes.
" The setting value for the overload protection function is determined on the basis of
the stated maximum permissible blocking time from the cold state tblock,cold.
However, when a machine at operating temperature is connected, a protective trip
during the tE period must be guaranteed. Therefore, it is always necessary to check
the plausibility condition tblock,cold 1.25tE and make sure the condition is met.
Initialization or plausibility
check of the thermal
replica
Under the following conditions, the P139 will not be able to track the thermal replica of
the protected object, and re-initialization of the thermal replica will be triggered :
" The power supply has been interrupted.

" Protection has been disabled.
" Motor protection has been disabled.
If the above conditions no longer apply, a plausibility check of the thermal replica is
automatically performed prior to cyclic processing.
" Operation condition 'machine running' but not 'starting up':

A cyclic plausibility check of the thermal replica is carried out such that if the overload
memorys charge is below 20 % it is increased to the minimum value of 20 %
( machine at operating temperature).
" Operation condition 'machine starting up':
Once the end of a startup is detected and the startup counter is decremented as a
result, the charging state of the overload memory is increased, if appropriate, to the
associated minimum value.
For each of the above procedures involving initialization or a plausibility check of the
thermal replica, the charging stage of the overload memory is always coupled to the
reading of the counter for number of startups still permitted (M P: St- u p s s t i l l
p e r m i t t . ) Therefore, if the overload memory is set automatically, the counter reading is
also changed to a plausible value as a function of the protection setting.
3-290 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.2 Special Overload Protection Cases
Logic function for the

operating mode with
(THERM)
For particular applications, the machine may be operated in the overload range for a
longer period of time. In such cases the motor protection function (MP) is too restrictive.
For these applications the MP and THERM protection functions are combined. The MP
protection function then serves as rotor protection and the THERM protection function as
stator protection.
If M P : O p e r a t i n g m o d e P S x is set to With THERM, the overload memory will be

incremented when the maximum r.m.s. phase current is above the set current threshold
current threshold M P: I S t U p > P S x . If this threshold is not exceeded, the memory
contents after a startup will initially be decremented until the mapping of the heat transfer
from the copper of the rotor to the rotor core is complete. Thereafter, the overload
memory will maintain a constant load and the thermal model of the thermal overload
protection function (THERM) will become active. With the onset of another startup of the
asynchronous motor (not the first startup), the thermal model of the THERM protection
function will be temporarily blocked during the startup time.
1000
100
t in s 10
0.1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
I / Iref
MP protection: set reciprocally squared characteristic, t6Iref = 1 s
THERM protection: set time constant 1 = 300 s, trip limit value = 100 %
S8Z50F3A
3-208 Tripping characteristic of motor protection with operating mode With THERM (cold characteristic)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-291

3 Operation
(continued)
Change of threshold for

reclosure permitted
Depending on the particular application, it is possible to change the overload memory
threshold value assumed for general use, when simulating protected object cooling, to
either 40 % (with three startups from cold or two from warm) or 22 % (with two startups
from cold or one from warm).
This set threshold value M P : R C p e r m i t t e d , < PSx can differ from these
average values so as to be more or less restrictive.
3-292 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-209 Overload protection in motor protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-293

3 Operation
(continued)
Startup counter
The motor startups are counted. The counter can be reset either individually or with
others as a group.
3-210 Startup counter
Reset of the thermal

replica
The thermal replica of motor heating can be reset at the local control panel or via a
binary signal input that is configured accordingly.
3-211 Reset of the thermal replica
3-294 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.31.3 Low Load Protection
The low load protection function makes it possible to monitor the load torque of a motor
drive for a minimum level. If the operating state recognition function detects a running
machine and the maximum r.m.s. phase current falls below the set operate value for a
set time, then an appropriate signal is generated. The signal needs to be configured to a
separate output relay, since it cannot be linked directly to either the general starting
signal or the trip command.
3-212 Overload protection in motor protection
3.31.4 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines
Motors that are operated in areas subject to explosion hazards must not reach a
temperature in the case of overload or blocking that would be critical for the existing air-
gas mixture.
The P139 is suitable for this type of application, which requires increased-safety
protection (Type e), but the device must be installed outside the hazardous area.
Please follow the setting instructions in Section 7.2: Protection of Increased-Safety

Machines.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-295

3 Operation
(continued)
3.32 Thermal Overload Protection (Function Group THERM)
Using this function, Thermal Overload Protection can be implemented. The Thermal
Overload Protection function can be operated together with the Motor Protection
function.
Thermal Overload
Protection
The power thermal overload function can be disabled or enabled from the local control
panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-213 Disabling or enabling Thermal Overload Protection
3-296 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Tripping characteristics
The maximum r.m.s. phase current is used to track a first-order thermal replica as
specified in IEC 255-8. The following parameters will govern the tripping parameters:
! The set thermal time constant () of the protected object

THERM: Tim.const. 1(>Ibl)PSx
! The set tripping level T H E R M : trip P S x
! The accumulated thermal load P.
! The updated measured coolant temperature c for the protected object.
! The maximum permissible coolant temperature c,max .
! The maximum permissible object temperature max
2
I
P
t = ln Iref
2
I c c,max
trip 1

Iref max c,max
Figure 3-214 shows the tripping characteristics for P = 0 % and with a measured
coolant temperature c identical to the maximum permissible coolant temperature.
The setting for the operating mode selects an absolute or relative replica. If the setting
is for Absolute replica, the P139 will operate with a fixed trip threshold trip of 100 %.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-297

3 Operation
(continued)
trip / %
10000
200
1000
110
/min
50
100
200
110
10 1000
50
t/min 200
1
110
50 30
0.1
0.01 1
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
0.00
I/Iref
D5Z50BE
3-214 Tripping characteristic of Thermal Overload Protection (tripping characteristics apply to P = 0 % and with a measured coolant
temperature c identical to the setting for the maximum permissible coolant temperature c,max)
3-298 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
To permit coolant temperature acquisition, one of the analog modules Y must be fitted
either the analog (I/O) module Y with a 20 mA current input and the PT100 input or the
temperature p/c board (the RTD module) with the temperature sensor inputs T1 to T9. If
neither module is available in the P139 then the setting T H E R M : C o o l a n t t e m p .
P S x is used in the calculation of the tripping time. The setting T H E R M : S e l e c t
m e a s . i n p u t P S x will determine which of these 11 inputs ("PT100", 20 mA, T1 to T9)
will influence the thermal replica.
One of the following signals is issued when an open circuit to a sensor has ocurred on
one of these analog inputs (see function description for 'Measured data input'):
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.

MEASI: PT100 open circuit
MEASI: Open circ. PT100 T1
to
The open circuit signal from the function group MEASI is forwarded to the Thermal
Overload Protection function.
By setting the parameter T H E R M : S e l . b a c k u p t h . P S x to one of the inputs

("PT100", 20 mA, T1 to T9) a temperature sensor with an open circuit can be replaced
by one of these backup temperature sensors connected to the corresponding input.
The setting T H E R M : B l . f . C T A f a u l t P S x defines whether the Thermal

Overload Protection function will be blocked in the event of a fault in the coolant
temperature acquisition.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-299

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for a setting without back-up temperature sensor and a configuration without measuring
card for temperature
Select.
meas.inputPSx
with CTA
Without
input
++
CTA error
MEASI Open circ.
SFMON: CTA error
MEASI Overload
input
MEASI Open circ.
inp.
CTA error
EXT
Bl. f. CTA
fault PSx
Block. by
CTA error
No
Yes
Select Bl. f. CTA ++ For Comp. fitt. of the

meas.inputPSx fault PSx
meas. card for temp.also
set
set 3: T1
set to
set 11: T9
19Z5220A_EN
3-215 Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition with an analog module (I/O) if the
parameter T H E R M : S e l . b a c k u p t h . P S x is set to 'Without'.
3-300 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
If the the temperature p/c board (the RTD module) is installed in addition to the analog
(I/O) module y one of the temperature sensors T1 to T9 may be selected by setting
T H E R M : S e l e c t m e a s . i n p u t P S x . Depending on the setting one of these open
circuit signals will be processed:
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp.

MEASI: PT100 open circuit
to
If one of the analog inputs (PT100, 20mA, T1 to T9) was selected as a backup by setting
T H E R M : S e l . b a c k u p t h . P S x the coolant temperature acquisition will continue
to operate with the selected backup sensor input when an open circuit to the main
sensor input has occurred. Only after the selected backup sensor has also become
defective the coolant temperature can no longer be measured and the signal T H E R M :
C T A f a u l t is issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-301

3 Operation
(continued)
Example for a setting with T2 as main sensor and T8 as back-up sensor
THERM: Select
meas.inputPSx
*
With CTA
4: T2
MEASI:Open circ.
T2
040 194
THERM: Sel. backup

th. PSx CTA error
*
10: T8 SFMON: CTA error
MEASI:Open circ.
T8
040 252
THERM:CTA error
EXT
038 062
Bl. f. CTA
fault PSx
Block. by
CTA error
No
Yes
Parameter- THERM: Select THERM: Sel. THERM: Bl. f. CTA

* meas.inputPSx backup th. PSx fault PS
set 1 072 177 072 080 072 178
set 2 073 177 073 080 073 178
set 3 074 177 074 080 074 178
set 4 075 177 075 080 075 178
19Z5221A_EN
3-216 Monitoring the coolant temperature acquisition with main and backup sensors
3-302 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Warning
A warning signal can be set in accordance with the set operate value T H E R M : R e l .
O / T w a r n i n g P S x Additionally, a pre-trip time limit can be set, when the time left
until tripping falls below this pre-trip limit, a warning will be issued.
If the current falls below the default threshold of 0.1 Iref, the buffer is discharged with the
set time constant T H E R M : T i m . c o n s t . 2 , < I b l P S x . The thermal replica may be
reset from an appropriately configured binary signal input. Resetting is possible even
when Thermal Overload Protection is disabled. Thermal Overload Protection can be
blocked via an appropriately configured binary signal input.
Operation together with the

Motor Protection function
If the Thermal Overload Protection function is operated together with the Motor
Protection function and if another startup of an asynchronous motor occurs (other than
the first startup), then the Thermal Overload Protection function will be temporarily
blocked during the startup time. If the Motor Protection function (MP) and the Thermal
Overload Protection function (THERM) are used simultaneously, then MP will act on
THERM protection and not vice versa.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-303

3 Operation
(continued)
3-217 Thermal Overload Protection
3-304 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-218 Resetting the thermal replica
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-305

3 Operation
(continued)
3.33 Unbalance Protection (Function Group I2>)
A two-stage unbalance protection function (I2>) is implemented in the P139.
unbalance protection
Unbalance protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
3-219 Enabling or disabling unbalance protection
3-306 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Operation
The presence or absence of unbalance is assessed on the basis of the negative-
sequence system current. The negative-sequence current is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds the set thresholds. After the set operate delay periods have elapsed,
a signal is issued. The following stages are available for the negative-sequence current:
! Unbalance stage Ineg> with time delay tIneg>.

! Unbalance stage Ineg>> with time delay tIneg>>.
The elapsing of all operate delays may be blocked via appropriately configured binary
signal inputs.
The unbalance protection signals can be configured to separate output relays. These
signals cannot be linked to the general starting signal but can be configured to the trip
command.
3-220 Unbalance protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-307

3 Operation
(continued)
3.34 Time-Voltage Protection (Function Group V<>)
The time-voltage protection function evaluates the fundamental component of the phase
voltages and of the neutral displacement voltage as well as the positive-sequence
voltage and negative-sequence voltage obtained from the fundamental components of
the three phase-to-ground voltages.
V<> protection
V<> protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel. Moreover,
enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
V<> protection readiness

V<> protection is ready if it is enabled and no fault has been detected in the voltage-
measuring circuit by measuring-circuit monitoring.
3-221 Disabling, enabling, and readiness of V<> protection
3-308 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the phase

voltages
The P139 checks the voltages to determine whether they exceed or fall below set
thresholds. Depending on the set operating mode of V<> protection, either the phase-to-
ground voltages (star operating mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (delta operating
mode) are monitored. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
3-222 Selection of measured variables
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-309

3 Operation
(continued)
3-223 Overvoltage monitoring
3-310 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-224 Undervoltage monitoring
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-311

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the positive-

sequence and negative-
sequence voltages
The P139 determines the positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages from the
fundamental components of the phase-to-ground voltages according to the formulas
given below, based on the M A I N : R o t a r y f i e l d setting.
Clockwise rotary field:

Positive-sequence voltage: V pos =
1
3
(
V A G + a VB G + a2 V CG )
Negative-sequence voltage: V neg =
1
3
(
V A G + a2 VB G + a V CG )
Anti-clockwise rotary field:
Positive-sequence voltage: V pos =
1
3
(
V A G + a2 VBG + a V CG )
Negative-sequence voltage: V neg =
1
3
(
V A G + a VB G + a2 V CG )
a = e j120
a 2 = e j240
3-312 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-225 Determining positive-sequence and negative-sequence voltages
The positive-sequence voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds or falls

below set thresholds, and the negative-sequence voltage is monitored to determine
whether it exceeds set thresholds. If the voltage exceeds or falls below the set
thresholds, then a signal is issued once the set operate delays have elapsed. The timer
stages may be blocked via appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of undervoltage monitoring are to be included in the trip commands, then
it is recommended that transient signals be used. Otherwise the trip command would
always be present when the system voltage was disconnected, and thus it would not be
possible to reclose the circuit breaker.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-313

3 Operation
(continued)
3-226 Monitoring the positive-sequence voltage
3-314 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-227 Monitoring the negative-sequence voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-315

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral-

displacement voltage
Depending on the setting, the V<> function monitors either the neutral-displacement
voltage calculated by the P139 from the three phase-to-ground voltages or the neutral-
displacement voltage formed externally via the fourth voltage measuring input (the
neutral-displacement voltage from the open delta winding of the voltage transformers, for
example see section entitled 'Conditioning of Measured Variables'). The neutral
displacement voltage is monitored to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. The
triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via appropriately configured
binary signal inputs.
3-316 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-229 Monitoring the neutral-displacement voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-317

3 Operation
(continued)
3.35 Over-/Underfrequency Protection (Function Group f<>)
The P139 monitors the selected voltage to determine whether it exceeds or falls below
set frequencies. The frequency is determined from the difference in time between the
zero crossings of the voltage (voltage zeroes). The over-/underfrequency protection
function has four stages. The operation of over-/underfrequency protection will be
explained below using the first stage as an example.
over-/underfrequency
protection
Over-/underfrequency protection can be disabled or enabled from the local control panel.
Moreover, enabling can be done separately for each parameter subset.
3-230 Disabling, enabling, and readiness of f<> protection
3-318 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Selecting the measuring

voltage
By selecting a measuring voltage setting, the user defines the voltage that is used by the
over-/underfrequency protection function for measurement purposes. This can be either
a phase-to-ground voltage or a phase-to-phase voltage.
3-231 Selecting the measuring voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-319

3 Operation
(continued)
Undervoltage blocking and

evaluation time
Over-/underfrequency protection requires a measuring voltage of sufficient magnitude.
Over-/underfrequency protection will be blocked instantaneously if the measuring voltage
falls below the set threshold of the undervoltage stage.
In order to avoid frequency stage starting caused by brief frequency fluctuations or

interference, the evaluation time can be set by the user. The operate conditions must be
satisfied for at least the duration of the set evaluation time in order for a signal to be
issued.
3-232 Undervoltage blocking and evaluation time setting
3-320 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Operating modes of over-/

underfrequency protection
For each stage of the over-/underfrequency protection function, the user can choose
between the following operating modes:
! Frequency monitoring
! Frequency monitoring combined with differential frequency gradient monitoring (df/dt)
! Frequency monitoring combined with mean frequency gradient monitoring (f/t)
Frequency monitoring
Depending on the setting, the P139 monitors the frequency to determine whether it
exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If an operate threshold in excess of the set
nominal frequency is set, the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency exceeds
the operate threshold. If an operate threshold below the set nominal frequency is set,
the P139 checks to determine whether the frequency falls below the operate threshold.
If it exceeds or falls below the set threshold, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage
can be blocked by way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
combined with differential
frequency gradient
monitoring (df/dt)
In this operating mode of the over-/ underfrequency protection function, the frequency is
also checked to determine whether the set frequency gradient is reached (in addition to
being monitored for exceeding or falling below the set threshold). Monitoring for
overfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency increase; monitoring for
underfrequency is combined with monitoring for a frequency decrease. If both operate
conditions are satisfied, a set timer stage is started. The timer stage can be blocked by
way of an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-321

3 Operation
(continued)
combined with mean
frequency gradient
monitoring (f/t)
The frequency gradient can differ for system disturbances in individual substations and
may vary over time due to power swings. Therefore it makes sense to take the mean
value of the frequency gradient into account for load-shedding systems.
In this operating mode of over-/underfrequency protection, frequency monitoring must be

set for 'underfrequency monitoring'.
Monitoring the mean value of the frequency gradient is started with the starting of
frequency monitoring. If the frequency decreases by the set value f within the set
time t, then the t/f monitoring function operates instantaneously and generates a trip
signal. If a frequency change does not lead to an operate decision of the monitoring
function, then the t/f monitoring function will be blocked until the underfrequency
monitoring function drops out. The trip signal can be blocked by way of an appropriately
configured binary signal input.
3-233 Operation of frequency monitoring combined with f/t monitoring
3-322 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-234 First stage of the over-/ underfrequency protection function
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-323

3 Operation
(continued)
3.36 Power Directional Protection (Function Group P<>)
The power directional protection function determines the active and reactive power from
the fundamental currents and voltages. The sign of the active or the reactive power,
respectively, is evaluated for direction determination
P<> protection
The power directional protection function can be disabled or enabled from the local
control panel. Moreover, enabling can be carried out separately for each parameter set.
3-235 Enabling or disabling power directional protection
Power determination
The P139 determines the active and reactive power from the three phase and the phase-
to-ground voltages. If the measuring-circuit monitoring function detects malfunctioning in
the voltage measuring circuit, power determination will be blocked.
Power monitoring
The P139 checks the determined power values to detect whether they exceed or fall
below set thresholds. The triggers are followed by timer stages that can be blocked via
appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
If the decisions of power monitoring are to be included in the trip commands when
values have fallen below set thresholds, then it is recommended that transient signals be
used. Otherwise, the trip command would always be present when the system voltage
was disconnected, and thus it would not be possible to close the circuit breaker again.
3-324 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-236 Power determination
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-325

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when set thresholds are
exceeded
The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it exceeds
the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting signal
is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
3-326 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Operate
delay P> PSx
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay P> PSx
tP> EXT
035 082
P<>: P> P<>: Signal

PSx P> delayed
035 087
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P> PSx
P<>: Starting
P>
035 086
P<>: Operate
delay P>>PSx
P<>: Release
delay P>>PSx
P<>: Blocking
tP>> EXT
035 083
P<>: P>> P<>: Signal

PSx P>> delayed
035 090
P<>: Diseng.
ratio P>>PSx
P<>: Starting
P>>
035 089
Diseng. Operate Release

ratio P> PSx delay P> PSx delay P> PSx
set
set
set
set
ratio P>>PSx delay P>>PSx delay P>>PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5271A_EN
3-237 Active power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-327

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

exceeded
The P139 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
directional decision is issued; if it is negative, a backward-directional decision results. A
setting determines whether a trip signal is triggered by a forward-directional, a backward-
directional or a non-directional decision.
3-238 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
3-328 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring

exceeded
The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it
exceeds the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power exceeds the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
signal is followed by the set operate and resetting delays.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-329

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Operate
delay Q> PSx
P<>: Release
P<>: Blocking delay Q> PSx
tQ> EXT
035 084
P<>: Q> P<>: Signal

PSx Q> delayed
035 093
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q> PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>
035 092
P<>: Operate
delay Q>>PSx
P<>: Release
delay Q>>PSx
P<>: Blocking
tQ>> EXT
035 085
P<>: Q>> P<>: Signal

PSx Q>> delayed
035 096
P<>: Diseng.
ratio Q>>PSx
P<>: Starting
Q>>
035 095

ratio Q> PSx delay Q> PSx delay Q> PSx
set
set
set
set
ratio Q>>PSx delay Q>>PSx delay Q>>PSx
set
set
set
set
19Z5270A_EN
3-239 Reactive power monitoring when set thresholds are exceeded
3-330 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

exceeded
The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
3-240 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when set thresholds are exceeded
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-331

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power monitoring

when values fall below
set thresholds
The P139 monitors the active power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the active power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
3-332 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking
tP< EXT
035 050
P<>: P<
PSx P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
P<>: Diseng. P<>: Release

ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx
P<>: P P<>: Signal

P< delayed
035 055
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
P<
035 054
P<>: Fault
P<>: Blocking P<
tP<< EXT 035 057
035 051
P<>: P<< P<>: Operate

PSx delay P<<PSx

ratio P<<PSx delay P<<PSx
P<>: Signal P<<

delayed
035 061
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
P<<
035 060
P<>: Fault
P<<
035 063
P<>: tWisch- P<>: tWisch-

impuls PSx impuls PSx
*
P<>: tP<
abgel. Wischer
035 056
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
035 062
P<>: tP</tP<<
elaps.trans
035 178
Parameter P<>: P< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release

PSx ratio P< PSx delay P< PSx delay P< PSx
set 1 017 030 017 034 017 060 017 226
set 2 017 031 017 035 017 061 017 227
set 3 017 032 017 036 017 062 017 228
set 4 017 033 017 037 017 063 017 229
Parameter P<>: P<< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
PSx ratio P<<PSx delay P<<PSx delay P<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 234 017 238 017 242 017 246 018 246
set 2 017 235 017 239 017 243 017 247 018 247
set 3 017 236 017 240 017 244 017 248 018 248
set 4 017 237 017 241 017 245 017 249 018 249
19Z5272A_EN
3-241 Active power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-333

3 Operation
(continued)
Active power direction

set thresholds
The P139 determines the sign of the active power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
3-334 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Starting
P<
035 054
Appar. power S
> 0,010 Snom
Direction
forward
backward
P<>: Signal P< non-directional

delayed
035 055 &
P<>: Trip signal
& P<
035 058
& >1
&
P<>: tP< elapsed

trans. &
035 056
P<>: Trip signal P<
& >1
& trans.
035 059
&
P<>: Starting
P<<
035 060
Direction
forward
backward
non-directional
P<>: Signal P<<
delayed
035 061
&
P<>: Trip signal
& P<<
& >1 035 064
&
P<>: tP<<
elapsed trans.
&
035 062
P<>: Trip sig.
& >1 & P<< trans.
035 065
P<>: Direction P<>: Direction
Parameter
P< PSx P<< PSx &
set 1 017 230 017 250
set 2 017 231 017 251
set 3 017 232 017 252
set 4 017 233 017 253
19Z5273A_EN
3-242 The direction-dependent trip signal of the active power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-335

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
P<
035 054
P<>: Operate
delay P< PSx
*
P<>: Release
delay P< PSx
* 2
P<>: Signal
P< delayed
035 055
P<>: tP<
elapsed trans.
035 056 3
P<>: Fault
P<
035 057
P<>: Operate
1 delay P< PSx *
P<>: Release
2 delay P< PSx *
P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *
Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay P< PSx delay P< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 017 060 017 226 018 246
set 2 017 061 017 227 018 247
set 3 017 062 017 228 018 248
set 4 017 063 017 229 018 249
19Z5278A_EN
3-243 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the active power monitoring
3-336 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power monitoring

set thresholds
The P139 monitors the reactive power with two-stage functions to detect when it falls
below the set thresholds. The resetting ratio of the threshold stages can be set.
When the reactive power falls below the set thresholds, a starting results. The starting
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-337

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Blocking
tQ< EXT
035 052
P<>: Q<
PSx P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx

ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
P<>: Q P<>: Signal

Q< delayed
035 067
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066
P<>: Fault
Q<
P<>: Blocking 035 069
tQ<< EXT
035 053
P<>: Q<<
PSx P<>: Operate
delay Q<<PSx

ratio Q<<PSx delay Q<< PSx
P<>: Signal Q<<

delayed
035 011
Setting blocked
P<>: Starting
Q<<
035 010
P<>: Fault
Q<<
035 049
P<>: tTransient P<>: tTransient

pulse PSx pulse PSx
*
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
035 068
P<>: tQ<<
elapsed trans.
035 016
P<>: tQ</tQ<<
elapsed trans.
035 179
Parameter P<>: Q< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release

PSx ratio Q< PSx delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx
set 1 018 035 018 044 018 052 018 056
set 2 018 036 018 045 018 053 018 057
set 3 018 037 018 046 018 054 018 058
set 4 018 038 018 047 018 055 018 059
Parameter P<>: Q<< P<>: Diseng. P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient
PSx ratio Q<<PSx delay Q<<PSx delay Q<<PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 085 018 095 018 213 018 236 018 246
set 2 018 086 018 096 018 214 018 237 018 247
set 3 018 087 018 097 018 215 018 238 018 248
set 4 018 088 018 098 018 216 018 239 018 249
19Z5276A_EN
3-244 Reactive power monitoring when values fall below set thresholds
3-338 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Reactive power direction

set thresholds
The P139 determines the sign of the reactive power. If the sign is positive, a forward-
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-339

3 Operation
(continued)
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066
Appar. power
S > 0,010 Snom
Direction
forward
backward
P<>: Signal Q< non-directional

delayed
035 067 &
P<>: Trip signal
& Q<
035 155
& >1
&
P<>: tQ< elapsed

trans. &
035 068
P<>: Trip sig. Q<
& >1
& trans.
035 156
&
P<>: Starting
Q<<
035 010
Direction
forward
backward
non-directional
P<>: Signal Q<<
delayed
035 011
&
P<>: Trip signal
& Q<<
& >1 035 176
&
P<>: tQ<< elapsed

trans.
&
035 016
P<>: Trip sig.
& >1 & Q<< trans.
035 177
P<>: Direction P<>: Direction
Parameter
Q< PSx Q<<PSx &
set 1 018 081 018 242
set 2 018 082 018 243
set 3 018 083 018 244
set 4 018 084 018 245
19Z5277A_EN
3-245 The direction-dependent trip signal of the reactive power protection function when values fall below set thresholds
3-340 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
1
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066
P<>: Operate
delay Q< PSx
*
P<>: Release
delay Q< PSx
* 2
P<>: Signal
Q< delayed
035 067
P<>: tQ<
elapsed trans.
035 068 3
P<>: Fault
Q<
035 069
P<>: Operate
1 delay Q< PSx *
P<>: Release
2 delay Q< PSx *
P<>: tTransient
3 pulse PSx *
Parameter P<>: Operate P<>: Release P<>: tTransient

delay Q< PSx delay Q< PSx pulse PSx
set 1 018 052 018 056 018 246
set 2 018 053 018 057 018 247
set 3 018 054 018 058 018 248
set 4 018 055 018 059 018 249
19Z5279A_EN
3-246 Performance of the transient signal and the fault signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-341

3 Operation
(continued)
Starting signal with

direction
Appar. power S > 0,010 Snom
P<>: Starting
P>
035 086
P<>: Starting
P>>
035 089 P<>: Direction P
>1 & forw.
P<>: Starting 035 181
P<
035 054
P<>: Starting
P<<
035 060
P<>: Direction P
& backw.
035 191
19Z5274A_EN
3-247 Directional starting signal issued by the active power monitoring
P<>: Direction Q
& forw.
035 193
P<>: Starting
Q>
035 092
P<>: Starting
Q>> P<>: Direction Q
035 095 >1 & backw.
035 194
P<>: Starting
Q<
035 066
P<>: Starting
Q<<
035 010
Appar. power S > 0,010 Snom
19Z5275A_EN
3-248 Directional starting signal issued by the reactive power monitoring
3-342 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.37 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
An adjustable timer stage for monitoring circuit breaker action is started with the general
trip signal 1. This timer stage is also triggered if, in the presence of a general starting
signal, a trip decision from an external protection device is acquired through a signal
input. The general trip signal 2 of the P139 is not used to trigger circuit breaker failure
protection. If the fault still persists when the timer stage elapses, the CB failure signal is
issued.
The input of a trip on starting signal via an appropriately configured binary signal input
generates an undelayed trip signal, provided a general starting signal is present.
3-249 Circuit breaker failure protection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-343

3 Operation
(continued)
3.38 Measuring-circuit Monitoring (Function Group MCMON)
Monitoring of the reference voltage has been added to the measuring-circuit monitoring
function.
The P139 monitors the phase currents and voltages for balance during healthy system
operation. If either unbalance or the lack of measuring voltage is detected, action is
taken to prevent the unit from malfunctioning.
3-250 Monitoring signals
Measuring-circuit monitoring can be deactivated by the appropriate setting. In the event

of a fault, measuring-circuit monitoring is blocked.
3-344 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Current monitoring
Current monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
! Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled.

! The difference between the maximum and the minimum phase current exceeds
0.05"Inom.
! A general starting signal is absent.
Current monitoring is based on checking the difference in the phase current magnitudes
under the following operate condition:
IP,max IP,min
I diff >
IP,max
where IP,max is the highest of the three phase currents and IP,min is the lowest; Idiff> is the
set operate value M C M O N : I d i f f > . In order to suppress short-term transients, the
measuring stage Idiff> is followed by a set operate-delayed timer stage M C M O N :
Operate delay.
If connection is to two current transformers only (phase ANC connection only) evaluation
of current IB can be disabled by an appropriate selection for the operating mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-345

3 Operation
(continued)
3-251 Monitoring the current-measuring circuits
3-346 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Voltage monitoring
Voltage monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
! Measuring-circuit monitoring is enabled.

In addition to these conditions, either a minimum current having the default threshold
setting of I > 0.05 Inom or the closed position of the circuit breaker contacts can be used
as enabling criteria. If at least one of the phase-to-phase voltages falls below the set
trigger value M C M O N : V m i n < for the period of the operate-delayed timer stage
M C M O N : O p e r a t e d e l a y , then the M C M O N : U n d e r v o l t a g e signal is issued.
The signal M C M O N : M e a s . v o l t a g e o . k . is generated if all three phase-to-

phase voltages exceed the fixed threshold of 0.65 Vnom and there is no incorrect phase
sequence.
Phase-sequence
monitoring
Phase-sequence monitoring is only enabled if the following conditions are met
simultaneously:
! Measuring circuit monitoring is enabled.

! Phase-sequence monitoring is enabled.
# All three phase-to-ground voltages exceed 0.4"Vnom.
In order to suppress short-term transients, the phase-sequence monitoring trigger is
followed by a set operate delay of 1 s. Once the operate delay has elapsed, the signal
M C M O N : P h a s e s e q u e n c e f a u l t y is issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-347

3 Operation
(continued)
3-252 Monitoring the voltage-measuring circuits
3-348 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
"Fuse Failure" monitoring

of the reference voltage
The P139 includes "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage function, which is
required by the 'Automatic Synchronism Check' (ASC).
Fuse Failure" monitoring is only possible if the ASC function has been configured. This
is specifically applied when no auxiliary contact is available on the voltage transformer
m.c.b. If "Fuse Failure" monitoring is not wanted it can be disabled from the local control
panel.
"Fuse Failure" monitoring must be able to discriminate between a short circuit in the
three-phase network being monitored and a reference voltage missing because of a
short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage.
A short circuit or an open circuit in the secondary circuits of the reference voltage is
present when the following conditions are met:
# The circuit breaker is closed.

# The difference in voltages on the line side and the busbar must exceed 0.1 Vnom .
3-253 "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-349

3 Operation
(continued)
3.39 Limit Value Monitoring (Function Group LIMIT)
Limit Value Monitoring is not designed to be a high-speed protection function; it is only

applied for monitoring and signaling purposes as well as to monitor temperature limits.
Enable/disable the Limit

Value Monitoring function
The Limit Value Monitoring function can be enabled or disabled from the integrated local
control panel.
Monitoring phase currents

and phase voltages
With the P139 monitoring of the following measured values is possible in order to
determine if they exceed set upper limit values or fall below set lower limit values:
! Maximum phase current

! Minimum phase current
! Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
! Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
! Maximum phase-to-ground voltage
! Minimum phase-to-ground voltage
If any of the measured values exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-350 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-254 Limit Value Monitoring of minimum and maximum phase current
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-351

3 Operation
(continued)
3-255 Limit Value Monitoring of maximum and minimum phase-to-phase voltage and maximum and minimum phase-to-ground voltage
3-352 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the neutral

displacement voltage
The neutral displacement voltage, calculated from the three phase-to-ground voltages, is
monitored by two stages to determine whether it exceeds set thresholds. If any of the
thresholds are exceeded, then a signal is issued after the associated time period has
elapsed.
3-256 Monitoring the neutral displacement voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-353

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the linearized

measured DC values
The direct current, linearized by the analog measured data input, is monitored by two
stages to determine if it exceeds or falls below set thresholds. If the measured value
exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is
issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
3-257 Monitoring the linearized measured DC values
3-354 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Monitoring the reference

voltage
The reference voltage Vref (when synchrocheck VT is fitted) is monitored by two stages
to determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values. If the measured value exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: General
enable USER
014 010
LIMIT:
Enabled
040 074
0: no
MAIN: Device 1: yes
on-line LIMIT: Vref> LIMIT: tVref>
003 030
042 144 042 148
1: yes (= on)
LIMIT: tVref>
elapsed
042 152
LIMIT: Vref>> LIMIT: tVref>>

042 145 042 149
LIMIT: tVref>>
Vref elapsed
042 153
LIMIT: Vref< LIMIT: tVref<

042 146 042 150
LIMIT: tVref<
elapsed
042 154
LIMIT: Vref<< LIMIT: tVref<<

042 147 042 151
LIMIT: tVref<<
abgelaufen
042 155
19Z5215A_EN
3-258 Monitoring the reference voltage
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-355

3 Operation
(continued)

"PT 100" temperature
value
The temperature value that is measured by the P139 with a resistance thermometer
(PT 100) connected to the analog (I/O) module Y, is monitored by two stages to
determine whether it exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower limit
values. If the measured value exceeds or falls below the corresponding upper or lower
limit values then a signal is issued after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT: Enabled LIMIT LIMIT
MAIN: Protection
active
MEASI: Temperature LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
LIMIT Starting
LIMIT LIMIT
LIMIT
elapsed
19Z5212A_EN
3-259 Monitoring the measured "PT 100" temperature value
3-356 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)

temperature values T1 to
T9
The temperatures that are measured by the P139 using temperature sensors connected
to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) are each monitored by two stages to
determine if they exceed or fall below set thresholds. If any of the measured values
exceed or fall below the corresponding upper or lower limit values then a signal is issued
after the associated time period has elapsed.
LIMIT: Starting
T1>
040 200
LIMIT Enabled LIMIT: T1> LIMIT: tT1>
014 120 014 122

GRUND Schutz ein
LIMIT: tT1>
elapsed
MEASI Temperature
T1 040 202
LIMIT: Starting
T1>>
040 201
LIMIT: T1>> LIMIT: tT1>>
014 121 014 123
LIMIT: tT1>>
elapsed
040 203
LIMIT: Starting
T1<
040 204
LIMIT: T1< LIMIT: tT1<
014 124 014 126

LIMIT: tT1<
elapsed
040 206
LIMIT: Starting
T1<<
040 205
LIMIT: T1<< LIMIT: tT1<<
014 125 014 127

LIMIT: tT1<<
elapsed
040 207
19Z5213A_EN
3-260 Monitoring the measured temperature value T1 as an example for measured temperature values T1 to T9
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-357

3 Operation
(continued)
Open circuit PT100

The open circuit signals from the temperature sensors, issued by the function group
M E A S I (see function description for 'Measured data input) are forwarded to the Limit
Value Monitoring function. An open circuit signal M E A S I : O p e n c i r c . P T 1 0 0 T x
(x = 1 to 9) will lead to blocking of these signals:
LIMIT: Starting Tx>, LIMIT: Starting Tx>>,

LIMIT: Starting Tx<, LIMIT: Starting Tx<<,
LIMIT: Starting Tx> elapsed, LIMIT: Starting Tx>> elapsed,
LIMIT: Starting Tx< elapsed, LIMIT: Starting Tx<< elapsed
Backup sensors
When an open circuit has occurred the 2-out-of-3-logic available with the Limit Value
Monitoring function will revert to backup sensors.
The selection of such backup sensors for the Limit Value Monitoring function is made in
the function group M E A S I .
For this purpose the temperature sensors connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD
module) are divided into three groups:
Group 1: T1, T2, T3

Group 2: T4, T5, T6
Group 3: T7, T8, T9
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to 'Without' the Limit Value

Monitoring function will operate without backup sensors.
If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 -2, the defective

temperature sensor from group 1 is replaced by the corresponding sensor from group 2.
If the backup temperature sensor from group 2 also fails it will be replaced by the
corresponding sensor from group 3, under the assumption that
M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x is set to Group 1 2/3.
The association of backup temperature sensors is listed below:
Main sensor Backup sensor from group 2 Backup sensor from group 3
With setting: With setting:
Group 1 -2 Group 1 2/3
or
Group 1 -2/3
T1 T4 T7
T2 T5 T8
T3 T6 T9
Should temperature sensor T1 fail, with the setting Group 1 2/3, it will replaced by T4.
Should temperature sensor T4 also fail it will replaced by T7.
2-out-of-3 monitoring
Limit values resulting from temperature values measured by main sensors (from
group 1) or their corresponding backup sensors are processed by the '2-out-of-3' Limit
Value Monitoring function, L I M I T : 2 o u t o f 3 w i t h T 1 , 2 , 3 . This is displayed in the
following figure.
3-358 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
MEASI: enabled MEASI: Backup MEASI: Backup

TempSensor PSx TempSensor PSx
* PS1: 004 243
035 008
PS2: 004 244
PS3: 004 245
without
PS4: 004 246
Group 1 - 2
Group 1 - 2/3
MEASI: T1 open circ.

040 193
LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed LIMIT: tTx>>

040 203 elapsed

040 208
LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed Tx: T1 or

041 153 backup sensor
(T4 or T7)
040 219
LIMIT: tT7>> elapsed

041 183

040 194

040 213 elapsed
tTx>> for
MEASI: T5 open circ. 2 of 3 LIMIT: 2 of 3
limit values with T1,2,3
040 209
elapsed 041 248
(T5 or T8)
040 252

041 193

040 195

040 163 elapsed

040 218

(T6 or T9)
040 253

041 243
19Z5210A_EN
3-261 Using backup sensors ("B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r " ) with the '2-out-of-3' Limit Value Monitoring function
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-359

3 Operation
(continued)
All functions associated with temperature sensors operate in a parallel mode. In this
way the '2-out-of-3' Limit Value Monitoring function, L I M I T : 2 o u t o f 3 w i t h T 4 , 5 , 6
may use temperature sensors from group 2 even though these backup sensors are
configured to group 1.
MEASI: T4 open circuit

040 208 LIMIT: tT4>>
elapsed,
LIMIT: tT4>> elapsed without
041 153 open circuit
MEASI: T5 open circuit tTx>> for

040 209 LIMIT: tT5>> 2 of 3 LIMIT: 2 of 3
elapsed, limit values with T4,5,6
LIMIT: tT5>> elapsed without elapsed 041 249

LIMIT: tT6>>
040 218
elapsed,
open circuit
041 173

040 219 LIMIT: tT7>>
elapsed,
MEASI: T8 open circuit tTx>> for

040 252 LIMIT: tT8>> 2 of 3 LIMIT: 2 of 3
elapsed, limit values with T7,8,9
LIMIT: tT8>> elapsed without elapsed 041 250

LIMIT: tT9>>
040 253
elapsed,
open circuit
041 243
19Z5211A_EN
3-262 Limit Value Monitoring function '2-out-of-3' for temperature sensors T4 to T6 and T7 to T9. If M E A S I : B a c k u p T e m p S e n s o r P S x
is set to 'Without' this scheme will also apply to temperature sensors T1 to T4.
3-360 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Application example
A motor protection application is shown in the figure below with temperature sensors T1
to T9 connected to the temperature p/c board (RTD module) and a "PT 100" resistance
thermometer connected to the analog (I/O) module Y.
These temperature sensors, for example, can be distributed as follows:
! On the stator there are three temperature sensors as the main sensors (group 1: T1,
T2, T3) and three backup sensors (group 2: T4, T5, T6) used by the '2-out-of-3' Limit
Value Monitoring function
! One temperature sensor on each of the bearings is used for individual Limit Value
signaling
! One main and one backup sensor inside the coolant are used by the thermal replica
in the Thermal Overload protection
RTD RTD Phase RTD

Main Temp. Sensor A B C Ambient temperature /
RTD Coolant temperature
Backup Temp. Sensor
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
RTD
Stator
RTD
RTD
Rotor
Bearing Bearing
19B5236A_EN
3-263 Temperature measurements on a motor to be used with the Limit Value Monitoring function (L I M I T ) and the Thermal Overload protection
(THERM)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-361

3 Operation
(continued)
3.40 Programmable Logic (Function Group LOGIC)
Programmable (or user-configurable) logic enables the user to link binary signals within
a framework of Boolean equations.
Binary signals in the P139 can be linked by logical OR or AND operations or by

additional NOT operations by setting L O G I C : F c t . a s s i g n m . o u t p . n , where
n = 1 to 32. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The
following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR.
A maximum of 32 elements can be processed in one Boolean equation. In addition to

the signals generated by the P139, initial conditions for governing the equations can be
set from the local control panel, through binary signal inputs, or through the serial
interfaces.
Logical operations can be controlled through the binary signal inputs in different ways.
The binary input signals L O G I C : I n p u t n E X T (n = 1 to 16) have an updating
function, whereas the input signals L O G I C : S e t n E X T (n = 1 to 8) are stored. The
logic can only be controlled from the binary signal inputs that are configured for
L O G I C : S e t n E X T if the corresponding reset input (L O G I C : R e s e t n E X T )
has also been configured for a binary signal input. If only one or neither of the two
functions is configured, then this is interpreted as Logic externally set. If the input
signals of the two binary signal inputs are implausible (such as when they both have a
logic value of 1), then the last plausible state remains stored in memory.
3-362 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-264 Control of logic operations via setting parameters or stored input signals
The L O G I C : T r i g g e r n signal is a triggering function that causes a 100 ms pulse to

be issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-363

3 Operation
(continued)
3-265 Setting options for programmable logic (shown here for output 1)
3-364 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another
higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of nested Boolean
equations. The equations are processed in the sequence defined by the order of each
equation so that the end result of a sequence of nested Boolean equations is given by
the highest-order equation.
The output signal of each equation is fed to a separate timer stage that has two timer
elements and a choice of operating modes. This offers the possibility of assigning a
freely configurable time characteristic to the output signal of each Boolean equation. In
the Minimum time operating mode, the setting of timer stage t2 has no effect. Figures
3-266 to 3-270 show the time characteristics for the various timer stage operating
modes.
Note: If the unit is set to off-line, the equations are not processed and all outputs are
set to a logic value of '0'.
3-266 Operating mode 1: Operate/release delay
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-365

3 Operation
(continued)
3-267 Operating mode 2: Operate-delay/pulse duration
3-268 Operating mode 3: Operate/release delay, retriggerable
3-366 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-269 Operating mode 4: Operate-delay/pulse duration, retriggerable
3-270 Operating mode 5: Minimum time
Through appropriate configuration, it is possible to assign the function of a binary input

signal to each output of a logic operation. The output of the logic operation then has the
same effect as if the binary signal input to which this function has been assigned were
triggered.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-367

3 Operation
(continued)
3-271 Signal assignment to outputs of Boolean equations
3-368 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.41 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units

(Function Groups DEV01 to DEV10)
The P139 is designed to control up to 6 switchgear units. The Bay Panel type defines
the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
Defining a Bay Panel type

With the selection of a Bay Panel type, the following definitions are made:
! Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.

! Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P139.
! The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open / Close' command control of the
switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.
! Binary inputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
! Binary outputs required for switchgear units with direct motor control.
When a Bay Panel type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and
the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o -
a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this
configuration. The list of Bay Panel types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs
and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear
units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P139 and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit
into the functional sequence of the P139 (processing of status signals only or controlling
and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example.
Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in
the function diagrams by function group C O M M 1 : with a blank address [--- ---], it will
indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been
assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as signal 1 to signal n
are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-369

3 Operation
(continued)
3.41.1 Processing Status Signals from Manually Operated Switchgear Units
The status signals Open and Closed are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals
conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see: Main Functions of the P139)
are used for further processing. If no logic value of '1' is present at any of the two binary
signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the
running time or until the switchgear unit is back to a defined position - either Open or
Closed - the signal Intermediate position is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
The signal Faulty position is issued if the switchgear unit does not return to the Open
or Closed position once the running time monitoring and the delay time set in M AIN :
D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is
set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is
no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be
signaled.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole signal as the status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a
configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated
switchgear unit is set to Open while the input has a logic value of '1'.
3-370 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-272 Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-371

3 Operation
(continued)
3.41.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units
Local or remote control of

external devices
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. The selection of the
control point is described in the section entitled Configuration of the Bay Panel and of
the Measured Value Panels; Selection of the Control Point. Usually, remote control is
carried out via the communication interface, local control via the keys on the local control
panel. Moreover, the switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured
appropriately (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or D E V x x :
I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l determines
whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.
Selection of the switchgear

unit to be controlled and
generating a switching
request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to
this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the local control panel using
the selection key and pressing the Open or Close key to generate the switching
request. For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be
configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the
communication interface, the control commands Open or Close will also address the
switchgear unit to be controlled.
3-372 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-273 Generating a switching request
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-373

3 Operation
(continued)
Enabling switching
commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P139 checks the interlocking conditions
defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted
or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function
can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a
switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the
conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.
3-274 Assignment of the equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands; enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function
3-374 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Bay interlock for operation

with the station interlock
function
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a
communication link with the substation control level. If the P139 detects a
communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an
automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay
interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching
request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will
then be a check - taking into account the station interlock functions as to whether
switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling
command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay
interlock is still present. Optionally, the Open or Close switching operation can be
carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the
bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be
considered.
3-275 Enabling of the switching commands by the station interlock
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-375

3 Operation
(continued)
Linking protection
commands to switching
commands
For circuit breakers, the Open command can be linked to the protection trip signals.
The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection
functions. The Bay Panel type defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers.
The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly
without a check of the interlocking conditions.
3-276 Linking to the protection commands
3-376 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Issue of switching
commands
Depending on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . m o d e c m d . ) set for
commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to
time control.
When the automatic synchronism check (ASC) is active and the parameter
A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'automatic synchr. control' a 'Close' request
will automatically issue a 'Close' command for the circuit breaker after a close enable'
was issued by the ASC.
However if A S C : S y s t e m i n t e g r a t . P S x is set to 'automatic synchr. checkl' ASC

will not interfere with any switching commands. Data generated and continuously
updated by the ASC function is transmitted when configurations have been set
accordingly to the central control station, where operators may make decisions as to
which external device is to be given a switching command.
External termination control

If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control
process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then
be necessary to set the P139 at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary
signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination
contacts.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-377

3 Operation
(continued)
3-277 Issue of switching commands
3-378 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Time control of switching

commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is
started. The P139 expects a status signal - Open or Closed to be issued by the
switchgear unit within the duration of running time monitoring. The status signal for the
position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured
binary inputs on the P139, that can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression mode.
For a description of debouncing and chatter suppression see the section entitled Main
Functions of the P139. For the duration of running time monitoring or until the contacts
on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either Open or Closed - the
signal Intermediate position is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status

will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is operating. Once the contacts on
the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their Open or Closed
position after the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal
'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a
delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time period has elapsed and there is no status
signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W .

e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No) the switching command is terminated after the set
latching time has elapsed, when either the Open or Closed position status signal is
received or the set time period for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Figure 3-
273).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes) the switching command is terminated, after the set
latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time
period for running time monitoring is active.
Switch truck
For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to
configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration
has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is
set to Open while the input has a logic value of '1'.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-379

3 Operation
(continued)
3-278 Monitoring of switching commands
3-380 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring without external

run-back of command,
example for switching operation close
DEV01: Close
command
210 029 1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4
1 10 ms
3 DEV01: Latching time 210 005
4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
19Z5201A_EN
3-279 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-381

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring with external

run-back of command,
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
DEV01:Inp.asg.
end Close
210 016
1 10 ms
19Z5202A_EN
3-280 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control
3-382 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Time control for direct

motor control
The control sequence described above applies to all switchgear units operated via an
Open contact or a Close contact. For bays with direct motor control of load
disconnecting switches, isolating links or grounding switches, the following modified
control sequence described below applies to motor-operated switchgear units. The list
of Bay Panel types shows which bay types are defined for direct motor control. An
example for the connection of a bay with direct motor control is illustrated in Chapter 5
Installation and Connection.
If a Bay Panel type with direct motor control is selected, a binary input for the status
signal of the motor relay and one output relay each to trigger the motor relay and the
shunt windings will have to be configured. In the example illustrated in Figure 3-281, the
single-pole command C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 2 is defined for control of the motor
relay, the single-pole command C M D _ 1 : C o m m a n d C 0 1 1 is defined for control of
the shunt windings and the single-pole signal S I G _ 1 : S i g n a l S 0 1 2 (debounced
and conditioned by chatter suppression) is defined for the status signal of the motor
relay.
After triggering the motor relay, a set monitoring time period is started during which the
status signal must be issued by the motor relay. If the status signal is not received
during this time period the 'Close' command issued to the output relays, configured to
control the motor relay and the shunt windings, is terminated. In addition a signal is
transferred to the substation control level.
If the status signal from the motor relay is issued during the monitoring time period, the
running time monitoring of the motor relay is started simultaneously with this status
signal. Monitoring of the switching command is then the same as with
electromechanically operated switchgear units.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W .

e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No) the Close command to the motor relay is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the Open or Closed
position status signal is received or the set time period for running time monitoring has
elapsed (see Figure 3-273). The monitoring time period is again started with the
termination of the Close command to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the
control commands 'Open' or Close are also terminated. The same is valid for the shunt
windings.
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t .

c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes) the switching command to the motor relay is
terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is
issued while the set time period for running time monitoring is active. The switching
command to the motor relay is always terminated after the set latching time has elapsed.
The monitoring time period is again started with the termination of the Close command
to the motor relay and after it has elapsed the control commands 'Open' or Close are
also terminated.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-383

3 Operation
(continued)
3-281 Control and monitoring of the motor relay
3-384 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
CMD_1: Command
C011
200 051
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2
CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
4
1 10 ms
2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060
4 DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
19Z5203A_EN
3-282 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control without external termination
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-385

3 Operation
(continued)
Time monitoring for direct motor-control

without external run-back of command,
DEV01: Close
command
210 029
1 2
CMD_1: Command
C012
200 056 2
3
DEV01: Switch.
device open
210 036
DEV01: Switch.
device closed
210 037
DEV01: Inp.
asg.end Close
210 016
1 10 ms
2 MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060
19Z5204A_EN
3-283 Sequence of time monitoring for direct motor control with external termination
3-386 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.42 Interlocking Logic (Function Group ILOCK)
The switching commands to the controllable switchgear units of the bay are not enabled
until the interlock conditions have been checked. The interlocks are defined in the form
of Boolean equations in the interlocking logic function.
The choice of the bay type automatically defines the bay interlock conditions (or
equations) for the Open and Close operations of the individual switchgear units in the
bay. Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations for operation with or
without station interlock (see the section entitled List of Bay Types in the Appendix).
These automatically defined interlock conditions - determined by the choice of bay type -
can be modified by the users at any time to fit their station requirements. For the bay
interlock, the following signals acquired by the P139 are linked by logic operations:
! Function blocks 1 and 2

! The programmable logic outputs
! The signals from binary inputs after debouncing and chatter suppression
! The position signals of the switchgear units after debouncing and chatter suppression
A maximum of 32 equations with 32 equation elements each are available for definition
of the interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of
brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: NOT before AND before OR.
The output signal of one equation can be processed as the input signal for another
higher-order equation, and this makes it possible to have a sequence of nested Boolean
equations.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-387

3 Operation
(continued)
3-284 Interlocking logic illustrated for equation 1
388 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3.43 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1)
Commands can be sent to the P139 through the communication interface. If the P139
receives the command, then the appropriately configured output relay is triggered and a
signal is issued - provided that remote control has been enabled.
The user may select the operating mode for any single-pole command. The following
settings are possible:
! Long command
! Short command
! Persistent command
If the user selects either a long or a short command, then the output relay is only
triggered for the time period set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd.
The following figure shows the setting options and the functional sequence for command
C001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole commands.
3-285 Functional sequence for single-pole commands, illustrated for command C001
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-389

3 Operation
(continued)
3.44 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1)
Binary, single-pole signals from the station can be transmitted by the P139 to the control
station through appropriately configured binary signal inputs.
The input signal is conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see: 'Main
Functions of the P139). The conditioned signal is then available as S I G _ 1 : L o g i c
signal xxx.
Signaling characteristics can be defined through the communication interface by setting

the operating mode. The following settings are possible:
! Without function:
! Start/end signal
! Transient signal
If the setting is Without function, then no telegram is sent when there is a state change at
the binary input. If the setting is Start/end signal then a telegram is sent each time there
is a state change. The requirement for sending the 'start' signal is that the logic '1' signal
be available for the set minimum time. If the setting is Transient signal, telegrams are
only sent if there is a state change from logic '0' to logic '1'.
The following figure shows the setting options and the functional sequence for signal
S001. Equivalent considerations apply to all other single-pole signals.
3-390 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
3-286 Functional sequence for single-pole signals, illustrated for signal S001
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-391

3 Operation
(continued)
3.45 Binary Counts (Function Group COUNT)
The P139 has one binary counter which counts the positive edges at an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The signal to be counted can be debounced.
Enabling or disabling the

counting function
The counting function can be disabled or enabled from the integrated local control panel.
Debouncing
The first positive pulse edge of the signal to be counted starts a timer stage running for
the duration of the set debouncing time. Each positive pulse edge during the
debouncing time retriggers the timer stage. If the signal is stable until the set
debouncing time has elapsed, it is counted.
If the signal has not changed its state from the occurrence of the first pulse edge to the
elapsing of the set debouncing time, it is not counted.
3-287 Signal sequence for debouncing

set debouncing time: 50 ms
392 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3 Operation
(continued)
Counting function
The debounced signal is counted by a 16 bit counter. Each counter can be set to a
specific count from the local control panel and through the serial interfaces (preload
function). The count (counter reading) can be displayed on the LCD display and output
via the PC and communication interfaces.
Transmission of counts via

the communication
interface
The count is transmitted through the communication interface by triggering an
appropriately configured binary signal input, or by giving a trigger command from the
local control panel, or at cyclic intervals in accordance with the set cycle time. If the
count is transmitted at cyclic intervals, transmission will be synchronized provided that
the ratio (60/set cycle time) is an integer. In all other cases, the count is transmitted at
intervals determined by a free running internal clock.
Resetting the counter

The counter can be reset from the local control panel, through an appropriately
configured binary signal input, or by the general reset function.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 3-393

3 Operation
(continued)
3-288 Binary count
394 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
4 Design
The P139 is available in different design types and with different combinations of
modules.
Regardless of design, the P139 like all other device types in the MiCOM Px30
system is equipped with the standard local control panel. The local control panel is
covered with a tough film so that the specified degree of protection will be
maintained. In addition to the essential control and display elements, a parallel
display consisting of a total of 17 LED indicators is also incorporated into the local
control panel. The meaning of the various LED indications is shown in plain text on a
label strip.
The PC interface (9-pin D-Sub female connector) is located under the lower covering
flap of the local control panel.
4.1 Designs
The P139 is available in a surface-mounted or flush-mounted case.
Both versions are connected in the same way via plug-in threaded terminal blocks.
The threaded terminal blocks in the surface-mounted case are accessible from the
front of the device after loosening the four crosshead screws on the sides (see
Figure 4-1 !), taking off the local control panel and hanging it in the slots in the left
side panel (see Figure 4-1 "). The P139 in the flush-mounted case is connected at
the back of the case.
!
The local control panel is connected to processor module P by a plug-in connecting
cable. Do not bend the connecting cable. Hang the local control panel in the slots
provided for this purpose in the left side panel.
The secondary circuit of operating current transformers must not be opened. If the
secondary circuit of an operating current transformer is opened, there is the danger
that resulting voltages may injure personnel or damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block
for devices with pin-terminal connection. Therefore always short-circuit the current
transformer before loosening the threaded terminals.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-1

4 Design
(continued)
4-1 Surface-mounted case, removal of local control panel (example for 40T case)
4-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
4-2 Dimensional drawing for surface-mounted case 40 T (dimensions in mm)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-3

4 Design
(continued)
4-3 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 40 T, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)
4-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
4-4 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 40 T, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-5

4 Design
(continued)
4-5 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame)
(dimensions in mm)
4-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
4-6 Dimensional drawing for flush-mounted case 84 T, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-7

4 Design
(continued)
4.2 Modules
The P139 is constructed of hardware modules that are standard throughout the
system. The following table gives an overview of the modules relevant for the P139
(*: modules that are not shown in the location diagrams, #: optional, $: standard
equipment, %: depending on order).
Type Index Description Width 40 T 84 T

A 9650 356 A ff Communication module (for wire connection RS 485) 4T # #
A 9650 354 A ff Communication module (for glass fiber, 4T # #

ST connector)
A 9650 355 A ff Communication module (for plastic fiber) 4T # #
A 9650 353 A ff Communication module (IRIG-B only) 4T # #
A 9650 827 B ff Module InterMiCOM COMM3 (RS 485) 4T # #
A 9650 828 B ff Module InterMiCOM COMM3 (for glass fiber) 4T # #
A 9650 829 B ff Module InterMiCOM COMM3 (for plastic fiber) 4T # #
A 9650 830 B ff Module InterMiCOM COMM3 (RS 232) 4T # #
B 0336 187 D ff * Bus module (digital) $
B 0336 188 C ff * Bus module (digital) $
B 0336 421 B ff * Bus module (analog) $ $
L 9650 319 D ff * Local control module $
L 9650 257 D ff * Local control module $
N 0337 086 B ff Transformer GF evaluation module 4T # #
P 9650 135 C ff Processor module 4T $ $

T 9650 307 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (pin term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 308 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (pin term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 309 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (pin term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 321 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 4 x V (ring term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 322 A ff Transformer module 4 x I, 5 x V (ring term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 323 A ff Transformer module 4 x I (ring term. conn.) 8T % %
T 9650 419 A ff NCIT module 8T % %
V 0337 437 E ff Power supply module 24 V- , 4T % %
default setting (switching threshold 18 V)
V 9651 328 A ff Power supply module 24 V- , 4T % %
switching threshold 90 V
V 9651 356 A ff Power supply module 24 V- , 4T % %
V 0337 191 M ff Power supply module 48 ... 250 V- / 100 ... 230 V, 4T % %
V 9651 329 A ff Power supply module 48 ... 250 V- / 100 ... 230 V, 4T % %
V 9651 357 A ff Power supply module 48 ... 250 V- / 100 ... 230 V, 4T % %
4-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
Type Index Description Width 40 T 84 T

X 0337 612 A ff Binary module (24 binary inputs), 4T # #
X 0337 377 E ff Binary module (6 binary inputs and 6 output relays), 4T # #
X 9651 333 A ff Binary module (6 binary inputs and 6 output relays), 4T # #
X 9651 361 A ff Binary module (6 binary inputs and 6 output relays), 4T # #
X 0336 973 B ff Binary module (6 output relays) 4T # #
X 9650 341 B ff Binary module (6 output relays, 4 of these with Triac) 4T # #
Y 0337 406 D ff Analogue module, 4T # #

Y 9651 335 A ff Analogue module, switching threshold 90 V 4T # #
Y 9651 363 A ff Analogue module, switching threshold 155 V 4T # #
Y 9650 735 C ff Analogue module / RTD module 4T # #
The space available for the modules measures 4 H in height by 40 T in width

(H = 44.45 mm, T = 5.08 mm). The location of the individual modules and the
position of the threaded terminal blocks in the P139 are shown in the location
diagram on the following page.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-9

4 Design
(continued)
<2>
-X31 *
-X32 *
<2>
*
-X33
<2>
*
-X34
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Alternative module
(see order information)
Per order
Type Designation Slot Item Type Designation Slot Item
Not equipped Binary I/O module
Communic. module
Trans. GF eval. mod.

Analog I/O module
Processor module
Transformer module
Power supply module
19Y5201A_EN
4-7 Location diagram P139 in case 40 T, pin terminal connection
Location diagram of the NCIT and RTD modules: see end of this chapter.
4-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
<2>
-X31 *
-X32 *
<2>
*
-X33
<2>
*
-X34
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Alternative module
(see order inform.)
Per Order
Communic. module

Analog I/O module
Processor module
Transformer module
Power supply module
19Y5203A_EN
4-8 Location diagram P139 in case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection
Location diagram of the RTD module: see end of this chapter.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-11

4 Design
(continued)
<2>
-X31 *
-X32 *
<2>
-X121
-X141
-X161
-X181
-X201
*
-X041
-X33
<2>
*
-X34
Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
Alternative module
(see order inform.)
Per Order
Communic. module
Processor module Analog I/O module
Transformer module
Power supply module
19Y5202A_EN
4-9 Location diagram P139 in case 84 T, ring terminal connection
Location diagram of the NCIT and RTD modules: see end of this chapter.
4-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

4 Design
(continued)
01 04 05
-X044
-X054
-X045
-X055
-X046
-X056
Type
T
*
01 04 05
: Alternative module
*
(see order inform.)
Type Designation Slot Item
T Transformer module 04-05 -U51 ... -U59
P439_NCIT _01a_EN
4-10 Location diagram of the NCIT module

applicable to:
Case 40 T, pin terminal connection
Case 84 T, ring terminal connection
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 4-13

4 Design
(continued)
01 03
-X81
-X82
-X83
Type
Y
*
01 03
: Alternative module
*
(see order information)
Type Designation Slot Item
Y RTD module 03 -U81 ... -U89
P139_RTD_01a_EN
4-11 Location diagram of the RTD module:

Case 40 T, pin terminal connection
Case 40 T, transformer module: ring terminal connection, other modules: pin terminal connection
Case 84 T, ring terminal connection
4-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

5 Installation and Connection
5.1 Unpacking and Packing
All P139 overcurrent and control devices are packaged separately into dedicated cartons
and shipped with outer packaging. Use special care when opening cartons and
unpacking devices, and do not use force. In addition, make sure to remove supporting
documents and the type identification label supplied with each individual device from the
inside carton.
The design revision level of each module included in the device when shipped can be
determined from the list of components (assembly list). This list of components should
be filed carefully.
After unpacking, each device should be inspected visually to confirm it is in proper

mechanical condition.
If the P139 needs to be shipped, both inner and outer packaging must be used. If the
original packaging is no longer available, make sure that packaging conforms to
DIN ISO 2248 specifications for a drop height 0.8 m.
5.2 Checking Nominal Data and Design Type
The nominal data and design type of the P139 can be determined by checking the type
identification label (see Figure 5-1). One type identification label is located under the
upper hinged cover on the front panel and a second label can be found on the inside of
the device. Another copy of the type identification label is fixed to the outside of the
P139 packaging.
P139 P139-XXXXXXX-304-40x-605 Diagram P139.40x xx.yy
Vn = 50 ... 130 V In = 1 / 5 A In = 1 / 5 A IEP,nom = A fnom = 50/60 Hz
VH,nom = Vx = 24 ... 250 V DC CE

Specification F 6.xxxxxx.y
EN 60255-6 / IEC 255-6
5-1 P139 type identification label
The data shown on the type identification label includes the nominal auxiliary voltage VX,
and the nominal VT input voltage Vn.
The P139 design version can be determined from the order number. A breakdown of the
order number is given in Chapter 14 of this operating manual and in the supporting
documents supplied with the device.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-1

(continued)
5.3 Location Requirements
The P139 has been designed to conform to DIN 57435 part 303. Therefore it is
important when choosing the installation location to make certain that it provides the
operating conditions as specified in above DIN norm sections 3.2 to 3.4. Several of
these important operating conditions are listed below.
Environmental Conditions
Ambient temperature: -5 C to +55 C [+23 F to +131 F]
Air pressure: 800 to 1100 hPa
Relative humidity: The relative humidity must not result in the formation of
either condensed water or ice in the P139.
Ambient air: The ambient air must not be significantly polluted by dust,
smoke, gases or vapors, or salt content.
Solar radiation: Direct solar radiation on the front of the device must be
avoided to ensure that the LC-Display remains readable.
Mechanical conditions
Vibration stress: 10 to 60 Hz, 0.035 mm and 60 to 150 Hz, 0.5 g
Earthquake resistance: 5 to 8 Hz, 3.5 mm / 1.5 mm, 8 to 35 Hz, 5 m/s2,

3 x 1 cycle
Electrical conditions for

auxiliary voltage of the
power supply
Operating range: 0.8 to 1.1 VA,nom with a residual ripple of up to 12 % VA,nom
Electromagnetic conditions
Substation secondary system design must follow the best of modern practices,
especially with respect to grounding and EMC.
5-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5.4 Installation
The dimensions and mounting dimensions for surface-mounted cases are given in
Chapter 4. When the P139 is surface-mounted on a panel, the wiring to the P139 is
normally run along the front side of the mounting plane. If the wiring is to be at the back,
an opening can be provided above or below the surface-mounted case. Figure 5-2
shows such an opening below the surface-mounted case.
5-2 Opening for running the wiring to the 40 T surface-mounted case (dimensions in mm)
Flush-mounted cases are designed for control panels. The dimensions and mounting
dimensions are given in Chapter 4. When the P139 is mounted on a cabinet door,
special sealing measures are necessary to provide the degree of protection required for
the cabinet (IP 51). Figures 5-3 to 5-6 show the required panel cutouts for both
mounting methods.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-3

(continued)
5-3 Panel cutout for the 40 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
5-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-4 Panel cutout for the 40 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-5

(continued)
5-5 Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
5-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-6 Panel cutout for the 84 T flush-mounted case, flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame) (dimensions in mm)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-7

(continued)
For flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
Before the P139 can be installed into a control panel, the local control panel must be
removed. The local control panel is removed as described below:
! Remove both top and bottom hinged flaps from the device. (Lift/lower both hinged
flaps 180up/down. Hold them in the middle and bend them slightly. The side
mountings of both hinged flaps can then be disengaged.)
! Remove the M3 screws (see Figure 5-7).
! Then remove the local control panel.
!
cable. Remember the connector position! Do not bend the connecting cable.
Then remove the lower M4 screws and only loosen the upper M4 screws (see Figure 5-7).
Now insert the P139 into the panel opening from the rear so that the upper M4 screws fit
into the corresponding holes. Then tighten all the M4 screws. After this, replace the
local control panel.
Note: For panels with a thickness 2 mm, replace the M3 and M4 screws with
longer screws. Longer screws are enclosed within the device packing.
5-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-7 Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 1 (without the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 T case.
Connection of protective grounding conductor: See section 5.5
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-9

(continued)
For flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame), the procedure is as
follows:
! Remove the screws as shown in Figure 5-8, " and mount the enclosed angle
brackets using these same screws.
! Then push the device into the control panel cutout from the front.
! Secure the device to the control panel by using the enclosed M6 screws (see Figure 5-9).
! Assemble the cover frame and snap-fasten onto the fixing screws.
5-8 Mounting the angle brackets
5-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-9 Installation of a case into a control panel. Flush-mount method 2 (using the angle brackets and frame ).
Example for a device with a 40 T case.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-11

(continued)
A rack mounting kit can be used to combine a flush-mounted 40 T case with a second
sub-rack to form a 19 mounting rack (see Figure 5-10). The second sub-rack can be
another device, for example, or an empty sub-rack with a blank front panel. Fit the
19 mounting rack to a cabinet as shown in Figure 5-11.
5-10 Combining 40 T flush-mounted cases to form a 19" mounting rack
5-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-11 Installation of the P139 in a cabinet with a 19" mounting rack
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-13

(continued)
5.5 Protective and Operational Grounding
The device must be reliably grounded to meet protective equipment grounding

requirements. The surface-mounted case is grounded using the bolt and nut,
appropriately marked, as the ground connection. The flush-mounted case must be
grounded in the area of the rear sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-section
of the ground conductor must conform to applicable national standards. A minimum
cross section of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the device. The cross-section of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section of
1.5 mm2 is required.
The grounding connection at both locations must be low-inductance, i.e. it must be kept
as short as possible.
5-12 Installing the protective grounding conductor terminal
the bracket is marked with the protective ground symbol:
5-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5.6 Connection
The P139 overcurrent and control device must be connected in accordance with the
terminal connection diagram as indicated on the type identification label. The terminal
connection diagram is included in the supporting documents supplied with the device.
The terminal connection diagrams that apply to the P139 are also to be found in the
Appendix to this operating manual.
In general copper conductors with a cross section of 2.5 mm are sufficient to connect a
system current transformer to a current input on the P139. To reduce CT knee-point
voltage requirements, it may be necessary to install shorter copper conductors with a
greater cross section between the system current transformers and the current inputs on
the P139. Copper conductors having a cross section of 1.5 mm2 are adequate to
connect binary signal inputs, the output relays and the power supply input.
All connections run into the system must always have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired but not used should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and
output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to
common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the
common potential of the grouped connections.
5.6.1 Connecting Measuring and Auxiliary Circuits
Power supply
Before connecting the auxiliary voltage Vx for the P139 power supply, it must be
ensured that the nominal value of the auxiliary device voltage corresponds with the
nominal value of the auxiliary system voltage.
Current-measuring inputs
When connecting the system transformers, it must be ensured that the secondary
nominal currents of the system and the device correspond.
The secondary circuit of live system current transformers must not be opened! If the
secondary circuit of a live CT is opened, there is the danger that the resulting voltages
will endanger personnel and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for system current transformer connection is not a shorting
block! Therefore always short-circuit the system current transformers before loosening
the threaded terminals.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-15

(continued)
Connecting the time-

overcurrent protection
measuring circuits
The system current and voltage transformers must be connected in accordance with the
standard schematic diagram shown in Figure 5-13. It is essential that the grounding
configuration shown in the diagram be followed. A connection, which has a reverse
orientation, can be taken into account when making settings (see Chapter 7).
The P139 is generally fitted with four current-measuring inputs. Three-pole or two-pole
connection is possible to suit the individual power system and substation.
5-13 Standard schematic diagram for time-overcurrent protection
5-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Connecting the measuring

circuits for ground fault
If the P139 is to function using ground fault direction determination by steady-state
values (the GFDSS function), then the T 4 current transformer must be connected to a
core balance current transformer or a current transformer in Holmgreen configuration. If
the metal shield of the cable is routed through the core balance transformer, the ground
wire must be fed through the core again before it is connected to ground. The cable
sealing end must be attached so that it is isolated from ground. This ensures that any
currents flowing through the shield will not affect measurement.
The steady-state ground fault direction determination requires either the three
phase-to-ground voltages or, alternatively, the neutral-point displacement voltage from
the open delta winding of a voltage transformer assembly as the measured voltage. An
additional voltage transformer (T 90) is available in the P139 to connect an open delta
winding. When setting the protection function, the selected voltage needs to be taken
into account.
Figure 5-14 shows the standard connection for ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values where the voltage measuring circuit is connected to an open delta
winding. With this connection configuration, forward/LS is displayed if a ground fault
occurs on the line side. A connection with reverse orientation for the system current or
voltage transformer is possible if the appropriate setting is made (see Chapter 7).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-17

(continued)
Connection to Connection to
Holmgreen group Core balance CT
A
B BS
C
19Z5290A_EN
5-14 Connecting the steady-state ground fault direction determination function to Holmgreen-configuration and core balance transformers
5-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Connecting protective
signaling
Either a transmission device or pilot wires are required for signal transmission,
depending on the operating mode selected. Twisted pair cores should be used as pilot
wires. Two or four cores are required. If only two cores are available, there must be an
all-or-nothing relay in each station for coupling received and transmitted signals. The
coils of the all-or-nothing relays must be designed for half the loop voltage. Figure 5-15
shows connection with two cores and Figure 5-16 connection with four cores.
The protective signaling transmitting relay can be set to either Transm. relay break
contact or Transm. relay make contact. In the first case the break contact of the
transmitting relay must be wired, and in the second case the make contact must be
wired. The figures show the connection for the setting Transm. relay break contact.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-19

(continued)
5-15 Connection of protective signaling with two cores
5-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-16 Connection of protective signaling with four cores
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-21

(continued)
Connecting a resistance
thermometer
A resistance thermometer can be connected if the device is fitted with analog module Y.
This analog I/O module input is designed to connect a PT 100 resistance thermometer.
The PT 100 should be connected using the 3-wire method (see Figure 5-17). No supply
conductor compensation is required in this case.
5-17 Connecting a PT 100 using the 3-wire method
Connecting binary inputs

and output relays
The binary inputs and output relays are freely configurable. When configuring these
components it is important to note that the contact rating of the binary I/O modules (X)
varies (see Chapter 2 Technical Data). Once the user has selected a bay type, the
P139 can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function
assignments for the control of switchgear units. The standard configuration of binary
inputs and output relays for each bay type is given in the list of bay types to be found in
the Appendix to this operating manual.
The polarity for connected binary inputs is to be found in the terminal connection
diagrams (see supporting documents supplied with the device or in the Appendix). This
is to be understood as a recommendation only. Connection to binary inputs can be
made as desired.
Connection of switchgear
units having direct motor
control
In the case of bay types having direct motor control, one binary input is configured for
the status signal and one output relay is configured for triggering and resetting the motor
relay. Configuration of appropriate output relays to trigger the armature and shunt
windings of motors on load disconnect switches, isolating links or grounding switches is
in accordance with the List of Bay Types (see Appendix). A connection example for a
direct motor control is shown in Figure 5-18.
5-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
5-18 Connection example for a direct motor control,

bay type No. 89 (A23.105.M04), feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-23

(continued)
5.6.2 Connecting the IRIG-B interface.
An IRIG-B-interface for time synchronization may be installed as an optional feature. It is

connected by a BNC connector. A coaxial cable having a characteristic impedance of
50 must be used as the connecting cable.
5.6.3 Connecting the Serial Interfaces
PC interface
The PC interface is provided so that personnel can operate the device from a personal
computer (PC).
!
The PC interface is not designed as a permanent connection. Consequently, the female
connector does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that
is required per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Communication interface
The communication interface is provided as a permanent connection of the device to a

control system for substations or to a central substation unit. Depending on the type,
communication interface 1 on the device is connected either by a special fiber-optic
connector or a RS 485 interface with twisted pair copper wires. Communication
interface 2 is only available as a RS 485 interface.
The selection and assembly of a properly cut fiber-optic connecting cable requires
special knowledge and expertise and is therefore not covered in this operating manual.
!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the device is shut off.
5-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
A RS485 data transmission link between a master and several slave devices can be
established by using the optional communication interface. The communication master
could be, for instance, a central control station. Devices linked to the communication
master, e.g. P139, are set-up as slave devices.
The RS 485 interface available on the P139 was designed so that data transfer in a full
duplex transmission mode is possible using a 4-wire data link between devices. Data
transfer between devices using the RS 485 interface is set up only for a half duplex
transmission mode. To connect the RS485 communication interface the following must
be observed:
! Only twisted pair shielded cables must be used, that are common in
telecommunication installations.
! At least one symmetrical twisted pair of wires is necessary.
! Conductor insulation and shielding must only be removed from the core in the
immediate vicinity of the terminal strips and connected according to national
standards.
! All shielding must be connected to an effective protective ground surface at both
ends.
! Unused conductors must all be grounded at one end.
A 4-wire data link as an alternative to a 2-wire communications link is also possible. A

cable with two symmetrical twisted pair wires is required for a 4-wire data link. A 2-wire
data link is shown in Figure 5-19, and a 4-wire data link is shown in Figure 5-20 as an
example for channel 2 on the communication module. The same is valid if channel 1 on
the communication module is available as a RS 485 interface.
2-wire data link:

The transmitter must be bridged with the receiver on all devices equipped electrically
with a full duplex communication interface, e.g. the P139. The two devices situated at
either far end must have a 200 to 220 resistor installed to terminate the data
transmission conductor. In most AREVA MiCOM Px3x devices, and also in the P139, a
220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware and can be connected
with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not necessary.
4-wire data link:

Transmitter and receiver must be bridged in the device situated on one far end of the
data transmission conductor. The receivers of slave devices, that have an electrically
full-duplex communication interface as part of their electrical system, e.g. the P139, are
connected to the transmitter of the communication master device, and the transmitters of
slave devices are connected to the receiver of the master device. Devices equipped
electrically with only a half duplex RS485 communication interface are connected to the
transmitter of the communication master device. The last device in line (master or slave
device) on the data transmission conductor must have the transmitter and receiver
terminated with a 200 to 220 resistor each. In most AREVA MiCOM Px3x devices,
and also in the P139, a 220 resistor is integrated into the RS485 interface hardware
and can be connected with a wire jumper. An external resistor is therefore not
necessary. The second resistor must be connected externally to the device (resistor
order number see section 13).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-25

(continued)
P139
P139
5-19 2-wire data link
5-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
P139
P139
5-20 4-wire data link
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 5-27

5-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
6 Local Control Panel
Local control panel

Switchgear installed in the bay can be controlled from the local control panel. In
addition, all data required for operation of the device is entered here, and data important
for system management is read out here as well. The following tasks can be handled
from the local control panel:
! Control of switchgear
! Readout and modification of settings
! Readout of cyclically updated measured operating data and logic status signals
! Readout of operating data logs and of monitoring signal logs
! Readout of event logs after overload situations, ground faults, or short circuits in the
power system
! Device resetting and triggering of additional control functions used in testing and
commissioning
Control is also possible through the PC interface. This requires a suitable PC and a
specific operating program.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-1

(continued)
6.1 Display and Keypad
Control and display

elements
The local control panel includes a LCD display with a resolution of 128 x 128 pixels
(divided semi graphically into 16 lines of 21 characters each), twelve function keys and
17 LED indicators.
Trip
Alarm
Out of Service
C
Healthy G
Edit Mode
O I L/R
6-1 View of the local control panel for the P139
6-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Display levels
All data relevant for operation and all device settings is displayed on two levels. Data
such as the switching status or the measured operating values is displayed at the panel
level and provides an up-to-date overview of the status of the bay. The menu tree level
below the panel level allows the user to select all data points (settings, signals,
measured variables, etc.) and to change them, if appropriate. To access a selected
event recording from either the panel level or from any other point in the menu tree,
press the READ key .
Bay Panel Signal Panel Measured Value Panel(s) Event Panel

(state-dependent)
P139 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Fault 17:58:44 Record View
Signals 17:58:44 Ground fault 17:58:44
P139 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Overload 17:58:44
Oper/Rec/OP_RC
P139 17:58:34 Signals 17:58:44 Meas. values 17:58:44 Events 17:58:54 Operat. data record.
BB1 MAIN: Voltage A-B prim. 20.04.98
BB2 M.c.b. trip V EXT 20.7 kV 05:21:32.331 ARC
Q1 Q2 PSS : Voltage B-C prim. Enabled
PS 1 active 20.6 kV Start
PSS : Voltage C-A prim.
Q0 PS 2 active 20.8 kV 23:58:17.501 MAIN
MAIN:
G
Current A prim. CB closed sig. EXT
Q8 Bay interlock. act. 416 A End
MAIN: Current B prim. 21.04.98
Locked Subst. interl. act. 415 A 05:21:32.331 DEV01
Remote Current C prim.
1088 A 417 A
Switch.device closed
Curr. IP,max prim. Start

Device Type Control and Display Panels
Parameters Operation Events
Device ID Cyclic measurements Event counters

Configuration parameters Control and testing Measured fault data
Function parameters Operating data recordings Event recordings
Global Measured operating data

Main functions Physical state signals
Parameter subset 1 Logical state signals
Parameter subset ...
Menu tree
Control
6-2 Display panels and menu tree
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-3

(continued)
Display panels
The following display panels are available with the P139:
! Bay Panel
! Signal Panel
! Measured Value Panels, which are called up according to system conditions
! Event Panel
The Bay Panel displays the up-to-date switching status of the selected bay as a one line
diagram. If user-defined bay types are applied, resulting information may be sub-divided
into up to eight images. A maximum of 28 physical and logic binary status may be
configured to one Signal Panel and, depending on the operating mode, acknowledged.
Selected measured values are displayed on the Measured Value Panels. Only the
Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design version of the given device and
its associated range of functions are actually available. The Event Panel displays the
most recent events, each with a time tag, such as the opening of a switchgear unit.
Menu tree and data points

All data points (setting values, signals, measured values, etc.) are selected using a
menu tree. When navigating through the menu tree, the first two lines of the LC-Display
always show the branch of the menu tree that is active, as selected by the user. The
data points are found at the lowest level of a menu tree branch and they are displayed
either with their plain text description or in numerically encoded form, as selected by the
user. The value associated with the selected data point, its meaning, and its unit of
measurement are displayed in the line below.
List data points

List data points are a special category. In contrast to other data points, list data points
generally have more than one associated value element. This category includes tripping
matrices, programmable logic functions, and event logs. When a list data point is
selected, the symbol is displayed in the bottom line of the LCD, indicating that a sub-
level is situated below this displayed level. The individual value elements of a list data
point are found at this sub-level. In the case of a list parameter, the individual value
elements are linked by operators such as OR.
6-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Short description of keys

! Up and Down Keys /
Panel Level:
The effect of using the up and down keys differs between the individual panels.
Bay Panel: The up/down keys switch between the measured

values selected for this panel.
Signal Panel: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the
Signal Panel.
Measured Value Panel: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the
Measured Value Panel.
Event Panel: The up/down keys switch between the pages of the
Event Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
By pressing the up and down keys, the user can navigate through the menu tree in
a vertical direction. If the device is in input mode, the up and down keys have a
different function.
Input Mode:
Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the up and down keys are pressed, the
parameter value is changed.
(Up key: The next higher value is selected.)
('Down' key: The next lower value is selected.)
With list parameters, the linking operator for the value element is changed by
pressing the up and down keys.
! Left and Right Keys /

Panel Level:
Bay Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between the
individual Bay Panel images.
Signal Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between Bay Panel
and Measured Value Panel.
Measured Value Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between Signal Panel
and Event Panel.
Event Panel: Pressing the 'right'/'left' keys switches between Measured
Value Panel and Bay Panel.
Menu Tree Level:
By pressing the left and right keys, the user can navigate through the menu tree in
a horizontal direction. If the device is in input mode, the left and right keys have a
different function.
Input Mode:
Parameter values can only be changed in the input mode, which is signaled by the
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE. When the left and right keys are pressed, the
cursor positioned below one of the digits in the change-enabled value moves to the
next digit to the right or left.
(Left key: The cursor moves to the next digit on the left.)
(Right key: The cursor moves to the next digit on the right.)
In the case of a list parameter, the user can navigate through the list of items
available for selection by pressing the left and right keys.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-5

(continued)
! ENTER Key
Panel Level:
By pressing the ENTER key at the Panel level, the user can go to the first menu tree
level.
Menu Tree Level:
To enter the input mode, press the ENTER key. Press the ENTER key a second time
to accept the changes as entered and leave the input mode. The LED indicator
labeled EDIT MODE signals that the input mode is active.
! CLEAR Key C
Press the CLEAR key to reset the LED indicators and clear all measured event data.
The records in the recording memories are not affected by this action.
Panel Level:
Bay Panel:
If the CLEAR key is pressed while selecting a switchgear unit on the Bay Panel then
the selection of the switchgear unit is canceled. The LED indicators are not reset in
this procedure.
Signal Panel:
A selected flashing signal may be acknowledged individually by pressing the CLEAR
key. This acknowledgement will switch the flashing signal to a static status but will
not cause the LED indicators to reset or clear measured event data.
Menu Tree Level:
Input mode:
When the CLEAR key is pressed all changes entered are rejected and the input
mode is exited.
! READ Key
Press the READ key to access a selected event recording from either the Panel level
or from any other point in the menu tree.
! Local/Remote Key L/R
The local/remote key is effective in the Bay Panel except where a binary signal input
has been configured for this function. The local/remote key is the transfer switch
between remote and local control (setting RL), or between remote&local and local
control (setting R&L L). If the local/remote key is set to (RL), the transfer from
remote to local control can only take place if the L/R password has been entered first.
The transfer from local to remote control does not require any password entry.
! Page Key
Panel Level:
Pressing the page key shows the next panel.
Menu Tree Level:
When the page key is pressed the Menu Tree Level is exited and the Bay Panel is
accessed.
6-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
! Selection Key
Bay Panel:
The Selection key is effective only in the Bay Panel and only if local control is
activated. If local control has been selected, pressing the Selection key selects the
switchgear unit to be controlled. The selected external device will be marked by an
asterisk (*) as long as no external device names are displayed. Otherwise the
external device name will flash and will be displayed in the status line.
Signal Panel:
The Selection key is used to select a flashing signal (not yet acknowledged) and will
also automatically switch to pages that might be available. When the last flashing
signal has been reached pressing the Selection key again will start with the first
flashing signal.
! OPEN Key O
The OPEN key is effective in the Bay Panel only. Pressing the OPEN key controls
the selected switchgear unit taking into account the interlock equation to assume
the open status.
! CLOSE Key I
The CLOSE key is effective in the Bay Panel only. Pressing the CLOSE key controls
the selected switchgear unit taking into account the interlock equation to assume
the closed status.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-7

(continued)
The following presentation of the individual control steps shows which displays can be
changed in each case by pressing keys. A small black square to the right of the enter
key indicates that the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE is illuminated. An underscored
external device name in the Bay Panel indicates a selected switchgear unit. The
examples used here are not necessarily valid for the device type described in this
manual; they merely serve to illustrate the control principles involved.
6.2 Changing between Display Levels
After start-up of the device, the display is at the Panel Level. The Bay Panel is
displayed.
Control Step / Description Control Display

Action
Jumping from Panel Level to
Menu Tree Level
0 Example of a display after start-up of the X YYY 10:33:22
device. SS1
SS2
Note: Q1 Q2
When the device is delivered, it is set for a
dummy bay without switchgear units.
Q0
Therefore only the name of the device appears
on the Bay Panel. The display shown in the Q9
example will not appear until a real bay type Q8

has been selected. Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
1 Press the ENTER key to go from the Panel X YYY

Parameters
Level to the Menu Tree Level.
Jumping from Menu Tree

Level to Panel Level
0 From the Menu Tree Level, the user can Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
jump to the Panel Level from any position Device on-line
No (=off)
within the menu tree.
1 Pressing the Page key. X YYY 10:33:22

or SS1
SS2
Alternatively first press the up key and hold it
+ C
down while pressing the CLEAR key. Q1 Q2
Note: Q0
It is important to press the up key first and
Q9
release it last in order to avoid unintentional
resetting of stored data. Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
After the set return time has elapsed (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC"), the display
will switch automatically to the Bay Panel.
6-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.3 Display Illumination
If none of the control keys is pressed, the display illumination will switch off once the set
return time illumination (setting in menu tree: "Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed. Pressing
any of the control keys will turn the display illumination on again. In this case the control
action that is normally triggered by that key will not be executed. Reactivation of the
display illumination is also possible by using a binary input.
If continuous display illumination is required, the function return time illumination is set
to blocked.
6.4 Control at Panel Level
At Panel Level, the user can move from one Panel type to another by pressing the Page
key (in one direction only) or the left/right keys (in both directions).
6.4.1 Bay Panel
Information displayed on
the Bay Panel
Figure 6-3 shows an example of a Bay Panel. The top line shows the device type on the
left and the current time of day on the right. Together with a customized Bay Panel type
with more than one Bay Panel image the top line will include an image marker in the
center. The image markers run from "Image A" (first image) to "Image H" (eighth image).
The Bay Panel shown below in one-line diagram representation is a function of the set
Bay Panel type. The symbols shown in the following table are used to represent the
switchgear units and other external devices as well as the status of switchgear units.
The user can switch between character sets 1, 2, and 3. Character set 3 is identical to
character set 1 in as-delivered condition but can be replaced by a user-defined character
set by using a special ancillary tool. The symbols of character set 2 are used in the
following description.
The fourth line from the bottom shows (in abbreviated form) whether a bay interlock is
active. The third line from the bottom indicates whether remote or local control is
permitted. In the example shown here, remote control is activated. The two lines at the
bottom contain measured value data. The arrows to the right of the measured value
data indicate that additional measured values can be called up by pressing the up or
down keys.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-9

(continued)
X YYY 10:33:22
SS1
SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
6-3 Example of a Bay Panel
Representation of the external

devices with
External device Status character set 1 character set 2
Circuit breaker Open
Closed
In-motion, Faulty
Load disconn. switch Open
Closed
In-motion, Faulty
Isolating link Open
Closed
In-motion, Faulty
Switch truck Open
Closed
In-motion, Faulty
Fuse unit Open
Closed
6-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

Action
Measured value display in the
Bay Panel 0 Measured values are shown one at a time. X YYY
SS1
10:33:22
A configuration step determines whether the SS2

measured value will also be displayed in bar Q1 Q2
chart form. The position of the bar chart can
also be set for horizontal or vertical display (the
Q0
setting applies to all measured values). The
arrows under the bar chart indicate that Q9
additional measured values can also be Locked

Q8
displayed. Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
1 By pressing the up or down key the next or

X YYY
SS1
10:33:25
measured value is displayed. In the example SS2

shown, no bar chart display has been Q1 Q2
configured for the measured value.
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1000 A
Curr. IA prim.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-11

(continued)
Controlling switchgear
units
Switchgear units can be controlled from the local control panel, provided that the unit has
been set for 'local control'. If the local/remote key is set to switch between remote and
local control (RL), then the switch from 'remote' to 'local' operation requires a
password. When more than one Bay Panel image is used only joint 'local/remote'
switching is available.
The following example is based on the (RL) setting for the local/remote key and the
factory-set L/R password. If the password has been changed by the user (see the
section entitled 'Changing the Password'), the following description will apply
accordingly.

Action
0 Select the Bay Panel. X YYY 10:33:22
SS1
SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
1 Press the 'local/remote' key (L/R) to switch L/R

XX YYY 10:33:25
the device to local operation. The Bay Panel is
no longer displayed. The device type appears ********
in the first line and eight asterisks (*) appear in
the fourth line as a prompt to enter the
password.
2a Press the following keys in sequence: XX YYY 10:33:27

Left
*
Down XX YYY 10:33:29
Right XX YYY 10:33:31
Up XX YYY 10:33:33
The display will change as shown in the
column on the right.
*
6-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. X YYY 10:33:25
SS1
If the correct password has been entered, the SS2
Bay Panel will re-appear. The third line from Q1 Q2
the bottom will display Local.
If an invalid password has been entered, the Q0
display shown above in Step 1 will appear. Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
2b This control step can be canceled at any C X YYY
SS1
10:33:22
time by pressing the CLEAR key before the SS2

ENTER key is pressed. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
3a Press the Selection key to select a X YYY
SS1
10:33:28
switchgear unit. Only switchgear units that are SS2

electrically controllable can be selected. The Q1 Q2
external device designation for the selected
switchgear unit Q0, for example is
Q0
displayed in flashing characters (underlined in
the example to the right) and also appears in Q9
the bottom line of the display. If the display of Locked

Q8
external device designations has been Local

1088 A
disabled, the selected switchgear unit will be Q0
marked by a flashing asterisk (*). The

designation of the selected external device
appears in the bottom line of the display.
3b To cancel the selection of a switchgear C

X YYY
SS1
10:33:28
unit, press the CLEAR key. Press the SS2

Selection key to select a new switchgear unit. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-13

(continued)

Action
4 After selecting a switchgear unit, press the

keys Open O
or
Close I
to control the switchgear unit. Before this
switching action is executed, compliance with
bay interlock conditions if applicable is
checked.
4a If the check of bay interlock conditions X YYY
SS1
10:33:33
determines that an operation can be carried SS2

out, then the switch command is executed. Q1 Q2
The in-motion (intermediate position) symbol
is displayed while the switchgear unit is
Q0
operating.
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
Once the operating time of the switchgear unit X YYY 10:33:35
has elapsed, the resulting switching status is SS1

displayed. SS2
Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
4b If the check of interlock conditions X YYY 10:33:35
determines that switching is not allowed, then SS1

SS2
the selected switchgear unit is no longer
Q1 Q2
highlighted. If the LED indicators have been
configured accordingly, the LED indicator for
Interlock equations violated will be illuminated. Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Local
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
5 If no control action takes place within a set

time period after selection of a switchgear unit
or if the return time for illumination has
elapsed, then the selection is canceled.
6-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

Action
6 Press the local/remote key (L/R) to switch to L/R X YYY
SS1
10:33:38
remote control; this is accomplished without a SS2

password prompt. Q1 Q2
Q0
Q9
Q8
Locked
Remote
1088 A
Curr. IP,max prim.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-15

(continued)
6.4.2 Signal Panel(s)
The Signal Panel is used to display the up to 28 different physical and logical binary
states that the device has available. The top line in the display shows the panel
designation 'Signals' and the current time of day. The following empty line separates the
heading from actual signals. This gives display capacity of up to seven signals to one
Signal Panel. Additional pages are created when more than seven signals have been
configured. As with all other panels, switching between pages is carried out
automatically, after the parameter panel hold-time (LOC: H o l d - t i m e f o r P a n e l s )
has elapsed, or manually by pressing the up/down keys.
Each signal consists of two lines. The first line shows a status marker (square)
! clear Signal inactive / not powered or

" black Signal active / powered or
#!$ flashing Signaling
and the associated function group. The second line shows the full text for this signal.
Automatic activation
When automatic activation of the Signal Panel is set (L O C : A u t . a c t i v . S i g n . P a n e l )
each status change of signals, configured to a panel, is automatically switched from the
Bay Panel image or the Operation Panel/Event Panel (depending on the actual
selection) to the Signal Panel. Depending on the range of functions available in the
device, the displays of Overload Panels, Ground Fault Panels or Fault Panels have a
higher priority and will be shown when an event has occurred. Using the Page key will
make the display jump to the other panels at any time.
Status display and

signaling
To differentiate between the states 'signal active / powered' and 'signal inactive / not
powered' shown on the Signal Panel the parameter (L O C : S t a t . i n d . S i g n . P a n e l )
is used. This will distinguish between a clear/black square alone and the simultaneous
change over from normal display to highlighting of text in both lines (the first line with the
status marker will remain unchanged!).
By using the parameter (L O C : I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ) the signaling of status

changes of signals in the Signal Panel is controlled. There is a difference between no
signaling (acknowledgement is not necessary, but, if so configured, the Signal Panel is
switched on at any status change), signaling by the flashing status marker #!$alone
or by flashing of the two lines (change over from normal display to highlighting of text
and the status marker). The flashing frequency is fixed and may not be changed.
Each status change of signals, configured to a panel of the Bay Panel image can be set
to call for user attention either by having the status marker or both signal lines flash
when a new event has occurred. The switching control will then automatically switch to
the page, which includes the first signal that has experienced a status change. After
pressing the Selection key this flashing signal is selected on the current page (signal
preceded by a flashing cursor >). The next flashing signal can be called up by pressing
the Selection key again. At this point it may occur that the display will automatically
jump to the next page. When the last flashing signal has been reached pressing the
Selection key again will start with the first flashing signal.
Depending on L O C : S i g n . c a u s . S i g n . P a n e l the cause of a flashing signal may

be set. Either each status change of the binary information or only "incoming" edges for
6-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
transient signals will lead to a flashing signal. The status change is generally shown as
"storing" i.e. the flashing signal will remain until it has been acknowledged.
Acknowledging flashing
signals
Acknowledging a flashing signal that has been selected will occur by pressing the
CLEAR key C . This will not reset illuminated LED indicators but will only acknowledge
the display. The flashing will stop when the CLEAR key is pressed and a static status
display will appear. Then the display will automatically jump to the next flashing signal.
This will enable the user to acknowledge any flashing signals by multiple pressing of the
CLEAR key. As long as the Selection key is pressed and no resetting has occurred the
current page will be continuously displayed (no automatic switching to the next page).
The selection will remain active until the time set in L O C : R e t u r n t i m e s e l e c t has
elapsed. When the time has elapsed the display will jump to the next page. During an
active selection the user may at any time jump to the next or the previous page by
pressing the 'up or 'down' keys (similar to the Measured Value Panel and the Event
Panel).
Status change signaling

In order to be able to continue with the processing of flashing signals the device has two
internal logic signals available.
As long as at least one status change signal in the Signal Panel has not been
acknowledged, L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l s t a t . will show the status change of the
Signal Panel as a static signal. This signal is made available in the selection tables for
the function groups LED, OUTP, LOGIC, PC, COMM1 and COMM2.
The second internal logic signal L O C : C h g . S i g . P a n e l f l a s h . shows the status

change of the Signal Panel as an alternating signal with a frequency of about 0.5 Hz.
This signal is only made available in the selection tables for the function groups LED,
OUTP and LOGIC. It is generated independent of the operating mode as set in L O C :
I n d i c a t . S i g n . P a n e l ; for example a LED configured to this signal will also be
triggered as flashing even if the operating mode is set to "without signaling".
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-17

(continued)
Description Display
1 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0
display by status markers (squares) I N P :

S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T
2 Example of a Signal Panel with status S i g n a l s 2 3 : 5 6 : 1 0
display by status markers (squares) and I N P :

highlighting of lines S t a t e U 1 6 0 4
M A I N :
M . c . b . t r i p V r e f E X T
F R _ R C :
F a u l t m e m . o v e r f l o w
L O C :
R e m . a c c . b l o c k . a c t i v e
O U T P :
O u t p . r e l a y s b l o c k e d
P S S :
A c t i v a t e P S 3 E X T
L O G I C :
R e s e t 3 E X T
3a Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers.
Cursor > is flashing
3b Example of the selection of a status

display with status markers and highlighting of
text.
Cursor > and highlighted text are flashing
6-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.4.3 Measured Value Panels
Measured Value Panels

The measured values that will be displayed on the Measured Value Panels can first be
selected in the menu tree under Par/Conf/LOC. The user can select different sets of
measured values for the Operation Panel, the Overload Panel, the Ground Fault Panel,
and the Fault Panel. Only the Measured Value Panels relevant for the particular design
version of the given device and its associated range of functions are actually available.
The selected set of values for the Operation Panel is always available. Please see the
section entitled Setting a List Parameter for instructions regarding selection. The
measured value display can be structured by inserting a dummy or placeholder in the list
of selected measured values. If the M A I N : W i t h o u t f u n c t i o n setting has been
selected for a given panel, then that panel is disabled.
The Measured Value Panels are called up according to system conditions. If, for
example, the device detects an overload or a ground fault, then the corresponding
Measured Value Panel will be displayed as long as the overload or ground fault situation
exists. If the device detects a fault, then the Fault Panel is displayed and remains active
until the measured fault values are reset, by pressing the CLEAR key C , for example.

Action
0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Meas. values 16:57:33
type of measured values being displayed. In Voltage A-B prim.

this example, the display shows measured 20.7 kV
operating values (abbreviated as 'Meas. Voltage B-C prim.
20.6 kV
values'). The time of day is shown at the upper Voltage C-A prim.
right of the display. 20.8 kV
Up to six selected measured values can be Current A prim.
displayed on the Panel simultaneously. 415 A
Current B prim.
416 A
Current C prim.
417 A
1 If more than six measured values have been or

Meas. values 16:57:35
selected, they can be viewed one page at a Voltage A-B norm.

time by pressing the up or down keys. The 0.7 Vnom
device will also show the next page of the Voltage B-C norm.
0.6 Vnom
Measured Value Panel after the set Hold-time Voltage C-A norm.
for Panels (setting in menu tree: 0.8 Vnom
"Par/Conf/LOC") has elapsed. Current A norm.
1.5 Inom
Current B norm.
1.6 Inom
Current C norm.
1.7 Inom
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-19

(continued)
6.4.4 Event Panel
The Event Panel shows the signals relevant for operation, each with the complete time
tag (date and time of day). A maximum of three signals are displayed. The Event Panel
is based on entries in the operating data memory (menu tree: "Opdat/Rec/OP_RC").

Action
0 The uppermost line of the display shows the Events 16:57:33
panel designation and the current time of day. 20.04.98

Below this line, the signals are shown in 05:21:32.331 MAIN
chronological order. The arrows at the bottom Trip command
Start
of the display area indicate that additional
signals can also be displayed. 05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/Faulty
Start
1 Pressing the up or down keys will display or

Events 16:57:35
the signals one at a time.

05:21:35.501 MAIN
Trip command
End
21.04.98
00:03:57.677 MAIN
Blocked/Faulty
Start
08:10:59.688 MAIN
Blockade/Strung
End
6-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.5 Control at the Menu Tree Level
6.5.1 Navigation in the Menu Tree
Folders and function

groups
All data points are grouped in function groups according to the function they are
associated with and are also organized in different folders based on practical control
requirements.
The menu tree begins with the device type at the top and then branches out below into
the three main folders entitled Parameters, Operation, and Events, which form the first
folder level. Below the first folder level are two more folder levels, so that the entire
folder structure consists of three main branches and a maximum of three folder levels.
At the bottom of each branch of folders, below the folder levels, are the various function
groups in which the individual data points are combined.
PX yyy
Unit
type
PX yyy PX yyy PX yyy

Folder Parameters Operation Events
plane 1
Oper/
Folder Cyclic measurements
plane 2
Oper/Cycl/
Folder Meas. operating data
plane 3
Oper/Cycl/Data/
Function MAIN
groups
Oper/Cycl/Data/MAIN
Data Date
points 01.01.99 dd.mm.yy
6-4 Basic menu tree structure
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-21

(continued)
6.5.2 Switching Between Address Mode and Plain Text Mode
The display on the local control panel can be switched between address mode and plain
text mode. In the address mode the display shows setting parameters, signals, and
measured values in numerically coded form, that is, as addresses. In plain text mode
the setting parameters, signals, and measured values are displayed in the form of plain
text descriptions. In either case, control is guided by the menu tree. The active branch
of the menu tree, as well as the headings of the panels are displayed in plain text in both
modes. Also the text on the Bay Panel is always displayed in plain text mode. In the
following examples, the display is shown in only plain text mode.

Action
0 In this example, the user switches from plain Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Device on-line
text mode to address mode. No (=off)
1 To switch from address mode to plain text C +

Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
003.030
mode or vice versa, press the CLEAR key C
or 0
and either the left key or the right key
simultaneously. This can be done at any point C +
in the menu tree.
6-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.5.3 Change-Enabling Function
Although it is possible to select any data point in the menu tree and read the associated
value by pressing the keys, it is not possible to switch directly to the input mode. This
safeguard prevents unintended changes in the settings.
There are two ways to enter the input mode.
Global change-enabling
function
! To activate the global change-enabling function, set the Param. change enabl.
parameter to Yes (menu tree: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC).
The change can only be made after the password has been entered. Thereafter, all
further changes with the exception of specially protected control actions (see the
section entitled Password-Protected Control Actions) are enabled without entering
the password.
Selective change-enabling
function
! Password input prior to any parameter change.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a

specific time interval. The following example is based on the factory-set password. If
the password has been changed by the user (see the section entitled Changing the
Password), the following description (next page) will apply analogously.

Action
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/LOC select Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Param. change enabl.
the Param. change enabl. parameter. No
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*) Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

appear in the fourth line of the display. No
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Left No
*
Right Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Up Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
No
*
Down Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
The display will change as shown in the No
column on the right. *
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-23

(continued)

Action
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/LOC
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Param. change enabl.
indicates that the setting can now be changed No
by pressing the up or down keys.
If an invalid password has been entered, the

display shown in Step 1 appears.
3 Change the setting to Yes. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

Yes
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

indicator will go out. The unit is enabled for Yes
further parameter changes.
The same procedure applies to any parameter change unless the global change-
enabling function has been activated. This method is recommended for a single
parameter change only. If several settings are to be changed, then the global change-
enabling function is preferable. In the following examples, the global change-enabling
function has been activated.
6-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Automatic return
The automatic return function prevents the change-enabling function from remaining
activated after a change of settings has been completed. Once the set return time
(menu tree Par/Conf/LOC) has elapsed, the change-enabling function is automatically
deactivated, and the display switches to a Measured Value Panel corresponding to the
current system condition. The return time is restarted when any of the control keys is
pressed.
Forced return
The return described above can be forced from the local control panel either by pressing
the Page key or by pressing the up key and then holding it down while pressing the
CLEAR key.
Note: It is important to press the up key first and release it last in order to avoid
unintentional deletion of stored data.
Even when the change-enabling function is activated, not all parameters can be
changed. For some settings it is also necessary to switch the device to offline. (menu
tree: Par/Func/Glob/MAIN, device on-line). Such settings include the configuration
parameters, by means of which the device interfaces can be adapted to the system. The
following entries in the Change column of the address list (see appendix) indicate
whether values can be changed or not:
! "on": The value can be changed even when the device is switched to online.
! "off": The value can only be changed when the device is switched to offline.
! "-": The value can be read out but cannot be changed.
The device is factory-set so that the device is switched to offline.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-25

(continued)
6.5.4 Changing Parameters
If all the conditions for a value change are satisfied (see above), the desired setting can
be entered.

Action
0 Example of a display. Oper/CtrlTest/LOC

In this example the change-enabling function is Yes
activated and the protective function is
disabled, if necessary.
1 Select the desired parameter by pressing Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
the keys. 50000 s
2 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The last digit 50000 s
of the value is highlighted by a cursor
(underlined).
3 Press the left or right keys to move the Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
cursor to the left or right. 50000 s
4 Change the value highlighted by the cursor Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
by pressing the up and down keys. In the 50010 s
meantime the device will continue to operate
with the old value.
5 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
labeled EDIT MODE will go out and the device 50010 s
will now operate with the new value. Press the
keys to select another setting parameter for a
value change.
6 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Conf/LOC

Autom. return time
you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled 50000 s
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out and the device will
continue to operate with the old value. A
further parameter can be selected for a value
change by pressing the keys.
6-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.5.5 Setting a List Parameter
Using list parameters, the user is able to select several elements from a list in order to
perform tasks such as defining a trip command or defining the measured values that will
be displayed on Measured Value Panels. The maximum possible number m that can
be selected out of the total number n of the set is given in the address list in the
Remarks column. As a rule, the selected elements are linked by an OR operator.
Other operators (NOT, OR, AND, NOT OR and NOT AND) are available in the LOGIC
function group for linking the selected list items. In this way binary signals and binary
input signals can be processed in a Boolean equation tailored to meet user
requirements. For the DNP 3.0 communication protocol, the user defines the class of a
parameter instead of assigning operators. The definition of a trip command shall be
used here as an example to illustrate the setting of a list parameter.

Action
0 Select a list parameter (in this example, the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

Fct.assign.trip cmd.
parameter 'Fct.assign.trip cmd.' at
Par/Func/Glob/ MAIN in the menu tree). The
down arrow (") indicates that a list parameter
has been selected.
1 Press the down key. The first function and Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

the first selected signal will appear in the third #01 DIST
and fourth lines, respectively. The symbol Trip zone 1
#01 in the display indicates the first item of the
selection. If MAIN: Without function appears
for the first item, then this means that no
function assignment has been made yet.
2 Scroll through the list of assigned functions Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

by pressing the right and left keys. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
OR #02 DIST
Trip zone 2
Once the end of the list is reached, the display Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

shown on the right will appear. Fct.assign.trip cmd.
#05 MAIN
?????
3 Press the ENTER key at any position in the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

list. The LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE #02 DIST
will light up. Trip zone 2
4 Scroll through the assignable functions by Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

pressing the right and left keys in the input #02 DIST
mode. Trip zone 4
5 Select the operator or the class using the Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

up and down keys. In this particular case, OR #02 DIST
only the OR operator can be selected. There Trip zone 4
is no limitation on the selection of classes.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-27

(continued)

Action
6 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator

C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN
will go out. The assignment has been made. OR #02 DIST
The unit will now operate with the new settings. Trip zone 4
If no operator has been selected, the OR

operator is always assigned automatically
when the ENTER key is pressed. There is no
automatic assignment of classes.
7 Press the up key to exit the list at any point Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

in the list.
8 If you wish to reject the new setting while C Par/Func/Glob/MAIN

you are still entering it (LED indicator labeled OR #02 DIST
EDIT MODE is on), press the CLEAR key. The Trip zone 2
LED indicator will go out.
Deleting a List Parameter

If MAIN: Without function is assigned to a given item, then all the following items are
deleted. If this occurs for item #01, everything is deleted.
6-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.5.6 Memory Readout
After a memory is entered, the memory can be read out at the entry point. It is not
necessary to activate the change-enabling function or even to switch the device to
offline. Inadvertent clearing of a memory at the entry point is not possible.
The following memories are available:
! In the menu tree Oper/Rec/OP_RC: Operating data memory

! In the menu tree Oper/Rec/MT_RC: Monitoring signal memory
! Event memories
# In the menu tree Events/Rec/FT_RC: Fault memories 1 to 8
# In the menu tree Events/Rec/OL_RC: Overload memories 1 to 8
# In the menu tree Events/Rec/GF_RC: Ground fault memories 1 to 8
Not all of these event memories are present in each unit. A given unit may contain only
some of them or even none at all, depending on the device type.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-29

(continued)
Readout of the operating

data memory
The operating data memory contains stored signals of actions that occur during
operation, such as the enabling or disabling of a device function. A maximum of 100
entries is possible, after which the oldest entry is overwritten. Operating data memory
entries are also displayed on the event panel.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the operating data Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
memory.
1 Press the down key to enter the operating Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 11:33 ARC
data memory. The latest entry is displayed. Enabled USER
No
2 Press the left key repeatedly to display the Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 10:01 PSIG
entries one after the other in chronological Enabled USER
order. Once the end of the operating data Yes
memory has been reached, pressing the left
key again will have no effect.
3 Press the right key to display the previous Oper/Rec/OP_RC

01.01.97 11:33 ARC
entry. Enabled USER
No
4 Press the up key at any point within the Oper/Rec/OP_RC

Operat. data record.
operating data memory to return to the entry
point.
6-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Readout of the monitoring

signal memory
If the unit detects an internal fault in the course of internal self-monitoring routines or if it
detects power system conditions that prevent flawless functioning of the unit, then an
entry is made in the monitoring signal memory. A maximum of 30 entries is possible.
After that an overflow signal is issued.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the monitoring Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
signal memory.
1 Press the down key to enter the monitoring Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
signal memory. The oldest entry is displayed. Checksum error param
2 Press the right key repeatedly to display Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 10:01 SFMON
the entries one after the other in chronological Exception oper. syst.
order. If more than 30 monitoring signals have
been entered since the last reset, the overflow
signal is displayed as the last entry.
3 Press the left key to display the previous Mon. signal record.
01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
entry. Checksum error param
4 If the down key is held down while a Mon. signal record.

01.01.97 13:33 SFMON
monitoring signal is being displayed, the Checksum error param
following additional information will be
displayed:
First: Time when the signal first occurred First: 13:33:59.744
Active: Yes
Active: The fault is still being detected Reset: No
(Yes) or is no longer detected (No) Number: 5
by the self-monitoring function.
Reset: The fault was no longer detected by
the self-monitoring function and has
been reset (Yes).
Number: The signal occurred x times.
5 Press the up key at any point within the Oper/Rec/MT_RC

Mon. signal record.
monitoring signal memory to return to the entry
point.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-31

(continued)
Readout of the event

memories
There are eight event memories for each type of event. The latest event is stored in
event memory 1, the previous one in event memory 2, and so forth.
Readout of event memories is illustrated using the fault memory as an example.

Action
0 Select the entry point for the first fault Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
memory, for example. If the memory contains 01.01.99 10:00:33
entries, the third line of the display will show
the date and time the fault began. If the third
line is blank, then there are no entries in the
fault memory.
1 Press the down key to enter the fault Fault recording 1

FT_RC
memory. First, the fault number is shown. In Event
this example it is the 22nd fault since the last 22
reset.
2 Press the right key repeatedly to see first Fault recording 1

200 ms FT_DA
the measured fault data and then the binary Running time
signals in chronological order. The time shown 0.17 s
in the second line is the relative time,
measured from the onset of the fault, at which
the value was measured or the binary signal Fault recording 1
started or ended. 0 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
Once the end of the fault has been reached Start
(after the right key has been pressed
repeatedly), pressing the right key again will
Fault recording 1
have no effect. 241 ms FT_RC
Record. in progress
End
3 Press the left key to see the previous Fault recording 1

0 ms FT_RC
measured value or the previous signal. Record. in progress
Start
4 Press the up key at any point within the Events/Rec/FT_RC

Fault recording 1
fault memory to return to the entry point. 01.01.99 10:00:33
6-32 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
6.5.7 Resetting
All information memories including the event memories and the monitoring signal
memory and also the LED indicators can be reset manually. In addition, the LED
indicators are automatically cleared and initialized at the onset of a new fault provided
that the appropriate operating mode has been selected so that they always indicate the
latest fault.
The LED indicators can also be reset manually by pressing the CLEAR key, which is
always possible in the standard control mode. This action also triggers an LED indicator
test and an LCD display test. The event memories are not affected by this action, so that
inadvertent deletion of the records associated with the reset signal pattern is reliably
prevented.
Because of the ring structure of the event memories, the data for eight consecutive
events are updated automatically so that manual resetting should not be necessary, in
principle. If the event memories need to be cleared completely, however, as would be
the case after functional testing, this can be done after selecting the appropriate
parameter. The resetting procedure will now be illustrated using the fault memory as an
example. In this example the global change-enabling function has already been
activated.

Action
0 Select the reset parameter. Line 3 of the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
display shows the number of faults since the 10
last reset, 10 in this example.
1 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will light up. 10
Don't execute
2 Press the up or down keys to change the Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
setting to Execute. 10
Execute
3 Press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
labeled EDIT MODE will go out. The value in 0
line 3 is reset to 0.
4 To cancel the intended clearing of the fault C Oper/CtrlTest/FT_RC

Reset recording
recordings after leaving the standard control 10
mode (the LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE
LED is on), press the CLEAR key. The LED
indicator will go out, and the fault recordings
remain stored in the device unchanged. Any
parameter can be selected again for a value
change by pressing the keys.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-33

(continued)
6.5.8 Password-Protected Control Actions
Certain actions from the local control panel (such as a manual trip command for testing
purposes) can only be carried out by entering a password. This setup is designed to
prevent accidental output and applies even when the global change-enabling function
has been activated.
The password consists of a pre-defined sequential key combination entered within a

specific time interval. The following example illustrates the password-protected output of
a manual trip command using the factory-set password. If the password has been
changed by the user (see the section entitled Changing the Password), the following
description will apply analogously.

Action
0 In the menu tree Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN, Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
select the parameter Man. trip cmd. USER. Don't execute
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks (*)

C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
appear in the fourth line of the display. Don't execute
********
2 Press the following keys in sequence: Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
left Don't execute
*
right Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
up Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd. USER
Don't execute
*
down Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN
Man. trip cmd USER
The display will change as shown in the Don't execute
column on the right. *
Now press the ENTER key. The LED indicator Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

labeled EDIT MODE will light up. This Man. trip cmd. USER
indicates that the setting can now be changed Don't execute
by pressing the up or down keys.
3 Change the setting to Execute. Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
Execute
6-34 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

Action
4 Press the ENTER key again. The LED Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
indicator will go out. The unit will execute the Don't execute
command.
5 As long as the LED indicator labeled EDIT C Oper/CtrlTest/MAIN

Man. trip cmd. USER
MODE is on, the control action can be Don't execute
terminated by pressing the CLEAR key. The
LED indicator will go out.
6.5.9 Changing the Password
The password consists of a combination of keys that must be entered sequentially within
a specific time interval. The left,right, up and down keys may be used to define the
password and represent the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4, respectively:
1 2
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-35

(continued)
The password can be changed by the user at any time. The procedure for this change is
described below. The starting point is the factory-set password.

Action
0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC select the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
parameter Password. ********
1 Press the ENTER key. Eight asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the left, right, up and down keys Par/Conf/LOC

Password
to enter the valid password. The display will ********
change as shown in the column on the right. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
********
*
3 Now press the ENTER key. The LED Par/Conf/LOC

Password
indicator labeled EDIT MODE will light up. The _
third line shows an underscore character ( _ )
as the prompt for entering a new password.
4 Enter the new password, which in this Par/Conf/LOC

Password
example is done by pressing the up key *
followed by the down key.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
5 Press the ENTER key again. Asterisks Par/Conf/LOC

Password
appear in the third line, and a cursor **
(underscore) in the fourth line prompts the user _
to enter the new password again.
6-36 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password
**
**
7a Press the ENTER key again. If the Par/Conf/LOC

Password
password has been re-entered correctly, the ********
LED indicator labeled EDIT MODE goes out
and the display appears as shown on the right.
The new password is now valid.
7b If the password has been re-entered Par/Conf/LOC

Password
incorrectly, the LED indicator labeled EDIT **
MODE remains on and the display shown on _
the right appears. The password needs to be
re-entered. It is also possible to cancel the
change in password by pressing the CLEAR
key (see Step 8).
8 The change in password can be canceled at C Par/Conf/LOC

Password
any time before Step 7 by pressing the CLEAR ********
key. If this is done, the original password
continues to be valid.
Operation from the local control panel without password protection is also possible. To
select this option, immediately press the ENTER key a second time in steps 4 and 6
without entering anything else. This will configure the local control panel without
password protection, and no control actions involving changes will be possible until the
global change-enabling function has been activated (see the section entitled Change-
Enabling Function).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-37

(continued)
If the configured password has been forgotten, it can be called up on the LCD display as
described below. The procedure involves turning the device off and then on again.

Action
0 Turn off the device.
1 Turn the device on again. At the very

beginning of device startup, press the four TEST
directional keys (left, right, up and down) at
the same time and hold them down.
2 When this condition is detected during Password

startup, the password is displayed. 1234
3 After the four keys are released, startup will

continue. TEST
6-38 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Changing and display of

the L/R password
The L/R password must be entered to enable local control.

Action
0 In the menu tree Par/Conf/LOC select Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
parameter Password L/R. ********
1 Press enter key. Eight stars appear in the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
fourth line of the display. ********
********
2 Press the left/right and up/down keys to Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
enter the valid general password. The display ********
changes as shown. *
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
********
*
3 Now press enter key. The EDIT MODE Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
LED will light up. The third line shows the 1423
current L/R password.
4 Enter the new password, using the up key Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
followed by the down key for the shorter *
password in this example.
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
5 Press enter key again. Stars appear in the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
third line; the enter prompt in the fourth line **
invites the user to enter the new L/R password _
once more.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 6-39

(continued)

Action
6 Re-enter the L/R password. Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
**
*
Par/Conf/LOC
Password L/R
**
**
7a Press enter key once more. If the Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
password has been repeated correctly, the ********
EDIT MODE LED goes out and the display
changes as illustrated. The new password is
now valid.
7b If the L/R password has been repeated Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
incorrectly, the EDIT MODE LED remains lit **
and the display to the right is shown. The L/R _
password needs to be re-entered.
Alternatively, the password change can be
aborted by pressing the reset key (see step 8).
8 Up to step 7, the password change can be C Par/Conf/LOC

Password L/R
aborted at any time by pressing the reset key. ********
The original password continues to be valid in
this case.
6-40 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
7 Settings
7.1 Parameter
The P139 must be adjusted to the system and to the protected equipment by appropriate
settings. This section gives instructions for determining the settings, which are located in
the folder titled Parameters in the menu tree. The sequence in which the settings are
listed and described in this chapter corresponds to their sequence in the menu tree. The
'Address List' in the Appendix lists all parameters, along with setting ranges and
incrementation or selection tables.
The units are supplied with a factory-set configuration of settings that in most cases
correspond to the default settings given in the Address List. If the factory settings differ
from the default settings, then this is indicated below at the appropriate points.
The default settings given in the Address List are activated after a cold restart. The
P139 is blocked in that case. All settings must be re-entered after a cold restart.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-1

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.1 Device Identification
The device identification settings are used to record the ordering information and the
design version of the P139. They have no effect on the device functions. These settings
should only be changed if the design version of the P139 is modified.
Device DVICE: Device type 000 000
The device type is displayed. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: Software version 002 120
Software version for the device. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW date 002 122
Date the software was created. This display cannot be altered.

DVICE: SW version communic. 002 103
Software version for the device's communication software. This display

cannot be altered.
DVICE: Language version 002 123
Identification of the change level of the texts of the data model. This display
cannot be altered.
DVICE: Text vers.data model 002 121
Using the text replacement tool provided by the operating program, the
user can change the parameter descriptors (plain text designations) and
load them into the device. These customized data models contain an
identifier defined by the user while preparing the data model. This identifier
is displayed at this point in the menu tree. Standard data models have the
identifier 0 (factory-set default).
DVICE: F number 002 124
The F number is the serial number of the device. This display cannot be
altered.
DVICE: Order No. 000 001
Order number of the device. The user cannot alter this number.
7-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Order ext. No. 1 000 003
Order extension numbers for the device.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-3

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Module var. slot 1 086 050
Item number of the module inserted in the respective slot 1 to 21.

The display always shows the actual component configuration at any given
time.
DVICE: Module vers. slot 1 086 193
Index letter specifying the version of the module fitted in the respective slot.
7-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DVICE: Variant of module A 086 047
Item number of module A in this design version.

DVICE: Version of module A 086 190
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: Variant of module L 086 048

DVICE: Version of module L 086 191
Index letter specifying the version of module A.

DVICE: Variant of module B 086 049

DVICE: Version of module B 086 192
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Variant module B (a) 086 046
Item number of analog bus module B.

DVICE: Version module B (a) 086 189
Index letter specifying the version of the digital bus module B.

DVICE: Customer ID data 1 000 040
Set your numerically coded user data here for your records.
DVICE: Device ID 000 035
ID code used by the operating program for identification purposes. See

description of the respective operating program for more detailed setting
instructions.
DVICE: Substation ID 000 036

instructions.
DVICE: Feeder ID 000 037

instructions.
DVICE: Device password 1 000 048
DVICE: Device password 2 000 049

instructions.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-5

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.2 Configuration Parameters
Local control panel LOC: Language 003 020
Language in which texts will be displayed on the local control panel.

LOC: Decimal delimiter 003 021
Character to be used as decimal separator on the local control panel.

LOC: Password 003 035
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Password L/R 221 040
The password to be used for changing settings from the local control panel
can be defined here. Further information on changing the password is
given in Chapter 6.
LOC: Displ. ext.dev.desig 221 032 Fig: 3-2
This setting defines whether the external device designations shall be

displayed on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Display L/R 221 070 Fig: 3-2
This setting defines whether the control site local or remote shall be
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071 Fig: 3-2
This setting defines whether the "Locked" or "Unlocked" status shall be

LOC: Designation busbar 1 221 033 Fig: 3-2
Setting the busbar designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.

LOC: Designat. bus sect.1 221 035 Fig: 3-2
LOC: Designat. bus sect.2 221 036 Fig: 3-2
Setting the busbar section designations to be displayed on the Bay Panel.

LOC: Character set 221 038 Fig: 3-2
The user can choose between several character sets to represent

switchgear and their switching states on the Bay Panel. The symbols
assigned to the character sets are shown in Chapter 6: Local Control Panel.
Note:
Character set 3 is identical to character set 1 in the factory default setting,
but can be replaced by an user-defined character set, by applying an
accessory tool to the operating program.
7-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208 Fig: 3-8
This setting determines whether the switching (using either the L/R key or
the key switch) is between local and remote control (LR) or between
local+remote and local control (R&LL).
LOC: Assignment read key 080 110
Selection of the event log that will be displayed when the READ key is
pressed.
LOC: Fct. Operation Panel 053 007 Fig: 3-4
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Measured Value Panel also

referred to as the Operation Panel.
LOC: Fct. Overload Panel 053 005 Fig: 3-7
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Overload Panel.

LOC: Fct. Grd.Fault Panel 053 004 Fig: 3-6
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Ground Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Fault Panel 053 003 Fig: 3-5
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Fault Panel.

LOC: Fct. Signal Panel 221 072 Fig: 3-3
Definition of the values to be displayed on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Aut.activ.Sign.Panel 221 073 Fig: 3-3
Activation of the automatic switching to the Signal Panel at every change of

state of a configured signal.
LOC: Stat.ind.Sign.Panel 221 074 Fig: 3-3
Definition of display type of active / inactive signals on the Signal Panel.

LOC: Indicat.Sign.Panel 221 075 Fig: 3-3
Definition of signal type at change of state and response to an acknowledge

command.
LOC: Sign.caus.Sign.Panel 221 078 Fig: 3-3
Definition of cause for signaling (every change of state / incoming signals

only).
LOC: Fct.asg. num. displ. 221 041 Fig: 3-2
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in

numerical form.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-7

7 Settings
(continued)
LOC: Fct. asg. bar displ. 221 042 Fig: 3-2
Definition of the measured values to be displayed on the Bay Panel in bar

chart form.
Note:
Measured values to be displayed in bar chart form must also be selected for
display as numerical measured values. However, not all measured values
that can be displayed in numerical form can also be displayed in bar chart
form! In such cases, a dummy or placeholder must be included in the
selection list for the bar chart display at the same point at which a measured
value that cannot be displayed in bar chart form appears in the selection list
for numerical measured values.
Example:
Current IB is to be displayed. In this case, either the primary current IB or

the per-unit current IB shall be selected for the numerical display. The per-
unit current IB shall be entered at the same position in the selection list for
the bar chart display.
LOC: Bar display type 221 039 Fig: 3-2
Deactivation of the bar chart display or definition of the orientation of the bar
chart to display measured values on the Bay Panel.
LOC: Scal. bar display I 221 044 Fig: 3-2
Scaling of measured current values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Scal. bar display V 221 045 Fig: 3-2
Scaling of measured voltage values to be displayed in bar chart form.

LOC: Display bar scale 221 046 Fig: 3-2
Setting this window can deactivate the scalable bar chart.

LOC: Hold-time for Panels 031 075 Fig: 3-3,3-4
Setting the time period for which a panel is displayed, before the unit
switches to the next panel. This setting is only relevant if more values are
selected than can be shown on the LC-Display.
LOC: Autom. return time 003 014 Fig: 3-3,3-4
If the user does not press a key on the local control panel during this set
time period, the change-enabling function is deactivated and the Bay Panel
is called up.
LOC: Return time select. 221 030 Fig: 3-2
time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is canceled.
LOC: Return time illumin. 003 023
time period, then the backlighting of the LCD display is switched off, and
any switchgear selection that might have been made is canceled.
7-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
PC link PC: Name of manufacturer 003 183 Fig: 3-9
Setting the name of the manufacturer.

Note: This setting can be changed to ensure compatibility.
PC: Bay address 003 068 Fig: 3-9
PC: Device address 003 069 Fig: 3-9
Bay and device addresses are used to address the device in

communication via the PC interface. An identical setting must be selected
for both addresses.
PC: Baud rate 003 081 Fig: 3-9
Baud rate of the PC interface.

PC: Parity bit 003 181 Fig: 3-9
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the PC connected to the
P139.
PC: Spontan. sig. enable 003 187 Fig: 3-9
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the PC interface.

PC: Select. spontan.sig. 003 189 Fig: 3-9
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via the PC interface.

PC: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 084 Fig: 3-9
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the PC interface.
PC: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 185 Fig: 3-9
Selection of the measured values that are transmitted in a user-defined

telegram via the PC interface.
PC: Delta V 003 055 Fig: 3-9
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta I 003 056 Fig: 3-9
A measured current value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by

the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta P 003 059 Fig: 3-9
The active power value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs by the
set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta f 003 057 Fig: 3-9
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the PC interface if it differs

by the set delta from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 155 Fig: 3-9
The telegram is transmitted if a measured value differs by the set delta

quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
PC: Delta t 003 058 Fig: 3-9
All measured values are transmitted again via the PC interface after this
time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been triggered
by the other delta conditions.
PC: Time-out 003 188 Fig: 3-9
Setting the time to elapse after the last telegram exchange via the PC
interface before activating the second communication channel of
communication module A.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-9

7 Settings
(continued)
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Function group COMM1 056 026
Canceling function group COMM1 or including it in the configuration. If the

function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden.
COMM1: General enable USER 003 170 Fig: 3-16
Disabling or enabling communication interface 1.

COMM1: Basic IEC870-5enable 003 215 Fig: 3-10
Common settings for enabling all protocols based on IEC 870-5-xxx.

COMM1: Addit. -101 enable 003 216 Fig: 3-10
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the protocol based on
IEC 870-5-101.
COMM1: Addit. ILS enable 003 217 Fig: 3-10
Enabling additional settings that are relevant for the ILS protocol.
COMM1: MODBUS enable 003 220 Fig: 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the MODBUS protocol.

COMM1: DNP3 enable 003 231 Fig: 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the DNP 3.0 protocol.

COMM1: COURIER enable 103 040 Fig: 3-10
Enabling settings relevant for the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Communicat. protocol 003 167 Fig: 3-10
Select the communication protocol that shall be used for the communication
interface.
COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178 Fig: 3-11
The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the 103
protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is

enabled.
COMM1: MODBUS prot. variant 003 214 Fig: 3-14
The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the
MODBUS protocol.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Line idle state 003 165 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
Setting the line idle state indication. 3-14,3-15,
3-16
7-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Baud rate 003 071 Fig: 3-11,

3-12,3-13,3-
Baud rate of the communication interface. 14,3-15,3-16
COMM1: Parity bit 003 171 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system 3-14,3-15,
connected to the P139. 3-16
COMM1: Dead time monitoring 003 176 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
The P139 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive 3-14,3-15,
pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if 3-16
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM1: Mon. time polling 003 202 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be 3-14,3-15,
less than the time set here. 3-16
COMM1: Octet comm. address 003 072 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the 3-14,3-15,
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be 3-16
selected for both addresses.
Note:
The former designation for C O M M 1 :
Octet comm. address: ILSA: Bay address
"ASDU": Application Service Data Unit
COMM1: Oct.2 comm.addr.DNP3 003 240 Fig: 3-15
In the DNP 3.0 protocol, a 16-bit address is used to identify devices. The
address that can be set here is the higher-order octet, whereas the address
set at C O M M 1 : O c t e t c o m m . a d d r e s s is the lower-order octet of
the DNP address.
Note: This setting is hidden unless the DNP 3.0 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Test monitor on 003 166 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13,
Setting specifying whether data shall be recorded for service activities. 3-14,3-15,
3-16
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-11

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Name of manufacturer 003 161 Fig: 3-11,

3-12,3-13
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Octet address ASDU 003 073 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
The communication address and the ASDU address are used to identify the
device in communication via the interface. An identical setting must be
Note:
This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
The former designation for COMM1: Octet address ASDU:
ILSA: D e v i c e a d d r e s s .
COMM1: Spontan. sig. enable 003 177 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication
interface.
Note: This setting is hidden unless an IEC 870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Select. spontan.sig. 003 179 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via "logical"
communication interface 1.
COMM1: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 003 074 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the
communication interface.
COMM1: Cycl. data ILS tel. 003 175 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
telegram via the communication interface.
COMM1: Delta V 003 050 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value transmitted.
7-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta I 003 051 Fig: 3-11,

3-12,3-13
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta P 003 054 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it
COMM1: Delta f 003 052 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication
interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM1: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 003 150 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
COMM1: Delta t 003 053 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
COMM1: Delta t (energy) 003 151 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
The measured values for active energy and reactive energy are transmitted
via the communication interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Contin. general scan 003 077 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
A continuous or background general scan means that the P139 transmits all
settings, signals, and monitoring signals via the communication interface
during slow periods when there is not much activity. This ensures that there
will be data consistency with a connected control system. The time to be
set defines the minimum time difference between two telegrams.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-13

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Comm. address length 003 201 Fig: 3-12
Setting the communication address length.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
COMM1: Octet 2 comm. addr. 003 200 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the higher-order communication address.

COMM1: Cause transm. length 003 192 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the cause of transmission.

COMM1: Address length ASDU 003 193 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the common address for identification of telegram

structures.
Note:
This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-101 protocol is set.
COMM1: Octet 2 addr. ASDU 003 194 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the common higher-order address for identification of

telegram structures.
Note:
COMM1: Addr.length inf.obj. 003 196 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the address for information objects.

COMM1: Oct.3 addr. inf.obj. 003 197 Fig: 3-12
Setting the length of the higher-order address for information objects.

COMM1: Inf.No.<->funct.type 003 195 Fig: 3-12
Setting specifying whether information numbers and function type shall be

reversed in the object address.
COMM1: Time tag length 003 198 Fig: 3-12
Setting the time tag length.

7-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: ASDU1 / ASDU20 conv. 003 190 Fig: 3-12
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 1 or 20 shall be converted as

a single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: ASDU2 conversion 003 191 Fig: 3-12
Setting specifying whether telegram structure 2 shall be converted as a

single signal or double signal.
Note:
COMM1: Initializ. signal 003 199 Fig: 3-12
Setting specifying whether an initialization signal shall be issued.

COMM1: Balanced operation 003 226 Fig: 3-12
Setting that determines whether communication takes place on a balanced

basis (full duplex operation).
COMM1: Direction bit 003 227 Fig: 3-12
Setting the transmission direction. Normally this value will be set to '1' at
the control center and to '0' at the substation.
COMM1: Time-out interval 003 228 Fig: 3-12
Setting the maximum time that will elapse until the status signal for the
acknowledgment command is issued.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. cmds 003 210 Fig: 3-14
MODBUS registers in the range 00301 to 00400 are assigned to the

selected commands. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first command is given to the register no. 00301, the second
to the register no. 00302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. selec. sig. 003 211 Fig: 3-14

selected signals. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This means
that the first signal is given to the register no. 10301, the second to the
register no. 10302, etc.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-15

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. m.val. 003 212 Fig: 3-14

selected measured values. Assignment is made in the order of selection.
This means that the first measured value is given to the register no. 30301,
the second to the register no. 30302, etc.
COMM1: Reg.asg. sel. param. 003 213 Fig: 3-14

selected parameters. Assignment is made in the order of selection. This
means that the first parameter is given to the register no. 40301, the second
to the register no. 40302, etc.
COMM1: Delta t (MODBUS) 003 152 Fig: 3-14
All MODBUS registers are transmitted again via the communication

interface after this time has elapsed.
COMM1: Autom.event confirm. 003 249 Fig: 3-14
Setting specifying whether an event must be confirmed by the master, in

order for an event to be deleted from the 'event queue'.
COMM1: Phys. Charact. Delay 003 241 Fig: 3-15
Number of bits that must pass between the receipt of the 'request' and the
start of sending the 'response'.
COMM1: Phys. Char. Timeout 003 242 Fig: 3-15
Number of bits that may be missing from the telegram before receipt is
terminated.
COMM1: Link Confirm. Mode 003 243 Fig: 3-15
Setting the acknowledgment mode of the link layer.

COMM1: Link Confirm.Timeout 003 244 Fig: 3-15
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
link layer.
7-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Link Max. Retries 003 245 Fig: 3-15
Number of repetitions that are carried out on the link layer if errors have
occurred during transmission (such as failure to acknowledge).
COMM1: Appl.Confirm.Timeout 003 246 Fig: 3-15
Setting the time period within which the master must acknowledge at the
application layer.
COMM1: Appl. Need Time Del. 003 247 Fig: 3-15
Time interval within which the slave cyclically requests time synchronization
from the master.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. inputs 003 232 Fig: 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 1 binary inputs.
Assignment of indexes is made in the order of selection, beginning with 0.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin.outputs 003 233 Fig: 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 10 binary outputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. bin. count. 003 234 Fig: 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 20 binary counters.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog inp. 003 235 Fig: 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 30 analog inputs.
COMM1: Ind./cl. analog outp 003 236 Fig: 3-15
Selection of data points and data classes for object 40 analog outputs.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-17

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM1: Delta meas.v. (DNP3) 003 250 Fig: 3-15
Initialization value of threshold values for transmission of measured values

in object 30. The master for each measured value can change the threshold
values separately by writing to object 34, 'analog input reporting deadband'.
COMM1: Delta t (DNP3) 003 248 Fig: 3-15
Cycle time for updating DNP object 30 (analog inputs).

COMM1: Command selection 103 042 Fig: 3-16
Selection of commands to be issued via the COURIER protocol.

Note: This setting is hidden unless the COURIER protocol is enabled.
COMM1: Signal selection 103 043 Fig: 3-16
Selection of signals to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Meas. val. selection 103 044 Fig: 3-16
Selection of measured values to be transmitted via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Parameter selection 103 045 Fig: 3-16
Selection of settings to be altered via the COURIER protocol.

COMM1: Delta t (COURIER) 103 046 Fig: 3-16
Cycle time at the conclusion of which the selected measured values are
again transmitted.
Canceling function group COMM2 or including it in the configuration. If the

COMM2: General enable USER 103 170 Fig: 3-18

COMM2: Line idle state 103 165 Fig: 3-18
Setting the line idle state indication.
7-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Baud rate 103 071 Fig: 3-18
Baud rate of the communication interface.

COMM2: Parity bit 103 171 Fig: 3-18
Set the same parity that is set at the interface of the control system
connected to the P139.
COMM2: Dead time monitoring 103 176 Fig: 3-18
The P139 monitors telegram transmission to make sure that no excessive

pause occurs within a telegram. This monitoring function can be disabled if
it is not required.
Note: This setting is only necessary for modem transmission.
COMM2: Mon. time polling 103 202 Fig: 3-18
The time between two polling calls from the communication master must be
less than the time set here.
COMM2: Octet comm. address 103 072 Fig: 3-18
COMM2: Name of manufacturer 103 161 Fig: 3-18

COMM2: Octet address ASDU 103 073 Fig: 3-18
COMM2: Spontan. sig. enable 103 177 Fig: 3-18
Enable for the transmission of spontaneous signals via the communication

interface.
COMM2: Select. spontan.sig. 103 179 Fig: 3-18
Selection of spontaneous signals for transmission via "logical"

COMM2: Transm.enab.cycl.dat 103 074 Fig: 3-18
Enable for the cyclic transmission of measured values via the

communication interface.
COMM2: Cycl. data ILS tel. 103 175 Fig: 3-18

telegram via the communication interface.
COMM2: Delta V 103 050 Fig: 3-18
A measured voltage value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-19

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM2: Delta I 103 051 Fig: 3-18
A measured current value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta P 103 054 Fig: 3-18
The active power value is transmitted via the communication interface if it

COMM2: Delta f 103 052 Fig: 3-18
The measured frequency value is transmitted via the communication

interface if it differs by the set delta quantity from the last measured value
transmitted.
COMM2: Delta meas.v.ILS tel 103 150 Fig: 3-18

COMM2: Delta t 103 053 Fig: 3-18
All measured values are transmitted again via the communication interface
after this time period has elapsed provided that transmission has not been
triggered by the other delta conditions.
7-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Canceling function group COMM3 or including it in the configuration.

This setting parameter is only visible if the relevant optional communication
module is fitted.
If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
COMM3: General enable USER 120 030

COMM3: Baud rate 120 038
Adjustment of the baud rate for telegram transmission via the teleprotection
interface (InterMiCOM interface) so as to meet the requirements of the
transmission carrier.
COMM3: Source address 120 031
Address for send signals.

COMM3: Receiving address 120 032
Address for receive signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. send 1 121 001
Assignment of functions for the 8 send signals.

COMM3: Fct. assignm. rec. 1 120 001
Configuration (assignment of functions) for the 8 receive signals

COMM3: Oper. mode receive 1 120 002
Selection of Blocking or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 1 to 4 (single-bit transmission).
Selection of Permissive or Direct intertrip for the operating mode of receive

signals 5 to 8 (bit-pair transmission).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-21

7 Settings
(continued)
COMM3: Default value rec. 1 120 060
Definition of the default value for the 8 receive signals.

COMM3: Time-out comm.fault 120 033 Fig: 3-21
This timer triggers the alarm signals CO MM 3 : Com mu nic a ti ons fau l t
and SFM ON : Co mm un ic .fa ul t CO MM 3 and sets the received signals
to their user-defined default values. Time-out occurs when the set time has
elapsed since the most recent 100% valid telegram was received.
COMM3: Sig.asg. comm.fault 120 034
Using this setting, the alarm signal can be configured (assigned) to the
corresponding PSIG input signal.
COMM3: Time-out link fail. 120 035 Fig: 3-21
Time indicating a persistent failure of the transmission channel. After this

timer stage has elapsed, alarm signals CO MM 3 : Co mm . l ink fa i lur e
and SFM ON : Co mm .l ink fai l .COM M3 are raised. These can be
mapped to give the operator a warning LED or contact to indicate that
maintenance attention is required.
COMM3: Limit telegr. errors 120 036
Percentage of corrupted messages compared to total messages transmitted

before an alarm is raised (COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. and SFMON:
L i m .e xc e e d . , t e l .e r r .) . When this threshold is exceeded, the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.
IRIG_B IRIGB: Function group IRIGB 056 072
Canceling function group IRIGB or including it in the configuration. If the

IRIGB: General enable USER 023 200 Fig: 3-22
Disabling or enabling the IRIG-B interface.
7-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary inputs
The P139 has opto coupler inputs for processing binary signals from the substation. The
number and connection schemes for the available binary inputs are shown in the
terminal connection diagrams. The Address List in the Appendix gives information about
the configuration options for all binary inputs.
The P139 identifies the fitted modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is not
fitted or has fewer binary signal inputs than the maximum number possible at this slot,
then the configuration addresses for the missing binary signal inputs are automatically
hidden in the menu tree.
When configuring binary inputs one should keep in mind the fact that the same function
can be assigned to several signal inputs. Thus one function can be activated from
several control points having different signal voltages.
The configuration in slots A and B and the configuration for the binary inputs U C01 to
U C08 will be changed with the selection of a new bay type. (Whether automatic
configuration occurs, is defined by the setting at M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O .)
Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 pin type or ring type cable
socket terminals the symbolic slots A, B and C refer to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
C 08 16
The configuration of binary inputs for each bay type in the case of auto-assignment is
given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the binary inputs at slots A
and B as well as the binary inputs U C01 to U C08 are configured for
functions from the DEVxx function groups only. Otherwise there will be an
error message, and the new bay type will not be activated.
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all binary inputs specified in
the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the
device. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will
not be activated.
In order to ensure that the device will recognize the input signals, the triggering signals
must persist for at least 30 ms.
The operating mode for each binary signal input can be defined. The user can specify
whether the presence (active high mode) or absence (active low mode) of a voltage
shall be interpreted as the logic 1 signal.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-23

7 Settings
(continued)
INP: Fct. assignm. U 601 152 091
7-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to binary signal inputs.

INP: Oper. mode U 601 152 092
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-25

7 Settings
(continued)
7-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for binary signal inputs.
Measured data input MEASI: Function group MEASI 056 030
Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the

MEASI: General enable USER 011 100 Fig: 3-24
Disabling or enabling analog measured data input.

MEASI: Enable IDC p.u. 037 190 Fig: 3-27
Setting the minimum current that must flow in order for the P139 to display a
measured value > 0 (zero suppression).
MEASI: IDC< open circuit 037 191 Fig: 3-27
If the input current falls below the set threshold, the P139 will issue an open
circuit signal.
MEASI: IDC 1 037 150 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 2 037 152 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 3 037 154 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 4 037 156 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 5 037 158 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 6 037 160 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 7 037 162 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 8 037 164 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 9 037 166 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 10 037 168 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 11 037 170 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 12 037 172 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 13 037 174 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 14 037 176 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 15 037 178 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 16 037 180 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 17 037 182 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 18 037 184 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 19 037 186 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: IDC 20 037 188 Fig: 3-27
Setting the input current that will correspond to a linearized value that has
been set accordingly.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-27

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASI: IDC,lin 1 037 151 Fig: 3-27
Setting the linearized current that will correspond to an input current that
has been set accordingly.
MEASI: Scaled val. IDC,lin1 037 192 Fig: 3-28
Setting the scaled value of IDC,lin1.

MEASI: Scaled val.IDC,lin20 037 193 Fig: 3-28
Setting the scaled value of IDC,lin20.

MEASI: Type of TempSensors 004 254
Selection of the temperature sensor type (PT 100, NI 100 or NI 120).
7-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary outputs
The P139 has output relays for the output of binary signals. The number and connection
schemes for the available output relays are shown in the terminal connection diagrams.
The Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
binary outputs.
The P139 identifies the installed modules during startup. If a given binary I/O module is
not fitted or has fewer output relays than the maximum number possible at this slot, then
the configuration addresses for the missing output relays are automatically hidden in the
menu tree.
The contact data for the all-or-nothing relays permits them to be used either as
command relays or as signal relays. It is important to note that the contact rating of the
binary modules (X) varies (see chapter Technical Data). One signal can also be
assigned simultaneously to several output relays for the purpose of contact
multiplication.
Selecting a new bay type can change the configuration for slots A and B! (Whether
automatic configuration occurs, is defined in the setting M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t
I / O .) .Depending on the connection type chosen for the P139 pin type or ring type
cable socket terminals the symbolic slots A and B correspond to the following slots:
Symbolic slot Pin type cable socket Ring type cable socket
terminals terminals
A 06 12
B 07 14
The configuration of output relays for each bay type in the case of auto-assignment is
given in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
In the case of auto-assignment, the following notes apply:
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that the output relays at slots A
and B are configured for functions from the DEVxx function groups only.
Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will not be
activated.
Note: Before selecting a new bay type, make sure that all output relays specified in
the List of Bay types for the selected bay type are actually available in the
device. Otherwise there will be an error message, and the new bay type will
not be activated.
An operating mode can be defined for each output relay. Depending on the selected
operating mode, the output relay will operate in either an energize-on-signal (ES) mode
or a normally-energized (NE) mode and in either a latching or non-latching mode. For
output relays operating in latching mode, the operating mode setting also determines
when latching will be canceled.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-29

7 Settings
(continued)
OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 601 150 121
7-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Assignment of functions to output relays.

OUTP: Oper. mode K 601 150 122
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-31

7 Settings
(continued)
Selection of operating mode for output relays.
7-32 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Measured data output MEASO: Function group MEASO 056 020
Canceling function group MEASI or including it in the configuration. If the

MEASO: General enable USER 031 074 Fig: 3-34
Disabling or enabling the measured data output function.

MEASO: Fct. assignm. BCD 053 002 Fig: 3-38
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in BCD-coded form.

MEASO: Hold time output BCD 010 010 Fig: 3-38
Setting the time period for transmission of the selected measured value in
BCD-coded form.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. BCD 037 140 Fig: 3-38
MEASO: Scaled max. val. BCD 037 141 Fig: 3-38
MEASO: BCD-Out min. value 037 142 Fig: 3-38
MEASO: BCD-Out max. value 037 143 Fig: 3-38
The variable Mx is to be issued in BCD-coded form.

For measured values in the range measured values to be issued the
output value should change linearly with the measured value.
Measured values Range
Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max.
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. BCD" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. BCD"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Output values Range

BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out min. value" ...
for measured values in the range ... "BCD-Out max. value"
"measured values to be issued"
BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out min. value"
for measured values = Mx,min.
BCD-coded output values "BCD-Out max. value"
for measured values = Mx,max.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-33

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-1 053 000 Fig: 3-40

MEASO: Fct. assignm. A-2 053 001
Selection of the measured value to be transmitted in analog form.

MEASO: Hold time output A-1 010 114 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Hold time output A-2 010 115
Setting the time period for output of the selected measured value.
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-1 037 104 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Scaled min. val. A-2 037 110
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-1 037 105 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Scaled knee val. A-2 037 111
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-1 037 106 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Scaled max. val. A-2 037 112
After conversion via a characteristic the selected measured value Ax

(x=1, 2) is to be issued as an output current. For this purpose a range
"measured values to be issued" is defined. In this range the characteristic
has two linear sections, which are separated by a knee point.
Measured values Range

Measured values for the variable Mx Mx,RL1 ... Mx,RL2
Associated scaled measured values 0 ... 1
Measured values to be issued Range

Measured values to be issued Mx,min. ... Mx,max.
Scaled measured values to be issued Mx,scal,min. ... Mx,scal,max
Designation of the set values "Scaled min. val. Ax" ...
in the data model ... "Scaled max. val. Ax"
with:
Mx,scal,min = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Mx,scal,max = (Mx,max - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
Knee point for characteristic Designation

Value for knee point Mx,knee
Scaled knee point value Mx,scaled,knee
Designation of this set value "Scaled knee val. Ax" ...
in the data model
with:
Mx,scaled,knee = (Mx,min - Mx,RL1) / (Mx,RL2 - Mx,RL1
7-34 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-1 037 107 Fig: 3-40

MEASO: AnOut min. val. A-2 037 113
MEASO: AnOut knee point A-1 037 108 Fig: 3-40

MEASO: AnOut knee point A-2 037 114
MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-1 037 109 Fig: 3-40

MEASO: AnOut max. val. A-2 037 115
Output values Designation in the data model

Output current range "AnOut min. val. Ax" ...
for measured values in the range ... "AnOut max. val. Ax"
"measured values to be issued"
Output current to be set "AnOut min. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,min.
Output current to be set "AnOut max. val. Ax"
for measured values = Mx,max.
Output current to be set "AnOut knee point Ax"
for measured values = Mx,knee
with:
Mx,min. ... Mx,max. : measured values to be issued
MEASO: Output value 1 037 120 Fig: 3-40
Measured values of external devices, which must be scaled to 0 to 100%,

can be issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-35

7 Settings
(continued)
LED indicators
The P139 has a total of 17 LED indicators for parallel display of binary signals. The
Address List in the Appendix gives information about the configuration options for all
LED indicators. LED indicator H 1 is not configurable. It is labeled HEALTHY and
signals the operational readiness of the device (supply voltage present). LED indicators
H 2 and H 3 are also not configurable. H 2 is labeled OUT OF SERVICE and signals a
blocking or malfunction; H 3 is labeled ALARM and signals a warning alarm. LED
indicator H 17 indicates that the user is in the EDIT MODE.
The factory setting for LED indicator H 4 is shown in the terminal connection drawings
included in the documentation or the appendix.
The layout of the LED indicators is shown in the dimensional drawings in chapter 4.
An operating mode can be defined for each LED indicator. Depending on the set
operating mode, the LED indicator will operate in either energize-on-signal (ES) mode
('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized (NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle') and
in either latching or non-latching mode. For LED indicators operating in latching mode,
the operating mode setting also determines when latching will be canceled.
LED: Fct. assignm. H 2 085 001
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 2.

The M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y function is permanently assigned.
Display of the function assigned to LED indicator H 3.

The S F M O N : W a r n i n g ( L E D ) function is permanently assigned.
Assignment of functions to LED indicators.
7-36 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LED: Operating mode H 2 085 002
Selection of operating mode for LED indicators.
Main function MAIN: Chann.assign.COMM1/2 003 169 Fig: 3-84
Assignment of communication interfaces to physical communication

channels.
MAIN: Type of bay 220 000 Fig: 3-45
Configuration of a bay type.

MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062 Fig: 3-45
If a customized bay type has been loaded, its bay type No. will be
displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number '0' will
be displayed.
Fault recording FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 1 035 160
FT_RC: Rec. analog chann. 2 035 161
The user specifies the channel on which each physical variable is recorded.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-37

7 Settings
(continued)
Canceling a protection
or control function
The user can adapt the device to the requirements of a particular high-voltage system by
including the relevant protection or control functions in the device configuration and
canceling all others (removing them from the device configuration).
The following conditions must be met before canceling a protection or control function:
! The protection or control function in question must be disabled.

! None of the functions of the protection or control function to be canceled may be
assigned to a binary input.
! None of the signals of the protection or control function may be assigned to a binary
output or an LED indicator.
! None of the signals of the protection or control function may be linked to other signals
by way of an m out of n parameter.
The protection or control function to which a parameter, a signal, or a measured value

belongs is defined by the function group designation (example: LIMIT).
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008
protection Canceling function group DTOC or including it in the configuration. If the

Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: Function group IDMT 056 009
protection Canceling function group IDMT or including it in the configuration. If the

Short-circuit direction SCDD: Function group SCDD 056 021
determination Canceling function group SCDD or including it in the configuration. If the

Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Function group SOTF 056 003
Canceling function group SOTF or including it in the configuration. If the

Protective signaling PSIG: Function group PSIG 056 004
Canceling function group PSIG or including it in the configuration. If the

7-38 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Function group ARC 056 005
Canceling function group ARC or including it in the configuration. If the

Automatic synchronism check ASC: Function group ASC 056 006
Canceling function group SKA or including it in the configuration. If the

Ground fault direction GFDSS: Function group GFDSS 056 012
determination using Canceling function group GFDSS or including it in the configuration. If the
steady-state values function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated
Transient ground fault TGFD: Function group TGFD 056 019
direction determination Canceling function group TGFD or including it in the configuration. If the
Motor protection MP: Function group MP 056 022
Canceling function group MP or including it in the configuration. If the

Thermal overload protection THERM: Function group THERM 056 023
Canceling function group THERM or including it in the configuration. If the

Unbalance protection I2>: Function group I2> 056 024
Canceling function group I2> or including it in the configuration. If the

Time-voltage protection V<>: Function group V<> 056 010
Canceling function group V<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Over-/underfrequency f<>: Function group f<> 056 033
protection Canceling function group f<> or including it in the configuration. If the

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-39

7 Settings
(continued)
Power directional protection P<>: Function group P<> 056 045
Canceling function group P<> or including it in the configuration. If the

Circuit breaker failure CBF: Function group CBF 056 007
protection Canceling function group CBF or including it in the configuration. If the

Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: Function group MCMON 056 015
Canceling function group MCMON or including it in the configuration. If the

Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Function group LIMIT 056 025
Canceling function group LIMIT or including it in the configuration. If the

Logic LOGIC: Function group LOGIC 056 017
Canceling function group LOGIC or including it in the configuration. If the

External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047
DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097
Canceling function groups DEV01 to DEV10 or including them in the

configuration. If any function group is cancelled from the configuration, then
all associated settings and signals are hidden.
7-40 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034
Setting the function type of the signal.
Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C
protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
Setting the information number of the signal.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032
Setting the function type of the command.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-41

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
Setting the information number of the command.

Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252
Canceling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004 Fig: 3-285
CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009
Canceling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration.

If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are
hidden.
7-42 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250
Canceling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the

SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007 Fig: 3-286
SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015
Canceling signals S001 to S040 or including them in the configuration. If

any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden..
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-43

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary counts COUNT: Function group COUNT 217 047
Canceling function group COUNT or including it in the configuration. If the

7-44 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3 Function Parameters
7.1.3.1 Global
PC link PC: Command blocking 003 182 Fig: 3-9
When command blocking is activated, commands are rejected from the PC

interface.
PC: Sig./meas.val.block. 003 086 Fig: 3-9
When signal and measured value blocking is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through the PC interface.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. USER 003 172 Fig: 3-10
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

COMM1: Sig./meas.block.USER 003 076 Fig: 3-11,3-
12,3-13
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or
measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM1.
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Command block. USER 103 172 Fig: 3-18
When command blocking user is activated, commands are rejected from

COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER 103 076 Fig: 3-18
When signal and measured value blocking user is activated, no signals or

measured data are transmitted through communication interface COMM2.
Binary outputs OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Fig: 3-32
When this blocking is activated, all output relays are blocked.
Main function MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Fig: 3-59
Switching the device off-line or on-line. Parameters marked 'No (=off)' in

the Address List can only be changed when protection is disabled.
MAIN: Test mode USER 003 012 Fig: 3-85
When the test mode user is activated, signals or measured data for PC and
communication interfaces are labeled 'test mode'.
MAIN: Nominal frequ. fnom 010 030 Fig: 3-196,
3-234
Setting the nominal frequency of the protected system.
MAIN: Rotary field 010 049 Fig: 3-116,
3-131,3-139,
Setting the rotary field direction, either clockwise or anticlockwise. 3-220,3-225,
3-252
MAIN: Inom C.T. prim. 010 001 Fig: 3-47,
3-107
Setting the primary nominal current of the main current transformers for
measurement of phase currents.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-45

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: IN,nom C.T. prim. 010 018 Fig: 3-48
Setting the primary nominal current of the main current transformer for
measurement of residual current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. prim. 010 002 Fig: 3-51,
3-107
Setting the primary nominal voltage of the system transformer for
measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. prim. 010 027 Fig: 3-52

measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. prim. 010 100 Fig: 3-53

measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Inom prim. NCIT 010 037
Setting the primary nominal current of the non-conventional instrument

transformer (NCIT) for measurement of phase currents.
MAIN: IN,nom prim. NCIT 010 039
Setting the primary nominal current of the NCIT for measurement of residual
current.
MAIN: Vnom prim. NCIT 010 038
Setting the primary nominal voltage of the NCIT for measurement of phase-
to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,1 NCIT 010 180
MAIN: Ph. err. VBG,1 NCIT 010 181
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,1 NCIT 010 182
Setting the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-ground
voltage in voltage measuring channel 1 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Ph. err. VAG,2 NCIT 010 192
MAIN: Ph.e.VBG/Vref,2 NCIT 010 193
MAIN: Ph. err. VCG,2 NCIT 010 194
Setting the phase error of the system transformer for each phase-to-ground
voltage (or for the reference voltage Vref, with ASC activated) in voltage
measuring channel 2 of the NCIT.
MAIN: Channel select. NCIT 010 187
Activating voltage measuring channel 1 or 2 of the NCIT. The setting

'Without' (voltage measuring channel) is also possible.
MAIN: Inom device 010 003 Fig: 3-46
Setting the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for

measurement of phase currents. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: IN,nom device 010 026 Fig: 3-46
Setting the secondary nominal current of the system transformer for

measurement of residual current. This also corresponds to the nominal
device current.
MAIN: Vnom V.T. sec. 010 009 Fig: 3-46
Setting the secondary nominal voltage of the system transformer for

measurement of phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase voltages.
7-46 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: VNG,nom V.T. sec. 010 028 Fig: 3-46

measurement of neutral-point displacement voltage.
MAIN: Vref,nom V.T. sec. 031 052 Fig: 3-46

measurement of reference voltage for automatic synchronism check.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IP 010 004 Fig: 3-46
Short-circuit direction determination depends on the connection of the

measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the
setting must be Standard if the P139s Forward decision is to be in the
direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or
given a connection scheme according to Chapter 5 if the forward
decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
MAIN: Conn. meas. circ. IN 010 019 Fig: 3-46
Direction determination of the ground fault measuring systems depends on

the connection of the measuring circuits. If the connection is as shown in
Chapter 5, then the setting must be Standard if the P139s Forward
decision is to be in the direction of the outgoing feeder. If the connection
direction is reversed or given a connection scheme according to
Chapter 5 if the forward decision is to be in the busbar direction, then the
setting must be Opposite.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IP 011 030 Fig: 3-47
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that measured

operating values of the phase currents and, if applicable, derived currents
are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. IN 011 031 Fig: 3-48
Setting the minimum current that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the residual current is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. value rel. V 011 032 Fig: 3-51
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that measured

operating values of the phase-to-ground voltages, phase-to-phase voltages,
and, if applicable, derived voltages are displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. VNG 011 033 Fig: 3-52
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the neutral-point displacement voltage is displayed.
MAIN: Meas. val. rel. Vref 011 034 Fig: 3-53
Setting the minimum voltage that must be exceeded so that the measured
operating value of the reference voltage for the automatic synchronism
check is displayed.
MAIN: Op. mode energy cnt. 010 138
Selection of the procedure to determine the active and reactive energy

output. 1st procedure: Data acquisition every 2s (approximately).
2nd procedure: Data acquisition every 100ms (approximately)
MAIN: Settl. t. IP,max,del 010 113 Fig: 3-47
Setting the time after which the delayed maximum current display shall
reach 95% of the maximum current IP,max.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-47

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 1 021 021 Fig: 3-64
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 1 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 1 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Fct.assign. block. 2 021 022 Fig: 3-64
Assignment of functions that will be blocked simultaneously when blocking

input 2 (M A I N : B l o c k i n g 2 E X T ) is activated.
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Fig: 3-74
Blocking the trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.1 021 001 Fig: 3-74
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 1.

MAIN: Fct.assig.trip cmd.2 021 002 Fig: 3-74
Assignment of signals that trigger trip command 2.

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 1 021 003 Fig: 3-74
Setting the minimum duration of trip command 1.

MAIN: Min.dur. trip cmd. 2 021 004 Fig: 3-74
Setting the minimum duration of trip command 2.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 1 021 023 Fig: 3-74
Specification as to whether trip command 1 should latch.

MAIN: Latching trip cmd. 2 021 024 Fig: 3-74
Specification as to whether trip command 2 should latch.

MAIN: Close cmd.pulse time 015 067 Fig: 3-67
Setting the duration of the close command.

MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057 Fig: 3-78
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output

enable.
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200 Fig: 3-42
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203
Setting the debouncing time.

MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201 Fig: 3-42
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204
Setting the chatter monitoring time.
7-48 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202 Fig: 3-42
MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring
time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230 Fig: 3-277,
3-285
Setting the command duration for a long command.
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231 Fig: 3-277,
3-285
Setting the command duration for a short command.
MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007 Fig: 3-78
Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control

commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008 Fig: 3-8
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local
control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065 Fig: 3-45
When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to
control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061 Fig: 3-273
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to
control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the
signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal
continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from
the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status
signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063 Fig: 3-281
This setting determines if bay types, defined for direct motor control, can be
used together with external termination contacts to directly influence the
control process of motor driven switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010 Fig: 3-77
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external

protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012 Fig: 3-77
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form
the CB trip signal.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-49

7 Settings
(continued)
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013 Fig: 3-77
Definition of the binary signal used by the P139 to signal the 'CB open'
position signal.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB closed 021 020 Fig: 3-66
Definition of the binary signal used by the P139 to signal the 'CB closed'
position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050 Fig: 3-77
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an

external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024 Fig: 3-77
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external
device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051 Fig: 3-68
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052 Fig: 3-68
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group

signal).
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Fig: 3-65
Selection of signals whose appearance will result in a Blocked/faulty signal

and in the activation of the LED indicator labeled OUT OF SERVICE.
Signals that lead to a blocking of the device are not configurable and always
result in the above signal and indication.
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via USER 003 100 Fig: 3-86
If parameter subset selection is to be handled from the integrated local

control panel rather than via binary signal inputs, choose the setting 'Yes'.
PSS: Param.subs.sel. USER 003 060 Fig: 3-86
Selection of the parameter subset from the local control panel.

PSS: Keep time 003 063 Fig: 3-86
The setting of this timer stage is relevant only if parameter subset selection
is carried out via binary signal inputs. Any voltage-free pause that may
occur during selection is bridged. If, after this time period has elapsed, no
binary signal input has yet been set, then the parameter subset selected
from the local control panel shall apply.
Self-monitoring SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Fig: 3-87
Selection of the signals whose appearance shall result in the signals

'Warning (LED)' and 'Warning (relay)' and in the activation of the LED
indicator labeled 'ALARM'. Signals caused by faulty hardware and leading
to a blocking of the device are not configurable. They always result in the
above signals and indication.
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Line length 010 005 Fig: 3-108
This setting defines the distance in km that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
FT_DA: Line reactance 010 012 Fig: 3-108
This setting defines the reactance X that the fault locator interprets as
100 % when calculating the line distance to a fault.
7-50 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
FT_DA: Angle kG 012 036 Fig: 3-106
Angle setting of the complex ground factor kG .
Z 0 Z pos
kG =
3 Z pos
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance
X 0 X pos X pos
k G angle = arc tan arc tan
R0 Rpos Rpos
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
FT_DA: Abs. value kG 012 037 Fig: 3-106
Setting the absolute value of the complex ground factor kG.
Z 0 Z pos
kG =
3 Z pos
Z 0 : zero-sequence impedance
Z pos : positive-sequence impedance
kG =
( X 0 X pos )2 + (R0 Rpos )2
3 Rpos 2 + X pos 2
R0 : resistance component of zero-sequence impedance

Rpos : resistance component of positive-sequence impedance
X 0 : reactance component of zero-sequence impedance
X pos : reactance component of positive-sequence impedance
If the calculated value cannot be set exactly, then a next smaller value
should be set.
FT_DA: Start data acquisit. 010 011 Fig: 3-105
This setting determines at what point during a fault the acquisition of fault
data should take place.
FT_DA: Output fault locat. 010 032 Fig: 3-105
Setting the conditions under which a fault location output occurs.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-51

7 Settings
(continued)
Fault recording FT_RC: Fct. assig. trigger 003 085 Fig: 3-110
This setting defines the signals that will trigger fault recording and fault data
acquisition.
FT_RC: I> 017 065 Fig: 3-110
This setting defines the threshold value of the phase currents that will
trigger fault recording and fault data acquisition.
FT_RC: Pre-fault time 003 078 Fig: 3-112
Setting the time during which data will be recorded before a fault occurs
(pre-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Post-fault time 003 079 Fig: 3-112
Setting the time during which data will be recorded after the end of a fault
(post-fault recording time).
FT_RC: Max. recording time 003 075 Fig: 3-112
Setting the maximum recording time per fault. This includes pre-fault and
post-fault recording times.
7-52 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.2 General Functions
Main function MAIN: Neutral-point treat. 010 048
The neutral-point treatment of the system must be set here.

MAIN: Hold time dyn.param. 018 009 Fig: 3-61
Setting the hold time of the "dynamic parameters". After switching to the
"dynamic" thresholds, the latter will remain active in place of the "normal"
thresholds during this period.
MAIN: Syst.IN enabled USER 018 008 Fig: 3-60
Enable/disable the DTOC and IDMT residual current stages.

MAIN: Block tim.st. IN,neg 017 015 Fig: 3-71
This setting defines whether a blocking of the residual current stages should
take place for single-pole or multi-pole phase current startings.
MAIN: Gen. starting mode 017 027 Fig: 3-72
This setting defines whether the triggering of the residual current stages IN>,
Iref,N>, IN>> or Iref>>> as well as the negative-sequence current stage Iref,neg>
should result in the formation of the general starting signal. If the setting is
'W/o start. IN, Ineg' then the associated time delays tIN>, tIref,N>, tIN>>, tIN>>>,
tIref,neg> are automatically excluded from the formation of the trip command.
MAIN: Op. mode rush restr. 017 097 Fig: 3-62
Setting the operating mode of the inrush stabilization function.

MAIN: Rush I(2*fn)/I(fn) 017 098 Fig: 3-62
Setting the operate value of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: I> lift rush restr. 017 095 Fig: 3-62
Setting the current threshold for deactivation of inrush stabilization.

MAIN: Suppress start. sig. 017 054 Fig: 3-71
Setting of the timer stage for the suppression of the phase-selective

startings and of the residual and negative-sequence system starting.
MAIN: tGS 017 005 Fig: 3-72
Setting the time delay of the general starting signal.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: General enable USER 022 075 Fig: 3-113
protection Enable/disable the definite-time overcurrent protection function.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: General enable USER 017 096 Fig: 3-124
protection Enable/disable the inverse-time overcurrent protection function.
Short-circuit direction SCDD: General enable USER 017 070 Fig: 3-136
determination Enable/disable the short-circuit direction determination.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-53

7 Settings
(continued)
Switch on to fault protection SOTF: General enable USER 011 068 Fig: 3-146
Enable/disable the switch on to fault (short circuit) protection.

SOTF: Operating mode 011 061 Fig: 3-146
This setting for the operating mode defines that, during the timer period, the
general starting signal will lead to a Trip command ("Trip with starting") or
that the measuring distance of impedance zone 1 will be extended by
D I S T : k z e H S R zone extension factor ("Trip with overreach").
SOTF: Manual close timer 011 060 Fig: 3-146
Setting the timer stage that will be started by a manual close.
Protective signaling PSIG: General enable USER 015 004 Fig: 3-147
Enable/disable the protective signaling.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: General enable USER 015 060 Fig: 3-153
Enable/disable the auto-reclosing control.

ARC: Sig.asg.trip t.GFDSS 015 105 Fig: 3-159
Selection of the GFDSS starting to trigger the auto-reclosing control

function.
ARC: Fct.assgn. tLOGIC 015 033 Fig: 3-163
Function assignment to tLOGIC.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: General enable USER 018 000 Fig: 3-171
Enable/disable the automatic synchronism check.

ASC: Transm.cycle,meas.v. 101 212 Fig: 3-180
Cycle period for transmission of ASC measured values.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: General enable USER 016 060 Fig: 3-182
determination using Enable/disable the ground fault direction determination by steady-state
steady-state values values.
GFDSS: Operating mode 016 090 Fig: 3-182
This setting specifies whether steady-state power evaluation or steady-state

current evaluation will be performed.
GFDSS: Op. mode GF pow./adm 016 063 Fig: 3-184,
3-190
Setting the operating mode of the ground fault direction determination by
steady-state values. The following settings are possible:
" "Cos circuit" for resonant-grounded systems.
! "Sin circuit" for isolated neutral-point systems.
GFDSS: Evaluation VNG 016 083 Fig: 3-183
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for direction determination: The displacement voltage calculated from the
phase-to-ground voltages or the displacement voltage measured at the T 90
transformer of the P139.
GFDSS: Measurem. direction 016 070 Fig: 3-184,
3-190
This setting defines the measuring direction for the 'forward' or 'backward'
decision.
7-54 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
GFDSS: VNG> 016 062 Fig: 3-184,

3-190
Setting the operate value of the neutral-point displacement voltage.
GFDSS: tVNG> 016 061 Fig: 3-184,
3-190
Setting the operate delay of the VNG> trigger.
GFDSS: f/fnom (pow.meas.) 016 091 Fig: 3-184,
3-190
Setting the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state
power evaluation.
GFDSS: f/fnom (curr.meas.) 016 092 Fig: 3-188
Setting the frequency of the measured variables evaluated in steady-state

current evaluation.
GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac> LS 016 064 Fig: 3-187
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual

current that must be exceeded so that the LS (line side) directional
decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Sector angle LS 016 065 Fig: 3-187
Setting of the sector angle for measurement in the line side direction.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos circuit" operating

mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay LS 016 066 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
Setting the operate delay of the direction decision in the forward direction.
GFDSS: Release delay LS 016 072 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
Setting the release delay of the direction decision in the forward direction.
GFDSS: IN,act>/IN,reac> BS 016 067 Fig: 3-187
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive power component of residual

current that must be exceeded so that the 'BS' (busbar side) directional
GFDSS: Sector angle BS 016 068 Fig: 3-187
Setting the sector angle for measurement in the direction of the busbar side.
Note: This setting is only effective in the "cos circuit" operating

mode.
GFDSS: Operate delay BS 016 069 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
Setting the operate delay of the direction decision in the backward direction.
GFDSS: Release delay BS 016 073 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
Setting the release delay of the direction decision in the backward direction.
GFDSS: IN> 016 093 Fig: 3-188
Setting the operate value of the steady-state current evaluation.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-55

7 Settings
(continued)
GFDSS: Operate delay IN 016 094 Fig: 3-188
Setting the operate delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: Release delay IN 016 095 Fig: 3-188
Setting the release delay of steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> LS 016 111 Fig: 3-193
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the LS (line side) directional
GFDSS: G(N)> / B(N)> BS 016 112 Fig: 3-193
Setting the threshold of the active or reactive susceptance component of

residual current that must be exceeded so that the BS (busbar side)
directional decision is enabled.
GFDSS: Y(N)> 016 113 Fig: 3-194
Setting the operate value of the admittance for the non-directional ground
fault determination (in the admittance evaluation mode).
GFDSS: Correction angle 016 110 Fig: 3-190
This setting is provided to compensate for phase-angle errors of the system

transformers (in the admittance evaluation mode).
GFDSS: Operate delay Y(N)> 016 114 Fig: 3-194
Setting the operate delay value of the admittance for the non-directional
ground fault determination (in the admittance evaluation mode).
GFDSS: Release delay Y(N)> 016 115 Fig: 3-194
Setting the release delay value of the admittance for the non-directional
ground fault determination (in the admittance evaluation mode).
Transient ground fault TGFD: General enable USER 016 040 Fig: 3-196
direction determination Enable/disable the transient ground fault direction determination.
TGFD: Evaluation VNG 016 048
This setting specifies which neutral-point displacement voltage will be used

for evaluation: The displacement voltage from the open delta winding of a
voltage transformer assembly or the displacement voltage calculated from
the three phase-to-ground voltages.
TGFD: Measurem. direction 016 045 Fig: 3-198
The direction measurement of the transient ground fault direction

determination function depends on the connection of the measuring circuits.
If the connection is as shown in Chapter 5, then the setting must be
'Standard', if the P139s 'Forward' decision is to be in the direction of the
outgoing feeder. If the connection direction is reversed or given a
connection scheme according to Chapter 5 if the forward decision is to
be in the busbar direction, then the setting must be Opposite.
Note: The global setting M A I N : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N does
not affect the direction determination feature of the transient ground fault
direction determination function.
TGFD: VNG> 016 041 Fig: 3-198
Setting the neutral-point displacement voltage threshold.

TGFD: Operate delay 016 044 Fig: 3-198
Setting the operate delay.
7-56 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
TGFD: IN,p> 016 042 Fig: 3-198
Setting the residual current threshold. A peak value is evaluated.

TGFD: Buffer time 016 043 Fig: 3-199
Setting the signal buffer time for transient ground fault direction
determination.
Motor protection MP: General enable USER 017 059 Fig: 3-203
Enable/disable the motor protection function.
Thermal overload protection THERM: General enable USER 022 050 Fig: 3-213
Enable/disable the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Operating mode 022 063 Fig: 3-217
Setting the operating mode of thermal overload protection.
Unbalance protection I2>: General enable USER 018 090 Fig: 3-219
Enable/disable the unbalance protection function.
Time-voltage protection V<>: General enable USER 023 030 Fig: 3-221
Enable/disable the time-voltage protection function.
Over-/underfrequency f<>: General enable USER 023 031 Fig: 3-230

protection Enable/disable the over-/underfrequency protection function.
f<>: Selection meas. volt 018 202 Fig: 3-231
Setting the voltage that is used for frequency measurement.

f<>: Evaluation time 018 201 Fig: 3-232
Setting the evaluation time. The operate conditions must be met for the
duration of the set evaluation time so that a signal is issued.
f<>: Undervolt. block. V< 018 200 Fig: 3-232
Setting the threshold of undervoltage blocking. If the voltage falls below this
threshold, the over-/underfrequency protection function will be blocked.
Power directional protection P<>: General enable USER 014 220 Fig: 3-235
Enable/disable the power directional protection function.
Circuit breaker failure CBF: General enable USER 022 080 Fig: 3-249
protection Enable/disable the circuit breaker failure protection function.
CBF: tCBF 011 067 Fig: 3-249
Setting the operate delay at the conclusion of which the Circuit breaker
failure signal is issued.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-57

7 Settings
(continued)
Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: General enable USER 014 001 Fig: 3-251
Enable/disable the measuring-circuit monitoring function.

MCMON: Op. mode Idiff> 017 028 Fig: 3-251
Adaptation of measuring-circuit monitoring to the system current

transformers.
MCMON: Idiff> 017 024 Fig: 3-251
Setting the operate value of measuring-circuit monitoring.

MCMON: Op. mode Vmin< monit 018 079 Fig: 3-252
Selection of the monitoring mode in the voltage-measuring circuit.

MCMON: Vmin< 017 022 Fig: 3-252
Setting the operate value for the voltage trigger Vmin< of measuring circuit
monitoring.
MCMON: Operate delay 017 023 Fig: 3-251
Setting the time delay for current and voltage monitoring.

MCMON: Phase sequ. monitor. 018 019 Fig: 3-252
Enable/disable the phase sequence monitoring function.

MCMON: FF,Vref enabled USER 014 013 3-253
Enable/disable the "Fuse Failure" monitoring function of the reference

voltage Vref.
MCMON: Oper. delay FF, Vref 014 012 3-253
Setting the time delay for "Fuse Failure" monitoring of the reference voltage
Vref.
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: General enable USER 014 010 Fig: 3-254
Enable/disable the limit value monitoring function.

LIMIT: I> 014 004 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I>> 014 020 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI> 014 031 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI>> 014 032 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I< 014 021 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate value of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: I<< 014 022 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate value of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
7-58 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: tI< 014 033 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate delay of the first undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tI<< 014 034 Fig: 3-254
Setting the operate delay of the second undercurrent stage for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG> 014 023 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG>> 014 024 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG> 014 035 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG>> 014 036 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG< 014 025 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPG<< 014 026 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG< 014 037 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPG<< 014 038 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPG<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP> 014 027 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP>> 014 028 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP> 014 039 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP>> 014 040 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VPP>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VPP< 014 029 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-59

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: VPP<< 014 030 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP< 014 041 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVPP<< 014 042 Fig: 3-255
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage VPP<< for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG> 014 043 Fig: 3-256
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: VNG>> 014 044 Fig: 3-256
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG> 014 045 Fig: 3-256
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: tVNG>> 014 046 Fig: 3-256
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>> for limit value
monitoring.
LIMIT: Vref> 042 144 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value monitoring.
(Relevant only with circuit board 5V, i.e. ordering option Vnom = 50 to 130 V {5 poles}
for ASC).
LIMIT: Vref>> 042 145 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate value of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
monitoring. (Relevant only with circuit board 5V).
LIMIT: tVref> 042 148 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref> for limit value
LIMIT: tVref>> 042 149 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref>> for limit value
LIMIT: Vref< 042 146 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: Vref<< 042 147 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate value of undervoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref< 042 150 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref< for limit value
LIMIT: tVref<< 042 151 Fig: 3-258
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vref<< for limit value
7-60 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: IDC,lin> 014 110 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate value IDC,lin> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin>> 014 111 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate value IDC,lin>> for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> 014 112 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> 014 113 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate delay of overcurrent stage IDC,lin>>.

LIMIT: IDC,lin< 014 114 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate value IDC,lin< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: IDC,lin<< 014 115 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate value IDC,lin<< for monitoring the linearized direct
current.
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< 014 116 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<.

LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< 014 117 Fig: 3-257
Setting the operate delay of undercurrent stage IDC,lin<<.

LIMIT: T> 014 100 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: T>> 014 101 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: tT> 014 103 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>.

LIMIT: tT>> 014 104 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring T>>.

LIMIT: T< 014 105 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: T<< 014 106 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring T<<.

LIMIT: tT< 014 107 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<.

LIMIT: tT<< 014 108 Fig: 3-259
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring T<<.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-61

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T1> 014 120 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: T2> 014 130
LIMIT: T3> 014 140
LIMIT: T4> 014 150
LIMIT: T5> 014 160
LIMIT: T6> 014 170
LIMIT: T7> 014 180
LIMIT: T8> 014 190
LIMIT: T9> 015 130
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: T1>> 014 121 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: T2>> 014 131
LIMIT: T3>> 014 141
LIMIT: T4>> 014 151
LIMIT: T5>> 014 161
LIMIT: T6>> 014 171
LIMIT: T7>> 014 181
LIMIT: T8>> 014 191
LIMIT: T9>> 015 131
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn>> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1> 014 122 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT2> 014 132
LIMIT: tT3> 014 142
LIMIT: tT4> 014 152
LIMIT: tT5> 014 162
LIMIT: tT6> 014 172
LIMIT: tT7> 014 182
LIMIT: tT8> 014 192
LIMIT: tT9> 015 132
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn> for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1>> 014 123 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT2>> 014 133
LIMIT: tT3>> 014 143
LIMIT: tT4>> 014 153
LIMIT: tT5>> 014 163
LIMIT: tT6>> 014 173
LIMIT: tT7>> 014 183
LIMIT: tT8>> 014 193
LIMIT: tT9>> 015 133
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn>> for temperature

sensor Tn.
7-62 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LIMIT: T1< 014 124 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: T2< 014 134
LIMIT: T3< 014 144
LIMIT: T4< 014 154
LIMIT: T5< 014 164
LIMIT: T6< 014 174
LIMIT: T7< 014 184
LIMIT: T8< 014 194
LIMIT: T9< 015 134
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: T1<< 014 125 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: T2<< 014 135
LIMIT: T3<< 014 145
LIMIT: T4<< 014 155
LIMIT: T5<< 014 165
LIMIT: T6<< 014 175
LIMIT: T7<< 014 185
LIMIT: T8<< 014 195
LIMIT: T9<< 015 135
Setting the operate value of temperature monitoring Tn<< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1< 014 126 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT2< 014 136
LIMIT: tT3< 014 146
LIMIT: tT4< 014 156
LIMIT: tT5< 014 166
LIMIT: tT6< 014 176
LIMIT: tT7< 014 186
LIMIT: tT8< 014 196
LIMIT: tT9< 015 136
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn< for temperature

sensor Tn.
LIMIT: tT1<< 014 127 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT2<< 014 137
LIMIT: tT3<< 014 147
LIMIT: tT4<< 014 157
LIMIT: tT5<< 014 167
LIMIT: tT6<< 014 177
LIMIT: tT7<< 014 187
LIMIT: tT8<< 014 197
LIMIT: tT9<< 015 137
Setting the operate delay of temperature monitoring Tn<< for temperature

sensor Tn.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-63

7 Settings
(continued)
Logic LOGIC: General enable USER 031 099 Fig: 3-265
Enable/disable the logic function.

LOGIC: Set 1 USER 034 030 Fig: 3-264,
3-271
LOGIC: Set 2 USER 034 031
LOGIC: Set 8 USER 034 037 Fig: 3-271
These settings define the static input conditions for the logic function.
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 030 000 Fig: 3-163,
3-265
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 030 004 Fig: 3-163
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 030 008
LOGIC: Fct.assignm. outp.10 030 036
These settings assign functions to the outputs.
7-64 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 1 030 001 Fig: 3-163,

3-265
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 2 030 005 Fig: 3-163
LOGIC: Op. mode t output 3 030 009
These settings define the operating modes for the output timer stages.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-65

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t1 output 1 030 002 Fig: 3-265

LOGIC: Time t1 output 2 030 006
Settings of timer stage t1 for the respective outputs.
7-66 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Time t2 output 1 030 003 Fig: 3-265

Settings of timer stage t2 for the respective outputs.

Note: This setting has no effect in the minimum time operating mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-67

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 1 044 000 Fig: 3-271
LOGIC: Sig.assig. outp. 2 044 002
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
7-68 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 1(t) 044 001 Fig: 3-271
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp. 2(t) 044 003
LOGIC: Sig.assig.outp.10(t) 044 019
These settings assign the function of a binary input signal to the output of
the logic equation.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-69

7 Settings
(continued)
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000
CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005
Selection of the command designation.
7-70 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002 Fig: 3-285

CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007
Selection of the command operating mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-71

7 Settings
(continued)
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008
Selection of the signal designation.
7-72 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001 Fig: 3-286

SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009
Selection of the signal operating mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-73

7 Settings
(continued)
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003 Fig: 3-286
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
7-74 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002 Fig: 3-286
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S013 226 098
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S014 226 106
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S015 226 114
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S016 226 122
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S017 226 130
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S018 226 138
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S019 226 146
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S020 226 154
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S021 226 162
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S022 226 170
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S023 226 178
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S024 226 186
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S025 226 194
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S026 226 202
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S027 226 210
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S028 226 218
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S029 226 226
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S030 226 234
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S031 226 242
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S032 226 250
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S033 227 002
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S034 227 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S035 227 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S036 227 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S037 227 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S038 227 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S039 227 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S040 227 058
The logic '1' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a
telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-75

7 Settings
(continued)
Binary counts COUNT: General enable USER 217 000 Fig: 3-288
Enable/disable the counting function.

COUNT: Debounce t. count. 1 217 160 Fig: 3-288
Setting the debounce time of the binary signal to be counted.

COUNT: Cycle t.count transm 217 007 Fig: 3-288
Setting the cycle time for the periodic transmission of the counts.
7-76 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.3 Parameter Subsets
Measured data input MEASI: BackupTempSensor PSx 004 243 004 244 004 245 004 246 Fig: 3-261
Selection of backup temperature sensor groups for parameter subset PSx.
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Enabled PSx 072 098 073 098 074 098 075 098 Fig: 3-113
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which definite-time overcurrent
protection is enabled.
DTOC: I> PSx 017 000 073 007 074 007 075 007 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
Caution! The range of setting values includes operate values that are not
permitted as continuous current values (see Technical Data).
DTOC: I> dynamic PSx 017 080 073 032 074 032 075 032 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(phase current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
stage M AIN: H ol d- time d yn . par am . is elapsing.
DTOC: I>> PSx 017 001 073 008 074 008 075 008 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
DTOC: I>> dynamic PSx 017 084 073 033 074 033 075 033 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).This operate value is effective only while the timer stage MAIN :
Ho ld - ti me d yn . pa ram. is elapsing.
DTOC: I>>> PSx 017 002 073 009 074 009 075 009 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage (phase current
stage).
DTOC: I>>> dynamic PSx 017 085 073 034 074 034 075 034 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(phase current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
DTOC: tI> PSx 017 004 073 019 074 019 075 019 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage.

DTOC: tI>> PSx 017 006 073 020 074 020 075 020 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-77

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: tI>>> PSx 017 007 073 021 074 021 075 021 Fig: 3-114
Setting the operate delay of the third overcurrent stage.

DTOC: Ineg> PSx 072 011 073 011 074 011 075 011 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg> dynamic PSx 076 200 077 200 078 200 079 200 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg> dynamic

(Ineg = negative-sequence current).
This operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN : Ho ld -
ti m e d yn . pa ram . is elapsing.
DTOC: Ineg>> PSx 072 012 073 012 074 012 075 012 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>> dynamic PSx 076 201 077 201 078 201 079 201 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg>> dynamic

DTOC: Ineg>>> PSx 072 013 073 013 074 013 075 013 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg>>> (Ineg = negative-sequence current).

DTOC: Ineg>>> dynamic PSx 076 202 077 202 078 202 079 202 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate value Ineg>>> dynamic

DTOC: tIneg> PSx 072 023 073 023 074 023 075 023 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg> (Ineg = negative-

sequence current).
DTOC: tIneg>> PSx 072 024 073 024 074 024 075 024 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>

DTOC: tIneg>>> PSx 072 025 073 025 074 025 075 025 Fig: 3-116
Setting the operate delay of overcurrent stage Ineg>>>

DTOC: Evaluation IN PSx 072 128 073 128 074 128 075 128 Fig: 3-118
This setting determines which current will be monitored: The current

calculated by the P139 or the residual current measured at the T 4 current
transformer.
DTOC: IN> PSx 017 003 073 015 074 015 075 015 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN> dynamic PSx 017 081 073 035 074 035 075 035 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the dynamic first overcurrent stage (residual
current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer stage
M A IN : H o ld - t i me d y n . p ar a m . is elapsing.
7-78 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DTOC: IN>> PSx 017 009 073 016 074 016 075 016 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN>> dynamic PSx 017 086 073 036 074 036 075 036 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage in dynamic mode
(residual current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer
DTOC: IN>>> PSx 017 018 073 017 074 017 075 017 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the third overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: IN>>> dynamic PSx 017 087 073 037 074 037 075 037 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate value of the dynamic third overcurrent stage (residual
current stage). This operate value is effective only while the timer stage
M A IN : H o ld - t i me d y n . p ar a m . is elapsing.
DTOC: tIN> PSx 017 008 073 027 074 027 075 027 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: tIN>> PSx 017 010 073 028 074 028 075 028 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: tIN>>> PSx 017 019 073 029 074 029 075 029 Fig: 3-119
Setting the operate delay of the third overcurrent stage (residual current
stage).
DTOC: Puls.prol.IN>,intPSx 017 055 073 042 074 042 075 042 Fig: 3-119
Setting the pulse prolongation time of the hold-time logic for intermittent
ground faults.
DTOC: tIN,interm. PSx 017 056 073 038 074 038 075 038 Fig: 3-119
Setting the tripping time of the hold-time logic for intermittent ground faults.
DTOC: Hold-t. tIN>,intmPSx 017 057 073 039 074 039 075 039 Fig: 3-119
Setting the hold-time for intermittent ground faults.
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: Enabled PSx 072 070 073 070 074 070 075 070 Fig: 3-124
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which IDMT protection is
enabled.
IDMT: Iref,P PSx 072 050 073 050 074 050 075 050 Fig: 3-129
Setting the reference current (phase current system).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-79

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Iref,P dynamic PSx 072 003 073 003 074 003 075 003 Fig: 3-129
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (phase current system). This
operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN : Ho ld -ti me
d yn . pa ram. is elapsing.
IDMT: Character.type P PSx 072 056 073 056 074 056 075 056 Fig: 3-129
Setting the tripping characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Factor kt,P PSx 072 053 073 053 074 053 075 053 Fig: 3-129
Setting the factor kt,P of the starting characteristic (phase current system).
IDMT: Min. trip time P PSx 072 077 073 077 074 077 075 077 Fig: 3-129
Setting the minimum trip time (phase current system). As a rule, this value
should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
IDMT: Hold time P PSx 072 071 073 071 074 071 075 071 Fig: 3-129
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (phase current
system).
IDMT: Release P PSx 072 059 073 059 074 059 075 059 Fig: 3-129
Setting the release or reset characteristic (phase current system).

IDMT: Iref,neg PSx 072 051 073 051 074 051 075 051 Fig: 3-129
Setting the reference current (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Iref,neg dynamic PSx 072 004 073 004 074 004 075 004 Fig: 3-131
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (negative-sequence current

system). This operate value is effective only while the timer stage M AIN :
Ho ld - ti me d yn . pa ram. i s e l a p s i n g .
IDMT: Character. neg. PSx 072 057 073 057 074 057 075 057 Fig: 3-131
Setting the tripping characteristic (negative-sequence current system).

IDMT: Factor kt,neg PSx 072 054 073 054 074 054 075 054 Fig: 3-131
Setting the factor kt,neg of the starting characteristic (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT: Min.trip time negPSx 072 078 073 078 074 078 075 078 Fig: 3-131
Setting the minimum trip time (negative-sequence current system). As a

rule, this value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (I>).
IDMT: Hold time neg PSx 072 072 073 072 074 072 075 072 Fig: 3-131
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (negative-sequence

current system).
IDMT: Release neg. PSx 072 060 073 060 074 060 075 060 Fig: 3-131
Setting the release or reset characteristic (negative-sequence current

system).
IDMT: Evaluation IN PSx 072 075 073 075 074 075 075 075 Fig: 3-132
This setting determines which current will be monitored: The current

calculated by the P139 or the residual current measured at the T 4 current
transformer.
IDMT: Iref,N PSx 072 052 073 052 074 052 075 052 Fig: 3-133
Setting the reference current (residual current system).

IDMT: Iref,N dynamic PSx 072 005 073 005 074 005 075 005 Fig: 3-133
Setting the reference current in dynamic mode (residual current system).

ti m e d yn . pa ram . i s e l a p s i n g .
7-80 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
IDMT: Characteristic N PSx 072 058 073 058 074 058 075 058 Fig: 3-133
Setting the tripping characteristic (residual current system).

IDMT: Factor kt,N PSx 072 055 073 055 074 055 075 055 Fig: 3-133
Setting the factor kt,N of the starting characteristic (residual current system).
IDMT: Min. trip time N PSx 072 079 073 079 074 079 075 079 Fig: 3-133
Setting the minimum trip time (residual current system). As a rule, this
value should be set as for the first DTOC stage (IN>).
IDMT: Hold time N PSx 072 073 073 073 074 073 075 073 Fig: 3-133
Setting the holding time for intermittent short circuits (residual current
system).
IDMT: Release N PSx 072 061 073 061 074 061 075 061 Fig: 3-133
Setting the release characteristic (residual current system).
Short-circuit direction SCDD: Enabled PSx 076 235 077 235 078 235 079 235 Fig: 3-136
determination This setting defines the parameter subset in which short-circuit direction
determination is enabled.
SCDD: Trip bias PSx 017 074 077 236 078 236 079 236 Fig: 3-140
This setting determines whether an overcurrent direction determination in

forward direction shall be formed when the direction determination of the
phase current and residual current stage is blocked.
SCDD: Direction tI> PSx 017 071 077 237 078 237 079 237 Fig: 3-140
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tI> trip signal
in the DTOC phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or
non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping time.
SCDD: Direction tI>> PSx 017 072 077 238 078 238 079 238 Fig: 3-140
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tI>> trip signal
in the DTOC phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward or
non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
SCDD: Direct. tIref,P> PSx 017 066 077 239 078 239 079 239 Fig: 3-140
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,P> trip
signal in the IDMT phase current stage will be issued for forward, backward
or non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has been set
SCDD: Direction tIN> PSx 017 073 077 240 078 240 079 240 Fig: 3-144
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIN> trip
signal in the DTOC residual current stage will be issued for forward,
backward or non-directional fault decisions. If the ARC is enabled and has
been set accordingly then a starting will trigger the associated ARC tripping
time.
SCDD: Direction tIN>> PSx 017 075 077 241 078 241 079 241 Fig: 3-144
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIN>> trip
signal in the DTOC residual current stage will be issued for forward,
time.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-81

7 Settings
(continued)
SCDD: Direct. tIref,N> PSx 017 067 077 242 078 242 079 242 Fig: 3-144
This setting for the measuring direction determines whether a tIref,N> trip
signal in the IDMT residual current stage will be issued for forward,
time.
SCDD: Charact. angle G PSx 017 076 077 243 078 243 079 243 Fig: 3-143
Setting the characteristic angle for the residual current stage in

correspondence to the measuring relation. Using this setting, a wide range
of conditions in dependence of the system neutral grounding impedance
can be accommodated, including the following:
" System neutral with relatively high resistance G = 0

" System neutral with relatively low resistance G - 45
" System neutral effectively grounded G= - 75
" System neutral reactance-grounded G= - 90
" System with isolated neutral G= + 90
SCDD: VNG> PSx 017 077 077 244 078 244 079 244 Fig: 3-142
Setting the operate value VNG>. This setting value is an enabling criterion
of the base point release of short-circuit direction determination.
In choosing this setting, the set nominal voltage M AIN : VNG ,nom V.T .
sec . should be taken into account.
SCDD: Block. bias G PSx 017 078 077 245 078 245 079 245 Fig: 3-144
This setting defines whether the trip bias of the residual current stage
should be blocked in the event of a phase current starting.
Protective signaling PSIG: Enabled PSx 015 014 015 015 015 016 015 017 Fig: 3-147
This setting defines the parameter subset in which protective signaling is

enabled.
PSIG: Tripping time PSx 015 011 024 003 024 063 025 023 Fig: 3-149
Setting the time delay of protective signaling.

PSIG: Release t. send PSx 015 002 024 001 024 061 025 021 Fig: 3-149
This setting determines the duration of the send signal.

PSIG: DC loop op. mode PSx 015 012 024 051 025 011 025 071 Fig: 3-149
This setting defines whether the transmitting relay will be operated in

energize-on-signal (ES) mode ('open-circuit principle') or normally-energized
(NE) mode ('closed-circuit principle'), i.e., Transm. relay make contact or
Transm. relay break contact, respectively.
PSIG: Direc.dependence PSx 015 001 015 115 015 116 015 117 Fig: 3-149
Setting the evaluation for directional dependence of protective signaling.

The following settings are possible:
Without
Phase curr. system
Residual curr. system
Phase/resid.c.system
7-82 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enabled PSx 015 046 015 047 015 048 015 049 Fig: 3-153
This setting defines the parameter subset in which ARC is enabled.

ARC: CB clos.pos.sig. PSx 015 050 024 024 024 084 025 044 Fig: 3-155
This setting defines whether the CB closed position will be scanned or not.
If the setting is 'With', a binary signal input must be configured accordingly.
ARC: Operating mode PSx 015 051 024 025 024 085 025 045 Fig: 3-152
The operating mode setting defines which of the following reclosure types is
permitted.
" TDR only
" HSR or TDR
" Test HSR only
ARC: Operative time PSx 015 066 024 035 024 095 025 055 Fig: 3-164,
3-166
Setting the operative time 1.
ARC: HSR trip.time GS PSx 015 038 024 100 024 150 025 100 Fig: 3-160
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a general starting condition.
ARC: HSR trip.time I> PSx 015 072 024 040 025 000 025 060 Fig: 3-156,
3-166
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a phase current starting in the
first DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSR trip.time I>>PSx 015 074 024 101 024 151 025 101 Fig: 3-156
second DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSRtrip.time I>>>PSx 014 096 024 102 024 152 025 102 Fig: 3-156
third DTOC overcurrent stage.
ARC: HSR trip.time IN>PSx 015 076 024 103 024 153 025 103 Fig: 3-156
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a residual current starting in the
ARC: HSRtrip.time IN>>PSx 015 031 024 104 024 154 025 104 Fig: 3-156
ARC: HSRtrip.t. IN>>> PSx 014 098 024 105 024 155 025 105 Fig: 3-156
ARC: HSRtrip.t. kIref>PSx 015 094 024 106 024 156 025 106 Fig: 3-158
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT phase
current system.
ARC: HSRtrip.t.kINref>PSx 015 096 024 107 024 157 025 107 Fig: 3-158
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT residual
current system.
ARC: HSRtrip.t. Ineg> PSx 015 034 024 108 024 158 025 108 Fig: 3-158
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT negative-
sequence current system.
ARC: HSR trip t.GFDSS PSx 015 078 024 109 024 159 025 109 Fig: 3-159
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via ground fault direction
determination using steady-state values.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-83

7 Settings
(continued)
ARC: HSRtrip.t. LOGIC PSx 015 098 024 110 024 160 025 110 Fig: 3-161
Setting the HSR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
ARC: HSR block.f. I>>>PSx 015 080 024 111 024 161 025 111 Fig: 3-162
The selection of the HSR blocking by I>>> defines whether an HSR is

blocked during an I>>> starting.
ARC: HSR dead time PSx 015 056 024 030 024 090 025 050 Fig: 3-164,
3-166
Dead time setting for a three-pole HSR.
ARC: No. permit. TDR PSx 015 068 024 037 024 097 025 057 Fig: 3-164
Setting the number of time-delay reclosures permitted. With the 0 setting,

only one HSR is carried out.
ARC: TDR trip.time GS PSx 015 039 024 112 024 162 025 112 Fig: 3-160
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a general starting condition.
ARC: TDR trip.time I> PSx 015 073 024 041 025 001 025 061 Fig: 3-157
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a phase current starting in the
ARC: TDR trip.time I>>PSx 015 075 024 113 024 163 025 113 Fig: 3-157
ARC: TDRtrip.time I>>>PSx 014 097 024 114 024 164 025 114 Fig: 3-157
ARC: TDR trip.time IN>PSx 015 077 024 115 024 165 025 115 Fig: 3-157
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a residual current starting in the
ARC: TDRtrip.time IN>>PSx 015 032 024 116 024 166 025 116 Fig: 3-157
ARC: TDRtrip.t. IN>>> PSx 014 099 024 117 024 167 025 117 Fig: 3-157
ARC: TDRtrip.t. kIref>PSx 015 095 024 118 024 168 025 118 Fig: 3-158
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT phase
current system.
ARC: TDRtrip.t.kINref>PSx 015 097 024 119 024 169 025 119 Fig: 3-158
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT residual
current system.
ARC: TDRtrip.t. Ineg> PSx 015 035 024 120 024 170 025 120 Fig: 3-158
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via a starting in the IDMT negative-
sequence current system.
ARC: TDR trip t.GFDSS PSx 015 079 024 121 024 171 025 121 Fig: 3-159
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via ground fault direction
determination using steady-state values.
ARC: TDRtrip.t. LOGIC PSx 015 099 024 122 024 172 025 122 Fig: 3-161
Setting the TDR tripping time and start via programmable logic.
ARC: TDR dead time PSx 015 057 024 031 024 091 025 051 Fig: 3-164
Setting the TDR dead time.

ARC: TDR block.f. I>>>PSx 015 081 024 124 024 174 025 124 Fig: 3-162
7-84 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
The selection of the TDR blocking by I>>> defines whether an TDR is

blocked during an I>>> starting.
ARC: Reclaim time PSx 015 054 024 028 024 088 025 048 Fig: 3-164,
3-166
Setting the reclaim time.
ARC: Blocking time PSx 015 058 024 032 024 092 025 052 Fig: 3-154
Setting the time that will elapse before the ARC will be ready again after
blocking by a binary signal input.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enabled PSx 018 020 018 021 018 022 018 023 Fig: 3-171
This setting defines the parameter subset in which automatic synchronism

check (ASC) is enabled.
ASC: CB assignment PSx 037 131 037 132 037 133 037 134 Fig: 3-179
This setting defines the function group DEVxx that will control the circuit
breaker.
ASC: System integrat. PSx 037 135 037 136 037 137 037 138 Fig: 3-179
This setting defines whether ASC will operate in the mode automatic
synchron. check or automatic synchr. control.
ASC: Active for HSR PSx 018 001 077 030 078 030 079 030 Fig: 3-172
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole HSR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Active for TDR PSx 018 002 077 031 078 031 079 031 Fig: 3-172
This setting defines whether reclosing after a three-pole TDR will occur only
after being enabled by ASC.
ASC: Clos.rej.w.block PSx 018 003 077 032 078 032 079 032 Fig: 3-172
This setting defines whether reclosing is rejected after being blocked by

ASC.
ASC: Operative time PSx 018 010 077 034 078 034 079 034 Fig: 3-166,
3-177
Setting the operative time for ASC.
ASC: Operating mode PSx 018 025 018 026 018 027 018 028 Fig: 3-176
Criteria for a close enable are defined by setting the operating mode.
ASC: Op.mode volt.chk.PSx 018 029 018 030 018 031 018 032 Fig: 3-175
This setting defines the logic linking of trigger decisions for a voltage
controlled close enable.
ASC: V> volt.check PSx 026 017 077 043 078 043 079 043 Fig: 3-175
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must exceed so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C :

Op.mode volt.chk. PSx .
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-85

7 Settings
(continued)
ASC: V< volt. check PSx 018 017 077 040 078 040 079 040 Fig: 3-175
Setting the voltage threshold that the phase-to-ground voltages and the
reference voltage must fall below so that they are recognized as "Voltage
showing".
Note: The logic linking of trigger decisions is defined by setting A S C :

Op.mode volt.chk. PSx .
ASC: tmin volt. check PSx 018 018 077 041 078 041 079 041 Fig: 3-175
Setting the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which voltage conditions must be met so that the close enable of the ASC is
effected.
ASC: Measurement loop PSx 031 060 077 044 078 044 079 044 Fig: 3-170
The voltage measurement loop, corresponding to the reference voltage,

must be selected so that determination of differential values is correct.
Example: Connect transformer T 15 to measure the reference voltage to

lines A & Bathe measurement loop is set to 'Loop 12'.
ASC: V> sync. check PSx 018 011 077 035 078 035 079 035 Fig: 3-176
Setting the threshold of the minimum voltage to obtain a synchronism

checked close enable.
ASC: Delta Vmax PSx 018 012 077 036 078 036 079 036 Fig: 3-176
Setting the maximum differential voltage between measured and reference

voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Delta f max PSx 018 014 077 038 078 038 079 038 Fig: 3-176
Setting the maximum differential frequency between measured and

reference voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Delta phi max PSx 018 013 077 037 078 037 079 037 Fig: 3-176
Setting the maximum differential angle between measured and reference

voltages to obtain a synchronism checked close enable.
ASC: Phi offset PSx 018 034 077 042 078 042 079 042 Fig: 3-176
Setting a Phi offset that may be necessary so that determination of the

differential angle is correct.
ASC: tmin sync. check PSx 018 015 077 039 078 039 079 039 Fig: 3-176
Setting the operate delay value to define the minimum time period during
which synchronism conditions must be met so that the close enable of the
ASC is effected.
7-86 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Motor protection MP: Enabled PSx 024 148 024 147 024 197 025 147 Fig: 3-203
This setting defines the parameter subset in which motor protection is

enabled.
MP: Iref PSx 017 012 024 131 024 181 025 131 Fig: 3-204
To determine the reference current, the nominal motor current needs to be
calculated first from the motor data:
Pnom
I nom , motor =
3 U nom cos
The reference current is the nominal motor current as projected onto the
transformer secondary side and is thus calculated as follows:
I ref I nom , motor Tnom
=
I nom ,( relay ) I nom,( relay )
Example:
Motor and System Data:
Nominal motor voltage Vnom: 10 Kv
Nominal motor power Pnom: 1500 kW
Efficiency : 96.6 %
Active power factor cos : 0.86
Nominal transformation ratio Tnom

of the main current transformer: 100 A
Determination of the Nominal Motor
1500 kW
I nom , motor =
Current: 3 10 kV 0.966 0.86
= 104 A
Determination of the reference current:
I ref 104 A 100

= = 1.04
I nom ,( relay ) 1A
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-87

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: Factor kP PSx 017 040 024 132 024 182 025 132 Fig: 3-204
The starting factor k should be set according to the maximum permissible

thermal continuous current:
I therm, motor
k=
I nom , motor
Example:
Motor Data:
Maximum permissible continuous thermal motor current Itherm,motor:

1.1 Inom,motor
Determination of the Starting Factor:
1.1 I nom , motor

k= = 1.1
I nom , motor
MP: IStUp> PSx 017 053 024 133 024 183 025 133 Fig: 3-209
Setting the current threshold for the operational status determination

'machine starting up'.
MP: tIStUp> PSx 017 042 024 134 024 184 025 134 Fig: 3-209
Setting the operate delay for the operational status determination 'machine
starting up'. Usually, the default setting can be retained.
MP: Character.type P PSx 017 029 024 135 024 185 025 135 Fig: 3-209
The selection of the tripping characteristic defines the restrictiveness of the

motor protection function. For low overcurrents, the logarithmic
characteristic provides significantly higher tripping times than the
reciprocally squared characteristic, since the latter neglects any heat
transfer to the cooling medium in the overload range.
7-88 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: t6Iref PSx 017 041 024 136 024 186 025 136 Fig: 3-209
This Setting the overload tripping time t6Iref is determined from the cold
machine data, using Iref = Inom,motor.
I ref = I nom , motor
For the reciprocally squared characteristic we set:

2
I startup

I
= tblock , cold
nom , motor
t6 I ref
36
For the logarithmic characteristic we set:

1
t6 I ref = tblock , cold 2
I startup

I
36 ln nom , motor
2
I startup
1
I
nom , motor
Based on the setting value thus determined, the tripping time for a warm
machine is now defined as follows.
For the reciprocally squared characteristic we set:
36
t = (1 0.2 ) t6 I ref 2
I startup

I
nom , motor
For the logarithmic characteristic we set:

2
I startup

I
t = (1 0.2 ) t6 I ref 36 ln nom , motor
2
I startup
1
I
nom , motor
Example:
Motor Data:
Motor startup current Istartup:
5.7 Inom,motor at Vnom
Max. permissible locked-rotor time with cold machine tblock,cold:
18 s at Vnom
Max. permissible locked-rotor time with cold machine tblock,cold:

16 s at Vnom
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-89

7 Settings
(continued)
MP: Tau after st.-up PSx 018 042 024 137 024 187 025 137 Fig: 3-209
Setting the heat dispersion time constant after startup. Usually, the default
setting can be retained.
MP: Tau mach.running PSx 017 088 024 138 024 188 025 138 Fig: 3-209
MP: Tau mach.stopped PSx 017 089 024 139 024 189 025 139 Fig: 3-209
Setting the cooling time constant with a running or stopped machine,

respectively.
If the thermal time constants of the motor are unknown, the cooling time
constant with machine running is best set to the highest setting value and
the cooling time with machine stopped to the five-fold value of that with
machine running.
MP: Perm. No.st.-ups PSx 017 047 024 140 024 190 025 140 Fig: 3-209
Setting the startup sequence of the motor as permitted by thermal

considerations.
Note:
The heavy starting logic (addresses 017 043 and 017 044) can only be
activated if the permissible startup sequence is set to two startups from cold
and one startup from warm.
MP: RC permitted, < PSx 018 043 024 141 024 191 025 141 Fig: 3-209
Setting the threshold value of the overload memory for reclosure

permission. Usually, the default setting can be retained.
MP: Operating mode PSx 018 041 024 142 024 192 025 142 Fig: 3-204
This setting defines whether motor protection will be operated together with
thermal overload protection (THERM).
MP: St.-up time tStUpPSx 017 043 024 143 024 193 025 143 Fig: 3-209
MP: Blocking time tE PSx 017 044 024 144 024 194 025 144 Fig: 3-209
Using an overspeed monitor, the heavy starting logic can be activated if

necessary. For this purpose, the load-torque-dependent operational startup
time needs to be set for tStUp and the maximum permissible locked-rotor
time (the tE time) with a machine at operating temperature needs to be set
for tE.
If the heavy starting logic is not used then the set startup time tStUp and the
tE-time should be set to the same value; the default values can be retained.
Note:
The heavy starting logic (address 017 047) can only be activated if the
permissible startup sequence is set to two startups from cold and one
startup from warm.
MP: I< PSx 017 048 024 145 024 195 025 145 Fig: 3-212
Setting the operate value of the minimum current stage of the underload
protection function of motor protection.
MP: tI< PSx 017 050 024 146 024 196 025 146 Fig: 3-212
Setting the operate delay of the minimum current stage of the underload
protection function of motor protection.
7-90 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Enabled PSx 072 175 073 175 074 175 075 175 Fig: 3-213
This setting defines the parameter subset in which thermal overload

THERM: Sel. backup th. PSx 072 080 073 080 074 080 075 080
Selecting the backup temperature sensor for the parameter subset PSx.
THERM: Iref PSx 072 179 073 179 074 179 075 179 Fig: 3-217
Setting the reference current.

THERM: Start.fact.OL_RC PSx 072 180 073 180 074 180 075 180 Fig: 3-217
Setting the starting characteristic factor kP.

THERM: Tim.const.1,>Ibl PSx 072 187 073 187 074 187 075 187 Fig: 3-217
Setting the thermal time constants of the protected object with current flow
(Ibl: base line current).
THERM: Tim.const.2,<Ibl PSx 072 188 073 188 074 188 075 188 Fig: 3-217
Setting the thermal time constants of the protected object without current
flow (Ibl: base line current).
Note:
This setting option is only relevant when machines are running. In all other
cases, time constant 2 must be set equal to time constant 1.
THERM: Max.perm.obj.tmp.PSx 072 182 073 182 074 182 075 182 Fig: 3-217
Setting the maximum permissible temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Max.perm.cool.tmpPSx 072 185 073 185 074 185 075 185 Fig: 3-217
Setting the maximum permissible coolant temperature.

THERM: Select meas.inputPSx 072 177 073 177 074 177 075 177 Fig: 3-215,3-
216
Selecting if and how the coolant temperature is measured: Via the PT100,
the 20mA input or Tx (x = 19).
THERM: Default CTA PSx 072 186 073 186 074 186 075 186 Fig: 3-217
Setting the coolant temperature to be used for calculation of the trip time if
coolant temperature is not measured.
THERM: Bl. f. CTA fault PSx 072 178 073 178 074 178 075 178 Fig: 3-215,
3-216
This setting specifies whether the thermal overload protection function will
be blocked in the event of faulty coolant temperature acquisition.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-91

7 Settings
(continued)
THERM: Rel. O/T warning PSx 072 184 073 184 074 184 075 184 Fig: 3-217
Setting the operate value of the warning stage.

THERM: Rel. O/T trip PSx 072 181 073 181 074 181 075 181 Fig: 3-217
Setting the operate value of the trip stage.

Note:
If the operating mode has been set to 'Absolute replica', the value here will
be automatically set to 100% and this parameter is hidden as far as the
local control panel is concerned.
THERM: Hysteresis trip PSx 072 183 073 183 074 183 075 183 Fig: 3-217
Setting the hysteresis of the trip stage.

THERM: Warning pre-trip PSx 072 191 073 191 074 191 075 191 Fig: 3-217
A warning will be given in advance of the trip. The time difference between
the warning time and the trip time is set here.
Unbalance protection I2>: Enabled PSx 018 220 018 221 018 222 018 223 Fig: 3-219
This setting defines the parameter subset in which unbalance protection is

enabled.
I2>: Ineg> PSx 018 091 018 224 018 225 018 226 Fig: 3-220
Setting the operate value of the first overcurrent stage.

I2>: Ineg>> PSx 018 092 018 227 018 228 018 229 Fig: 3-220
Setting the operate value of the second overcurrent stage.

I2>: tIneg> PSx 018 093 018 230 018 231 018 232 Fig: 3-220
Setting the operate delay of the first overcurrent stage.

I2>: tIneg>> PSx 018 094 018 233 018 234 018 235 Fig: 3-220
Setting the operate delay of the second overcurrent stage.
7-92 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Time-voltage protection V<>: Enabled PSx 076 246 077 246 078 246 079 246 Fig: 3-221
This setting defines the parameter subset in which time-voltage protection is

enabled.
V<>: Operating mode PSx 076 001 077 001 078 001 079 001 Fig: 3-222
This setting specifies whether the phase-to-ground voltages (Star operating

mode) or the phase-to-phase voltages (Delta operating mode) will be
monitored.
Note:
In the settings for the operate values of the time-voltage protection function,
the reference quantity is Vnom in the Star operating mode, but Vnom/3 in the
Delta operating mode.
To work out the settings for the over/undervoltage stages, consider the
following example for Vnom = 100 V:
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
80 V (phase-to-phase):
OperateValue 80V
Setting = = = 0.80
Vnom 100V
Setting in the Delta operating mode for an operate value of
46.2 V (phase-to-phase):
OperateValue 46.2V 46.2V 3
Setting = = = = 0.80
Vnom 100V 100V
3 3
V<>: Evaluation VNG PSx 076 002 077 002 078 002 079 002 Fig: 3-228
This setting determines which neutral-point displacement voltage will be

monitored: The displacement voltage calculated by the P139 or the
displacement voltage measured at the T 90 voltage transformer.
V<>: V> PSx 076 003 077 003 078 003 079 003 Fig: 3-223
Setting the operate value V>.

V<>: V>> PSx 076 004 077 004 078 004 079 004 Fig: 3-223
Setting the operate value V>>.

V<>: tV> PSx 076 005 077 005 078 005 079 005 Fig: 3-223
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>.

V<>: tV> 3-pole PSx 076 027 077 027 078 027 079 027 Fig: 3-223
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage V> when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV>> PSx 076 006 077 006 078 006 079 006 Fig: 3-223
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage V>>.

V<>: V< PSx 076 007 077 007 078 007 079 007 Fig: 3-224
Setting the operate value V<.

V<>: V<< PSx 076 008 077 008 078 008 079 008 Fig: 3-224
Setting the operate value V<<.

V<>: tV< PSx 076 009 077 009 078 009 079 009 Fig: 3-224
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-93

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: tV< 3-pole PSx 076 028 077 028 078 028 079 028 Fig: 3-224
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage V< when all three trigger
stages are activated.
V<>: tV<< PSx 076 010 077 010 078 010 079 010 Fig: 3-224
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage V<<.

V<>: Vpos> PSx 076 015 077 015 078 015 079 015 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate value Vpos>.

V<>: Vpos>> PSx 076 016 077 016 078 016 079 016 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate value Vpos>>.

V<>: tVpos> PSx 076 017 077 017 078 017 079 017 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>.

V<>: tVpos>> PSx 076 018 077 018 078 018 079 018 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vpos>>.

V<>: Vpos< PSx 076 019 077 019 078 019 079 019 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate value Vpos<.

V<>: Vpos<< PSx 076 020 077 020 078 020 079 020 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate value Vpos<<.

V<>: tVpos< PSx 076 021 077 021 078 021 079 021 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<.

V<>: tVpos<< PSx 076 022 077 022 078 022 079 022 Fig: 3-226
Setting the operate delay of undervoltage stage Vpos<<.

V<>: Vneg> PSx 076 023 077 023 078 023 079 023 Fig: 3-227
Setting the operate value Vneg>.

V<>: Vneg>> PSx 076 024 077 024 078 024 079 024 Fig: 3-227
Setting the operate value Vneg>>.

V<>: tVneg> PSx 076 025 077 025 078 025 079 025 Fig: 3-227
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>.

V<>: tVneg>> PSx 076 026 077 026 078 026 079 026 Fig: 3-227
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage Vneg>>.

V<>: VNG> PSx 076 011 077 011 078 011 079 011 Fig: 3-229
Setting the operate value VNG>.

V<>: VNG>> PSx 076 012 077 012 078 012 079 012 Fig: 3-229
Setting the operate value VNG>>.

V<>: tVNG> PSx 076 013 077 013 078 013 079 013 Fig: 3-229
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>.

V<>: tVNG>> PSx 076 014 077 014 078 014 079 014 Fig: 3-229
Setting the operate delay of overvoltage stage VNG>>.

V<>: tTransient PSx 076 029 077 029 078 029 079 029 Fig: 3-224
Setting the time limit of the signals generated by the undervoltage stages.
V<>: Hyst. V<> meas. PSx 076 048 077 048 078 048 079 048 Fig: 3-223
Setting the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring measured

voltages.
7-94 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
V<>: Hyst. V<> deduc. PSx 076 049 077 049 078 049 079 049 Fig: 3-226
Setting the hysteresis of the trigger stages for monitoring derived voltages
such as Vneg and VNG.
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Enabled PSx 018 196 018 197 018 198 018 199 Fig: 3-230
protection This setting defines the parameter subset in which over-/underfrequency
f<>: Oper. mode f1 PSx 018 120 018 121 018 122 018 123 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Oper. mode f2 PSx 018 144 018 145 018 146 018 147
f<>: Oper. mode f3 PSx 018 168 018 169 018 170 018 171
f<>: Oper. mode f4 PSx 018 192 018 193 018 194 018 195
Setting the operating mode of the timer stages of over-/underfrequency

protection.
f<>: f1 PSx 018 100 018 101 018 102 018 103 Fig: 3-234
f<>: f2 PSx 018 124 018 125 018 126 018 127
f<>: f3 PSx 018 148 018 149 018 150 018 151
f<>: f4 PSx 018 172 018 173 018 174 018 175
Setting the frequency threshold. The over-/underfrequency protection

function will operate if one of the following two conditions applies: The
threshold is higher than the set nominal frequency and the frequency
exceeds this threshold. The threshold is lower than the set nominal
frequency and the frequency falls below this threshold. Depending on the
selected operating mode, a signal will be issued without further monitoring
or, alternatively, further monitoring mechanisms will be triggered.
f<>: tf1 PSx 018 104 018 105 018 106 018 107 Fig: 3-234
f<>: tf2 PSx 018 128 018 129 018 130 018 131
f<>: tf3 PSx 018 152 018 153 018 154 018 155
f<>: tf4 PSx 018 176 018 177 018 178 018 179
Setting the operate delay of over-/underfrequency protection.

f<>: df1/dt PSx 018 108 018 109 018 110 018 111 Fig: 3-234
f<>: df2/dt PSx 018 132 018 133 018 134 018 135
f<>: df3/dt PSx 018 156 018 157 018 158 018 159
f<>: df4/dt PSx 018 180 018 181 018 182 018 183
Setting the frequency gradient to be monitored

Note: This setting is ineffective unless operating mode
"f with df/dt" has been selected.
f<>: Delta f1 PSx 018 112 018 113 018 114 018 115 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Delta f2 PSx 018 136 018 137 018 138 018 139
f<>: Delta f3 PSx 018 160 018 161 018 162 018 163
f<>: Delta f4 PSx 018 184 018 185 018 186 018 187
Setting for Delta f.

"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-95

7 Settings
(continued)
f<>: Delta t1 PSx 018 116 018 117 018 118 018 119 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Delta t2 PSx 018 140 018 141 018 142 018 143
f<>: Delta t3 PSx 018 164 018 165 018 166 018 167
f<>: Delta t4 PSx 018 188 018 189 018 190 018 191
Setting for Delta t.

"f w. Delta f/Delta t" has been selected.
Power directional protection P<>: Enabled PSx 014 252 014 253 014 254 014 255 Fig: 3-235
This setting defines the parameter subset in which power directional

P<>: P> PSx 017 120 017 200 017 201 017 202 Fig: 3-237
Setting the operate value P> for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P> PSx 017 128 017 129 017 130 017 131 Fig: 3-237
Setting the operate delay of stage P>.

P<>: Release delay P> PSx 017 132 017 133 017 134 017 135 Fig: 3-237
Setting the release delay of stage P>.

P<>: Direction P> PSx 017 136 017 137 017 138 017 139 Fig: 3-238
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P> trip signal
will be issued for forward, backward or non-directional fault decisions.
P<>: Diseng. ratio P> PSx 017 124 017 125 017 126 017 127 Fig: 3-237
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P> for the active power.
P<>: P>> PSx 017 140 017 141 017 142 017 143 Fig: 3-237
Setting the operate value P>> for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P>>PSx 017 148 017 149 017 150 017 151 Fig: 3-237
Setting the operate delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Release delay P>>PSx 017 152 017 153 017 154 017 155 Fig: 3-237
Setting the release delay of stage P>>.

P<>: Direction P>> PSx 017 156 017 157 017 158 017 159 Fig: 3-238
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P>> trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio P>>PSx 017 144 017 145 017 146 017 147 Fig: 3-237
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P>> for the active power.
P<>: Q> PSx 017 160 017 161 017 162 017 163 Fig: 3-239
Setting the operate value Q> of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q> PSx 017 168 017 169 017 170 017 171 Fig: 3-239
Setting the operate delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Release delay Q> PSx 017 172 017 173 017 174 017 175 Fig: 3-239
Setting the release delay of stage Q>.

P<>: Direction Q> PSx 017 176 017 177 017 178 017 179 Fig: 3-240
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q> trip signal
7-96 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q> PSx 017 164 017 165 017 166 017 167 Fig: 3-239
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q> of the reactive power.
P<>: Q>> PSx 017 180 017 181 017 182 017 183 Fig: 3-239
Setting the operate value Q>> of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q>>PSx 017 188 017 189 017 190 017 191 Fig: 3-239
Setting the operate delay of stage Q>>.

P<>: Release delay Q>>PSx 017 192 017 193 017 194 017 195 Fig: 3-239
Setting the release delay of stage Q>>.

P<>: Direction Q>> PSx 017 196 017 197 017 198 017 199 Fig: 3-240
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q>> trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q>>PSx 017 184 017 185 017 186 017 187 Fig: 3-239
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q>> of the reactive
power.
P<>: P< PSx 017 030 017 031 017 032 017 033 Fig: 3-241
Setting the operate value P< for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P< PSx 017 060 017 061 017 062 017 063 Fig: 3-241,
3-243
Setting the operate delay of stage P<.
P<>: Release delay P< PSx 017 226 017 227 017 228 017 229 Fig: 3-241,
3-243
Setting the release delay of stage P<.
P<>: Direction P< PSx 017 230 017 231 017 232 017 233 Fig: 3-242
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P< trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio P< PSx 017 034 017 035 017 036 017 037 Fig: 3-241
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P< for the active power.
P<>: P<< PSx 017 234 017 235 017 236 017 237 Fig: 3-241
Setting the operate value P<< for the active power.

P<>: Operate delay P<<PSx 017 242 017 243 017 244 017 245 Fig: 3-241
Setting the operate delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Release delay P<<PSx 017 246 017 247 017 248 017 249 Fig: 3-241
Setting the release delay of stage P<<.

P<>: Direction P<< PSx 017 250 017 251 017 252 017 253 Fig: 3-242
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a P<< trip signal
P<>: Diseng.ratio P<< PSx 017 238 017 239 017 240 017 241 Fig: 3-241
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value P<< for the active power.
P<>: Q< PSx 018 035 018 036 018 037 018 038 Fig: 3-244
Setting the operate value Q< of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q< PSx 018 052 018 053 018 054 018 055 Fig: 3-244,
3-246
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-97

7 Settings
(continued)
P<>: Release delay Q< PSx 018 056 018 057 018 058 018 059 Fig: 3-244,
3-246
Setting the release delay of stage Q<.
P<>: Direction Q< PSx 018 081 018 082 018 083 018 084 Fig: 3-245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q< trip signal
P<>: Diseng. ratio Q< PSx 018 044 018 045 018 046 018 047 Fig: 3-244
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q< of the reactive power.
P<>: Q<< PSx 018 085 018 086 018 087 018 088 Fig: 3-244
Setting the operate value Q<< of the reactive power.

P<>: Operate delay Q<<PSx 018 213 018 214 018 215 018 216 Fig: 3-244
Setting the operate delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Release delay Q<<PSx 018 236 018 237 018 238 018 239 Fig: 3-244
Setting the release delay of stage Q<<.

P<>: Direction Q<< PSx 018 242 018 243 018 244 018 245 Fig: 3-245
This setting of the measuring direction determines whether a Q<< trip signal
P<>: Diseng.ratio Q<< PSx 018 095 018 096 018 097 018 098 Fig: 3-244
Setting the disengaging ratio of the operate value Q<< of the reactive
power.
P<>: tTransient pulse PSx 018 246 018 247 018 248 018 249 Fig: 3-241,
3-243,3-244,
Setting the time limit of the signals generated by the stages P<, P<<, Q< 3-246
and Q<< after the respective operate delay has elapsed.
7-98 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
7.1.3.4 Control
Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003 Fig: 3-78
Selecting the bay interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002 Fig: 3-78
Selecting the station interlocking function from the local control panel.
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014 Fig: 3-63
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022 Fig: 3-63
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.

MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029 Fig: 3-63
Setting the operate delay of the function blocks.

MAIN: Perm.No.mot.drive op 221 027 Fig: 3-80
Setting the permissible motor drive operations within the time interval
defined at M A I N : M o n . t i m e m o t . d r i v e s .
MAIN: Mon.time mot.drives 221 026 Fig: 3-80
Setting the monitoring time to monitor the number of motor drives.

MAIN: Cool.time mot.drives 221 028 Fig: 3-80
Setting the cooling time for motors in motor-operated switchgear.

MAIN: Mon.time motor relay 221 060 Fig: 3-281,3-
282,3-283
Setting for the monitoring time for the motor relay.
External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000 Fig: 3-2
DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050
Setting the designation of the respective external device.
Note: This setting is only active if the external device designations are
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-99

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004 Fig: 3-272,

3-278,3-279,
DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054
3-282
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).

DEV01: Latching time 210 005 Fig: 3-273,
3-279,3-280,
DEV02: Latching time 210 055
3-282,3-283
Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear

position signal "Open" or "Closed" has been received.
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011 Fig: 3-272,
DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061 3-278
DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and
chatter suppression.
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012 Fig: 3-272,
DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062 3-278
DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112
This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position signal will be

suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
7-100 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027 Fig: 3-272,
DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077 3-278
DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s
delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024 Fig: 3-277
DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074
Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short
command or time control.
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014 Fig: 3-272,
3-278
DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in /

unplugged) of the switch truck plug.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-101

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021 Fig: 3-276
DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general
trip command 1 of the protection function.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are
defined as circuit breakers. This definition is included in the bay type
definitions.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022 Fig: 3-276
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by general
trip command 2 of the protection function.
definitions.
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023 Fig: 3-276
DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close
command" of the protection function.
definitions.
7-102 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019 Fig: 3-273
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the open position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020 Fig: 3-273
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal
to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position.
Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can
be selected.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015 Fig: 3-281
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open 210 065
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Open' command.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for bay types that are defined
for 'direct motor control.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-103

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016 Fig: 3-281,

3-280,3-283
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the
'Close' command.
Note: This setting is only visible (active) for bay types that are defined
for 'direct motor control.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025 Fig: 3-275
DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026 Fig: 3-275

DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted

without a check by the station interlock function.
7-104 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039 Fig: 3-274

DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included
in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the
interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the
corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a
new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to
change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040 Fig: 3-274
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'.
Note:
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-105

7 Settings
(continued)
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041 Fig: 3-274
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042 Fig: 3-274
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the
interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'.
Note:
7-106 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

7 Settings
(continued)
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000 Fig: 3-284

ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 250 009
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-107

7 Settings
(continued)
7.2 Protection of Increased-Safety Machines
7.2.1 General
The P139 was subjected to risk analysis based on the DIN V 19 250 standard of May
1994 (on basic safety considerations for measuring and protection relays) as well as
DIN V 19 251 of February 1995 (on measuring and protection relays, specifications and
measures for their fail-safe functioning) and owing to a lack of more specific standards
also based on DIN V VDE 0801 (on computers in safety systems).
Based on this risk analysis involving the examination of extensive measures for
prevention and management of malfunction, the P139 has been classified in
specifications class 3. According to NAMUR NE 31 (NAMUR: German committee on
standards for measuring and control engineering), specifications class 3 corresponds to
risk area 1. For this risk area, a protection device of single-channel design with alarm
signal and/or normally-energized arrangement (closed-circuit principle) will normally
suffice. IIn special cases, a requirement for a higher specifications class can be met by
a customized 1 out of 2 or 2 out of 3 circuit.
By connection and configuration of the output relay M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty , the
increased-safety machine can be switched off immediately or, alternatively, an alarm
signal can be given for delayed switch-off based on an assessment of the operational
conditions by trained staff.
7.2.2 Restrictive Safety-Oriented Configuration
For the P139 to operate in a restrictive safety-oriented mode under all operational
conditions, the output relays must be operated in a normally-energized arrangement
('closed-circuit principle'). In this arrangement, the relevant output relay is energized
during normal operation and drops out in the event of an activation of the associated
function or in the event of a malfunction.
On the configuration of functions, please see the Chapter on Local Control.
Essential General Configuration
Function Address Folder 1 Setting

MAIN: Device on-line 003 030 Par/Func/Glob/ Yes = on (1)
MAIN: Trip cmd.block. USER 021 012 Par/Func/Glob/ No (0)
OUTP: Outp.rel.block USER 021 014 Par/Func/Glob/ No (0)
DTOC: Function group DTOC 056 008 Par/Conf/ With (1)
MP: Function group MP 056 022 Par/Conf/ With (1)
I2>: Function group I2> 056 024 Par/Conf/ With (1)
DTOC: General enable USER 022 075 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
MP: General enable USER 017 059 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
I2>: General enable USER 018 090 Par/Func/Gen/ Yes (1)
1
See the Chapter on Local Control for notes on the folders.
7-108 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
7 Settings
(continued)
In order to implement a restrictive safety-oriented configuration for the protection of

electrical increased-safety machines, the configuration should be equivalent to the
example shown in the table below:
Relay Function Address Folder Associated

Function
K 902 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 902 150 196 Par/Conf/ MAIN: Gen.
trip command
1
OUTP: Oper. mode K 902 150 197 Par/Conf/ NE updating
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 021 001 Par/Func/Glob/ MP: Trip signal
DTOC: Trip
signal
I2>: tIneg>
elapsed
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7-109

7 Settings
(continued)
During device startup and during P139 operation, cyclic self-monitoring tests are run. In
the event of a positive test result, a specified monitoring signal will be issued and stored
in a non-volatile memory the monitoring signal memory (see Chapter
Troubleshooting). A listing of all possible entries in this monitoring signal memory is
given in the address list (see Appendix). Monitoring signals prompted by a serious
hardware or software fault in the unit are always entered in the monitoring signal
memory. The entry of monitoring signals of lesser significance into the monitoring signal
memory is optional. The user can select this option by setting an 'm out of n' parameter.
The blocking of the protection device is governed by similar principles, that is, signals
prompted by a serious hardware or software fault in the unit always lead to a blocking of
the protection unit. The assignment of signals of lesser significance to the signal
M AIN : Blocke d /fau l ty by an m out of n parameter (M AIN : F c t . a s s i g n m .
F a u l t ) is optional.

Function
K 908 OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 908 150 214 Par/Conf/ MAIN: Fct.
assign. fault
OUTP: Oper. mode K 908 150 215 Par/Conf/ NE updating
MAIN: Fct. assign. fault 021 031 Par/Func/Glob/ SFMON: Error K
902
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 1
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 4
SFMON:
Defect.module
slot 9
For safety-oriented operation, the Warning can be configured onto an output relay as in
the following example.

Function
E.g. OUTP: Fct. assignm. K 901 150 193 Par/Conf/ SFMON:
K 901 Warning (relay)
SFMON: Fct. assign. warning 021 030 Par/Func/Glob/ SFMON: Phase
sequ. V faulty
SFMON:
Undervoltage
7-110 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

8 Information and Control Functions
The P139 generates a large number of signals, processes binary input signals, and
acquires measured data during fault-free operation of the protected object as well as
fault-related data. A number of counters are available for statistical purposes. This
information can be read out from the integrated local control panel.
All this information can be found in the Operation and Events folders in the menu tree.
8.1 Operation
8.1.1 Cyclic Values
8.1.1.1 Measured Operating Data
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. tel. errors p.u. 120 040
Display of the updated measured operating value for the number of

corrupted messages within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: No.t.err.,max,stored 120 041
Display of the maximum value for the proportion of corrupted messages

within the last 1000 received messages.
COMM3: Loop back result 120 057
COMM3: Loop back receive 120 056
While the hold time is running, the loop back test results can be checked by
reading out these values.
Measured data input MEASI: Current IDC 004 134 Fig: 3-27
Display of the input current.

MEASI: Current IDC p.u. 004 135 Fig: 3-27
Display of the input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Curr. IDC,lin. p.u. 004 136 Fig: 3-27
Display of the linearized input current referred to IDC,nom.

MEASI: Scaled value IDC,lin 004 180 Fig: 3-28
Display of the scaled linearized value.

MEASI: Temperature T 004 133 Fig: 3-29
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-1

(continued)
MEASI: Temperature T1 U301 004 224 Fig: 3-30,

3-260
MEASI: Temperature T2 U302 004 225
Display of temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature p/c board.

MEASI: Temperature Tmax 004 233 Fig: 3-29
Display of the maximum temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature

input on the analog p/c board.
MEASI: Temp. T1 max. U301 004 234 Fig: 3-30
MEASI: Temp. T2 max. U302 004 235
Display of maximum temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature

p/c board.
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T 004 221 Fig: 3-29
Display of the temperature measured at the "PT 100" temperature input on

the analog p/c board referred to 100 C.
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T1 004 081 Fig: 3-30
MEASI: Temperature p.u. T2 004 082
Display of temperatures measured at inputs on the temperature p/c board

referred to 100 C.
Measured data output MEASO: Current A-1 005 100 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Current A-2 005 099
Display of the current on the analog measured data output

(A1: channel 1; A2: channel 2)
8-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Main function MAIN: Date 003 090 Fig: 3-82
Date display.
Note: The date can also be set here.
MAIN: Time of day 003 091 Fig: 3-82
Display of the time of day.

Note: The time can also be set here.
MAIN: Time switching 003 095 Fig: 3-82
Setting for standard time or daylight saving time.

This setting is necessary in order to avoid misinterpretation of the times
assigned to signals and event data that can be read out through the PC or
Note:
The time can be set here for standard time or daylight saving time.
In the case of clock synchronization via the clock synchronization telegram
from a central control system or a central device, this setting will be
overwritten each time a new clock synchronization telegram is received.
With a free-running clock or synchronization by minute pulse through a
binary input, the time of day setting and the time switching setting in the
device must be plausible. The two settings do not affect each other.
MAIN: Frequency f 004 040 Fig: 3-56
Display of system frequency.

MAIN: Curr. IP,max prim. 005 050 Fig: 3-47
Display of the maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,delay 005 036 Fig: 3-47
Display of the delayed maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: IP,max prim.,stored 005 034 Fig: 3-47
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Curr. IP,min prim. 005 055 Fig: 3-47
Display of the minimum phase current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current A prim. 005 040 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current A as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current B prim. 006 040 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current B as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current C prim. 007 040 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current C as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current (IP) prim. 005 010 Fig: 3-47
Display of the calculated resultant current as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IN prim. 004 043 Fig: 3-48
Display of the updated value for the residual current as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPG,max prim. 008 042 Fig: 3-51
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-3

(continued)
MAIN: Volt. VPG,min prim. 009 042 Fig: 3-51
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-G prim. 005 042 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-G prim. 006 042 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-G prim. 007 042 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. (VPG)/3 prim. 005 012 Fig: 3-51
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage VNG prim. 004 041 Fig: 3-52
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 as a primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage Vref prim. 005 046 Fig: 3-53
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Volt. VPP,max prim. 008 044 Fig: 3-51
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage VPP,min prim 009 044 Fig: 3-51
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Voltage A-B prim. 005 044 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Voltage B-C prim. 006 044 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for the phase-to-phase voltage B-C as a

primary quantity.
MAIN: Voltage C-A prim. 007 044 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A as a primary

quantity.
MAIN: Appar. power S prim. 005 025 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated apparent power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Active power P prim. 004 050 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated active power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Reac. power Q prim. 004 052 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated reactive power value as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy outp.prim 005 061 Fig: 3-57
Display of the updated active energy output as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Act.energy inp. prim 005 062 Fig: 3-57
Display of the updated active energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: React.en. outp. prim 005 063 Fig: 3-57
Display of the updated reactive energy output as a primary quantity.
8-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
MAIN: React. en. inp. prim 005 064 Fig: 3-57
Display of the updated reactive energy input as a primary quantity.

MAIN: Current IP,max p.u. 005 051 Fig: 3-47
Display of the maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,delay 005 037 Fig: 3-47
Display of the delayed maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: IP,max p.u.,stored 005 035 Fig: 3-47
Display of the delayed stored maximum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IP,min p.u. 005 056 Fig: 3-47
Display of the minimum phase current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current A p.u. 005 041 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current B p.u. 006 041 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current B referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current C p.u. 007 041 Fig: 3-47
Display of phase current C referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current (IP) p.u. 005 011 Fig: 3-47
Display of the calculated residual current referred to Inom.

MAIN: Current IN p.u. 004 044 Fig: 3-48
Display of the updated residual current value referred to Inom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,max p.u. 008 043 Fig: 3-51
Display of the maximum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage VPG,min p.u. 009 043 Fig: 3-51
Display of the minimum phase-to-ground voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-G p.u. 005 043 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage A-G referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-G p.u. 006 043 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage B-G referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-G p.u. 007 043 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-ground voltage C-G referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Volt. (VPG)/3 p.u. 005 013 Fig: 3-51
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to Vnom .

MAIN: Voltage VNG p.u. 004 042 Fig: 3-52
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage measured at transformer

T 90 referred to Vnom .
MAIN: Voltage Vref p.u. 005 047 Fig: 3-53
Display of the reference voltage measured at transformer T 15 referred to Vnom .

MAIN: Voltage VPP,max p.u. 008 045 Fig: 3-51
Display of the maximum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-5

(continued)
MAIN: Voltage VPP,min p.u. 009 045 Fig: 3-51
Display of the minimum phase-to-phase voltage referred to Vnom.

MAIN: Voltage A-B p.u. 005 045 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage A-B referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage B-C p.u. 006 045 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage B-C referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Voltage C-A p.u. 007 045 Fig: 3-51
Display of the updated value for phase-to-phase voltage C-A referred to Vnom.
MAIN: Appar. power S p.u. 005 026 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated apparent power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Active power P p.u. 004 051 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated active power value referred to nominal apparent

power Snom.
MAIN: Reac. power Q p.u. 004 053 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated value for reactive power referred to nominal

apparent power Snom.
MAIN: Active power factor 004 054 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated active power factor.

MAIN: Load angle phi A 004 055 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated load angle value in phase A.

MAIN: Load angle phi B 004 056 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated load angle value in phase B.

MAIN: Load angle phi C 004 057 Fig: 3-54
Display of the updated load angle value in phase C.

MAIN: Angle phi N 004 072 Fig: 3-54
Display of the angle between the measured residual current system

quantities IN and VNG.
MAIN: Angle VPG vs. IN 005 009
Display of the angle between the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage

and the measured residual current system quantities IN.
MAIN: Phase rel.,IN vs IP 004 073 Fig: 3-55
The phase relations of measured and calculated residual current are

compared.
MAIN: Current I unfilt. 004 074
Display of calculated unfiltered resultant current.
8-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Curr. IN,act p.u. 004 045 Fig: 3-187
determination using Display of the updated value for the active component of residual current
steady-state values referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN,reac p.u. 004 046 Fig: 3-187
Display of the updated value for the reactive component of residual current
referred to IN,nom.
GFDSS: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 004 047 Fig: 3-188
Display of the updated value for the harmonic content of residual current
referred to IN,nom. This display is only active when the steady-state current
evaluation mode of the GFDSS ground fault direction determination function
is enabled.
GFDSS: Admitt. Y(N) p.u. 004 191 Fig: 3-193
Display of the updated admittance value referred to YN,nom.

If G F D S S : Eva lu a ti on VNG is set to Measured:
YN,nom = IN,nom / VNG,nom.
If G F D S S : Eva lu a ti on VNG is set to Calculated:
YN,nom = IN,nom / Vnom
GFDSS: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 004 192 Fig: 3-193
Display of the updated conductance value referred to YN,nom.

GFDSS: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 004 193 Fig: 3-193
Display of the updated susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

Motor protection MP: Therm.repl.buffer MP 004 018 Fig: 3-209
Display of the buffer content of the motor protection function.

MP: St-ups still permitt 004 012 Fig: 3-209
Display of the current number of motor startups still permitted before RC

blocking.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-7

(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Status THERM replica 004 016 Fig: 3-217
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

THERM: Object temperature 004 137 Fig: 3-217
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

THERM: Coolant temperature 004 149 Fig: 3-217
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at TH ERM :

Selec t CTA.
When set to "Default temp. value" the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to "From 20 mA input"
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
THERM: Pre-trip time left 004 139 Fig: 3-217
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
THERM: Therm. replica p.u. 004 017
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function

referred to a buffer content of 100 %.
THERM: Object temp. p.u. 004 179
Display of the temperature of the protected object referred to 100 C.

THERM: Coolant temp. p.u. 004 178
Display of the coolant temperature referred to 100 C.

THERM: Temp. offset replica 004 109 Fig: 3-217
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant

temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature
is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current
only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Binary counts COUNT: Count 1 217 100 Fig: 3-288
Display of the updated count.
Note: The count value can be set here (Preload-Function).
8-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
8.1.1.2 Physical State Signals
Communication interface 3 COMM3: State receive 1 120 000
COMM3: State receive 2 120 003
Display of the relevant receive signal.

COMM3: State send 1 121 000
Display of the updated value for the relevant send signal.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-9

(continued)
Binary inputs INP: State U 601 152 090
INP: State U 602 152 093
INP: State U 603 152 096
INP: State U 604 152 099
INP: State U 605 152 102
INP: State U 606 152 105
INP: State U 701 152 108
INP: State U 702 152 111
INP: State U 703 152 114
INP: State U 704 152 117
INP: State U 705 152 120
INP: State U 706 152 123
INP: State U 801 184 001
INP: State U 802 184 005
INP: State U 803 184 009
INP: State U 804 184 013
INP: State U 805 184 017
INP: State U 806 184 021
INP: State U 807 184 025
INP: State U 808 184 029
INP: State U 809 184 033
INP: State U 810 184 037
INP: State U 811 184 041
INP: State U 812 184 045
INP: State U 813 184 049
INP: State U 814 184 053
INP: State U 815 184 057
INP: State U 816 184 061
INP: State U 817 184 065
INP: State U 818 184 069
INP: State U 819 184 073
INP: State U 820 184 077
INP: State U 821 184 081
INP: State U 822 184 085
INP: State U 823 184 089
INP: State U 824 184 093
INP: State U 901 152 144
INP: State U 902 152 147
INP: State U 903 152 150
INP: State U 904 152 153
INP: State U 1201 152 198
INP: State U 1202 152 201
INP: State U 1203 152 204
INP: State U 1204 152 207
INP: State U 1205 152 210
INP: State U 1206 152 213
INP: State U 1401 190 001
INP: State U 1402 190 005
INP: State U 1403 190 009
INP: State U 1404 190 013
INP: State U 1405 190 017
INP: State U 1406 190 021
INP: State U 1601 192 001
8-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
INP: State U 1602 192 005
INP: State U 1603 192 009
INP: State U 1604 192 013
INP: State U 1605 192 017
INP: State U 1606 192 021
INP: State U 1607 192 025
INP: State U 1608 192 029
INP: State U 1609 192 033
INP: State U 1610 192 037
INP: State U 1611 192 041
INP: State U 1612 192 045
INP: State U 1613 192 049
INP: State U 1614 192 053
INP: State U 1615 192 057
INP: State U 1616 192 061
INP: State U 1617 192 065
INP: State U 1618 192 069
INP: State U 1619 192 073
INP: State U 1620 192 077
INP: State U 1621 192 081
INP: State U 1622 192 085
INP: State U 1623 192 089
INP: State U 1624 192 093
INP: State U 2001 153 086
INP: State U 2002 153 089
INP: State U 2003 153 092
INP: State U 2004 153 095
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
! "Without function": No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
! "Low": Not energized.
! "High": Energized.
This display appears regardless of the setting for the binary signal input
mode.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-11

(continued)
Binary outputs OUTP: State K 601 150 120
OUTP: State K 602 150 123
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
OUTP: State K 1201 151 008
OUTP: State K 1202 151 011
OUTP: State K 1203 151 014
OUTP: State K 1204 151 017
OUTP: State K 1205 151 020
OUTP: State K 1206 151 023
OUTP: State K 1401 169 001
OUTP: State K 1402 169 005
OUTP: State K 1403 169 009
OUTP: State K 1404 169 013
OUTP: State K 1405 169 017
OUTP: State K 1406 169 021
OUTP: State K 1407 169 025
OUTP: State K 1408 169 029
OUTP: State K 1601 171 001
OUTP: State K 1602 171 005
OUTP: State K 1801 173 001
OUTP: State K 1802 173 005
OUTP: State K 1803 173 009
OUTP: State K 1804 173 013
OUTP: State K 1805 173 017
OUTP: State K 1806 173 021
OUTP: State K 2001 151 200
OUTP: State K 2002 151 203
OUTP: State K 2003 151 206
8-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
OUTP: State K 2004 151 209
OUTP: State K 2005 151 212
OUTP: State K 2006 151 215
OUTP: State K 2007 151 218
OUTP: State K 2008 151 221
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
! "Without function": No functions are assigned to the output relay.

! "Low": The output relay is not energized.
! "High": The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the operating mode set for the output
relay.
LED indicators LED: State H 2 085 000
LED: State H 3 085 003
LED: State H 10 085 024
LED: State H 11 085 027
LED: State H 12 085 030
LED: State H 13 085 033
LED: State H 14 085 036
LED: State H 15 085 039
LED: State H 16 085 042
The state of the LED indicators is displayed as follows:
! "Inactive": The LED indicator is not energized.

! "Active": The LED indicator is energized.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-13

(continued)
8.1.1.3 Logic state signals
Local control panel LOC: Illumination on EXT 037 101
LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005 Fig: 3-8

LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004 Fig: 3-8
LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel stat. 221 076 Fig: 3-3
LOC: Chg.Sig.Panel flash. 221 077 Fig: 3-3
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Command block. EXT 003 173 Fig: 3-10
COMM1: Sig./meas. block EXT 037 074 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
COMM1: Command blocking 003 174 Fig: 3-10
COMM1: Sig./meas.val.block. 037 075 Fig: 3-11,
3-12,3-13
COMM1: IEC 870-5-103 003 219 Fig: 3-11
COMM1: IEC 870-5-101 003 218 Fig: 3-12
COMM1: IEC 870-5,ILS 003 221 Fig: 3-13
COMM1: MODBUS 003 223 Fig: 3-14
COMM1: DNP3 003 230 Fig: 3-15
COMM1: COURIER 103 041 Fig: 3-16
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Communications fault 120 043 Fig: 3-21

COMM3: Comm. link failure 120 044 Fig: 3-21
COMM3: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 120 045
IRIG-B interface IRIGB: Enabled 023 201 Fig: 3-22

IRIGB: Synchron. ready 023 202 Fig: 3-22
Measured data input MEASI: Enabled 035 008 Fig: 3-24

MEASI: PT100 open circuit 040 190 Fig: 3-29
MEASI: PT100 T1 open circ. 040 193 Fig: 3-30,
3-261
3-261
MEASI: PT100 T3 open circ. 040 195 Fig: 3-261
3-262
3-262
3-262
MEASI: Open circ. PT100 T7 040 219 Fig: 3-261,
3-262
3-261,3-262
3-262
MEASI: Overload 20 mA input 040 191 Fig: 3-27
MEASI: Open circ. 20mA inp. 040 192 Fig: 3-27
Binary outputs OUTP: Block outp.rel. EXT 040 014 Fig: 3-32
OUTP: Reset latch. EXT 040 015 Fig: 3-32
OUTP: Outp. relays blocked 021 015 Fig: 3-32
OUTP: Latching reset 040 088 Fig: 3-32
8-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Measured data output MEASO: Enabled 037 102 Fig: 3-34

MEASO: Outp. enabled EXT 036 085 Fig: 3-35
MEASO: Reset output EXT 036 087 Fig: 3-36
MEASO: Output reset 037 117 Fig: 3-36
MEASO: Valid BCD value 037 050 Fig: 3-37,
3-38
MEASO: 1-dig. bit 0 (BCD) 037 051 Fig: 3-38
MEASO: Value A-1 valid 069 014 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Value A-1 output 037 118 Fig: 3-40
MEASO: Value A-2 valid 069 015
MEASO: Value A-2 output 037 119
Main function MAIN: Enable protect. EXT 003 027 Fig: 3-59
MAIN: Disable protect. EXT 003 026 Fig: 3-59
MAIN: System IN enable EXT 040 130 Fig: 3-60
MAIN: Syst. IN disable EXT 040 131 Fig: 3-60
MAIN: Test mode EXT 037 070 Fig: 3-85
MAIN: Blocking 1 EXT 040 060 Fig: 3-64
MAIN: Blocking 2 EXT 040 061 Fig: 3-64
MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT 040 138 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Trip cmd. block. EXT 036 045 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: M.c.b. trip V EXT 004 061 Fig: 3-172
MAIN: M.c.b. trip Vref EXT 036 086 Fig: 3-172
MAIN: Switch dyn.param.EXT 036 033 Fig: 3-61
MAIN: CB closed sig. EXT 036 051 Fig: 3-66,
3-67,3-155,
3-252,3-253
MAIN: Manual close EXT 036 047 Fig: 3-146
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. EXT 037 018 Fig: 3-75
MAIN: Man.cl.cmd.enabl.EXT 041 023 Fig: 3-67
MAIN: Man. close cmd. EXT 041 022 Fig: 3-67
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT 065 001 Fig: 3-83
MAIN: Min-pulse clock EXT 060 060 Fig: 3-82
MAIN: Ch.1 an. NCIT on EXT 010 188
MAIN: Ch.2 an. NCIT on EXT 010 190
MAIN: Prot. ext. enabled 003 028 Fig: 3-59

MAIN: Prot. ext. disabled 038 046 Fig: 3-59
MAIN: Syst.IN ext/user en. 040 132 Fig: 3-60
MAIN: System IN enabled 040 133 Fig: 3-60
MAIN: System IN disabled 040 134 Fig: 3-60
MAIN: Device not ready 004 060 Fig: 3-65
MAIN: Enable control 221 058 Fig: 3-78
MAIN: Test mode 037 071 Fig: 3-85
MAIN: Blocked/faulty 004 065 Fig: 3-65
MAIN: Trip cmd. blocked 021 013 Fig: 3-74
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-15

(continued)
MAIN: Latch. trip c. reset 040 139 Fig: 3-74

MAIN: Manual trip signal 034 017 Fig: 3-75
MAIN: Man. close command 037 068 Fig: 3-67
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 036 251 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 1 036 005 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Gen. trip signal 2 036 023 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Gen. trip command 035 071 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Gen. trip command 1 036 071 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Gen. trip command 2 036 022 Fig: 3-74
MAIN: Close command 037 009 Fig: 3-174,
3-181
MAIN: Close aft.man.cl.rqu 037 012 Fig: 3-67
MAIN: Dynam. param. active 040 090 Fig: 3-61
MAIN: General starting 040 000 Fig: 3-72
MAIN: tGS elapsed 040 009 Fig: 3-72
MAIN: Starting A 040 005 Fig: 3-71
MAIN: Starting B 040 006 Fig: 3-71
MAIN: Starting C 040 007 Fig: 3-71
MAIN: Starting GF 040 008 Fig: 3-71
MAIN: Starting Ineg 040 105 Fig: 3-71
MAIN: Rush restr. A trig. 041 027 Fig: 3-62
MAIN: Rush restr. B trig. 041 028 Fig: 3-62
MAIN: Rush restr. C trig. 041 029 Fig: 3-62
MAIN: Timer stage P elaps. 040 031 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: Timer st. Ineg elaps 040 050 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: Timer stage N elaps. 040 032 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: TripSig. tI>/tIrefP> 040 042 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: TrSg.tIneg>/Iref,neg 040 051 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: TripSig tIN>/tIrefN> 040 043 Fig: 3-73
MAIN: Ground fault 041 087 Fig: 3-70
MAIN: Ground fault A 041 054 Fig: 3-69
MAIN: Ground fault B 041 055 Fig: 3-69
MAIN: Ground fault C 041 056 Fig: 3-69
MAIN: Gnd. fault forw./LS 041 088 Fig: 3-70
MAIN: Gnd. fault backw./BS 041 089 Fig: 3-70
MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001 Fig: 3-78
MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000 Fig: 3-78
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015 Fig: 3-63
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023 Fig: 3-63
MAIN: Mon. mot. drives tr. 221 056 Fig: 3-80
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018 Fig: 3-79
MAIN: CB trip internal 221 006 Fig: 3-77
MAIN: CB tripped 221 016 Fig: 3-77
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017 Fig: 3-68
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054 Fig: 3-68
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053 Fig: 3-68
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055 Fig: 3-68
MAIN: Communication error 221 019 Fig: 3-81
MAIN: Ch.1 analog NCIT on 010 189
MAIN: Ch.2 analog NCIT on 010 191
8-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Parameter subset selection PSS: Control via user EXT 036 101 Fig: 3-86
PSS: Activate PS 1 EXT 065 002 Fig: 3-86
PSS: Control via user 036 102 Fig: 3-86
PSS: Ext.sel.param.subset 003 061 Fig: 3-86
PSS: PS 1 activated ext. 036 094 Fig: 3-86
PSS: Actual param. subset 003 062 Fig: 3-86
PSS: PS 1 active 036 090 Fig: 3-86
Self-monitoring SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070 Fig: 3-87

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100 Fig: 3-87
SFMON: Warm restart exec. 041 202
SFMON: Cold restart exec. 041 201
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure 090 019
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122
SFMON: +15V supply faulty 093 081
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
SFMON: Wrong module slot 1 096 100
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-17

(continued)
SFMON: Defect.module slot 1 097 000
SFMON: Defect.module slot10 097 009
SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070
SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071
SFMON: +15V faulty mod. N 093 096
SFMON: -15V faulty mod. N 093 097
SFMON: DAC faulty module N 093 095
SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
SFMON: Mod.Y RTD DPR faulty 093 108
SFMON: Mod.Y RTD RAM faulty 093 109
SFMON: Error K 601 097 070
8-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012 Fig: 3-89

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
SFMON: Invalid SW vers YRTD 093 123
SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-19

(continued)
SFMON: Time-out module YRTD 093 119
SFMON: IRIGB faulty 093 117
SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000 Fig: 3-250

SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001 Fig: 3-252

SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009 Fig: 3-252
SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022 3-253
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017 Fig: 3-250

SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005 Fig: 3-251
SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016 Fig: 3-250
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 093 140
SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 093 142
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 093 141
SFMON: Telecom. faulty 098 006 Fig: 3-150

SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035 Fig: 3-217
SFMON: CTA error 098 034 Fig: 3-215,
3-216
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094 Fig: 3-201
SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098 Fig: 3-196
SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
SFMON: Invalid scaling A-1 093 114 Fig: 3-40

SFMON: Invalid scaling A-2 093 115
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116 Fig: 3-27

SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024 Fig: 3-29
SFMON: PT100 T1 open circ. 098 029 Fig: 3-30
SFMON: PT100 T2 open circ. 098 030
SFMON: Open circ. PT100 T7 098 044
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input 098 025 Fig: 3-27

SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026 Fig: 3-27
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028 Fig: 3-234
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync 093 120
SFMON: Output 30 098 053
SFMON: Output 30 (t) 098 054
8-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Overload recording OL_RC: Record. in progress 035 003 Fig: 3-93

OL_RC: Overl. mem. overflow 035 007 Fig: 3-94
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Record. in progress 035 005 Fig: 3-102
GF_RC: GF memory overflow 035 006 Fig: 3-103
Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Trigger EXT 036 088 Fig: 3-105
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger EXT 036 089 Fig: 3-110

FT_RC: Trigger 037 076 Fig: 3-110
FT_RC: I> triggered 040 063 Fig: 3-110
FT_RC: Record. in progress 035 000 Fig: 3-110
FT_RC: Fault mem. overflow 035 001 Fig: 3-111
FT_RC: System disturb. runn 035 004 Fig: 3-110
FT_RC: Faulty time tag 035 002
Definite-time overcurrent DTOC: Blocking tI> EXT 041 060 Fig: 3-114
protection DTOC: Blocking tI>> EXT 041 061 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Blocking tI>>> EXT 041 062 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Block. tIneg> EXT 036 141 Fig: 3-116
DTOC: Block. tIneg>> EXT 036 142 Fig: 3-116
DTOC: Block. tIneg>>> EXT 036 143 Fig: 3-116
DTOC: Blocking tIN> EXT 041 063 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Blocking tIN>> EXT 041 064 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Blocking tIN>>> EXT 041 065 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Enabled 040 120 Fig: 3-113
DTOC: Starting I> 040 036 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Starting I>> 040 029 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Starting I>>> 039 075 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Starting Ineg> 036 145 Fig: 3-71,
3-72,3-116
DTOC: Starting Ineg>> 036 146 Fig: 3-71,
3-72,3-116
DTOC: Starting Ineg>>> 036 147 Fig: 3-71,
3-72,3-116
DTOC: Starting IN> 040 077 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Starting IN>> 040 041 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Starting IN>>> 039 078 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: tI> elapsed 040 010 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: tI>> elapsed 040 033 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: tI>>> elapsed 040 012 Fig: 3-114
DTOC: Trip signal tI> 041 020 Fig: 3-115
DTOC: Trip signal tI>> 040 011 Fig: 3-115
DTOC: Trip signal tI>>> 040 076 Fig: 3-115
DTOC: tIneg> elapsed 036 148 Fig: 3-73,
3-116,3-117
DTOC: tIneg>> elapsed 036 149 Fig: 3-73,
3-116,3-117
DTOC: tIneg>>> elapsed 036 150 Fig: 3-73,
3-116,3-117
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg> 036 151 Fig: 3-73,
3-116,3-117
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>> 036 152 Fig: 3-116,
3-117
DTOC: Trip signal tIneg>>> 036 153 Fig: 3-116,
3-117
DTOC: tIN> elapsed 040 013 Fig: 3-119
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-21

(continued)
DTOC: tIN>> elapsed 040 121 Fig: 3-119

DTOC: tIN>>> elapsed 039 079 Fig: 3-119
DTOC: Trip signal tIN> 041 021 Fig: 3-120
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>> 040 028 Fig: 3-120
DTOC: Trip signal tIN>>> 040 079 Fig: 3-120
DTOC: H.-time tIN>,i. runn 040 086 Fig: 3-121
DTOC: tIN>,interm. elapsed 040 099 Fig: 3-121
DTOC: Trip sig. tIN>,intm. 039 073 Fig: 3-121
Inverse-time overcurrent IDMT: Block. tIref,P> EXT 040 101 Fig: 3-129
protection IDMT: Block. tIref,neg>EXT 040 102 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: Block. tIref,N> EXT 040 103 Fig: 3-133
IDMT: Enabled 040 100 Fig: 3-124
IDMT: Starting Iref,P> 040 080 Fig: 3-129
IDMT: tIref,P> elapsed 040 082 Fig: 3-129
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,P> 040 084 Fig: 3-130
IDMT: Hold time P running 040 053 Fig: 3-129
IDMT: Memory P clear 040 110 Fig: 3-129
IDMT: Starting Iref,neg> 040 107 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: tIref,neg> elapsed 040 109 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: Trip sig. tIref,neg> 040 108 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: Hold time neg runn. 040 113 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: Memory neg clear 040 111 Fig: 3-131
IDMT: Starting Iref,N> 040 081 Fig: 3-133
IDMT: tIref,N> elapsed 040 083 Fig: 3-133
IDMT: Trip signal tIref,N> 040 085 Fig: 3-134
IDMT: Hold time N running 040 054 Fig: 3-133
IDMT: Memory N clear 040 112 Fig: 3-133
Short-circuit direction SCDD: Enabled 040 098 Fig: 3-136

determination SCDD: Blocked 040 062 Fig: 3-138
SCDD: Fault P forward 036 018 Fig: 3-139
SCDD: Fault P backward 036 019 Fig: 3-139
SCDD: Ground fault forward 040 037 Fig: 3-143
SCDD: Ground fault backw. 040 038 Fig: 3-143
SCDD: Fault P or G forwd. 040 039 Fig: 3-145
SCDD: Fault P or G backw. 040 040 Fig: 3-145
Switch on to fault protection SOTF: Par. ARC running EXT 039 063 Fig: 3-146
SOTF: Enabled 040 069 Fig: 3-146
SOTF: tManual-close runn. 036 063 Fig: 3-146
SOTF: Trip signal 036 064 Fig: 3-146
8-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Protective signaling PSIG: Enable EXT 037 025 Fig: 3-147

PSIG: Disable EXT 037 026 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Test telecom. EXT 036 038 Fig: 3-149
PSIG: Blocking EXT 036 049 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Receive EXT 036 048 Fig: 3-149,
3-150
PSIG: Ext./user enabled 037 023 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Enabled 015 008 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Ready 037 027 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Not ready 037 028 Fig: 3-147
PSIG: Test telecom. chann. 034 016 Fig: 3-149
PSIG: Telecom. faulty 036 060 Fig: 3-150
PSIG: Send (signal) 036 035 Fig: 3-149
PSIG: Send (transm.relay) 037 024 Fig: 3-149
PSIG: Receive (signal) 037 029 Fig: 3-149
PSIG: Trip signal 038 007 Fig: 3-149
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enable EXT 037 010 Fig: 3-153

ARC: Disable EXT 037 011 Fig: 3-153
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C EXT 037 017 Fig: 3-167
ARC: Blocking EXT 036 050 Fig: 3-154
ARC: CB drive ready EXT 004 066 Fig: 3-155
ARC: Ext./user enabled 037 013 Fig: 3-153
ARC: Enabled 015 064 Fig: 3-153
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C 034 023 Fig: 3-167
ARC: Blocked 004 069 Fig: 3-154
ARC: Blocking trip 042 000 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Ready 004 068 Fig: 3-155
ARC: Not ready 037 008 Fig: 3-155
ARC: Reject test HSR 036 055 Fig: 3-167
ARC: Block. time running 037 004 Fig: 3-154
ARC: Cycle running 037 000 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Operat.time running 037 005 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Start by LOGIC 037 078 Fig: 3-163
ARC: Dead time HSR runn. 037 002 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Dead time TDR runn. 037 003 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Reclaim time running 036 042 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Trip signal 039 099 Fig: 3-164
ARC: (Re)close request 037 077 Fig: 3-67,
3-164,3-173
ARC: (Re)close signal HSR 037 007 Fig: 3-164
ARC: (Re)close signal TDR 037 006 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Reclosure successful 036 062 Fig: 3-164
ARC: Sig.interr. CB trip 036 040 Fig: 3-164
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-23

(continued)
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Ext./user enabled 037 092 Fig: 3-171
ASC: Enable EXT 037 049 Fig: 3-171
ASC: Disable EXT 037 061 Fig: 3-171
ASC: Blocking EXT 037 048 Fig: 3-172
ASC: Test close requ. EXT 037 064 Fig: 3-173
ASC: Enabl.close requ.EXT 037 063 Fig: 3-173
ASC: Close request EXT 037 062 Fig: 3-173
ASC: Enabled 018 024 Fig: 3-171
ASC: Blocked 038 018 Fig: 3-172
ASC: Ready 037 079 Fig: 3-172
ASC: Not ready 037 082 Fig: 3-172
ASC: Test close request 034 019 Fig: 3-173
ASC: Close request 034 018 Fig: 3-173
ASC: Cycle running 038 019 Fig: 3-177
ASC: Operat.time running 037 093 Fig: 3-177
ASC: Close enable 037 083 Fig: 3-67,
3-175
ASC: Close enable,volt.ch 037 085 Fig: 3-175
ASC: Close enable,sync.ch 037 084 Fig: 3-176
ASC: Close rejection 037 086 Fig: 3-177
Ground fault direction GFDSS: GF (curr.) eval. EXT 038 020 Fig: 3-182
determination using GFDSS: Enabled 042 096 Fig: 3-182
steady-state values GFDSS: GF (pow.) ready 038 026 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: GF (pow.) not ready 038 027 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: GF (curr.) evaluat. 039 071 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: GF (curr.) ready 038 028 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: GF (curr.) not ready 038 029 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: Admittance ready 038 167 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: Admittance not ready 038 168 Fig: 3-182
GFDSS: Grd. fault pow./adm. 009 037 Fig: 3-184,
3-190
GFDSS: Forward / LS 009 035 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
GFDSS: Backward / BS 009 036 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
GFDSS: Starting forward/LS 009 040 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
GFDSS: Starting backw. /BS 009 041 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
GFDSS: Trip signal forw./LS 009 031 Fig: 3-187,
3-193
GFDSS: Ground fault (curr.) 009 038 Fig: 3-188
GFDSS: Starting Y(N)> 009 074 Fig: 3-194
GFDSS: Trip Y(N)> 009 075 Fig: 3-194
GFDSS: Trip signal Y(N)> 009 072 Fig: 3-194
8-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Transient ground fault TGFD: Blocking EXT 004 034 Fig: 3-196
direction determination TGFD: Reset signals EXT 004 140 Fig: 3-200
TGFD: Enabled 037 100 Fig: 3-196
TGFD: Ready 037 080 Fig: 3-196
TGFD: Not ready 037 081 Fig: 3-196
TGFD: Ground fault 004 033 Fig: 3-198
TGFD: Direct. determined 004 030 Fig: 3-199
TGFD: Forward / LS 004 031 Fig: 3-199
TGFD: Backward / BS 004 032 Fig: 3-199
TGFD: Signals reset 004 141 Fig: 3-200
Motor protection MP: Therm.repl.block EXT 040 044 Fig: 3-209

MP: Reset replica EXT 041 082 Fig: 3-211
MP: Speed monitor n> EXT 040 045 Fig: 3-209
MP: Enabled 040 115 Fig: 3-203
MP: Reset replica 041 083 Fig: 3-211
MP: Reclosure blocked 040 049 Fig: 3-209
MP: Starting k*Iref> 041 057 Fig: 3-204
MP: Startup 040 119 Fig: 3-209
MP: Trip by failed st-up 041 081 Fig: 3-209
MP: Trip signal 040 046 Fig: 3-209
MP: tI< elapsed 040 047 Fig: 3-212
Thermal overload protection THERM: Therm.repl.block EXT 041 074 Fig: 3-217
THERM: Reset replica EXT 038 061 Fig: 3-218
THERM: Enabled 040 068 Fig: 3-213
THERM: Reset replica 039 061 Fig: 3-218
THERM: Starting k*Iref> 041 108 Fig: 3-217
THERM: CTA error EXT 038 062 Fig: 3-215,
3-216
THERM: Warning 039 025 Fig: 3-217
THERM: Trip signal 039 020 Fig: 3-217
THERM: Buffer empty 039 112 Fig: 3-217
THERM: CTA error 039 111 Fig: 3-215,
3-216
THERM: Within pre-trip time 041 109 Fig: 3-217
THERM: Setting error,block. 039 110 Fig: 3-217
Unbalance protection I2>: Blocking EXT 035 100 Fig: 3-220

I2>: Blocking tIneg> EXT 041 076 Fig: 3-220
I2>: Blocking tIneg>> EXT 041 077 Fig: 3-220
I2>: Enabled 040 073 Fig: 3-219
I2>: Starting Ineg> 035 024 Fig: 3-220
I2>: Starting Ineg>> 035 025 Fig: 3-220
I2>: tIneg> elapsed 035 033 Fig: 3-220
I2>: tIneg>> elapsed 035 034 Fig: 3-220
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-25

(continued)
Time-voltage protection V<>: Blocking tV> EXT 041 068 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Blocking tV>> EXT 041 069 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Blocking tV< EXT 041 070 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Blocking tV<< EXT 041 071 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Blocking tVpos> EXT 041 090 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Blocking tVpos>> EXT 041 091 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Blocking tVpos< EXT 041 092 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Blocking tVpos<< EXT 041 093 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Blocking tVneg> EXT 041 094 Fig: 3-227
V<>: Blocking tVneg>> EXT 041 095 Fig: 3-227
V<>: Blocking tVNG> EXT 041 072 Fig: 3-229
V<>: Blocking tVNG>> EXT 041 073 Fig: 3-229
V<>: Enabled 040 066 Fig: 3-221
V<>: Ready 042 003 Fig: 3-221
V<>: Not ready 042 004 Fig: 3-221
V<>: Starting V>/>> A(-B) 041 031 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V>/>> B(-C) 041 032 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V>/>> C(-A) 041 033 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V> 041 030 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V> 3-pole 041 097 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V>> 041 096 Fig: 3-223
V<>: tV> elapsed 041 034 Fig: 3-223
V<>: tV> 3-pole elapsed 041 098 Fig: 3-223
V<>: tV>> elapsed 041 035 Fig: 3-223
V<>: Starting V</<< A(-B) 041 038 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting V</<< B(-C) 041 039 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting V</<< C(-A) 041 040 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting V< 041 037 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting V< 3-pole 042 005 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting V<< 041 099 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV< elapsed 041 041 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV< elaps. transient 042 023 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Fault V< 041 110 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV< 3-pole elapsed 042 006 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV< 3p elaps. trans. 042 024 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Fault V< 3-pole 041 111 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV<< elapsed 041 042 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV<< elapsed trans. 042 025 Fig: 3-224
V<>: tV</<< elaps. trans. 042 007 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Fault V<< 041 112 Fig: 3-224
V<>: Starting Vpos> 042 010 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Starting Vpos>> 042 011 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos> elapsed 042 012 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos>> elapsed 042 013 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Starting Vpos< 042 014 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Starting Vpos<< 042 015 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos< elapsed 042 016 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos< elaps. trans. 042 026 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Fault Vpos< 041 113 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos<< elapsed 042 017 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos<< elaps.trans. 042 027 Fig: 3-226
V<>: Fault Vpos<< 041 114 Fig: 3-226
V<>: tVpos</<< elap.trans 042 018 Fig: 3-226
8-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
V<>: Starting Vneg> 042 019 Fig: 3-227

V<>: Starting Vneg>> 042 020 Fig: 3-227
V<>: tVneg> elapsed 042 021 Fig: 3-227
V<>: tVneg>> elapsed 042 022 Fig: 3-227
V<>: Starting VNG> 041 044 Fig: 3-229
V<>: Starting VNG>> 042 008 Fig: 3-229
V<>: tVNG> elapsed 041 045 Fig: 3-229
V<>: tVNG>> elapsed 041 046 Fig: 3-229
Over-/underfrequency f<>: Blocking f1 EXT 042 103 Fig: 3-234

protection f<>: Blocking f2 EXT 042 104
f<>: Blocking f3 EXT 042 105
f<>: Blocking f4 EXT 042 106
f<>: Enabled 042 100 Fig: 3-230

f<>: Ready 042 101 Fig: 3-230
f<>: Not ready 042 140 Fig: 3-230
f<>: Blocked by V< 042 102 Fig: 3-232
f<>: Starting f1 042 107 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Starting f1/df1 042 108 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Delta f1 triggered 042 109 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Delta t1 elapsed 042 110 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Trip signal f1 042 111 Fig: 3-234
f<>: Starting f2 042 115
f<>: Starting f2/df2 042 116
f<>: Delta f2 triggered 042 117
f<>: Delta t2 elapsed 042 118
f<>: Trip signal f2 042 119
Power directional protection P<>: Blocking tP> EXT 035 082 Fig: 3-237
P<>: Blocking tP>> EXT 035 083 Fig: 3-237
P<>: Blocking tQ> EXT 035 084 Fig: 3-239
P<>: Blocking tQ>> EXT 035 085 Fig: 3-239
P<>: Blocking tP< EXT 035 050 Fig: 3-241
P<>: Blocking tP<< EXT 035 051 Fig: 3-241
P<>: Blocking tQ< EXT 035 052 Fig: 3-244
P<>: Blocking tQ<< EXT 035 053 Fig: 3-244
P<>: Enabled 036 250 Fig: 3-235
P<>: Starting P> 035 086 Fig: 3-237,
3-247
P<>: Starting P>> 035 089 Fig: 3-237,
3-247
P<>: Signal P> delayed 035 087 Fig: 3-237
P<>: Signal P>> delayed 035 090 Fig: 3-237
P<>: Trip signal P> 035 088 Fig: 3-238
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-27

(continued)
P<>: Trip signal P>> 035 091 Fig: 3-238

P<>: Starting Q> 035 092 Fig: 3-239,
3-248
P<>: Starting Q>> 035 095 Fig: 3-239,
3-248
P<>: Signal Q> delayed 035 093 Fig: 3-239
P<>: Signal Q>> delayed 035 096 Fig: 3-239
P<>: Trip signal Q> 035 094 Fig: 3-240
P<>: Trip signal Q>> 035 097 Fig: 3-240
P<>: Starting P< 035 054 Fig: 3-241,
3-242,3-247
P<>: Starting P<< 035 060 Fig: 3-241,
3-242,3-247
P<>: Signal P< delayed 035 055 Fig: 3-241,
3-242
P<>: Signal P<< delayed 035 061 Fig: 3-241,
3-242
P<>: tP< elapsed trans. 035 056 Fig: 3-241,
3-242
P<>: tP<< elapsed trans. 035 062 Fig: 3-241,
3-242
P<>: tP</tP<< elaps.trans 035 178 Fig: 3-241
P<>: Fault P< 035 057 Fig: 3-241,
3-243
P<>: Fault P<< 035 063 Fig: 3-241
P<>: Trip signal P< 035 058 Fig: 3-242
P<>: Trip signal P<< 035 064 Fig: 3-242
P<>: Trip signal P< trans 035 059 Fig: 3-242
P<>: Trip sig. P<< trans. 035 065 Fig: 3-242
P<>: Starting Q< 035 066 Fig: 3-244,
3-245,3-248
P<>: Starting Q<< 035 010 Fig: 3-244,
3-245,3-248
P<>: Signal Q< delayed 035 067 Fig: 3-244,
3-245
P<>: Signal Q<< delayed 035 011 Fig: 3-244,
3-245
P<>: tQ< elapsed trans. 035 068 Fig: 3-244,
3-245
P<>: tQ<< elapsed trans. 035 016 Fig: 3-244,
3-245
P<>: tQ</tQ<< elaps.trans 035 179 Fig: 3-244
P<>: Fault Q< 035 069 Fig: 3-244,
3-246
P<>: Fault Q<< 035 049 Fig: 3-244
P<>: Trip signal Q< 035 155 Fig: 3-245
P<>: Trip signal Q<< 035 176 Fig: 3-245
P<>: Trip sig. Q< trans. 035 156 Fig: 3-245
P<>: Trip sig. Q<< trans. 035 177 Fig: 3-245
P<>: Direction P forw. 035 181 Fig: 3-247
P<>: Direction P backw. 035 191 Fig: 3-247
P<>: Direction Q forw. 035 193 Fig: 3-248
P<>: Direction Q backw. 035 194 Fig: 3-248
8-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Circuit breaker failure CBF: Starting trig. EXT 038 016 Fig: 3-249
protection CBF: Parallel trip EXT 037 019 Fig: 3-67,
3-249
CBF: Enabled 040 055 Fig: 3-249
CBF: Trip signal 040 026 Fig: 3-249
CBF: tCBF running 036 066 Fig: 3-249
CBF: CB failure 036 017 Fig: 3-249
Measuring-circuit monitoring MCMON: Enabled 040 094 Fig: 3-251

MCMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 040 087 Fig: 3-251
MCMON: Undervoltage 038 038 Fig: 3-252
MCMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 038 049 Fig: 3-252
MCMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 038 023 Fig: 3-250
MCMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 037 020 Fig: 3-250
MCMON: FF, Vref triggered 038 100 3-253
MCMON: Meas. voltage o.k. 038 048 Fig: 3-252
MCMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 040 078
Limit value monitoring LIMIT: Enabled 040 074 Fig: 3-254,

3-258
LIMIT: tI> elapsed 040 220 Fig: 3-254
LIMIT: tI>> elapsed 040 221 Fig: 3-254
LIMIT: tI< elapsed 040 222 Fig: 3-254
LIMIT: tI<< elapsed 040 223 Fig: 3-254
LIMIT: tVPG> elapsed 040 224 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPG>> elapsed 040 225 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPG< elapsed 040 226 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPG<< elapsed 040 227 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPP> elapsed 040 228 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPP>> elapsed 040 229 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPP< elapsed 040 230 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVPP<< elapsed 040 231 Fig: 3-255
LIMIT: tVNG> elapsed 040 168 Fig: 3-256
LIMIT: tVNG>> elapsed 040 169 Fig: 3-256
LIMIT: tVref> elapsed 042 152 Fig: 3-258
LIMIT: tVref>> elapsed 042 153 Fig: 3-258
LIMIT: tVref< elapsed 042 154 Fig: 3-258
LIMIT: tVref<< elapsed 042 155 Fig: 3-258
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin> 040 180 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin>> 040 181 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: tIDC,lin> elapsed 040 182 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: tIDC,lin>> elapsed 040 183 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin< 040 184 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: Starting IDC,lin<< 040 185 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: tIDC,lin< elapsed 040 186 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: tIDC,lin<< elapsed 040 187 Fig: 3-257
LIMIT: Starting T> 040 170 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: Starting T>> 040 171 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: tT> elapsed 040 172 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: tT>> elapsed 040 173 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: Starting T< 040 174 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: Starting T<< 040 175 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: tT< elapsed 040 176 Fig: 3-259
LIMIT: tT<< elapsed 040 177 Fig: 3-259
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-29

(continued)
LIMIT: Starting T1> 040 200 Fig: 3-260

LIMIT: Starting T1>> 040 201 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT1> elapsed 040 202 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT1>> elapsed 040 203 Fig: 3-260,
3-261
LIMIT: Starting T1< 040 204 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: Starting T1<< 040 205 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT1< elapsed 040 206 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: tT1<< elapsed 040 207 Fig: 3-260
LIMIT: Starting T2> 040 210
LIMIT: Starting T2>> 040 211
LIMIT: tT2> elapsed 040 212
LIMIT: tT2>> elapsed 040 213 Fig: 3-261

LIMIT: Starting T2< 040 214
LIMIT: Starting T2<< 040 215
LIMIT: tT2< elapsed 040 216
LIMIT: tT2<< elapsed 040 217
LIMIT: Tt3> elapsed 040 162
LIMIT: Tt3>> elapsed 040 163 Fig: 3-261


3-262

3-262

3-262
8-30 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)

3-262

3-262

3-262
LIMIT: 2out of3 with T1,2,3 041 248 Fig: 3-261

LIMIT: tIPxx triggered 221 232
LIMIT: tVPGxx triggered 221 233
LIMIT: tVPPxx triggered 221 234
LIMIT: tVNGxx triggered 221 235
LIMIT: tVrefxx triggered 221 237
Logic LOGIC: Input 1 EXT 034 000 Fig: 3-265

LOGIC: Input 2 EXT 034 001
LOGIC: Input 16 EXT 034 015 Fig: 3-265

LOGIC: Set 1 EXT 034 051 Fig: 3-264
LOGIC: Set 2 EXT 034 052
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-31

(continued)
LOGIC: Reset 1 EXT 034 059 Fig: 3-264

LOGIC: Reset 2 EXT 034 060
LOGIC: 1 has been set 034 067 Fig: 3-264

LOGIC: 2 has been set 034 068
LOGIC: 1 set externally 034 075 Fig: 3-264

LOGIC: 2 set externally 034 076
LOGIC: Enabled 034 046 Fig: 3-265

LOGIC: Output 1 042 032 Fig: 3-265
LOGIC: Output 1 (t) 042 033 Fig: 3-265
LOGIC: Output 2 042 034
LOGIC: Output 2 (t) 042 035 Fig: 3-163

LOGIC: Output 3 (t) 042 037
8-32 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-33

(continued)
External devices 01 to 10 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030 Fig: 3-272,
3-278
DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031 Fig: 3-272,
3-278
DEV01: Control state 210 018 Fig: 3-272,
3-278
DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036 Fig: 3-272,
3-278,3-279,
3-280,3-
282,3-283
DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037 Fig: 3-272,
3-278,3-279,
3-280,3-282,
3-283
DEV01: Sw. dev. interm.pos. 210 038 Fig: 3-272,
3-278
DEV01: Open command 210 028 Fig: 3-277
DEV01: Close command 210 029 Fig: 3-277,
3-279,3-280,
3-282,3-283
DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080
DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081 Fig: 3-66

DEV02: Control state 210 068
DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086
DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087
DEV02: Sw. dev. interm.pos. 210 088
DEV02: Open command 210 078
DEV02: Close command 210 079
DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131
8-34 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
DEV10: Closed signal EXT 211 231 Fig: 3-66

DEV10: Switch. device open 211 236 Fig: 3-77

Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032 Fig: 3-284

ILOCK: Output 2 250 033
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-35

(continued)
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001 Fig: 3-285

CMD_1: Command C002 200 006
CMD_1: Command C011 200 051 Fig: 3-281,

3-282
CMD_1: Command C012 200 056 Fig: 3-281,
3-282,3-283
8-36 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004 Fig: 3-286
SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005 Fig: 3-286
SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012
SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013
SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092 Fig: 3-281

SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093 Fig: 3-281
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-37

(continued)
Binary counts COUNT: Set counter 1 EXT 217 130 Fig: 3-288
COUNT: Transmit counts EXT 217 009 Fig: 3-288
COUNT: Reset EXT 217 004 Fig: 3-288
COUNT: Enabled 217 001 Fig: 3-288
COUNT: Transmit counts 217 010 Fig: 3-288
COUNT: Reset 217 005 Fig: 3-288
8-38 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
8.1.2 Control and Testing
Device DVICE: Service info 031 080 031 080
LOC: Param. change enabl. 003 010
Setting the enable for changing values from the local control panel.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Sel.spontan.sig.test 003 180 Fig: 3-17
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM1: Test spont.sig.start 003 184 Fig: 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM1: Test spont.sig. end 003 186 Fig: 3-17
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 2 COMM2: Sel.spontan.sig.test 103 180 Fig: 3-19
Signal selection for testing purposes.

COMM2: Test spont.sig.start 103 184 Fig: 3-19
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "starting".

COMM2: Test spont.sig. end 103 186 Fig: 3-19
Triggering of transmission of a selected signal as "ending".
Communication interface 3 COMM3: Reset No. tel.errors 120 037
COMM3: Send signal for test 120 050
COMM3: Log. state for test 120 051
COMM3: Send signal, test 120 053
COMM3: Loop back send 120 055
COMM3: Loop back test 120 054
COMM3: Hold-time for test 120 052
Measured data input MEASI: Reset temperat. Tmax 003 045
Resetting measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to

updated measured values.
Binary outputs OUTP: Reset latch. USER 021 009 Fig: 3-32
Reset of latched output relays from the local control panel.

OUTP: Relay assign. f.test 003 042 Fig: 3-33
Selection of an output relay to be tested.

OUTP: Relay test 003 043 Fig: 3-33
The output relay selected for testing is triggered for the set time
(O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t ) .
This control action is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-

Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-39

(continued)
OUTP: Hold-time for test 003 044 Fig: 3-33
Setting the time period for which the selected output relay is triggered
during functional testing.
Measured data output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116 Fig: 3-36
Resetting the measured data output function.
Main function MAIN: Enable syst. IN USER 003 142 Fig: 3-60
Enabling the residual current stages of the DTOC/IDMT protection.

MAIN: Disable syst.IN USER 003 141 Fig: 3-60
Disabling the residual current stages of the DTOC/IDMT protection.

MAIN: General reset 003 002 Fig: 3-83
Reset of the following memories:

! All counters
! LED indicators
! Operating data memory
! All event memories
! Event counters
! Fault data
! Measured overload data
! Recorded fault values
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER 021 010 Fig: 3-83
Reset of the following displays:

! LED indicators
! Fault data
MAIN: Rset.latch.trip USER 021 005 Fig: 3-74
Reset of latched trip commands from the local control panel.

MAIN: Reset c. cl./trip c. 003 007 Fig: 3-76
The counters for counting close and trip commands are reset.
MAIN: Reset IP,max,stored 003 033 Fig: 3-47
The display of the stored maximum phase current is reset.

MAIN: Reset meas.v. energy 003 032 Fig: 3-57
The display of active and reactive energy output and input is reset.
MAIN: Man. trip cmd. USER 003 040 Fig: 3-75
A 100 ms trip command is issued from the local control panel. This setting
is password-protected (see section entitled 'Password-Protected Control
Operations' in Chapter 6).
Note:
The command is only executed if the manual trip command has been
configured as trip command 1 or 2.
8-40 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
MAIN: Man. close cmd. USER 018 033 Fig: 3-67
A close command is issued from the local control panel for the set reclose
command time. This setting is password-protected (see section entitled
'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).
MAIN: Warm restart 003 039
A warm restart is carried out. The device functions as it does when the
power supply is turned on.
MAIN: Cold restart 000 085
A cold restart is carried out. This setting is password-protected (see section

entitled 'Password-Protected Control Operations' in Chapter 6).A cold
restart means that all settings and recordings are cleared. The values with
which the device operates after a cold restart are the underlined default
settings given in the Range of Values column in the Address List. They
are selected so as to block the device after a cold restart.
Operating data recording OP_RC: Reset recording 100 001 Fig: 3-88
The operating data memory and the counter for operation signals are reset.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Reset recording 003 008 Fig: 3-89
Reset of the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: Reset recording 100 003 Fig: 3-94
Reset of the overload memory.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Reset recording 100 000 Fig: 3-103
Reset of the ground fault memory.
Fault recording FT_RC: Trigger USER 003 041 Fig: 3-110
Fault recording is enabled from the local control panel for 500 ms.
FT_RC: Reset recording 003 006 Fig: 3-111
Reset of the following memories:

! LED indicators
! Fault memory
! Fault counter
! Fault data
! Recorded fault values
Protective signaling PSIG: Enable USER 003 132 Fig: 3-147
Protective signaling is enabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Disable USER 003 131 Fig: 3-147
Protective signaling is disabled from the local control panel.

PSIG: Test telecom. USER 015 009 Fig: 3-149
A send signal is issued for 500 ms.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-41

(continued)
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Enable USER 003 134 Fig: 3-153
The auto-reclosing control function is enabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Disable USER 003 133 Fig: 3-153
The auto-reclosing control function is disabled from the local control panel.
ARC: Test HSR A-B-C USER 011 066 Fig: 3-167
A three-pole test HSR is triggered.

ARC: Reset counters 003 005 Fig: 3-169
The ARC counters are reset.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Enable USER 003 136 Fig: 3-171
Automatic synchronism check is enabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Disable USER 003 135 Fig: 3-171
Automatic synchronism check is disabled from the local control panel.

ASC: Reset counters 003 089 Fig: 3-181
The ASC counters are reset.

ASC: Test close requ.USER 018 005 Fig: 3-173
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. No close command is transmitted to
the CB if the check of the ASC is positive. Only a signal is issued.
ASC: Close request USER 018 004 Fig: 3-173
A close request is issued from the integrated local control panel. This will
trigger the ASC functional operation. A close command is transmitted to the
CB if the check of the ASC is positive.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: Reset counters 003 004 Fig: 3-189,3-
determination using 195
steady-state values The counters for the ground fault direction determination function using
steady-state values are reset.
Transient ground fault TGFD: Reset signals USER 003 009 Fig: 3-200
direction determination The direction decisions can be reset while the buffer time is elapsing.
TGFD: Reset counters 003 022 Fig: 3-202
The counters for the transient ground fault direction determination function
are reset.
Motor protection MP: Rset.therm.repl.USER 022 073 Fig: 3-211
Resetting the thermal replica of the motor protection function.
8-42 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Thermal overload protection THERM: Rset.therm.repl.USER 022 061 Fig: 3-218
Resetting the thermal replica of the thermal overload protection function.
LOGIC: Trigger 1 034 038 Fig: 3-265

LOGIC: Trigger 2 034 039
LOGIC: Trigger 8 034 045 Fig: 3-265
Intervention in the logic at the appropriate point of a 100 ms pulse.
COUNT: Transmit counts USER 217 008 Fig: 3-288
Count transmission.
COUNT: Reset USER 217 003 Fig: 3-288
Count reset.
8.1.3 Operating data recording
Operating data recording OP_RC: Operat. data record. 003 024 Fig: 3-88
Point of entry into the operating data log.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: Mon. signal record. 003 001 Fig: 3-89
Point of entry into the monitoring signal log.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-43

(continued)
8.2 Events
8.2.1 Event counters
Communication interface 3 COMM3: No. telegram errors 120 042
Main function MAIN: No. general start. 004 000 Fig: 3-72
Number of general starting signals.

MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 1 004 006 Fig: 3-76
Number of general trip commands 1.

MAIN: No. gen.trip cmds. 2 009 050 Fig: 3-76
Number of general trip commands 2.

MAIN: No. close commands 009 055 Fig: 3-67
Number of close commands.

MAIN: No. motor drive op. 221 025 Fig: 3-80
Number of times external devices with direct motor control are activated
during the monitoring time.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.out 009 090 Fig: 3-57
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.overfl.act.en.inp 009 091 Fig: 3-57
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the active energy
input was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.out 009 092 Fig: 3-57
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
output was exceeded.
MAIN: No.ov/fl.reac.en.inp 009 093 Fig: 3-57
Counter for the number of times the measuring range of the reactive energy
input was exceeded.
Operating data recording OP_RC: No. oper. data sig. 100 002 Fig: 3-88
Number of signals stored in the operating data memory.
Monitoring signal recording MT_RC: No. monit. signals 004 019 Fig: 3-89
Number of signals stored in the monitoring signal memory.
Overload recording OL_RC: No. overload 004 101 Fig: 3-93
Number of overload events.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: No. ground faults 004 100 Fig: 3-102
Number of ground faults.
8-44 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
Fault recording FT_RC: No. of faults 004 020 Fig: 3-110
Number of faults.
FT_RC: No. system disturb. 004 010 Fig: 3-110
Number of system disturbances.
Auto-reclosing control ARC: Number HSR A-B-C 004 007 Fig: 3-169
Number of high-speed reclosures.

ARC: Number TDR 004 008 Fig: 3-169
Number of time-delay reclosures.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: No. RC aft. man.clos 004 009 Fig: 3-181
Number of reclosures after a manual close request.

ASC: No. close requests 009 033 Fig: 3-181
Number of close requests.

ASC: No. close rejections 009 034 Fig: 3-181
Number of close rejections.
Ground fault direction GFDSS: No. GF power/admitt. 009 002 Fig: 3-195
determination using Number of ground faults detected by steady-state power evaluation.
steady-state values
GFDSS: No. GF (curr. meas) 009 003 Fig: 3-189
Number of ground faults detected by steady-state current evaluation.

GFDSS: No. GF admitt. Y(N) 009 060 Fig: 3-195
Number of ground faults (non-directional) detected by the admittance

evaluation method.
GFDSS: No. GF forward/LS 009 000 Fig: 3-195
Number of ground faults in the forward direction.

GFDSS: No. GF backward/BS 009 001 Fig: 3-195
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Transient ground fault TGFD: No. GF 004 015 Fig: 3-202

direction determination Number of transient ground faults.
TGFD: No. GF forward/LS 004 013 Fig: 3-202
Number of transient ground faults in the forward direction.

TGFD: No. GF backward/BS 004 014 Fig: 3-202
Number of ground faults in the backward direction.
Motor protection MP: No. of start-ups 004 011 Fig: 3-210
Number of motor startups since the last reset.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-45

(continued)
8.2.2 Measured Event Data
Overload data acquisition OL_DA: Overload duration 004 102 Fig: 3-90
Duration of the overload event.

OL_DA: T.taken f.startup,MP 005 096 Fig: 3-91
Display of the motor startup time.

OL_DA: Start-up current, MP 005 098 Fig: 3-91
Display of the motor startup current.

OL_DA: Heat.dur.start-up,MP 005 097 Fig: 3-91
Display of startup heating in motor protection.

OL_DA: Status THERM replica 004 147 Fig: 3-92
Display of the buffer content of the thermal overload protection function.

OL_DA: Load current THERM 004 058 Fig: 3-92
Display of the load current used by the thermal overload protection function
to calculate the tripping time.
OL_DA: Object temp. THERM 004 035 Fig: 3-92
Display of the temperature of the protected object.

OL_DA: Coolant temp. THERM 004 036 Fig: 3-92
Display of the coolant temperature depending on the setting at TH ERM :

Selec t CTA .
When set to "Default temp. value" the set temperature value will be
displayed. When set to "From PT 100" the temperature measured by the
resistance thermometer will be displayed. When set to "From 20 mA input"
the temperature measured via a 20 mA transducer will be displayed.
OL_DA: Pre-trip t.leftTHERM 004 148 Fig: 3-92
Display of the time remaining before the thermal overload protection

function will reach the tripping threshold.
OL_DA: Offset THERM replica 004 154 Fig: 3-92
Display of the additional reserve if the coolant temperature is taken into

account. This display is relevant if the coolant temperature has been set to
a value below the maximum permissible coolant temperature or, in other
words, if the thermal model has been shifted downwards.
If the coolant temperature and the maximum permissible coolant

temperature have been set to the same value, then the coolant temperature
is not taken into account and the characteristic is a function of the current
only. The additional reserve amounts to 0 in this case.
Ground fault data acquisition GF_DA: Ground flt. duration 009 100 Fig: 3-95
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault.
GF_DA: GF duration pow.meas 009 024 Fig: 3-96
Display of the ground fault duration of the most recent ground fault as
determined by the steady-state power evaluation feature of the ground fault
8-46 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
GF_DA: Voltage VNG p.u. 009 020 Fig: 3-97,

3-101
Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage of the most recent ground
fault referred to Vnom.
Note:
This display is only active when the steady-state power evaluation mode of
the GFDSS ground fault direction determination function is enabled.
GF_DA: Current IN p.u. 009 021 Fig: 3-97,
3-99,3-101
Display of the residual current of the most recent ground fault referred to
IN,nom.
Note:
This display is only active when the ground fault direction determination
function using steady state values (GFDSS) is enabled.
GF_DA: Curr. IN,act p.u. 009 022 Fig: 3-97
Display of the active component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note:
GF_DA: Curr. IN,reac p.u. 009 023 Fig: 3-97
Display of the reactive component of the residual current of the most recent
ground fault referred to IN,nom.
Note:
GF_DA: GF durat. curr.meas. 009 026 Fig: 3-98
determined by the steady-state current evaluation feature of the ground fault
GF_DA: Curr. IN filt. p.u. 009 025 Fig: 3-99
Display of the residual current component having the set filter frequency for
the most recent ground fault (referred to IN,nom).
GF_DA: GF duration admitt. 009 068 Fig: 3-100
determined by the admittance evaluation mode of the ground fault direction
determination function.
GF_DA: Admittance Y(N) p.u. 009 065 Fig: 3-101
Display of the admittance value referred to YN,nom.

GF_DA: Conduct. G(N) p.u. 009 066 Fig: 3-101
Display of the conductance value referred to YN,nom.

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-47

(continued)
GF_DA: Suscept. B(N) p.u. 009 067 Fig: 3-101
Display of the susceptance value referred to YN,nom.

Fault data acquisition FT_DA: Fault duration 008 010 Fig: 3-104
Display of the fault duration.

FT_DA: Running time 004 021 Fig: 3-104
Display of the running time.

FT_DA: Fault current P p.u. 004 025 Fig: 3-107
Display of phase current A referred to Inom.

FT_DA: Flt.volt. PG/PP p.u. 004 026 Fig: 3-107
Display of the calculated neutral-point displacement voltage referred to

Vnom .
FT_DA: Fault loop angle P 004 024 Fig: 3-107
Display of the fault angle.

FT_DA: Fault curr. N p.u. 004 049 Fig: 3-107
Display of the ground fault current referred to IN,nom.

FT_DA: Fault loop angle N 004 048 Fig: 3-107
Display of the ground fault angle.

FT_DA: Meas. loop selected 004 079 Fig: 3-107
Display of the measuring loop selected for determination of fault data.

FT_DA: Fault react., prim. 004 029 Fig: 3-107
Display of the fault reactance as a primary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault reactance,sec. 004 028 Fig: 3-107
Display of the fault reactance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault impedance, sec 004 023 Fig: 3-107
Display of the fault impedance as a secondary quantity.

FT_DA: Fault locat. percent 004 027 Fig: 3-108
Display of the fault location of the last fault (in %) referred to the setting
FT_DA: Line reactance PSx.
FT_DA: Fault location 004 022 Fig: 3-108
Display of the fault location of the last fault in km.

FT_DA: Load imped.post-flt. 004 037 Fig: 3-109
Display of the load impedance (in ) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault
has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P139.
FT_DA: Load angle post-flt. 004 038 Fig: 3-109
Display of the load angle (in degrees) after the general starting condition of
time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only appears if the fault
has been detected by the fault data acquisition function of the P139.
8-48 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

(continued)
FT_DA: Resid.curr. post-flt 004 039 Fig: 3-109
Display of the residual current referred to Inom after the general starting
condition of time-overcurrent protection has ended. The display only
appears if the fault has been detected by the fault data acquisition function
of the P139.
Automatic synchronism check ASC: Voltage Vref 004 087 Fig: 3-180
ASC: Volt. sel. meas.loop 004 088 Fig: 3-180
ASC: Volt. magnit. diff. 004 091 Fig: 3-176,
3-180
Display of the difference between amplitudes of the measurement loop
voltage and the reference voltage during a close request, referred to Vnom.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Angle difference 004 089 Fig: 3-176,
3-180
Display of the difference between angles (in degrees) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request. The display
only appears if ASC is operating.
ASC: Frequ. difference 004 090 Fig: 3-176,
3-180
Display of the difference between frequencies (in Hz) of the measurement
loop voltage and the reference voltage during a close request.
The display only appears if ASC is operating.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 8-49

(continued)
8.2.3 Event recording
Overload recording OL_RC: Overload recording 1 033 020 Fig: 3-94

OL_RC: Overload recording 2 033 021 Fig: 3-94
Point of entry into the overload log.
Ground fault recording GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 1 033 010 Fig: 3-103
GF_RC: Ground flt.record. 2 033 011 Fig: 3-103
Point of entry into the ground fault log.
Fault recording FT_RC: Fault recording 1 003 000 Fig: 3-111

FT_RC: Fault recording 2 033 001 Fig: 3-111
Point of entry into the fault log.
8-50 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
9 Commissioning
9.1 Safety Instructions
The device must be reliably grounded before auxiliary voltage is turned on.
The surface-mounted case is grounded using the appropriate bolt and nut as the ground
connection. The flush-mounted case must be grounded in the area of the rear
sidepieces at the location provided. The cross-sectional area of this ground conductor
must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum conductor cross section
of 2.5 mm2 is required.
In addition, a protective ground connection at the terminal contact on the power supply
module (identified by the letters PE on the terminal connection diagram) is also
required for proper operation of the unit. The cross-sectional area of this ground
conductor must also conform to applicable national standards. A minimum cross section
of 1.5 mm2 is required.
Before working on the device itself or in the space where the device is connected,
always disconnect the device from the supply.
The secondary circuit of live current transformers must not be opened. If the secondary
circuit of a live current transformer is opened, there is the danger that the resulting
voltages will endanger people and damage the insulation.
The threaded terminal block for current transformer connection is not a shorting block.
Therefore always short-circuit current transformers before loosening the threaded
terminals.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
When the P139 is used for the protection of increased-safety machines, it must be
located outside of any areas that are subject to explosion hazards.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-1

9 Commissioning
(continued)
!
The fiber-optic interface may only be connected or disconnected when the supply
voltage for the unit is shut off.
!
The PC interface is not designed for permanent connection. Consequently the socket
does not have the extra insulation from circuits connected to the system that is required
per VDE 0106 Part 101.
Therefore when connecting the connecting cable make sure that you do not touch the
socket contacts.
!
Application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must be in compliance with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see chapter entitled 'Technical
Data').
9-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9.2 Commissioning Tests
Preparation
After the P139 has been installed and connected as described in Chapter 5, the
commissioning procedure can begin.
Before turning on the power supply voltage, the following items must be checked again:
! Is the device connected to the protective ground at the specified location?

! Does the nominal voltage of the battery agree with the nominal auxiliary voltage of
the device?
! Are the current and voltage transformer connections, grounding, and phase
sequences correct?
After the wiring work is completed, check the system to make sure it is properly isolated.
The conditions given in VDE 0100 must be satisfied.
Once all checks have been made, the power supply voltage may be turned on. After
voltage has been applied, the device starts up. During startup, various startup tests are
carried out (see section entitled Self-Monitoring in Chapter 3). The LED indicator
labeled HEALTHY (H1) and the LED indicator labeled OUT OF SERVICE (H2) will
light up. (The LED indicator H2 is coupled to the signal M A I N : B l o c k e d / f a u l t y . )
After approximately 15 s, the P139 is ready for operation. In initial, factory-set condition
or after a cold restart, the device type 'P139' and the time of day will be displayed in the
first line of the LCD display. If a bay type has already been set, the bay will be displayed
in single-pole representation.
Once the change-enabling command has been issued (see the Section Change-
Enabling Function in Chapter 6), all settings can be entered. The procedure for entering
settings from the integrated local control panel is described in Chapter 6.
Note: First set the desired bay type (M A I N : T y p e o f b a y in the "Par/Conf/"

folder). When the bay type is set, the binary signal inputs and output relays
are automatically configured to conform to the definitions specified for the
bay type (see List of Bay Types) provided that the automatic configuration
is enabled at M A I N : A u t o - a s s i g n m e n t I / O .
After the enter key (E) is pressed to confirm the 'Type of bay' setting
parameter, the 'Initializing bay' signal is displayed for 20 s. The EDIT
MODE LED will light up. Local control actions are not possible during this
time.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-3

9 Commissioning
(continued)
If either the PC interface or the communication interface will be used for setting the P139
and reading out event records, then the following settings must first be made from the
integrated local control panel.
! Par/DvID/ folder:
" DVICE: Device password 1
" DVICE: Device password 2
! Par/Conf/ folder:
" PC: Name of manufacturer
" PC: Bay address
" PC: Device address
" PC: Baud rate
" PC: Parity bit
" COMM1: Function group COMM1
" COMM1: General enable USER
" COMM1: Name of manufacturer
" COMM1: Line idle state
" COMM1: Baud rate
" COMM1: Parity bit
" COMM1: Communicat. protocol
" COMM1: Octet comm. address
" COMM1: Octet address ASDU

" COMM2: Name of manufacturer
" COMM2: Line idle state
" COMM2: Baud rate
" COMM2: Parity bit
" COMM2: Octet comm. Address
" COMM2: Octet address ASDU
" COMM3: Baud rate
9-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
! Par/Func/Glob/ folder:
" PC: Command blocking
" PC: Sig./meas.val.block
" COMM1: Command block. USER
" C O M M 1 : S i g . / m e a s . b l o c k .U S E R
" COMM2: Command block. USER

" COMM2: Sig./meas.block.USER
Instructions on these settings are given in Chapters 7 and 8.
Note: The settings given above apply to the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
protocol. If another protocol is being used for the communication interface,
additional settings may be necessary. See Chapter 7 for further details.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-5

9 Commissioning
(continued)
After the settings have been made, the following checks should be carried out again
before blocking is canceled:
! Has the appropriate bay type been configured?

! Does the function assignment of the binary signal inputs agree with the terminal
connection diagram?
! Has the correct operating mode been selected for the binary signal inputs?
! Does the function assignment of the output relays agree with the terminal connection
diagram?
! Has the correct operating mode been selected for the output relays?
! Have the interlocking equations and the external interlocking inputs been configured
correctly?
! Have all settings been made correctly?
Now the blocks can be cleared as follows ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder):
! M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e "Yes (on)"
Tests
By using the signals and displays generated by the P139, it is possible to determine
whether the P139 is correctly set and properly interconnected with the station. Signals
are signaled by output relays and LED indicators and entered into the event memory. In
addition, the signals can be checked by selecting the appropriate signal in the menu
tree.
If the user does not wish to operate the circuit breaker during the protection functions
test, the trip commands can be blocked through M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R
('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately configured binary signal input. If circuit
breaker testing is desired, it is possible to issue a trip command for 100 ms through
M A I N : M a n . t r i p c m d . U S E R ('Oper/CtrlTest' folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. Selection of the trip command from the integrated local
control panel is password-protected (see Section Password-Protected Control Actions in
Chapter 6).
Note: The manual trip command is only executed if it has been configured for trip
command 1 or 2.
If the P139 is connected to substation control level, it is advisable to activate the test
mode via MAIN: T e s t m o d e U S E R ('Par/Func/Glob/' folder) or an appropriately
configured binary signal input. The telegrams are then identified accordingly (cause of
transmission: test mode).
9-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the binary signal

inputs
By selecting the corresponding state signal (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder), it is possible to
determine whether the input signal that is present is recognized correctly by the P139.
The values displayed have the following meanings:
! Low: Not energized.

! High: Energized.
! Without function: No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode selected.
Checking the output relays

It is possible to trigger the output relays for a settable time period for test purposes (time
setting at O U T P : H o l d - t i m e f o r t e s t in 'Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). First select the
output relay to be tested (O U T P : R e l a y a s s i g n . f . t e s t, Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
Test triggering then occurs via O U T P : R e l a y t e s t (Oper/CtrlTest/' folder). It is
password-protected (see the section entitled Password-Protected Control Operations in
Chapter 6).
!
Before starting the test, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Checking the current-

measuring inputs
By applying appropriate analog signals as measuring variables to the measuring inputs,
the user can check via the operating data displays (see Chapter Information and Control
Functions) whether the P139 detects the analog signals with the specified accuracy
(folder Oper/Cycl/Data/).
! M AIN : C u r r e n t A p .u .: Display of the updated phase current A referred to the
nominal device current Inom
! M AIN : C u r r e n t B p .u .: Display of the updated phase current B referred to the

! M AIN : C u r r e n t C p .u .: Display of the updated phase current C referred to the

! M AIN : C u r r e n t IN p .u .: Display of the updated phase current IN referred to the

!
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see the Chapter on Technical
Data).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-7

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the protection

function
Four parameter subsets are stored in the P139, one of which is activated. Before
checking the protective function, the user should determine which parameter subset is
activated. The activated parameter subset is displayed at P S S : A c t u a l p a r a m .
s u b s e t ('Oper/Cycl/Log/" folder).
When testing the time-overcurrent protection with a testing device, the measuring-circuit
monitoring function should be deactivated (M C M O N : Ge n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R ,
folder Par/Func/Gen/) since it would otherwise always operate and thus, depending on
the setting, issue fault signals.
Testing the connection of

the phase current and
voltage transformers with
load current for correct
phase
The user can check to make sure connection to the system's current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase by consulting the operating data displays for
load angle (M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i A , M A I N : L o a d a n g l e p h i B , M A I N :
L o a d a n g l e p h i C in the 'Oper/Cycl/Meas/' folder). To this end, it is necessary for
the connection to be standard in accordance with the standard schematic diagram
shown in Chapter Installation and Connection and for the setting of M AIN : C o n n .
m e a s . c i r c . I P to be standard. In the case of a purely resistive load, the load angles
of all three phases must be 0 in line direction. The load angles are only determined if at
least 5% of the nominal device current is flowing.
9-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the connection of

the residual current
transformer with load
current for correct phase
Whether connection of the P139s residual current transformer involves the correct
phase can be checked using the operating data displays (M AIN : An g l e p h i N , folder
Oper/Cycl/Data/). The required measuring variables VNG and IN must be generated. If
the connection is standard in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown in
Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and the setting of M AIN : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c . I N
(folder Par/Func/Glob/) is 'standard' then a phase-to-ground voltage needs to be
disconnected and the phase currents of the other two phases need to be shorted at the
same time (see Figure 9-1).
The set rotary field needs to match the actual rotary field. In the case of a purely
resistive load, the angle N must have the following values (depending on the direction
of energy flow in either line or busbar direction):
Display Energy in line direction Energy in busbar direction

MAIN: Angle phiN Approx. 0 Approx. 180
(folder Oper/Cycl/Data/)
Simplified testing of the

connection of the residual
current transformer with
load current for correct
phase
If the residual current does not originate from a dedicated main current transformer such
as a core balance transformer, a simplified test can be carried out. In this procedure,
after a positive test as to whether connection of the phase current and voltage
transformers involves the correct phase and after shorting any one of the phase
currents, the phase of the measured residual current is compared to the phase of the
sum of phase currents. In the case of a phase match (or a positive direction check), the
measured operating value M AIN : Ph a s e r e l .,IN vs IP (folder Oper/Cycl/Data/) is
displayed as 1. The phase relation check is carried out only if the calculated residual
current is in excess of 0.1$Inom.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-9

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-1 Connection example - generation of measuring variables
9-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the definite-time

function
Testing of the definite-time overcurrent protection function can only be carried out if the
following conditions are met:
! DTOC protection is enabled. This may be interrogated at the logic state signal
D T O C : E n a b l e d (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder).
! The function M A I N : B l o c k t i m . s t . I N , n e g is set to No (folder Par/Func/Gen).
! The function M A I N : G e n . s t a r t i n g m o d e is set to Starting IN, Ineg (folder
Par/Func/Gen).
! The short-circuit direction determination function is disabled. S C D D : G e n e r a l
e n a b l e U S E R (folder 'Par/Func/Gen') is set to No.
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the overcurrent stages and the associated
timer stages can be tested.
!
Data).
Testing the inverse-time

function
Testing of the inverse-time overcurrent protection function can only be carried out if the
following conditions are met:
! IDMT protection is enabled. This may be interrogated at the logic state signal
IDMT: E n a b l e d (folder Oper/Cycl/Log/).
! The function M A I N : B l o c k t i m . s t . I N , n e g is set to No (folder Par/Func/Gen).
! The function M A I N : G e n . s t a r t i n g m o d e is set to Starting IN, Ineg (folder

Par/Func/Gen).
! The short-circuit direction determination function is disabled. S C D D : G e n e r a l

e n a b l e U S E R (folder 'Par/Func/Gen') is set to No.
time delays can be tested.
!
Data).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-11

9 Commissioning
(continued)
The trip times for the inverse-time overcurrent protection function as a function of the set
tripping characteristics are shown in the following table:
No. Tripping Formula for the Constants Formula for the

Characteristic Tripping Release
Characteristic Characteristic
k = 0.01 to 10.00 a b c R
0 Definite Time t=k
Per IEC 255-3 a
t =k b
I
1
I
ref
1 Standard Inverse 0.14 0.02
2 Very Inverse 13.50 1.00
3 Extremely Inverse 80.00 2.00
4 Long Time Inverse 120.00 1.00
Per IEEE C37.112 R
tr = k 2
a I
t = k + c 1
I
I b
ref
1
I
ref
5 Moderately Inverse 0.0515 0.0200 0.1140 4.85
6 Very Inverse 19.6100 2.0000 0.4910 21.60
7 Extremely Inverse 28.2000 2.0000 0.1217 29.10
Per ANSI R
tr = k 2
a I
t = k + c 1
I
I b ref
1

I
ref
8 Normally Inverse 8.9341 2.0938 0.17966 9.00
9 Short Time Inverse 0.2663 1.2969 0.03393 0.50
10 Long Time Inverse 5.6143 1.0000 2.18592 15.75
11 RI-Type Inverse 1
t =k
0.236
0.339
I

I
ref
12 RXIDG-Type Inverse I
t = k 5.8 1.35 ln

I ref
9-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Directional testing of the

phase current stages of the
short-circuit direction
determination function
The current and voltage transformers of the system need to be simulated with a suitable
testing device. In order to check the phase current stages of the short-circuit direction
determination function, the following conditions must be met:
! The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled (see Chapter 3).

! All three phase currents are greater than 0.1 Inom.
! At least two phase-to-phase voltages are greater than 200 mV.
! The directions of the short-circuit direction determination function are set to forward.
If the connection is standard in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown
in Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and the setting of M AIN : Conn. meas. circ. IP
is Standard then the measurement of the short-circuit direction determination function
will be in line direction. The set rotary field needs to match the actual rotary field. It is
now possible to simulate the various fault types with the appropriate starting via the
DTOC or IDMT protection function by applying various shorting jumpers (such as A-G).
The trip signals of the phase current stages are now directional. The trip signals of the
phase current stages are now directional.
Direction testing of the

residual current stages of
the short-circuit direction
determination function
In order to check the residual current stages of the short-circuit direction determination
function, the following conditions must be met:
! The short-circuit direction determination function is enabled (see Chapter 3).

! The residual current is in excess of 0.01$Inom.
! The neutral displacement voltage is greater than the set triggering value of the
function S C D D : V N G > .
If the connection is standard in accordance with the standard schematic diagram shown
in Chapter 'Installation and Connection' and the setting of M AIN : C o n n . m e a s . c i r c .
IN is 'standard' then the measurement of the short-circuit direction determination
function will be in line direction. The set rotary field needs to match the actual rotary
field. It is now possible to simulate the various fault types as described under Direction
testing of the phase current stages. The trip signals of the residual current stages are
now directional.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-13

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking protective
signaling
The protective signaling function can only be checked if protective signaling is ready.
This can be determined via the logic state signal P S I G : R e a d y (Oper/Cycl/Log/
folder).
If protective signaling is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
! Protective signaling is not enabled.

P S I G : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R is set to No
! Protective signaling is being blocked by the triggering of a correspondingly configured
binary signal input (P S I G : B l o c k i n g E X T ).
! A fault was detected in the telecommunications channel (PSIG : T e l e c o m . fa u l ty).
If the conditions for testing are satisfied, it is possible to generate a send signal for test
purposes from the integrated local control panel (P S I G : T e s t t e l e c o m . U S E R ).
This pulse will be present for 1 ms and is extended for the set reset time. This pulse will
be present for 1 s and will be extended for the set reset time. The generated signal can
be checked via the logic state signal PSIG : S e n d ( t r a n s m . r e l a y ).
9-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the auto-reclosing

control
The auto-reclosing function (ARC) can only be checked if it is ready. This can be
determined via the logic state signal A R C : R e a d y (Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder).
If the ARC function is not ready, this may be due to the following reasons:
! The ARC function is not enabled

(this can be determined by checking the logic state signal A R C : E n a b l e d
(Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder). This can be due to the following reasons:
" A R C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R ('Par/Func/Gen' folder) is set to No.
" The ARC has been disabled through an appropriately configured binary signal
input A R C : D i s a b l e E X T . (This can be determined by checking the logic
state signal AR C : Ext. e n a b l e d in the 'Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder.)
! The ARC is being blocked. (This can be checked at the logic state signal
AR C : Bl o c k e d in folder 'Oper/Cycl/Log/'.)
! There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input configured for
ARC: CB drive ready EXT.
! There is no signal with a logic value of 1 at the binary signal input configured for
M AIN : C B c l o s e d s i g . E X T . The circuit breaker position signal is only
necessary if With has been set at A R C : C B c l o s . p o s . s i g . (folder
'Par/Func/Gen/').
! An ARC cycle is currently running. (This can be checked at logic state signal
A R C : C y c l e r u n n i n g in the Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.)
A test HSR for checking can be executed from the integrated local control panel or by
triggering a binary signal input. The test HSR function first issues a trip command and
then issues a reclose command after the set dead time has elapsed.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-15

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the motor

protection function
time delays can be tested.
!
Data).
In order to test the motor protection function, first clear the thermal replica. Clearing the
thermal replica is achieved by briefly disabling the protection function (M AIN : D e vi c e
o n - l i n e set to No, folder Par/Func/Glob/). The updated status of the thermal replica
can be interrogated via the operating data display M P: T h e r m . r e p l . b u ffe r M S
( folder Oper/Cycl/Data/). The trip times depend on the set tripping characteristic:
With cleared thermal replica, the test current is changed abruptly from 0 ( machine
stopped) to a value setting value M P: IStU p > PSx, folder Par/Func/Gen/
( machine running).
36
! Reciprocally squared characteristic t = (1 m 0 ) t 6Iref
(I Iref ) 2
(I Iref ) 2
! ( )
Logarithmic characteristic: t = 1 m 0 t 6Iref 36 ln
(I Iref ) 2 1
9-16 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the thermal

overload protection
function
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the reference current and the associated
time delay can be tested.
!
Data).
In order to test the thermal overload protection function, first clear the thermal replica.
Clearing the thermal replica is achieved by briefly disabling the protection function
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e set to No, folder Par/Func/Glob/). The updated status of the
thermal replica can be interrogated via the operating data display T H ER M : T h e r m .
r e p l i c a ve r s . ( folder Oper/Cycl/Data/) The trip time can be checked:
With cleared thermal replica, the test current is changed abruptly from 0 to a value
of 0.1 Iref
2
I
P
t = ln Iref
2
I c c,max
trip 1

Iref max c,max
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-17

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the voltage-time protection function
By applying appropriate analog signals as measuring variables to the measuring inputs,

the user can check via the operating data displays (see Chapter Information and Control
Functions) whether the unit detects the analog signals with the specified accuracy
(folder Oper/Cycl/Data/).
! M A I N : V o l t a g e A - G p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage A-G

referred to the nominal voltage Vnom.
! M A I N : V o l t a g e B - G p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage B-G
! M A I N : V o l t a g e C - G p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage C-G
! M A I N : V o l t a g e P G , m a x p . u . : Display of the updated maximum phase-to-ground
voltage referred to the nominal voltage Vnom.
! M A I N : V o l t a g e P G , m i n p . u . : Display of the updated minimum phase-to-ground
! M A I N : V o l t a g e A - B p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage A-B
! M A I N : V o l t a g e B - C p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage B-C
! M A I N : V o l t a g e C - A p . u . : Display of the updated phase-to-ground voltage C-A
! M A I N : V o l t a g e P P , m a x p . u . : Display of the updated maximum phase-to-phase
! M A I N : V o l t a g e P P , m i n p . u . : Display of the updated minimum phase-to-phase
! M A I N : V o l t a g e V N G p . u . : Display of the neutral-point displacement voltage as
measured at transformer T 90, referred to Vnom.
! M A I N : V o l t a g e (VPG)/3 p.u .: Display of the calculated neutral-point
displacement voltage referred to Vnom.
!
Data).
9-18 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
By applying appropriate measuring variables, the overvoltage stages and the

undervoltage stages as well as the associated timer stages can be tested.
The P139 calculates the neutral-point displacement voltage from the input-side
measured variables as follows:
1
V N G = V A G + V BG + V CG
3
For a single-phase test where V B G = V C G = 0 , the result of the calculation formula

for VN-G just cited is that the VN-G> and VN-G>> triggers operate if the test voltage
exceeds the following value:
Vnom
V test = 3 VNG
3
VNG : Setting V<>: V N G > or V<>: V N G >>
!
The application of analog signals to the measuring inputs must comply with the
maximum permissible rating of the measuring inputs (see Technical Data Chapter).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-19

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Checking the ground fault

direction determination by
steady-state values
(GFDSS) function
If both residual current and neutral displacement voltage are available as measured
variables, then the P139 determines the ground fault direction by steady-state power
evaluation of the measured variables if the operating mode is set to Steady-state power
or Steady-state admittance. Depending on the setting, either the neutral-point
displacement voltage calculated by the P139 or that measured at transformer T 90 is
evaluated. If only the current can be measured, the P139 reaches a ground fault
decision on the basis of the level of the residual current (steady-state current evaluation).
Switching to steady-state current evaluation is done from the integrated local control
panel or by triggering an appropriately configured binary signal input.
If allowed by system operation, a ground fault can be closed on the busbar side (BS) or
the line side (LS). The P139 must then transmit the corresponding signals. However, a
requirement for ground fault recognition in the steady-state power evaluation mode is
that the set thresholds for residual current (G F D S S : I N , a c t > / I N , r e a c > B S or
L S ) and for neutral displacement voltage (G F D S S : V N G > ) be exceeded. For steady-
state current evaluation, the requirement is that the residual current threshold
G F D S S : I N > be exceeded. In the admittance evaluation mode, the requirement is
that the set thresholds for conductance / susceptance (G F D SS: G ( N ) > / B( N ) L S
or BS) and the neutral displacement voltage (G F D S S : V N G > ) be exceeded or that
the admittance (G F D SS: Y( N ) > ) be exceeded.
Because of the danger of a double ground fault, a function test involving the closing of a
ground fault will not be possible in most cases. In these cases the current and voltage
transformers in the system can be connected so that a function test is possible without a
ground fault.
The residual current measured by the P139 and the neutral displacement voltage are
displayed as measured operating data both in primary quantities and referred to the
nominal quantities of the P139 (see the section entitled Measured Operating Data in the
Address List).
Auxiliary circuit in
resonant-grounded
systems
First the fuse in phase A of the voltage transformer is removed and the associated
secondary side is short-circuited (see Figures 9-2 and 9-3). The result is a displacement
voltage VN-G with a magnitude smaller by a factor of 3 than that of the displacement
voltage in the case of a dead fault to ground.
If the current is measured in a Holmgreen group, then the current transformer in A on the
secondary side must be disconnected and short-circuited (see Figure 9-2).
9-20 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-2 Auxiliary circuit in resonant-grounded systems with Holmgreen group, ground fault in BS direction
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-21

9 Commissioning
(continued)
A pilot wire is threaded into core balance current transformers, and a current is drawn
from phase B through the wire (see Figure 9-3). The vectorial assignment of currents
and voltages is shown in the phasor diagrams included with the terminal connection
diagrams.
In the example shown below, a ground fault is simulated on the busbar side. To check a
ground fault on the line side, the current or voltage connections must be switched.
9-3 Auxiliary circuit in resonant-grounded systems with core balance current transformer, ground fault in BS direction
9-22 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Auxiliary circuit in systems

with isolated neutral
First the fuse in phase A on the primary side of the voltage transformer is removed and
the corresponding secondary side is short-circuited (see Figures 9-4 and 9-5). The
result is a displacement voltage VN-G with a magnitude smaller by a factor of 3 than that
of the displacement voltage in the case of a dead fault to ground.
If the current is measured in a Holmgreen group, then the current transformers in A and
B on the secondary side must be disconnected and short-circuited (see Figure 9-4).
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-23

9 Commissioning
(continued)
9-4 Auxiliary circuit in systems with isolated neutral and Holmgreen group, ground fault in LS direction
9-24 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
A pilot wire is threaded into core balance current transformers, and a current is drawn
from phases B and C through this wire (see Figure 9-5). The vectorial assignment of
currents and voltages is shown in the phasor diagrams included with the terminal
connection diagrams.
In the example shown below, a ground fault is simulated on the line side. To check a
ground fault on the busbar side, the current or voltage connections must be switched.
9-5 Auxiliary circuit in systems with isolated neutral and core balance current transformer, ground fault in LS direction
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-25

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Testing the transient

ground fault determination
Secondary testing of the transient ground fault determination is possible only with a
testing device that reproduces the transient pulse with sufficient accuracy. Otherwise,
the transient ground fault determination may not be triggered as the logic is specifically
designed for transient pulse determination.
Testing the control

functions
The selected bay type is displayed on the Bay Panel. The activation of the Bay Panel
display is described in Chapter 6. If the position signals of the switchgear units are
connected correctly to the P139, then the updated switching status of the switchgear
units will be displayed on the bay panel. If the switching status is not displayed correctly,
the user can check the physical state signals of the binary inputs to determine whether
the status signals in the P139 are correct (this can be checked at IN P: Sta te U xxx,
'Oper/Cycl/Phys').
Switching from local to

remote control
Switchgear units can be controlled locally using the keys on the local control panel,
remotely through the communication interface, or through appropriately configured
binary signal inputs. The control point Local or Remote is selected either by means
of the L/R key on the local control panel or via an appropriately configured binary signal
input. If a binary signal input has been configured, then the L/R key has no effect.
Switching from Remote to Local using the L/R key on the local control panel is only
possible if the L/R password has been entered first (see additional instructions in
Chapter 6). The selected control point is displayed on the Bay Panel.
Local control
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected by pressing the Selection key on the
local control panel and then controlled by pressing the Open or Close key. If the
switchgear units are to be controlled through binary signal inputs, then the appropriate
signal input must be triggered.
Remote control
The switchgear units can be controlled via the communication interface or appropriately
configured binary signal inputs.
Switchgear unit not

responding
If a switchgear unit does not respond to a switching command, it could be due to the
following factors:
! The general control enable if configured has not been set.

(configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . c t r l . e n a b l . , 'Par/Func/Glob' folder)
! Interlocking has been triggered.
(This can be checked at M A I N : I n t e r l o c k e q u . v i o l . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/'.)
! For bays with direct motor control only:
Motor monitoring has been triggered.
(This can be checked at M A I N : M o n . m o t . d r i v e s t r . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/'.)
9-26 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

9 Commissioning
(continued)
To determine which interlocks are activated, check as follows:
! For bay interlock (BI) check:

M A I N : B a y i n t e r l o c k . a c t . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder
! For substation interlock (SI) check:
M A I N : S u b s t . i n t e r l . a c t . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder
! For local control:
It is possible to deactivate the interlock through an appropriately configured binary
signal input.
Configuration through M AIN : In p . a s g . i n t e r l . d e a c t , 'Oper/Func/Glob' folder)
Note: Substation interlocking is only active when there is communication with the
substation control level through the communication interface. In the event of
a communication error, the unit will switch automatically to bay interlock
without station interlock. To determine if there is a communication error,
check at M AIN : C o m m u n i c a ti o n e r r o r , Oper/Cycl/Log/ folder.
Substation interlocking can be deactivated selectively for each switchgear

unit and each control direction Open or Close.
(This can be checked at D E V x x : O p e n w / o s t a t . i n t e r l or D E V x x :
C l o s e w / o s t a t . i n t . , 'Oper/Cycl/Log/' folder.)
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9-27

9 Commissioning
(continued)
Completion of
commissioning
Before the P139 is released for operation, the user should make sure that the following
steps have been taken:
! All memories have been reset.

(Reset at M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t (password-protected) and M T _ R C : R e s e t
r e c o r d i n g , both in 'Oper/CtrlTest/ folder.)
! Blocking of output relays has been canceled.
(O U T P : O u t p . r e l . b l o c k U S E R in 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')
! Blocking of the trip command has been canceled.
(M A I N : T r i p c m d . b l o c k . U S E R , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'No')
! The device is on-line.
(M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e , 'Par/Func/Glob/' folder, setting 'Yes (on)')
! The residual current stages of the protection functions are enabled (on).
(M A I N : S y s t . I N e n a b l e d U S E R ,'Par/Func/Gen/' folder, setting 'Yes (on)')
! The measuring-circuit monitoring function is enabled if it was disabled for testing
purposes.
(M C M O N : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R , 'Par/Func/Gen/' folder, setting 'Yes')
! The correct control point Local or Remote is activated.
! The desired interlocking conditions are activated.
After completion of commissioning, only the green LED indicator signaling Operation
(H1) should be on.
9-28 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
10 Troubleshooting
This chapter describes problems that might be encountered, their causes, and possible
methods for eliminating them. It is intended as a general orientation only, and in cases
of doubt it is better to return the P139 to the manufacturer. Please follow the packaging
instructions in the section entitled Unpacking and Packing in Chapter 5 when returning
equipment to the manufacturer.
Problem:
! Lines of text are not displayed on the local control panel.

" Check to see whether there is supply voltage at the device connection points.
" Check to see whether the magnitude of the auxiliary voltage is correct. The P139
is protected against damage resulting from polarity reversal.
Before checking further, disconnect the P139 from the power supply.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
!
cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable!
" Check to make sure that fuse F1 on power supply module V is not fused.
If the fuse is defective, it should not be replaced without determining the cause of
failure. If a fuse is replaced without eliminating the problem, there is the danger
that the damage will spread.
Required Fuses:
VA,nom = 24 V DC: Type M3.5

VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC and 100 to 230 V AC: Type M2
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-1

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
! The P139 issues a Warning signal on LED H3. (H3 is labeled ALARM).
Identify the specific problem by reading out the monitoring signal memory (see the
section entitled Monitoring Signal Memory Readout in Chapter 6). The table below
lists possible monitoring or warning indications (provided that a configuration setting
has been entered at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g ) , the faulty area, the
P139 response, and the mode of the output relay configured for 'Warning' and
'Blocked/faulty'.
SFMON: Warning (LED) 036 070
Warning configured for LED H3.

SFMON: Warning (relay) 036 100
Warning configured for an output relay.
Key
-: No reaction and/or no output relay triggered.
Yes: The corresponding output relay is triggered.
Updating: The output relay configured for 'Warning' starts only if the monitoring
signal is still present.
1)
: The 'Blocked/faulty' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n m . f a u l t .
2)
: The 'Warning' output relay only operates if the signal has been
configured at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n m . w a r n i n g .
SFMON: Cold restart 093 024
A cold restart has been carried out on account of a checksum error in the
memory (NOVRAM).
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Warm restart / Device blocking
'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes
'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes
SFMON: Cold rest./SW update 093 025
A cold restart has been carried out following a software update.
SFMON: Blocking/ HW failure 090 019
Supplementary warning that this device is blocked.
'Warning' output relay: Updating / Updating
10-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Relay Kxx faulty 041 200
Multiple signal: Output relay defective.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: -/-

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: Yes / Yes 1)
SFMON: Hardware clock fail. 093 040
The hardware clock has failed.

'Blocked/faulty' output relay: -/-
SFMON: Battery failure 090 010
Battery voltage too low. Replace battery.

SFMON: Invalid SW d.loaded 096 121
Wrong or invalid software has been downloaded.
SFMON: Invalid type of bay 096 122
If the user has selected a bay type that requires a P139 hardware
configuration that is not actually fitted, then this signal is generated.

'Warning' output relay: -/-
The +15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
The + 24 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-3

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: -15V supply faulty 093 080
The - 15 V internal supply voltage has dropped below a minimum value.
Module in wrong slot.
10-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Defective module in slot x.

SFMON: Module A DPR faulty 093 070
Dual-Port-RAM fault on communication module A. This fault is only

detected during device startup.

SFMON: Module A RAM faulty 093 071
RAM fault on communication module A.

SFMON: +15V faulty mod. N 093 096
The +15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: -15V faulty mod. N 093 097
The -15 V internal supply voltage of the transient ground fault evaluation
module has dropped below a minimum value.

SFMON: DAC faulty module N 093 095
The digital-to-analog converter of the transient ground fault evaluation

module is defective.

SFMON: Module N DPR faulty 093 090
The checksum feature of the transient ground fault evaluation module has
detected a fault in the data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-5

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Module N RAM faulty 093 091
Fault in the program or data memory of the transient ground fault evaluation
module.

SFMON: Module Y DPR faulty 093 110
The checksum feature of analog I/O module Y has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Module Y RAM faulty 093 111
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog I/O module.

SFMON: Mod.Y RTD DPR faulty 093 108
The checksum feature of analog module (RTD) has detected a fault in the
data transmission of the Dual-Port-RAM.

SFMON: Mod.Y RTD RAM faulty 093 109
Fault in the program or data memory of the analog module (RTD).

10-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
Output relay K xxx defective.

SFMON: Undef. operat. code 093 010
Undefined operation code, i.e. software error.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-7

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Invalid arithm. op. 093 011
Invalid arithmetic operation, i.e. software error.
SFMON: Undefined interrupt 093 012
Undefined interrupt, i.e. software error.
SFMON: Exception oper.syst. 093 013
Interrupt of the operating system.
SFMON: Protection failure 090 021
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic start of protection routines. It has

detected an error.
SFMON: Checksum error param 090 003
A checksum error involving the parameters in the memory (NOVRAM) has

been detected.
SFMON: Clock sync. error 093 041
In 10 consecutive clock synchronization telegrams, the difference between

the time of day given in the telegram and that of the hardware clock is
greater than 10 ms.

SFMON: Interm.volt.fail.RAM 093 026
Faulty test pattern in the RAM. This can occur, for example, if the
processor module or the power supply module is removed from the bus
module (digital). This fault is only detected during device startup. After the
fault is detected, the software initializes the RAM. This means that all
records are deleted.1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -
10-8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Overflow MT_RC 090 012
Last entry in the monitoring signal memory in the event of overflow.

SFMON: Semaph. MT_RC block. 093 015
Software overloaded.

SFMON: Inval. SW vers.COMM1 093 075
Incorrect or invalid communication software has been downloaded.

1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: - / -
SFMON: Invalid SW vers. N 093 093
Incorrect or invalid software for transient ground fault evaluation module has
been downloaded.
SFMON: Time-out module N 093 092
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the transient ground

fault evaluation module. It has detected an error.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers. Y 093 113
Incorrect or invalid software for analog I/O module Y has been downloaded.

SFMON: Invalid SW vers YRTD 093 123
Incorrect or invalid software for analog module (RTD) has been

downloaded.
SFMON: Time-out module Y 093 112
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog I/O module
Y. It has detected an error.

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-9

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Time-out module YRTD 093 119
Watchdog is monitoring the periodic status signal of the analog module

(RTD). It has detected an error.

SFMON: IRIGB faulty 093 117
The IRIGB interface is enabled but there is no plausible input signal.

SFMON: M.c.b. trip V 098 000
The line-side voltage transformer m.c.b. has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of short-circuit

'Warning' output relay: Yes / Yes 2)
SFMON: M.c.b. trip Vref 098 011
The m.c.b. monitoring the reference voltage transformer has tripped.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of automatic

synchronism check (ASC)
SFMON: Phase sequ. V faulty 098 001
Measuring-circuit monitoring has detected a fault in the phase sequence of

the phase-to-ground voltages.

SFMON: Undervoltage 098 009
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected an undervoltage.

SFMON: FF, Vref triggered 098 022
The "Fuse Failure" monitoring function has detected a fault in the voltage
measuring circuit for the reference voltage.

10-10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: M.circ. V,Vref flty. 098 023
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits for phase-to-ground voltages or

the reference voltage faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault

detected.
SFMON: Meas. circ. V faulty 098 017
Multiple signal: Voltage-measuring circuits faulty.

detected.
SFMON: Meas. circ. I faulty 098 005
The measuring-circuit monitoring function has detected a fault in the

current-measuring circuits.

SFMON: Meas.circ.V,I faulty 098 016
Multiple signal: Multiple signaling: Current- or voltage-measuring circuits

faulty.

detected.
SFMON: Communic.fault COMM3 098 140
Since the last complete valid message was transmitted the time set at
C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t c o m m . f a u l t has elapsed and the receive
signals are set to their user-defined default values.

SFMON: Hardware error COMM3 093 143
The P139 has detected a hardware error in the effective connection

InterMiCOM (communication interface 3).

SFMON: Comm.link fail.COMM3 098 142
Timer stage C O M M 3 : T i m e - o u t l i n k f a i l . has elapsed indicating a

persistent failure of the transmission channel. The receive signals are set to
their user-defined default values.

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-11

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Lim.exceed.,tel.err. 098 141
The threshold set for timer stage C O M M 3 : L i m . e x c e e d . , t e l . e r r .

was exceeded and the receive signals are set to their user-defined default
values.

SFMON: Telecom. faulty 098 006
The transmission channel of protective signaling is faulty.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of protective signaling

SFMON: Setting error THERM 098 035
Invalid parameters in the setting for the thermal replica.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of thermal overload

protection.
SFMON: CTA error 098 034
Measurement of the coolant temperature via the analog module is faulty.

detected.
SFMON: TGFD mon. triggered 093 094
The monitoring function for transient ground fault direction determination

has operated.

SFMON: Fcts.not perm.f.60Hz 093 098
A protective function has been activated that is not permitted for operation
at a system frequency of 60 Hz.

SFMON: Invalid scaling BCD 093 124
An invalid characteristic has been set for the BCD output channel of analog
I/O module Y.

detected.
10-12 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
An invalid characteristic has been set for one of the analog output channels
of analog I/O module Y.

detected.
SFMON: Invalid scaling IDC 093 116
An invalid characteristic has been set for the analog input channel of analog
I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
SFMON: PT100 open circuit 098 024
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the resistance
thermometer "PT100" to the analog I/O module Y.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Depends on type of fault detected.
SFMON: Open circ. PT100 T7 098 044
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of a resistance

thermometer Tx (x = 1 ... 9) to the analog module (RTD).

detected.
SFMON: Overload 20 mA input 098 025
The 20 mA input of analog I/O module Y is overloaded.

detected.
SFMON: Open circ. 20mA inp. 098 026
The P139 has detected an open circuit in the connection of the 20 mA input.

detected.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 10-13

10 Troubleshooting
(continued)
SFMON: Setting error f<> 098 028
The over-/underfrequency protection function has been set for

'overfrequency' monitoring (based on the settings for operate value and
nominal frequency). This setting is not valid in the f w. Delta f / Delta t
operating mode.
1st device reaction / 2nd device reaction: Blocking of the over-/under

frequency protection function
SFMON: Inv.inp.f.clock sync 093 120
The function was configured to a binary input on the analog I/O module Y.
This setting is not valid for this function.

These LOGIC outputs can be included in the list of warning signals by

selection at S F M O N : F c t . a s s i g n . w a r n i n g . The warning signals
are also recorded in the monitoring signal memory.

10-14 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

11 Maintenance
11 Maintenance
The P139 is a low-maintenance device. The components used in the units are selected
to meet exacting requirements. Recalibration is not necessary.
Maintenance procedures in
the power supply area
Electrolytic capacitors are installed in the power supply area because of dimensioning
requirements. The useful life of these capacitors is significant from a maintenance
standpoint. When the equipment is operated continuously at the upper limit of the
recommended temperature range (+55C or 131F), the useful life of these components
is 80,000 hours, or more than 9 years. Under these conditions, replacement of the
electrolytic capacitors is recommended after a period of 8 to 10 years. Component drift
follows the '10-degree rule'. This means that the useful life is doubled for each 10 K
reduction in temperature. When the operating temperatures inside the devices are
lower, the required maintenance intervals are increased accordingly.
The P139 is equipped with a lithium battery for non-volatile storage of fault data and for
keeping the internal clock running in the event of failure of the auxiliary power supply.
Loss of capacity due to module-internal self-discharging amounts to less than 1% per
year over a period of availability of 10 years. Since the terminal voltage remains virtually
constant until capacity is exhausted, usefulness is maintained until a very low residual
capacity is reached. With a nominal capacity of 850 mAh and discharge currents of only
a few A during device storage or in the range of the self-discharge current during
device operation, the result is a correspondingly long service life. It is therefore
recommended that the lithium battery only be replaced after the maintenance interval
cited above.
Replacement of the maintenance-related components named above is not possible

without soldering. Maintenance work must be carried out by trained personnel, and the
auxiliary voltage must be turned off while the work is being performed.
Always turn off the power (supply voltage) before removing a hardware module.
The power supply must be turned off for at least 5 s before power supply module V is
removed. Otherwise there is the danger of an electric shock.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 11-1

11 Maintenance
(continued)
The relevant components are located on the following modules:
! Electrolytic capacitor:
on power supply module V.
! Lithium battery:
on power supply module V.
Note: Only AREVA-approved components may be used (see Chapter 13).
Capacitor capacitance must be checked before installation.
11-1 Component drawing for power supply module V.
11-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

11 Maintenance
(continued)
There is a danger of explosion if the electrolytic capacitor and battery are not properly
replaced. Always check to make sure that the polarity of the electrolytic capacitor and
the battery is correct.
The following instructions apply to surface-mounted cases:
!
cable. Make sure the connector position is correct. Do not bend the connecting cable.
Note: The replaced components (electrolytic capacitor and battery) must be disposed
of in compliance with applicable national regulations.
After the maintenance procedures described above have been completed, new
commissioning tests as described in Chapter 9 must be carried out.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 11-3

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Routine functional testing

The P139 is used as a safety device and must therefore be routinely checked for proper
operation. The first functional tests should be carried out approximately 6 to 12 months
after commissioning. Additional functional tests should performed at intervals of 2 to 3
years 4 years at the maximum.
The P139 incorporates in its system a very extensive self-monitoring function for
hardware and software. The internal structure guarantees, for example, that
communication within the processor system will be checked on a continuing basis.
Nonetheless, there are a number of subfunctions that cannot be checked by the self-
monitoring feature without running a test from the device terminals. The respective
device-specific properties and setting parameters must be observed in such cases.
In particular, none of the control and signaling circuits that are run to the device from the
outside are checked by the self-monitoring function.
Analog input circuits

The analog measured variables are fed through an analog preprocessing feature (anti-
aliasing filtering) to a common analog-to-digital converter. In conjunction with the self-
monitoring function, the measuring-circuit monitoring function that is available for the
devices general functions can detect deviations in many cases, depending on the
parameter settings for sensitivity. However, it is still necessary to test from the device
terminals in order to make sure that the analog measuring circuits are functioning
correctly.
The best way to carry out a static test of the analog input circuits is to check the primary
measured operating data using the operating data measurement function or to use a
suitable testing instrument. A small measured value (such as the nominal current in
the current path) and a large measured value (such as the nominal voltage in the
voltage path) should be used to check the measuring range of the A/D converter. This
makes it possible to check the entire control range.
The accuracy of operating data measurement is <1 %. An important factor in evaluating

device performance is long-term performance based on comparison with previous
measurements.
In addition, a dynamic test (injection test) can be used to check input performance and
the phase relation of the current transformers and the anti-aliasing filter.
This dynamic test is not absolutely necessary, since it only checks the stability of a few
less passive components. Based on reliability analysis, the statistical expectation is that
only one component in 10 years in 1000 devices will be outside the tolerance range.
11-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

11 Maintenance
(continued)
Additional injection testing of every protection function, is not necessary, in our opinion,
since information processing is completely numerical and is based on the measured
analog current and voltage values. Proper operation was checked in conjunction with
type testing.
Binary inputs
The binary inputs are not checked by the self-monitoring function. However, a testing
function is integrated into the software so that the trigger state of each input can be read
out (Oper/Cycl/Phys folder). This check should be performed for each input being used
and can be done, if necessary, without disconnecting any device wiring.
Binary outputs
With respect to binary outputs, the integrated self-monitoring function includes even two-
phase triggering of the relay coils of all the all-or-nothing relays. There is no monitoring
function for the external contact circuit. In this case, the all-or-nothing relays must be
triggered by way of device functions or integrated test functions. For these testing
purposes, triggering of the output circuits is integrated into the software through a special
control function (Oper/CtrlTest/ folder).
!
Before starting testing, open any triggering circuits for external devices so that no
inadvertent switching operations will take place.
Serial interfaces
The integrated self-monitoring function for the PC or communication interface also
includes the communication module. The complete communication system, including
connecting link and fiber-optic module (if applicable), is always totally monitored as long
as a link is established through the control program or the communication protocol.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 11-5

11-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
12 Storage
12 Storage
Devices must be stored in a dry and clean environment. A temperature range of -25C
to +70C (-13F to +158F) must be maintained during storage (see the Chapter on
Technical Data). The relative humidity must be controlled so that neither condensation
nor ice formation will result.
If the units are stored without being connected to auxiliary voltage, then the electrolytic
capacitors in the power supply area need to be recharged every 4 years. Recharge the
capacitors by connecting auxiliary voltage to the P139 for approximately 10 minutes.
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 12-1

12-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
13 Accessories and Spare Parts
The P139 is supplied with standard labeling for the LED indicators. User-specific
labeling for non-standard configurations of the LEDs can be printed on the blank label
strips packed with the device. The label strip can then be glued to the front panel area
reserved for this purpose.
The label strip can be filled in using an overhead projector pen, waterproof type.
Example: Stabilo brand pen, OH Pen 196 PS.
Description Order No.

Cable bushings 88512-4-0337414-301
Lithium battery, type 1/2 AA 3.6 V
Electrolytic capacitor 100 F, 385 V DC
Only the following brands of capacitor are
permitted:
Philips, type PUL-SI/159/222215946101
Panasonic, type TS-HA/ECOS 2GA 101
Nichicon, type LGQ 2G 101 MHSZ
Nichicon, type LGU 2G 101 MHLZ
Fuse for VA,nom = 24 V DC: M3.5
Fuse for VA,nom = 48 to 250 V DC
and 100 to 230 V AC: M2
Resistance 200 255.002.696
Cover frame 84 T 88512-4-9650723-301
S&R-103 operating program (for Windows) On request
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 13-1

13-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
14 Order Information
14 Order Information for P139 in Case 40T
P139
P139 Feeder Management and Bay Control 9 0 -304 -4xx -605 -7xx -46x -9x x -9x x -8xx
Basic device:
Basic device 40TE, pin-terminal connection, 3 405
Basic device 40TE, CT/VT ring-, I/O pin-terminal connection, 5 406
Basic device 84TE, ring-terminal connection, 8 407
basic complement with 4 binary inputs and 8 output relays
and 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays
for the control of 3 switchgear units
Mounting option and display:

Surface-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 5
Flush-mounted, local control panel with graphic display 6
Current transformer:
Inom = 1 A / 5 A (T1...T4) 2) (NCIT: 22.5 mV at 50 A) 9
Voltage transformer:
Without 0
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (4-pole) 4
Vnom = 50 ... 130 V (5-pole) f. Automatic Synchronism Check 5
CT/VT-Boards with NCIT: 9)

Variant 1: 22.5 mV at 50 A, 3.25 V at Vnom 9
Additional binary I/O options:

Without 0
With 1 binary module (add. 6 binary inputs and 6 output relays) 5
for the control of up to 3 further switchgear units
Power supply and additional outputs:

VA,nom = 24 VDC 3
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 4
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor 6
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC 7
and 6 output relays, 4 with thyristor
VA,nom = 24 VDC and 6 output relays 8
VA,nom = 48 ... 250 VDC / 100 ... 230 VAC and 6 output relays 9
Further add. options:

Without 0
With TGF (transient ground fault direction determination) module 3) 1
With analog module 2
With TGF and analog module 3) 3
With binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 4
With TGF and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 3) 5
With RTD module 3) 7
With RTD and analog module 3) 8
With RTD module and binary module (add. 24 binary inputs) 3) 9
Switching threshold on binary inputs:

18 V (standard variant) (Without order extension No.)
90 V (60...70% of Vnom = 125...150 V) 8) -461
155 V (60...70% of Vnom = 220...250 V) 8) -462
With communication / information interface:

Only IRIG-B input for clock synchronization -90 0
Protocol can be switched between: -92
IEC 60870-5-101/-103, Modbus, DNP3, Courier
and IRIG-B input for clock synchronization
and 2nd interface (RS485, IEC 60870-5-103)
For connection to wire, RS485, isolated 1
For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector 4
With guidance / protection interface:

Protocol InterMiCOM -95

For connection to plastic fibre, FSMA connector 2
For connection to glass fibre, ST connector 4
Language:
English (German) 4) (Without order extension No.)
Px40 English (English) 4) (On request) -800
German (English) 4) -801
French (English) 4) (On request) -802
Spanish (English) 4) (On request) -803
Polish (English) 4) (On request) -804
Russian (English) 4)
7)
(On request) -805
2) Switching via parameter, default setting is underlined!

3) This option is excluded if the InterMiCOM (-95x) is ordered
4) Second included language in brackets
7) Hardware option, supports Cyrillic letters instead of special Western European characters
8) Standard variant recommended, if higher pickup threshold not explicitly required by the application
9) NCIT (non-conventional instrument transformer) option for variants with either pin terminals only or ring terminals only
P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 14-1

14-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33
Publication: P139/EN M/B33 (AFSV.12.09450 D) VOL. 1/2
AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/
Publication: P139/EN M/A88 VOL. 1/2
AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com

T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/

P139 EN M A88 Vol1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

P139 EN M A88 Vol1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

P139 EN M A88 Vol1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MiCOM P139

AREVA Energietechnik GmbH ist ein DNV zertifiziertes Unternehmen.

Alle Prfungen nach IEC 255-6 und DIN EN 60255-6.

Die folgenden berprfungen waren Gegenstand der Stckprfung bei Referenzbedingungen:

1 bereinstimmung der Schutzeinrichtung mit Bestckungs- und Anschluplan

3 Stromversorgung im Bereich 0,8 UH,nom UH,nom 1,1 UH,nom

4 Prfung der Genauigkeit der Einstellwerte

5 Ansprech- und Kommandozeiten fr alle wesentlichen Funktionen

6 Funktionsprfung aller binren Signaleingnge und Kontakte

7 100 % kontrollierter Wrmedauerlauf

1 Application and Scope 1-1

2 Technical Data 2-1

3.4.2 "Logic Communication Interface 1 (COMM1) 3-14

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 7

3.11 Main Functions of the P139 (MAIN) 3-63

8 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

3.27 Auto-Reclosing Control (ARC) 3-213

3.31 Motor Protection (MP) 3-280

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 9

5 Installation and Connection 5-1

6 Local Control Panel 6-1

10 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

8 Information and Control Functions 8-1

13 Accessories and Spare Parts 13-1

14 Order Information 14-1

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 11

1 Application and Scope

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-1

Protection functions P139 P139

Control Functions P139

Communication Functions P139

Measured Value Functions P139

! = standard; (!) = ordering option

1-2 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-3

# Parameter subset selection

Control/ Monitoring of Self- Overload

50/51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 51 P,Q,N 67 50/27 49 37/48/49/50S/66 46 30/74 25 79 67N 67N

27/59 P,Q,N 81 32 50BF/62

1-1 Functional diagram

1-4 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

Inputs and outputs

The optional 0 to 20 mA input provides open-circuit and overload monitoring, zero

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 1-5

Local control and display

Utilizing one of the two available communication interfaces (communication protocols

The second communication interface (communication protocol per IEC 60870-5-103

1-6 P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33

2.2 General Data

General device data

Dimensions and Connections

PC interface (X6): EIA RS232 connector (DIN 41652),

P139-304-405/-406/-407-605 // AFSV.12.09450.D / P139/EN M/B33 2-1

Current Measuring Inputs (conventional):

Current and Voltage Measuring Inputs (NCIT)

Other Inputs and Outputs:

Creepage Distances and Clearances

2.3.1 Type Tests

1 MHz Burst Disturbance Test